TRACE GC 2000 ™ Gas Chromatograph Service Manual Prod uct Ty pe Trace GC 2000 Service Manual Part Number M 317 09 270, Rev. B © 1999 CE Instruments, a subsidiary of ThermoQuest Corporation. All rights reserved. Printed in the Italy. Published by TMQ-Milan, Technical Publication, Strada Rivoltana, 20090 Rodano (Milan) Tel: +39 02 95059355 Fax: +39 02 95059388 Printing History: Rev. B, June 1999 Disclaimer Technical Information contained in this publication is for reference purposes only and is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made to supply complete and accurate information; however, ThermoQuest corporation assumes no responsibility and will not be liable for any errors, omissions, damage, or loss that might result from any use of this manual or the information contained therein (even if this information is properly followed and problems still arise). This publication is not part of the Agreement of Sale between ThermoQuest and the purchaser of a TRACE GC system. In the event of any conflict between the provisions of this document and those contained in ThermoQuest’s Terms and Conditions, the provisions of the Terms and Conditions shall govern. Reference to System Configurations and Specifications supersede all previous information and are subject to change without notice. Trademarks TRACE™ is a trademark of ThermoQuest Corporation. Other brand and product names may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Special Printing Instructions: All schematics in Section 5 (Electronic Board Description) must be printed either with the “Fit to Page” item selected or with Tabloid size paper in order to be viewed correctly. This applies only to the schematics sections of Section 5. The Section 5 chapters themselves can be printed on normal Letter or A4 Letter size paper. Declaration Manufacturer: ThermoQuest Italia S.p.A. ThermoQuest Italia S.p.A. is the manufacturer of the instrument described in this manual and, as such, is responsible for the instrument safety, reliability and performance only if: • installation • re-calibration • changes and repairs • have been carried out by authorized personnel, and if: • the local installation complies with local law regulations • the instrument is used according to the instructions provided, and its operation is only entrusted to qualified and trained personnel ThermoQuest Italia S.p.A. is not liable for any damages derived from noncompliance with the aforementioned recommendations. ThermoQuest Italia S.p.A. Strada Rivoltana 20090 RODANO (MI) ITALY Warranty Please complete, date and sign the Quality Form accompanying the instrument. Your new instrument is covered against manufacturing defects for the period agreed within the sales terms which is generally a period of 15 months from the invoice date or 12 months from the date of installation, whichever occurs earlier, specific agreements excepted. Warranty does not cover consumables, damage caused by the improper use of the instrument and damage due to transportation. Service contracts are available from your area CE Instruments representative or directly from our headquarters Customer Support department at the following numbers: CE Instruments Customer Support Tel. + 39 02 95059 355 Fax. + 39 02 95059 388 The warranty will be invalidated (specific agreements excepted) if the instrument is removed from its original packaging in the absence of an authorized CE Instruments Customer Service Engineer. Contents About This Manual ................................................................................................................................... xvii Overview...................................................................................................................................... xvii Conventions Used in This Manual.................................................................................................xxi Instrument Markings and Symbols .............................................................................................. xxii Using Hydrogen ...........................................................................................................................xxiv Using the Hydrogen Sensor ............................................................................................xxiv SECTION I Introduction Chapter 1.1 GC Base Unit..................................................................................................................................................3 TRACE GC 2000 System Components ............................................................................................4 Pneumatic Compartment......................................................................................................4 Analytical Unit.....................................................................................................................4 Electronic Compartment ......................................................................................................5 Keypad and Display Panel ...................................................................................................5 Chapter 1.2 Pneumatic Systems.......................................................................................................................................7 Gas Control .......................................................................................................................................8 Digital Pneumatics ...............................................................................................................8 Analog Pneumatics ..............................................................................................................8 Mixed Pneumatics................................................................................................................8 Carrier Gas Control..............................................................................................................8 Column Evaluation .................................................................................................9 Leak Check ............................................................................................................9 Gas Saver Function...............................................................................................13 Detector Gas Control .........................................................................................................13 Chapter 1.3 Injection Systems ........................................................................................................................................15 Injection Systems Overview ...........................................................................................................16 Split/Splitless Injector........................................................................................................16 On-Column Injector ...........................................................................................................16 HOT Cold On-Column Injector .........................................................................................16 Large Volume On-Column Injector...................................................................................17 Packed Column Injector.....................................................................................................17 Purged Packed Column Injector ........................................................................................17 Chapter 1.4 Detection Systems ......................................................................................................................................19 Detectors .........................................................................................................................................20 Flame Ionization Detector..................................................................................................20 Electron Capture Detector..................................................................................................20 Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector...........................................................................................20 Multidetector System .........................................................................................................21 Detector Base Bodies.........................................................................................................21 Service Manual iii Contents SECTION II Specification Summary Chapter 2.1 Column Oven ...............................................................................................................................................25 Column Oven Overview ................................................................................................................. 26 Oven Safety ....................................................................................................................... 28 Column Oven Configuration .......................................................................................................... 29 Oven Menu ..................................................................................................................................... 31 Chapter 2.2 Injectors .......................................................................................................................................................35 Split/Splitless Injector Overview.................................................................................................... 36 Septum ............................................................................................................................... 39 Liners ................................................................................................................................. 40 Packed Columns ................................................................................................... 41 Split/Splitless Injector Menus......................................................................................................... 42 On-Column Injector Overview ....................................................................................................... 46 Primary Cooling System.................................................................................................... 46 Secondary Cooling System................................................................................................ 47 Optional Devices ............................................................................................................... 48 Auxiliary Purge Line ............................................................................................ 48 Automatic Actuator .............................................................................................. 48 High Oven Temperature (HOT OC) Device ........................................................ 48 Large Volume On-Column Injector (LVOCI) ..................................................... 48 On-Column Injector Menu ............................................................................................................ 49 HOT Cold On-Column Injector Overview ..................................................................................... 50 Optional Devices ............................................................................................................... 50 Auxiliary Purge Line ............................................................................................ 50 Solvent Vapor Exit Valve..................................................................................... 51 HOT Cold On-Column Injector Menu ........................................................................................... 52 Large Volume On-Column Injector Overview............................................................................... 53 Auxiliary Purge Line ......................................................................................................... 54 Large Volume On-Column Injector Menu ..................................................................................... 55 Packed Column Injector Overview................................................................................................. 56 Septa .................................................................................................................................. 56 Liners and Adapters........................................................................................................... 57 Packed Column Injector Menu ....................................................................................................... 58 Purged Packed Column Injector Overview .................................................................................... 59 Septa .................................................................................................................................. 60 Liners ................................................................................................................................. 60 Purged Packed Column Injector Menu........................................................................................... 61 Chapter 2.3 Detectors......................................................................................................................................................63 Flame Ionization Detector Overview.............................................................................................. 64 Jet....................................................................................................................................... 64 Selectivity .......................................................................................................................... 64 Temperature....................................................................................................................... 64 Carrier and Detector Gases................................................................................................ 65 FID Menu........................................................................................................................................ 67 Flame Out Conditions........................................................................................................ 68 iv Service Manual Contents Electron Capture Detector Overview ............................................................................................. 69 Wipe Test .......................................................................................................................... 70 Carrier and Detector Gases................................................................................................ 70 Operating Principle............................................................................................................ 71 Molecular Structure and Detector Response ..................................................................... 71 Constant Current Operating Mode .................................................................................... 72 Base Frequency ................................................................................................................. 73 ECD Menu...................................................................................................................................... 74 Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector Overview..................................................................................... 75 Thermionic Source Lifetime ............................................................................................. 75 Carrier and Detector Gases................................................................................................ 76 NPD Menu...................................................................................................................................... 77 SECTION III Functional Tests Chapter 3.1 Info Messages ............................................................................................................................................. 81 Info Messages ................................................................................................................................. 82 Chapter 3.2 Error Messages ........................................................................................................................................... 85 Error Messages ............................................................................................................................... 86 Chapter 3.3 Diagnostic Messages.................................................................................................................................. 89 Diagnostic Messages ...................................................................................................................... 90 SECTION IV Maintenance & Troubleshooting Chapter 4.1 GC Base Unit ............................................................................................................................................... 99 Overview ...................................................................................................................................... 100 Replace the Oven Motor............................................................................................................... 101 Required Tools ................................................................................................................ 101 Required Parts ................................................................................................................. 101 Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 101 Replace the Oven Heater Baffle ................................................................................................... 108 Required Tools ................................................................................................................ 108 Required Parts ................................................................................................................. 108 Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 108 Replace the Flapper Motor ........................................................................................................... 116 Required Tools ................................................................................................................ 116 Required Parts ................................................................................................................. 116 Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 116 Remove the Power Control Module ............................................................................................. 119 Required Tools ................................................................................................................ 119 Required Parts ................................................................................................................. 119 Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 119 Remove the CPU and Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O Unit ............................................ 125 Required Tools ................................................................................................................ 125 Service Manual v Contents Required Parts.................................................................................................................. 125 Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 125 Chapter 4.2 Digital Pressure Flow Control for Carrier Gases....................................................................................129 Digital Pressure Flow Control Modules ....................................................................................... 130 DPFC Purged Packed Carrier Pneumatic Module........................................................... 130 DPFC Packed Carrier Pneumatic Module ....................................................................... 131 DPFC On-Column Carrier Pneumatic Module ............................................................... 132 DPFC for S/SL and PTV Carrier Pneumatic Module...................................................... 133 Maintenance.................................................................................................................................. 134 Calibration ....................................................................................................................... 134 Troubleshooting............................................................................................................................ 135 Chapter 4.3 Detector Gas Flow Control for Detector Gases......................................................................................137 Detector Gas Flow Control Modules............................................................................................ 138 Hardware Configuration AA, Option 401 ....................................................................... 138 Calibration .......................................................................................................... 138 Hardware Configuration AB, Option 402 ....................................................................... 139 Calibration .......................................................................................................... 139 Hardware Configuration AC, Option 403 ....................................................................... 140 Calibration .......................................................................................................... 140 Hardware Configuration AD, Option 404 ....................................................................... 141 Calibration .......................................................................................................... 141 Hardware Configuration AE............................................................................................ 142 Detector Gas Connections ............................................................................................................ 143 Chapter 4.4 Handshake Cables ....................................................................................................................................145 TRACE to TEKMAR 2000/3000 Handshake Cable .................................................................... 146 TRACE to TSQ Handshake Cable ............................................................................................... 147 TRACE to Generic Data System Remote Start ............................................................................ 148 TRACE to GCQ............................................................................................................................ 149 Autosampler Handshake Cables ................................................................................................... 150 SECTION V Electronic Board Description Chapter 5.1 Analytical Unit ...........................................................................................................................................157 General Description ...................................................................................................................... 158 Chapter 5.2 Control Unit................................................................................................................................................161 General Description ...................................................................................................................... 162 Chapter 5.3 Motherboard ..............................................................................................................................................167 Theory of Operations.................................................................................................................... 168 Adjustment Procedures................................................................................................................. 173 Schematics and Component Layout ............................................................................................. 173 vi Service Manual Contents Chapter 5.4 Central Processing Unit (CPU) ................................................................................................................ 183 Theory of Operations.................................................................................................................... 184 Adjustment Procedures................................................................................................................. 186 Schematics and Component Layout ............................................................................................. 187 Chapter 5.5 Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O.................................................................................................... 197 Theory of Operations.................................................................................................................... 198 Adjustment Procedures................................................................................................................. 201 Schematics and Component Layout ............................................................................................. 201 Chapter 5.6 Power Control Module.............................................................................................................................. 217 Theory of Operations.................................................................................................................... 218 Adjustment Procedures................................................................................................................. 219 Schematics and Component Layout ............................................................................................. 219 Chapter 5.7 Digital Pressure Flow Control.................................................................................................................. 227 Theory of Operations.................................................................................................................... 228 Circuit Function............................................................................................................... 228 Adjustment Procedures................................................................................................................. 229 Schematics and Component Layout ............................................................................................. 229 Chapter 5.8 Keypad and Display Panel ....................................................................................................................... 235 Theory of Operations.................................................................................................................... 236 Adjustment Procedures................................................................................................................. 236 Schematics and Component Layout ............................................................................................. 236 Chapter 5.9 Theory of Detector Cards......................................................................................................................... 239 Block Diagram for Detector Cards............................................................................................... 240 Chapter 5.10 Flame Ionization Detector Controller ...................................................................................................... 241 Theory of Operations.................................................................................................................... 242 Circuit Function............................................................................................................... 242 Output Specifications ...................................................................................................... 243 Adjustment Procedures................................................................................................................. 243 Calibration Adjustments.................................................................................................. 243 Special Notes ................................................................................................................... 243 Schematics and Component Layout ............................................................................................. 244 Chapter 5.11 Electron Capture Detector Controller ..................................................................................................... 255 Theory of Operations.................................................................................................................... 256 Circuit Function............................................................................................................... 256 Detector Heat................................................................................................................... 257 Output Specifications ...................................................................................................... 258 Adjustment Procedures................................................................................................................. 258 Schematics and Component Layout ............................................................................................. 258 Service Manual vii Contents Chapter 5.12 Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector Controller............................................................................................265 Theory of Operations.................................................................................................................... 266 Circuit Function............................................................................................................... 266 Output Specifications ...................................................................................................... 267 Adjustment Procedures................................................................................................................. 267 Schematics and Component Layout ............................................................................................. 268 Chapter 5.13 Flame Photometric Detector Controller (FPD)........................................................................................275 Theory of Operations.................................................................................................................... 275 Circuit Functions ............................................................................................................. 275 Output Specifications ...................................................................................................... 277 Adjustment Procedure .................................................................................................................. 277 Protection Circuits ........................................................................................................................ 277 Special Notes ................................................................................................................................ 277 Schematics and Component Layout ............................................................................................. 278 Chapter 5.14 Photoionization Detector Controller (PID) ..............................................................................................285 Theory of Operations.................................................................................................................... 285 Circuit Function............................................................................................................... 285 Output Specifications ...................................................................................................... 287 Adjustment Procedures................................................................................................................. 287 Protection Circuits ........................................................................................................................ 287 Special Notes ................................................................................................................................ 287 Schematics and Component Layout ............................................................................................. 288 Chapter 5.15 Thermal Conductivity Detector Controller (TCD) ...................................................................................295 Theory of Operations.................................................................................................................... 295 Circuit Functions ............................................................................................................. 295 Output Specifications ...................................................................................................... 297 Adjustment Procedures................................................................................................................. 297 Protection Circuits ........................................................................................................................ 297 Special Notes ................................................................................................................................ 297 Schematics and Component Information...................................................................................... 298 Chapter 5.16 Thermocouple Preamplifiers....................................................................................................................305 Theory of Operations.................................................................................................................... 306 Adjustment Procedures................................................................................................................. 306 Schematics and Component Layout ............................................................................................. 307 Chapter 5.17 On-Column Semiautomatic Actuator ......................................................................................................311 Theory of Operations.................................................................................................................... 312 Adjustment Procedures................................................................................................................. 312 Schematics and Component Layout ............................................................................................. 312 viii Service Manual Contents SECTION VI Service Equipment Chapter 6.1 Recommended Test Equipment .............................................................................................................. 319 PCB Replacement......................................................................................................................... 320 Digital Flowmeter......................................................................................................................... 320 Digital Voltmeter (DVM)............................................................................................................. 320 Oscilloscope ................................................................................................................................. 320 Leak Test Meter............................................................................................................................ 320 Chapter 6.2 TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit..................................................................................................................... 323 Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 324 SECTION VII Replacement Parts List SECTION VIII Service Information Chapter 8.1 Service Notes (TSB).................................................................................................................................. 333 Chapter 8.2 Additional Technical Information ............................................................................................................ 335 Appendix A Flame Ionization Detector ....................................................................................................................... 343 About This Guide ......................................................................................................................... 344 Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 345 Who Performs the Installation of the Kit ........................................................................ 345 Detector Gases Requirements.......................................................................................... 345 Transformer for FID ........................................................................................................ 345 Getting Started.............................................................................................................................. 346 Removing the GC Panels ................................................................................... 347 Installing the FID Control Card ......................................................................... 348 Mounting the FID on the GC ............................................................................. 350 Reinstall the GC Panels...................................................................................... 352 Restarting the GC ............................................................................................... 352 Configuration................................................................................................................................ 353 Set FID Parameters....................................................................................................................... 354 Range Parameter................................................................................................. 355 Appendix B Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector ............................................................................................................... 357 About This Guide ......................................................................................................................... 358 Introduction .................................................................................................................................. 359 Who Performs the Installation of the Kit ........................................................................ 359 Detector Gases Requirements.......................................................................................... 359 Transformer for NPD ...................................................................................................... 360 Service Manual ix Contents Getting Started .............................................................................................................................. 361 Removing the GC Panels.................................................................................... 362 Installing the NPD Control Card ........................................................................ 365 Removing the Power Control Module................................................................ 368 Install the Transformer for Detector................................................................... 371 Reinstall the Power Control Module .................................................................. 373 Mounting the NPD on the GC ............................................................................ 373 Reinstall the GC Panels ...................................................................................... 375 Restarting the GC ............................................................................................... 376 Configuration................................................................................................................................ 377 Hardware Configuration ..................................................................................... 377 Detector and Make-up Gas Configuration ......................................................... 377 Set NPD Parameters ..................................................................................................................... 379 Appendix C Flame Photometric Detector ...................................................................................................................381 About This Guide ......................................................................................................................... 382 Introduction................................................................................................................................... 383 Who Performs the Installation of the Kit......................................................................... 383 Detector Gases Requirements.......................................................................................... 383 Getting Started .............................................................................................................................. 385 Removing the GC Panels.................................................................................... 386 Installing the FPD Control Card......................................................................... 388 Mounting the FPD on the GC............................................................................. 391 Reinstall the GC Panels ...................................................................................... 394 Restarting the GC ............................................................................................... 394 Configuration................................................................................................................................ 395 Set FPD Parameters ...................................................................................................................... 396 Appendix D Photoionization Detector .........................................................................................................................399 About This Guide ......................................................................................................................... 400 Introduction................................................................................................................................... 401 Who Performs the Installation of the Kit......................................................................... 401 Detector Gases Requirements.......................................................................................... 401 Getting Started .............................................................................................................................. 403 Removing the GC Panels.................................................................................... 404 Installing the PID Control Card.......................................................................... 406 Mounting the PID on the GC.............................................................................. 409 Connecting Capillary Column and Exit Line ..................................................... 414 Reinstall the GC Panels ...................................................................................... 414 Restarting the GC ............................................................................................... 415 Configuration................................................................................................................................ 416 Set PID Parameters ....................................................................................................................... 417 Appendix E Electron Capture Detector .......................................................................................................................419 About This Guide ......................................................................................................................... 420 Introduction................................................................................................................................... 421 Who Performs the Installation of the Kit......................................................................... 421 Detector Gases Requirements.......................................................................................... 421 Getting Started .............................................................................................................................. 423 x Service Manual Contents Removing the GC Panels....................................................................................424 Installing the ECD Control Card ........................................................................426 Mounting the ECD on the GC ............................................................................429 Reinstall the GC Panels ......................................................................................430 Restarting the GC................................................................................................431 Configuration ................................................................................................................................432 Set ECD Parameters......................................................................................................................433 Appendix F Transformer Installation ..........................................................................................................................435 Transformer Overview..................................................................................................................436 Standard and NPD Transformers 437 Getting Started ..............................................................................................................................438 Removing the GC Panels....................................................................................438 Remove the Power Control Module ...................................................................440 Install the Transformer for Detector ...................................................................443 Reinstall the Power Control Module ..................................................................445 Reinstall the GC Panels ......................................................................................445 Restarting the GC................................................................................................445 Configuration ................................................................................................................................446 Appendix G Reagent Safety Information .....................................................................................................................447 ACETONE..........................................................................................................447 METHANOL ......................................................................................................448 TOLUENE ..........................................................................................................448 Appendix H Customer Communication .......................................................................................................................449 How To Contact Us and Order Spare Parts ..................................................................................449 Technical Support ............................................................................................................451 Reader Survey..................................................................................................................452 Glossary .................................................................................................................................................... 453 Index .......................................................................................................................................................... 459 Figures Figure 1.1-1. Figure 1.2-1. Figure 2.1-1. Figure 2.1-2. Figure 2.1-3. Figure 2.2-1. Figure 2.2-2. Figure 2.2-3. Figure 2.2-4. Figure 2.2-5. Figure 2.2-6. Figure 2.2-7. Figure 2.2-8. TRACE GC 2000 Compartments ........................................................................................4 Leak Test Parts ..................................................................................................................10 Injector/Detector Locations and Fittings ...........................................................................26 Oven Air Circulation .........................................................................................................27 Cryogenic Air Circulation .................................................................................................28 Split/Splitless Injector .......................................................................................................37 Septum Purge System ........................................................................................................38 Split/Splitless Injector Components ..................................................................................39 S/SL Wide-Bore Injection Tapered Liner .........................................................................40 S/SL With a Packed Column .............................................................................................41 On-Column Injector ..........................................................................................................46 Primary and Secondary Cooling Systems .........................................................................47 HOT Cold On-Column Injector ........................................................................................50 Service Manual xi Contents Figure 2.2-9. Figure 2.2-10. Figure 2.2-11. Figure 2.3-1. Figure 2.3-2. Figure 2.3-3. Figure 4.1-1. Figure 4.1-2. Figure 4.1-3. Figure 4.1-4. Figure 4.1-5. Figure 4.1-6. Figure 4.1-7. Figure 4.1-8. Figure 4.1-9. Figure 4.1-10. Figure 4.1-11. Figure 4.1-12. Figure 4.2-1. Figure 4.2-2. Figure 4.2-3. Figure 4.2-4. Figure 4.2-5. Figure 4.3-1. Figure 4.3-2. Figure 4.3-3. Figure 4.3-4. Figure 4.3-5. Figure 4.4-1. Figure 4.4-2. Figure 4.4-3. Figure 4.4-4. Figure 4.4-5. Figure 5.2-1. Figure 5.2-2. Figure 5.3-1. Figure 5.3-2. Figure 5.3-3. Figure 5.3-4. Figure 5.5-1. Figure 5.5-2. Figure 5.9-1. Figure 8.2-1. Figure A-1. Figure A-2. Figure A-3. Figure A-4. Figure A-5. Figure A-6. Figure A-7. Figure B-1. Figure B-2. xii TRACE GC 2000 Configuration for Large Volume On-Column Injection ..................... 53 Packed Column Injector .................................................................................................... 56 Purged Packed Column Injector ....................................................................................... 59 Flame Ionization Detector ................................................................................................. 64 Electron Capture Detector ................................................................................................. 69 Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector .......................................................................................... 75 Retaining Screws on the GC Top Cover ......................................................................... 103 Pneumatic Flow Module Propped on the GC Upper Deck ............................................. 104 Tab Adjustment Screws and Tab Screws on the Oven Heater Baffle ............................ 105 Retaining Screws on the GC Top Cover ......................................................................... 110 Right Side View of GC Rear Panel ................................................................................. 111 Right Side View of GC Front Panel ................................................................................ 112 Tab Adjustment Screws and Tab Screws on the Oven Heater Baffle ............................ 113 Clamp for Oven Heater Temperature Sensor .................................................................. 114 Retaining Screws on the GC Top Cover ......................................................................... 120 Right Side View of GC Rear Panel ................................................................................. 122 Right Side View of GC Front Panel ................................................................................ 123 Retaining Screws on the GC Top Cover ......................................................................... 126 DPFC Purged Packed Carrier Pneumatic Module .......................................................... 130 DPFC Packed Carrier Pneumatic Module ...................................................................... 131 DPFC On-Column Carrier Pneumatic Module ............................................................... 132 DPFC for S/SL and PTV Carrier Pneumatic Module ..................................................... 133 DPFC Electronic Diagram of the Carrier Pneumatic Module ........................................ 134 Hardware AA, Option 401 for ECD Only ...................................................................... 138 Hardware AB, Option 402 for ECD, PID, FPD, and FID Without Make-Up ................ 139 Hardware AC, Option 403 for ECD, PID, FPD, and FID With Make-Up ..................... 140 Hardware AD, Option 404 for NPD, ECD, PID, FPD, and FID Without Make-Up ...... 141 Hardware AE for Auxiliary Gas Control ........................................................................ 142 TRACE to TEKMAR 2000/3000 handshake cable, # b119521-0002 ............................ 146 TRACE to TSQ handshake cable, #3801-4004 .............................................................. 147 TRACE to generic data system remote start, #23043457 ............................................... 148 TRACE to GCQ, # 3801-4003 ........................................................................................ 149 Connections for AS2000 Interconnect Cable and Dual Autosampler Start Cable ......... 150 Block Diagram of Base Unit ........................................................................................... 162 Expanded Block Diagram of Circuit Functions .............................................................. 163 Front View of Timed Event Connector (J38, 15-Pin Female) ........................................ 170 Front View of Generic Handshake Connector ................................................................ 170 Front View of Autosampler Connector ........................................................................... 171 Front View of Oven Cryo Valve and Inlet Cryo Valve Connector ................................ 172 Block Diagram of Temperature Feedback Circuit .......................................................... 198 Detailed Block Diagram of Temperature Feedback Circuit ........................................... 199 Block Diagram for Detector Cards ................................................................................. 240 Install New TRACE 2000 Software Dialog Box ............................................................ 337 TRACE GC 2000 ............................................................................................................ 346 TRACE GC 2000 Top Cover .......................................................................................... 347 TRACE GC 2000 Rear Panel .......................................................................................... 348 Extension Slots Top View ............................................................................................... 349 Detector Control Card Expansion Slots .......................................................................... 349 Jet for FID ....................................................................................................................... 351 Installation of the FID ..................................................................................................... 351 TR ACE GC 2000 ........................................................................................................... 362 TRACE GC 2000 Top Cover .......................................................................................... 363 Service Manual Contents Figure B-3. Figure B-4. Figure B-5. Figure B-6. Figure B-7. Figure B-8. Figure B-9. Figure B-10. Figure B-11. Figure B-12. Figure B-13. Figure C-1. Figure C-2. Figure C-3. Figure C-4. Figure C-5. Figure C-6. Figure C-7. Figure C-8. Figure D-1. Figure D-2. Figure D-3. Figure D-4. Figure D-5. Figure D-6. Figure D-7. Figure D-8. Figure D-9. Figure E-1. Figure E-2. Figure E-3. Figure E-4. Figure E-5. Figure E-6. Figure F-1. Figure F-2. Figure F-3. Figure F-4. Figure F-5. Figure F-6. Figure F-7. TRACE GC 2000 Rear Panel ......................................................................................... 364 GC Rear Panel Fixing Screws ......................................................................................... 365 Extension Slots Top View .............................................................................................. 366 Detector Control Card Expansion Slots .......................................................................... 367 TRACE GC 2000 Right Side View ................................................................................ 369 TRACE GC 2000 Rear View .......................................................................................... 370 Transformer Installation .................................................................................................. 371 Transformer Assembly Identification Parts .................................................................... 372 Installation of the Transformer for NPD ......................................................................... 373 Jet for NPD ..................................................................................................................... 374 Installation of the NPD ................................................................................................... 375 TRACE GC 2000 ............................................................................................................ 386 TRACE GC 2000 Top Cover .......................................................................................... 387 TRACE GC 2000 Rear Panel ......................................................................................... 388 Extension Slots Top View .............................................................................................. 389 Detector Control Card Expansion Slots .......................................................................... 390 Jet for FPD ...................................................................................................................... 392 Installation of the FPD .................................................................................................... 393 Cables Connection .......................................................................................................... 393 TRACE GC 2000 ............................................................................................................ 404 TRACE GC 2000 Top Cover .......................................................................................... 405 TRACE GC 2000 Rear Panel ......................................................................................... 406 Extension Slots Top View .............................................................................................. 407 Detector Control Card Expansion Slots .......................................................................... 408 PID General View ........................................................................................................... 410 Explose of the PID Components ..................................................................................... 411 PID Installation Result ................................................................................................... 413 Capillary Column and Exit Line Connections ................................................................ 414 TRACE GC 2000 ............................................................................................................ 424 TRACE GC 2000 Top Cover .......................................................................................... 425 TRACE GC 2000 Rear Panel ......................................................................................... 426 Extension Slots Top View .............................................................................................. 427 Detector Control Card Expansion Slots .......................................................................... 428 Installation of the ECD ................................................................................................... 430 Standard and NPD Transformers .................................................................................... 437 TRACE GC 2000 View .................................................................................................. 439 TRACE GC 2000 Rear Panel ......................................................................................... 440 TRACE GC 2000 Right Side View ................................................................................ 441 TRACE GC 2000 Rear View .......................................................................................... 442 Transformer Installation .................................................................................................. 443 Transformer Assembly Identification Parts .................................................................... 444 Tables Table 2.1-1. Table 2.1-2. Table 2.2-1. Table 2.2-2. Table 2.2-3. Table 2.2-4. Table 2.2-5. Table 2.2-6. Configure Oven Menu ......................................................................................................29 The Oven Menu ................................................................................................................31 Liners Sizes and Applications ...........................................................................................40 Inlet Menu in Split Mode ..................................................................................................43 Inlet Menu in Splitless Mode ............................................................................................43 Inlet Menu in Surge Splitless Mode ..................................................................................44 Inlet Menu in Split Mode ..................................................................................................49 Inlet Menu for On-Column Injectors With the HOT Device ............................................52 Service Manual xiii Contents Table 2.2-7. Table 2.2-8. Table 2.2-9. Table 2.2-10. Table 2.3-1. Table 2.3-2. Table 2.3-3. Table 2.3-4. Table 2.3-5. Table 2.3-6. Table 2.3-7. Table 2.3-8. Table 3.1-1. Table 3.2-1. Table 3.3-1. Table 4.2-1. Table 4.3-1. Table 5.3-1. Table 5.3-2. Table 5.3-3. Table 5.3-4. Table 5.3-5. Table 5.3-6. Table 5.3-7. Table 5.4-1. Table 5.4-2. Table 5.4-3. Table 5.5-1. Table 5.5-2. Table 5.5-3. Table 5.6-1. Table 5.7-1. Table 5.8-1. Table 5.10-1. Table 5.11-1. Table 5.12-1. Table 5.16-1. Table 5.17-1. Table 6.2-1. Table 6.2-2. Table 6.2-3. Table 6.2-4. Table 6.2-5. Table 6.2-6. Table 6.2-7. Table 6.2-8. Table 6.2-9. Table 6.2-10. Table 6.2-11. Table 6.2-12. Table 8.2-1. Table 8.2-2. xiv Inlet Menu for Large Volume On-Column Injectors ........................................................55 Liners and Adapters for Packed Column Injectors ...........................................................57 Inlet Menu for Packed Column Injectors ..........................................................................58 Inlet Menu for Purged Packed Column Injectors ..............................................................61 FID Carrier Gases. ............................................................................................................65 Typical Operating Conditions ...........................................................................................65 FID Menu ..........................................................................................................................67 ECD Carrier Gases. ...........................................................................................................70 Relative Response to Some Organic Compounds .............................................................72 ECD Menu ........................................................................................................................74 NPD Carrier Gases ............................................................................................................76 NPD Menu ........................................................................................................................77 Info Messages ...................................................................................................................82 Error Messages ..................................................................................................................86 Diagnostic Messages .........................................................................................................90 DPFC Input and Output Voltages ...................................................................................135 Detector Gas Connections ...............................................................................................143 Non-DPFC Gas ON/OFF Control Connectors ................................................................169 Timed Event Connector ..................................................................................................170 Generic Handshake Connector ........................................................................................171 Autosampler Connector ..................................................................................................172 Oven Cryo Valve and Inlet Cryo Valve Connectors .......................................................172 Other Connectors ............................................................................................................173 Motherboard Schematics .................................................................................................173 Select Lines and Devices ................................................................................................185 TPU Channels and Functions ..........................................................................................186 CPU Schematics ..............................................................................................................187 Temperature Controls .....................................................................................................199 External Input/Output Signals .........................................................................................200 Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O Schematics .......................................................201 Power Control Module PCB Schematics ........................................................................219 Digital Pressure Flow Control Schematics .....................................................................229 Keypad and Display Panel Schematics ...........................................................................236 FID Controller Schematics ..............................................................................................244 ECD Controller Schematics ............................................................................................258 NPD Controller Schematics ............................................................................................268 Thermocouple Preamplifiers Schematics ........................................................................307 On-Column Semiautomatic Actuator Schematics ..........................................................312 Electronics .......................................................................................................................324 Oven ................................................................................................................................325 Injector Assemblies .........................................................................................................325 Injector Consumables ......................................................................................................325 Large Volume Injections .................................................................................................326 Detector Assemblies .......................................................................................................326 Detector Consumables ....................................................................................................327 Fans .................................................................................................................................327 Pneumatics ......................................................................................................................328 AS 2000 Left/Right .........................................................................................................328 HS 2000 ...........................................................................................................................328 Service Tools ...................................................................................................................328 Configure Menu ..............................................................................................................338 Configure Menu ..............................................................................................................339 Service Manual Contents Table 8.2-3. Table 8.2-4. Table 8.2-5. Table 8.2-6. Table 8.2-7. Table 8.2-8. Table 8.2-9. Table H-1. HIDDEN CONFIGURATION Menu .............................................................................340 Config Right Inlet Menu .................................................................................................340 Config Right Inlet Type Menu ........................................................................................341 Left Inlet Menu ...............................................................................................................341 Left Carrier Col Flow Rates Menu .................................................................................342 Valves Menu ...................................................................................................................342 Left Valves Menu ...........................................................................................................342 Transformer Types ..........................................................................................................436 Operating Procedures Replace the Oven Motor............................................................................................................................ 102 Replace the Oven Heater Baffle ................................................................................................................ 109 Replace the Flapper Motor ........................................................................................................................ 117 Remove the Power Control Module .......................................................................................................... 120 Remove the CPU and Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O Unit ......................................................... 126 How to Update Your TRACE GC 2000 Software .................................................................................... 336 Using the Configure Menu ........................................................................................................................ 337 Using the Hidden Configuration Menu ..................................................................................................... 338 Controlling LVOCI Inlet Parameters ........................................................................................................ 341 Installing FID Upgrade Kit........................................................................................................................ 346 Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas ................................................................................................... 353 Parameters Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 354 Installing NPD Upgrade Kit ...................................................................................................................... 362 Configuring Hardware, Detector and Make-up Gas.................................................................................. 377 Parameters Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 379 Installing FPD Upgrade Kit ....................................................................................................................... 386 Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas ................................................................................................... 395 Parameters Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 396 Installing PID Upgrade Kit........................................................................................................................ 404 Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas ................................................................................................... 416 Parameters Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 417 Installing ECD Upgrade Kit ...................................................................................................................... 424 Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas ................................................................................................... 432 Parameters Setting ..................................................................................................................................... 433 Installing the Transformer ......................................................................................................................... 438 Hardware Configuration ............................................................................................................................ 446 Service Manual xv About This Manual Overview The TRACE GC 2000 Service Manual provides detailed information for installing, servicing, and repairing the TRACE GC 2000 gas chromatograph. This manual is written primarily for certified service representatives. This manual is organized as follows: Section I, Introduction, provides an introduction to the basic components and systems of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 1.1, GC Base Unit, describes the base unit of the TRACE GC 2000 and its components. Chapter 1.2, Pneumatic Systems, describes the pneumatic systems available for the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 1.3, Injection Systems, describes the injection systems available for the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 1.4, Detection Systems, describes the detection systems available for use in the TRACE GC 2000. Section II, Specification Summary, provides a summary of specifications for the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 2.1,Column Oven, describes the column oven of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 2.2, Injectors, describes the injectors available for use with the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 2.3, Detectors, describes the detectors available for use with the TRACE GC 2000. Section III, Functional Tests, provides information about alarm, diagnostic, and error messages of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 3.1, Info Messages, contains information to help identify and troubleshoot info messages on the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 3.2, Error Messages, contains information to help identify and troubleshoot info, error, and diagnostic messages on the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 3.3, Diagnostic Messages, contains information to help identify and troubleshoot info, error, and diagnostic messages on the TRACE GC 2000. Section IV, Maintenance & Troubleshooting, provides maintenance and troubleshooting for various components of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 4.1, GC Base Unit, contains procedures for replacing the components associated with the frame and oven assembly. It also explains how to remove the Power Control Module, the CPU, and the Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O unit. Service Manual xvii About This Manual Overview Chapter 4.2, Digital Pressure Flow Control for Carrier Gases, contains information about the Digital Pressure Flow Control modules of the TRACE GC 2000. It also addresses maintenance and troubleshooting issues. Chapter 4.3, Detector Gas Flow Control for Detector Gases, contains information about the Detector Gas Flow Control modules of the TRACE GC 2000. It also addresses maintenance and troubleshooting issues. Chapter 4.4, Hand Shake Cables, contains information regarding the different types of handshake cables and connections used with the TRACE GC 2000. Section V, Electronic Board Description, provides a description of the electronic boards in the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 5.1, Analytical Unit, describes the Analytical Unit of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 5.2, Control Unit, describes the Control Unit of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 5.3, Motherboard, describes the Motherboard of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 5.4, Central Processing Unit (CPU), describes the PCB for the Central Processing Unit (CPU) of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 5.5, Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O, chapter describes the Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O (TF & DIO) PCB of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 5.6, Power Control Module, describes the PCB for the Power Control Module (PCM) of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 5.7, Digital Pressure Flow Control, describes the PCB for the Digital Pressure Flow Control (DPFC) of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 5.8, Keypad and Display Panel, describes the PCB for the Keypad and Display Panel of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 5.9, Theory of Detector Cards, contains a representative block diagram for the following 6 detector chapters. Chapter 5.10, Flame Ionization Detector Controller, describes the Flame Ionization Detector (FID) controller of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 5.11, Electron Capture Detector Controller, describes the Electron Capture Detector (ECD) controller of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 5.12, Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector Controller, describes the Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector (NPD) controller of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 5.13, Flame Photometric Detector Controller (FPD), describes the TRACE GC 2000 Flame Photometric Detector (FPD) controller. Chapter 5.14, Photoionization Detector Controller (PID), This chapter describes the TRACE GC 2000 Photoionization Detector (PID) controller. Chapter 5.15, Thermal Conductivity Detector Controller (TCD), describes the TRACE GC 2000 Thermal Conductivity Detector (TCD) controller. Chapter 5.16, Thermocouple Preamplifiers, describes the PCB for the thermocouple preamplifiers of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 5.17, On-Column Semiautomatic Actuator, describes the PCB for an oncolumn semiautomatic actuator of the TRACE GC 2000. xviii Service Manual Overview About This Manual Section VI, Service Equipment, provides specifications for recommended test equipment used with the TRACE GC 2000. The TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit is also included. Chapter 6.1, Recommended Test Equipment, provides test equipment specifications that should enable isolation of problems, repair, and calibration of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 6.2, TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit, provides a list of the parts found in the TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit. Part numbers are included. Section VII, Replacement Parts List, provides a list of replacement parts and component part numbers for the TRACE GC 2000. Section VIII, Service Information, provides service and technical information for the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 8.1, Service Notes (TSB), contains service notes and Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) for the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 8.2, Additional Technical Information, contains additional technical information for the TRACE GC 2000. Appendix A, Flame Ionization Detector, contains the manual FID Installation Instructions (PN M 317 09 327), which provides instructions for installing and configuring the Flame Ionization Detector on your TRACE GC 2000. Appendix B, Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector, contains the manual NPD Installation Instructions (PN M 317 09 329) which provides the instructions to install and configure the Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector on your TRACE GC 2000. Appendix C, Flame Photometric Detector, contains the manual FPD Installation Instructions (PN M 317 09 331) which provides the instructions to install and configure the Flame Photometric Detector on your TRACE GC 2000. Appendix D, Photoionization Detector, contains the manual PID Installation Instructions (PN M 317 09 333) the instructions to install and configure the Photoionization Detector on your TRACE GC 2000. Appendix E, Electron Capture Detector, contains the manual ECD Installation Instructions (PN M 317 09 335) which provides the instructions to install and configure the Electron Capture Detector on your TRACE GC 2000. Appendix F, Transformer Installation, contains the manual Transformer Installation which provides the instructions to install and configure a transformer on your TRACE ™ GC 2000. Appendix G, Reagent Safety Information, contains the chemical references for the solvents mentioned in this manual. Service Manual xix About This Manual Overview Appendix H, Customer Communication, contains contact information for ThermoQuest offices worldwide. Use the Reader Survey in this section to give us feedback on this manual and help us improve the quality of our documentation. The Glossary contains definitions of terms used that may be used in this manual. This also includes abbreviations, acronyms, metric prefixes, and symbols. The Index contains an alphabetical list of key terms and topics in this manual, including cross-references and the corresponding page numbers. xx Service Manual Conventions Used in This Manual About This Manual Conventions Used in This Manual The following symbols and typographical conventions are used throughout this manual. Bold Bold text indicates names of windows, menus, dialog boxes, buttons, and fields. Italic Italic indicates cross references, first references to important terms defined in the glossary, and special emphasis. Monospace Monospace, or Courier, indicates filenames and filepaths, or to indicate text the user should enter with the keyboard. Monospace Bold Monospace Bold indicates messages or prompts displayed on the computer screen or on a digital display. » This symbol illustrates menu paths to select, such as File»Open…. KEY NAME Bold, uppercase sans serif font indicates the name of a key on a keyboard or keypad, such as ENTER. CAUTION This symbol alerts you to an action or procedure that, if performed improperly, could damage the instrument. NOTE This symbol alerts you to important information related to the text in the previous paragraph. This symbol alerts you to an action or procedure that, if performed WARNING! improperly, could result in damage to the instrument or possible physical harm to the user. This symbol may be followed by icons indicating special precautions that should be taken to avoid injury. This symbol indicates electric shock hazard. This symbol indicates danger from hazardous chemicals. This symbol indicates danger from high temperature surfaces or substances. This symbol indicates a fire hazard. This symbol indicates an explosion hazard. This symbol indicates a toxic hazard. Service Manual xxi About This Manual Instrument Markings and Symbols This symbol indicates the presence of flammable materials. This symbol indicates the presence of radioactive material. This symbol indicates an operation or procedure that must NOT be performed by the user. A ThermoQuest authorized Customer Support Engineer must perform this procedure. This symbol indicates all metal objects, such as watches and jewelry, must be taken off. This symbol indicates an eye hazard. Eye protection must be worn. This symbol indicates the user must wear a protective screen when performing the procedure. This symbol indicates the user must wear protective shoes when performing the procedure. This symbol indicates the user must wear protective clothing when performing the procedure. This symbol indicates the user must wear gloves when performing the procedure. Instrument Markings and Symbols The following table explains the symbols used on ThermoQuest instruments. Only a few of them are used on the TRACE GC 2000 gas chromatograph. Symbol Description Direct Current Alternating Current Both direct and alternating current Three-phase alternating current 3 Earth (ground) terminal Protective conductor terminal xxii Service Manual Instrument Markings and Symbols About This Manual Symbol Description Frame or chassis terminal Equipotentiality On (Supply) Off (Supply) Equipment protected throughout by DOUBLE INSULATION or REINFORCED INSULATION (Equivalent to Class II of IEC 536) Indicates that the user must refer to the manual for specific Warning or Caution information to avoid personal injury or damage to the product. Caution, risk of electric shock Caution, hot surface Caution (refer to accompanying documents) In-position of a bistable push control Out-position of a bistable push control Service Manual xxiii About This Manual Using Hydrogen Using Hydrogen The use of hydrogen as a carrier gas or as fuel for certain flame detectors requires the operator’s strict attention and compliance with special precautions due to the hazards involved. Hydrogen is a dangerous gas, particularly in an enclosed area when it reaches a concentration corresponding to its lower explosion level (4% in volume). When mixed with air it can create an explosive mixture. An explosion hazard could develop in the GC oven when hydrogen is used as a carrier gas if oven elements are not perfectly connected to each other, or if the connection materials are worn out, broken, or otherwise faulty. Use the following safety precautions when using hydrogen: • Ensure that all hydrogen cylinders comply with the safety requirements for proper use and storage. All hydrogen cylinders must be equipped with safety valves and automatic safety systems. • Make sure the gas supply is turned completely off when connecting hydrogen lines. • Perform a bubble test to ensure that the hydrogen lines are leak-tight before using the instrument. • Ensure your GC column oven has a ThermoQuest hydrogen sensor. A hydrogen sensor continuously monitors the hydrogen level in the GC column oven. If your GC oven does not have a hydrogen sensor already installed, contact your ThermoQuest sales representative. To comply with instrument safety requirements, a ThermoQuest CSE or authorized service technician should install the sensor. If you plan to use a sensor other than the recommended ThermoQuest sensor, you must verify its ability to perform the functions listed above before installing it. It must comply with your local safety regulations, or with the IEC 10101 regulations if local regulations do not exist. Using the Hydrogen Sensor The lower limit of the hydrogen sensor is 0.5% in volume. You should adjust the detection threshold to 1% in volume, which is 25% of the hydrogen lower limit of explosion (4% in volume). In cases where the connections begin to leak or the column breaks, the sensor alerts the operator. Then it automatically cuts off the gas supply and heating to the active zones, and sweeps the column oven with forced air ventilation. 1. xxiv IEC 1010-1, First Edition, September 1990; IEC 1010-1, Amendment 1, September 1992; IEC 1010-1, Amendment 2, June 1995. Service Manual Using Hydrogen About This Manual If the sensor detects anomalies or leaks during GC operation due to instrument malfunction, the operator must immediately: • close the hydrogen supply • switch off the gas chromatograph • air out the room The reliability of the sensor depends on careful maintenance. After the sensor is in use, you must periodically check its operating performance and calibration as recommended by the manufacturer. Refer to your hydrogen sensor’s instruction manual for maintenance guidelines. WARNING! Never use hydrogen in your TRACE GC 2000 system unless your GC oven has a hydrogen sensor installed. NOTE Service Manual ThermoQuest CSEs are not authorized to install or repair any instrument using hydrogen as a carrier gas unless the instrument is equipped with the appropriate sensor. xxv About This Manual xxvi Using Hydrogen Service Manual SECTION I Introduction This section provides an introduction to the basic components and systems of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 1.1, GC Base Unit, describes the base unit of the TRACE GC 2000 and its components. Chapter 1.2, Pneumatic Systems, describes the pneumatic systems available for the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 1.3, Injection Systems, describes the injection systems available for the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 1.4, Detection Systems, describes the detection systems available for use in the TRACE GC 2000. GC Base Unit This chapter describes the base unit of the TRACE GC 2000 and its components. Chapter at a Glance… TRACE GC 2000 System Components........................................................................ 4 Pneumatic Compartment............................................................................................... 4 Analytical Unit.............................................................................................................. 4 Electronic Compartment ............................................................................................... 5 Keypad and Display Panel ............................................................................................ 5 Service Manual 3 Chapter 1.1 GC Base Unit TRACE GC 2000 System Components TRACE GC 2000 System Components The TRACE GC 2000 consists of four major components, as shown in Figure 1.1-1. Temp I n it ia l t R a m p 1 im e OVEN 36 0 1 .0 0 < 2 0 .0 VAL VES 1. Pneumatic Compartment 3. Electronic Compartment 2. Analytical Unit 4. Keypad and Display Panel Figure 1.1-1. TRACE GC 2000 Compartments Pneumatic Compartment The pneumatic compartment contains the pneumatic gas control circuits. The circuits can be completely electronic (digital pneumatics), completely analog, or a combination of analog and digital components (mixed pneumatics). Analytical Unit The analytical unit consists of two subcompartments: 4 • The column oven • The injector and detector cassette Service Manual TRACE GC 2000 System Components Chapter 1.1 GC Base Unit Electronic Compartment The electronic compartment consists of two subcompartments: • The high-voltage compartment • The motherboard for the detector controller cards Keypad and Display Panel The keypad and display panel make up the TRACE GC 2000 user interface. Service Manual 5 Pneumatic Systems This chapter describes the pneumatic systems available for the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter at a Glance… Gas Control ................................................................................................................... 8 Digital Pneumatics........................................................................................................ 8 Analog Pneumatics ....................................................................................................... 8 Mixed Pneumatics......................................................................................................... 8 Carrier Gas Control....................................................................................................... 8 Detector Gas Control .................................................................................................. 13 Service Manual 7 Chapter 1.2 Pneumatic Systems Gas Control Gas Control The arrangement of the pneumatic gas control system depends on the detectors configured on the base unit. Three possible configurations of the pneumatic compartment are available: • Digital pneumatics • Analog pneumatics • Mixed pneumatics (analog and digital) Digital Pneumatics In GCs equipped with digital pneumatics, carrier and detector gases are controlled electronically through a series of electronic pneumatic control modules mounted in the pneumatic compartment. The Digital Pressure Flow Control (DPFC) modules control the carrier gas flow, and the Detector Gas Flow Control (DGFC) modules control detector gas flow. A single DPFC module can alternate the flow of one carrier gas supply between a split/splitless injector and another (non-split/splitless) injector. Analog Pneumatics In GCs equipped with analog pneumatics, detector gases are controlled by a series of conventional, manually regulated control modules mounted in the pneumatic compartment. Manual control is also referred to as non-DGFC. Mixed Pneumatics In GCs equipped with mixed digital and analog pneumatics, DPFC modules control carrier gas flow, while conventional, or non-DGFC, modules control detector gases. The detector gas pneumatic circuits can be configured for up to three detectors at one time. Each of the three detector gas flows can be regulated separately. You can easily interchange different detectors. Carrier Gas Control Carrier gas control is only available in DPFC format. The DPFC module allows the digital control of the inlet pressure and carrier gas flow. 8 Service Manual Chapter 1.2 Pneumatic Systems Gas Control The DPFC module features the following: • Constant pressure or constant flow operating modes • Programmed pressure or programmed flow operating modes • Inlet pressure control (in kPa, psi, or bar) and column flow rate control (in mL/min) • Split flow control (in mL/min) Column Evaluation For pressure controlled injectors (split/splitless and on-column), control of the column flow is indirect. This means that the GC regulates pressure to control the flow of gas through the column. To do this, the GC relies on a column constant. The column constant is a measure of the column’s pneumatic resistance. You can use the TRACE GC 2000’s column evaluation feature to automatically calculate the column constant. Leak Check A leak check involves six stages. 1. Leak testing the gas source to the GC 2. Pressurizing the split/splitless inlet system 3. Pressuring the packed injection 4. Pressurizing the detector base body 5. Automatic leak checking Service Manual 9 Chapter 1.2 Pneumatic Systems Gas Control Stage 1. Leak Testing the gas source to the GC Helpful Materials: Electronic Leak Detector, Cut-Off Valve PN 405 100 23, Pressure Gauge PN 408 500 07, 1/8” Tee PN 403 200 42 The TRACE DPFC gas input contains on and off solenoid valves that are in the off position when the GC power is off. Figure 1.2-1 Leak Test Parts provides a detailed description for the following instruction. GC 2 GC 3 Cut-off Valve Pressure Gauge GC 1 1/8" Tee with Teflon Tape to Seal Pipe Threads Figure 1.2-1. Leak Test Parts First, connect the gas lines to the GC as outlined in the Site Prep and Installation manual. While the GC power is still off, turn on all gas supply lines to the GC and set the input pressure to 420 kPa (60 psig). Allow the gas lines to pressurize for several seconds. Turn off the input gas source and allow the system to set for several minutes. The pressure should not decrease. If the pressure drops, locate the leak using an electronic leak detector. If multiple systems are attached to the same gas source, you will need to isolate each GC system. An easy way to isolate the GC is to install an Cut-Off valve (PN 405 100 23) and Pressure Gauge (PN 408 500 07) with a 1/8” input Tee (PN 403 200 42) in the gas line leading to the GC that you are leak testing, Be sure the pressure gauge is connected in line between the on/off valve and the GC. Turn on the gas supply and allow the system to pressurize. Turn off the Cut-off valve and verify the pressure holds. Keep in mind, this only leak checks the plumbing from the Cut-off valve to the GC. 10 Service Manual Chapter 1.2 Pneumatic Systems Gas Control Stage 2. Pressurizing the split/splitless inlet system Helpful Materials: Aluminum Plug PN 290 326 55, M4 Capillary Inlet Nut PN 350 324 23 Turn the GC power on and allow the TRACE GC 2000 to perform its initial self-test. Insert an aluminum plug PN 290 326 55 (pkg. 10 ea.) into the M4 capillary inlet nut PN 350 324 23. Attach the nut to the capillary inlet and tighten. On the GC front panel, press the VALVES button (bottom row). Select Inlet valves. Turn the appropriate injector split valve and the septum purge valve off. Select the appropriate Right or Left Carrier. Set the mode to constant pressure. Turn on the gas pressure and set the inlet pressure to the maximum value. The maximum value can be determined by moving the cursor to the pressure display line and pressing the Info key on the front panel. Allow the inlet several seconds to pressurize. The display should show the selected pressure and the actual pressure. Turn the pressure OFF. The actual pressure should not change more than 14 to 21 kPa (2–3 Psig) in 10 minutes. If the pressure begins to immediately drop, use an electronic leak tester and check the split and septum purge vent, the septum and the fittings on the split vent filter for leaks. Check all fittings around the inlet. Stage 3. Pressurizing the packed injector Helpful Materials: Septum PN 313 032 00, Cap PN 350 010 51 Two types of packed injectors exist on the TRACE GC 2000. One is packed with septum purge and the other is packed without septum purge. Determine which packed injector is installed on your GC. Turn the GC power on and allow the TRACE GC 2000 to perform its initial self-test. Seal the inlet using Cap PN 350 010 51. Select the appropriate Right or Left Carrier. If a packed injector with septum purge is being used, it will be necessary to turn the septum purge valve off. To turn the septum purge valve off, press the VALVES button (bottom row) on the front panel. Select Inlet valves. Turn the appropriate injector septum purge valve off. Select the appropriate Left or Right carrier. Set the mode to constant pressure. Turn on the gas pressure and set the inlet pressure to the maximum value. The maximum value can be determined by moving the cursor to the pressure display line and pressing the Info key on the front panel. Allow the inlet several seconds to pressurize. The display should show the selected pressure and the actual pressure. Turn the pressure OFF. The actual pressure should not change more than 14 to 21 kPa (2–3 Psig) in 10 minutes. If the pressure begins to immediately drop, use an electronic leak tester and check the septum purge vent, the septum and all fittings around the inlet for leaks. Stage 4. Pressurizing the on column injector The on column injector must be sealed using a short section of capillary column connected to the injector. Insert the column into the injector as described in chapter 13 of the Operating Manual. Insert the other end of the column into a septa. This should seal the other end of the column. After the column is in place, turn the GC power on and allow the TRACE GC 2000 to perform its initial self-test. Select the Left Carrier and set the mode to constant pressure. Turn on the gas pressure and set the inlet Service Manual 11 Chapter 1.2 Pneumatic Systems Gas Control pressure to the maximum value. The maximum value can be determined by moving the cursor to the pressure display line and pressing the Info key on the front panel. Allow the inlet several seconds to pressurize. The display should show the selected pressure and the actual pressure. Turn the pressure OFF. The actual pressure should not change more than 14 to 21 kPa (2–3 Psig) in 10 minutes. If the pressure begins to immediately drop, use an electronic leak tester and check the various parts of the inlet for leaks. Stage 5. Pressurizing the detector base body Helpful Materials: Cap PN 350 061 01, M4 Column Nut PN 350 324 23, Aluminum Plug PN 290 326 55, Blank Detector Jet PN 404 019 00 Turn the GC power on and allow the TRACE GC 2000 to perform its initial self-test. Set all detector temperatures to ambient and verify the detector base body has cooled to ambient temperature. Remove the detector from the base body. Seal the top of the detector base body using cap PN 350 061 01. If the detector base body contains an FID or NPD jet, it is not necessary to remove the jet. The seal will fit over the jet. If the base is configured for capillary columns, remove the column and seal the detector base inlet using a M4 column nut PN 350 324 23 and aluminum plug PN 290 326 55 (pkg. 10 ea.). If the base body is configured for packed columns, insert a septum PN 313 032 00 into a septum cap PN 350 010 51 and attach it to the detector inlet to seal the base body input. Turn on one of the detector gases and allow the detector base to pressurize. NOTE It is not necessary to turn on all the detector gases. With the top and bottom of the base body sealed, all the gas lines will pressurize back to the flow module. The front panel display will show different pressures for the various detector gases event though only one of the detector gases is turned on. Once the base body has pressurized, turn the gas that was used to pressurize the base body off. The actual pressure should not change more than 14 to 21 kPa (2–3 Psig) in 10 minutes. The capillary column base body standard outfit contains a blank Detector Jet PN 404 019 00. Substituting the existing detector jet with this blank jet will allow the base body column flow path to be sealed. With this blank jet in place and a column connected between the inlet and the base body, the inlet can be pressurized and the complete carrier flow path leak tested. Be sure any H2 and makeup supplies connected to the base body are turned off when this test is made. Allow several minutes for the system to pressurize before turning off the column flow. If the system is pressurized and the split/septum purge vents are off, the actual pressure should not change more than 14 to 21 kPa (2–3 Psig) in 10 minutes. Stage 6. Automatic leak check With the TRACE GC 2000 system you can perform an automatic gas leak check. When you select the GC leak check function the GC measures the column flow with a true mass flow sensor and compares it to a calculated flow value obtained from the original column constant to see if the numbers match. If there is a significant difference between the two values then the instrument detects a gas leak. 12 Service Manual Chapter 1.2 Pneumatic Systems Gas Control Gas Saver Function The gas saver function reduces the split flow after an injection to avoid the waste of expensive gases. It is only available on DPFC systems. Refer to... Chapter 4.6 Digital Pressure Flow Control for Carrier Gases Detector Gas Control The DGFC module allows the digital control of all the necessary detector gases. The non-DGFC modules have conventional pneumatic controls which require manual regulation of detector gases. Both DGFC and non-DGFC gas flows can be automatically switched on and off using the TRACE GC 2000 keypad. Refer to... Chapter 4.7 Detector Gas Flow Control for Detector Gases Service Manual 13 Injection Systems This chapter describes the injection systems available for the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter at a Glance… Injection Systems Overview ....................................................................................... 16 Split/Splitless Injector................................................................................................. 16 On-Column Injector.................................................................................................... 16 HOT Cold On-Column Injector .................................................................................. 16 Large Volume On-Column Injector ............................................................................ 17 Packed Column Injector.............................................................................................. 17 Purged Packed Column Injector ................................................................................. 17 Service Manual 15 Chapter 1.3 Injection Systems Injection Systems Overview Injection Systems Overview The following injection systems are available on the TRACE GC 2000: • Split/Splitless Injector (S/SL) • On-Column Injector (OCI) • HOT Cold On-Column Injector (HOT OC) • Large Volume On-Column Injector (LVOCI) • Packed Column Injector (PKD) • Purged Packed Column Injector (PPKD) Digital Pressure and Flow Control (DPFC) is available for all injection systems. Split/Splitless Injector The Split/Splitless (S/SL) injector minimizes heavy component discrimination with optimized sample transfer to the column. You can use capillary and wide-bore columns with the split/splitless injector. With the appropriate adapter kit, you can also use packed columns. Refer to... Chapter 4.2 Maintaining a Split/Splitless Injector On-Column Injector The On-Column Injector (OCI) allows you to inject a sample directly into a 0.25 or 0.32 mm capillary column or 0.53 mm wide-bore column. Primary and secondary cooling systems keep the injection block at ambient temperature and the injection zone cool to prevent sample vaporization and ensure complete sample transfer from the syringe to the column. Refer to... Chapter 4.3 Maintaining a Cold On-Column Injector HOT Cold On-Column Injector The High Oven Temperature cold On-Column (HOT OC) injector is a special version of the standard on-column injector. It can operate at high oven temperatures. An optional HOT device is required. Refer to... Chapter 4.3 Maintaining a Cold On-Column Injector 16 Service Manual Injection Systems Overview Chapter 1.3 Injection Systems Large Volume On-Column Injector The Large Volume On-Column Injector (LVOCI) is a special version of the standard on-column injector. It allows the automatic introduction of large volumes of liquid sample through the AS 2000 Autosampler. Refer to... Chapter 4.3 Maintaining a Cold On-Column Injector Packed Column Injector The Packed (PKD) column injector features injection directly into metal or glass packed columns or into metal or glass packed columns with glass liners. Refer to... Chapter 4.4 Maintaining a Packed Column Injector Purged Packed Column Injector The Purged Packed (PPKD) column injector allows sample injection and vaporization into a liner. The sample then transfers to a wide-bore capillary column. Refer to... Chapter 4.5 Maintaining a Purged Packed Column Injector Service Manual 17 Detection Systems This chapter describes the detection systems available for use in the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter at a Glance… Detectors ..................................................................................................................... 20 Flame Ionization Detector........................................................................................... 20 Electron Capture Detector........................................................................................... 20 Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector.................................................................................... 20 Multidetector System .................................................................................................. 21 Detector Base Bodies.................................................................................................. 21 Service Manual 19 Chapter 1.4 Detection Systems Detectors Detectors The following detection systems are available for the TRACE GC 2000: • Flame Ionization Detector (FID) • Electron Capture Detector (ECD) • Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector (NPD) All detectors are available with both Digital Gas Flow Control (DGFC) and conventional pressure regulators (non-DGFC). Flame Ionization Detector The Flame Ionization Detector (FID) provides optimum sensitivity and linearity. The FID ensures stable, reproducible, and long-term trouble-free performance. Refer to… Chapter 4.8 Maintaining an FID Electron Capture Detector The Electron Capture Detector (ECD) features a very low ionization cell volume and increased resistance to contamination. This ensures high sensitivity and trouble-free operations. You can easily remove and clean the collecting electrode without disturbing the 63Ni source. The detector can be heated to 400 °C, extending its application range to higher molecular weight compounds. Refer to… Chapter 4.9 Maintaining an ECD Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector The Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector (NPD), equipped with a ceramic matrix thermionic source, features high sensitivity and long-term stability for analyzing compounds containing nitrogen and phosphorus. A special thermionic source is also available for Enhanced Nitrogen Selectivity (ENS) mode. Refer to… Chapter 4.10 Maintaining an NPD 20 Service Manual Chapter 1.4 Detection Systems Detectors Multidetector System To analyze complex samples, a significant reduction in analysis time and increase in analytical information may be gained with a multidetector configuration. Detectors may be arranged: • In series with a non-destructive detector (ECD) followed by a destructive detector (NPD or FID) • In parallel to provide a number of chromatograms from each single injection This may be particularly useful for bulk analysis of product formulations, biochemical, and environmental applications. Detector Base Bodies The ionization detectors are easily interchangeable. This is made possible by base bodies on the analytical unit that provide a connection between the detector head and the analytical column. Two types of detector base bodies are available. The type you can use depends on the GC base unit configuration. • Packed column base body • Capillary column base body Refer to… Chapter 2.3 Detectors Service Manual 21 SECTION II Specification Summary This section provides a summary of specifications for the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 2.1, Column Oven, describes the column oven of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 2.2,Injectors, describes the injectors available for use with the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 2.3, Detectors, describes the detectors available for use with the TRACE GC 2000. Column Oven This chapter describes the column oven of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter at a Glance… Column Oven Overview ............................................................................................. 26 Column Oven Configuration ...................................................................................... 29 Oven Menu ................................................................................................................. 31 Service Manual 25 Chapter 2.1 Column Oven Column Oven Overview Column Oven Overview The TRACE GC 2000 column oven provides a stable heating environment for the analytical column. It heats and cools quickly, and efficient air circulation ensures a high degree of thermal stability. Opening the oven door activates a safety microswitch, which automatically switches off the oven heating and the motor for the air circulation fans. The oven is heated by resistor elements powered by a circuit located within the GC control unit. The column fittings in the oven depend on whether capillary or packed column injector and detector base bodies are installed. Auxiliary gas lines, if installed, end in M8x1 male fittings between the injector and the detector base bodies. The oven temperature is monitored by a PT 100 platinum wire sensor and controlled by the GC control unit. Figure 2.1-1 shows the positions of the left and right detectors on top of the oven and the fittings inside the oven. Top View Interior View LCH Left Channel RCH Right Channel LJ Left Injector RJ Right Injector LJ* 2nd Left Injector RJ* 2nd Right Injector LD Left Detector RD Right Detector Figure 2.1-1. Injector/Detector Locations and Fittings 26 Service Manual Chapter 2.1 Column Oven Column Oven Overview The column oven has the following capabilities: • Seven linear temperature ramps • A maximum temperature of 450 °C • A maximum temperature increase rate of 120 °C/min • A minimum operating temperature a few degrees above ambient obtained by two modulated cooling flaps controlled by the GC, shown in Figure 2.1-2 1. Oven 3. Air 2. Fan Figure 2.1-2. Oven Air Circulation • Service Manual Temperature control by a combination of heater control and fine control of hot air exhaust and an ambient air intake. The system allows separation of moderately volatile components on thick film capillary columns at near ambient temperatures without the use of a cryogenic system. With a cryogenic option installed, the oven temperatures can reach –55 °C with liquid carbon dioxide or –99 °C with liquid nitrogen. Figure 2.1-3 shows the cryogenic system. 27 Chapter 2.1 Column Oven Column Oven Overview 1. Oven 5. Heater Baffle 2. Fan 6. Coolant Reservoir (LCO2 or LN2) 3. Air Circulation Path 7. Back Pressure Regulator 4. Heater Coil 8. Coolant Valve (LCO2 or LN2) Figure 2.1-3. Cryogenic Air Circulation Oven Safety Opening the oven door cuts off the power to the oven heater, fan, and the cryogenic system (if installed). The setpoints are kept in memory. The display shows the following safety message: OVEN Temp 40 Door Open Initial time Ramp 1 2.00 Off To return to normal operation, close the oven door. WARNING! The oven vents at the rear of the GC discharge hot air during cooling. WARNING! Hydrogen is a potentially dangerous gas. Refer to Using Hydrogen on page xxiv for safety information. 28 Service Manual Chapter 2.1 Column Oven Column Oven Configuration Column Oven Configuration The CONFIGURE OVEN menu contains the control parameters for the column oven. Press CONFIG and OVEN to open the menu shown in Table 2.1-1. Refer to Chapter 3, Configuration, in the Operating Manual for more information about the CONFIGURE menu. Table 2.1-1. Configure Oven Menu Menu Range CONFIGURE OVEN Auto Prep Run Comments The title bar. Off/On Press ON to enable automatic execution of the Prep Run without pressing PREP RUN. This feature is useful when you use the autosampler. When this item is set to Off, you must press PREP RUN to activate the Prep Run. PR timeout 0–999.99 min, Enter the duration of the prep run. The injection must occur within this time or the timeout will return the GC to the Standby condition. Equil time 0–999.99 min This is the time required for equilibrating the oven temperature after the temperature is set or modified. Ready delay 0–99.9 min This parameter delays the Ready to Inject condition. This function is useful for on-column injectors. It allows the secondary cooling to cool the injector before the injection. This time must not exceed the PR timeout value. Max temp 0– 450 °C This parameter defines the maximum allowable oven temperature setpoint to protect the column from unintentional excessively high temperature. This limit must be set to the manufacturer's maximum recommended operating temperature for the column. Enable cryogenics1 Yes/No This function enables the oven cryogenic system when it is installed and configured (LCO2 or LN2 as coolant). Press YES to activate the cryogenic system. Press NO to deactivate it. Start cryogen1 1. This parameter defines the temperature at which the oven cryogenic system regulation occurs. This parameter line is displayed if Enable cryogenics has been set to YES. If the cryogenic system is installed and configured, its parameters are included in the menu. Service Manual 29 Chapter 2.1 Column Oven Column Oven Configuration OPERATING PROCEDURE Configure the Column Oven Use this procedure to configure the column oven. Configuration Without the Cryogenic System 1. Press CONFIG, then press OVEN or scroll to Oven and press ENTER. 2. Scroll to Auto prep run. Press ON to enable automatic prep run. Press OFF if you want prep run to be activated by pressing the PREP RUN key. 3. Scroll to PR timeout and set the duration of the prep run timeout. 4. Scroll to Equil time and set the oven temperature equilibration time. 5. Scroll to Ready delay and set the time delay before the GC enters the Ready to Inject condition. 6. Scroll to Max Temp and set the maximum allowable oven temperature. Configuration With the Oven Cryogenic System 1. Press CONFIG, then press OVEN or scroll to Oven and press ENTER. 2. Scroll to Auto prep run. Press ON to enable automatic prep run. Press OFF if you want prep run to be activated by pressing the PREP RUN key. 3. Scroll to PR timeout and set the duration of the prep run timeout. 4. Scroll to Enable cryogenics and press YES to enable the cryogenic system or NO to disable it. 5. Scroll to Equil time and set the oven temperature equilibration time. 6. Scroll to Ready delay and set the time delay before the GC enters the Ready to Inject condition. 7. Scroll to Start cryogen and set the cryogenic system regulation temperature. The range depends on the coolant used. 8. Scroll to Max Temp and set the maximum allowable oven temperature. 30 Service Manual Chapter 2.1 Column Oven Oven Menu Oven Menu The OVEN menu contains the parameters for programming the oven temperature from an initial temperature to a final temperature using up to seven ramps during the analytical run. It is possible to set a single (isothermal) or multiple ramp program. Press OVEN to open the OVEN menu, shown in Table 2.1-2. Table 2.1-2. The Oven Menu Menu Range Comments The title bar. OVEN 1 Temp On/Off, 0–450 °C Press ON to display the actual and setpoint values. This value is the initial temperature. Initial time 0–999.99 min This parameter defines the time the oven remains at the starting temperature after a programmed run has begun. Ramp 1 0.0–120 °C/min, On/Off This is the temperature ramp rate in °C/minute to reach the final temperature. Press ON to enable a temperature ramp. Final temp 1 0–450 °C1 This parameter defines the temperature the column oven will reach at the end of the heating or cooling ramp. This line only appears if Ramp 1 is On. Final time 1 0.00–999.99 min, This parameter defines how long (in minutes) the oven will maintain the final temperature of the ramp. Ramp 2-7 On/Off, 0.0–120 °C/min After you program the first ramp, the menu adds the Ramp 2 parameter lines. If you do not want an additional ramp, leave this parameter set to Off. To program the ramp, press ON. The Final temp and Final time lines for the ramp will be added to the menu. You can repeat this process to program up to seven temperature ramps. Final temp 2-7 0–450 °C1 This parameter defines the temperature the column oven will reach at the end of the relevant ramp. Final time 2-7 0.00–999.99 min, This parameter defines how long (in minutes) the oven will maintain the final temperature of the ramp. Post run temp 0–450 °C1 This parameter defines a temperature the oven will reach after the end of the analytical run. Press OFF if you do not want a post run temperature. Press ON to display the setpoint value and the Post run temp, Post run time, L Post pres, and R post pres parameters. Service Manual 31 Chapter 2.1 Column Oven Oven Menu Table 2.1-2. The Oven Menu (Continued) Menu Comments Post run time 0.00–999.99 min This is the time the oven maintains the post run temperature. L/R Post pres 0–700 kPa This parameter defines the pressure for the Left or Right carrier during the Post run time when the system operates in Constant Pressure or Programmed Pressure mode. 1. 32 Range With a cryogenic system, the ranges are –99–450 °C (with liquid N2), –55–450 °C (with liquid CO2). The range is 0–500 °C if the oven is configured for high oven temperatures. Service Manual Chapter 2.1 Column Oven Oven Menu OPERATING PROCEDURE Set Up a Single Ramp Temperature Program This program raises the initial oven temperature to a specified final temperature at a specified rate and maintains the final temperature for a specified time. 1. Press OVEN to access the Oven menu. 2. Scroll to Temp and enter the initial temperature. 3. Scroll to Initial time and enter the time you want the oven to maintain the initial temperature. 4. Scroll to Ramp 1 and press ON. Enter the ramp rate in °C/minute for the oven to reach the ramp’s Final temp. 5. Scroll to Final temp 1 and enter the final temperature for the ramp. 6. Scroll to Final time 1 and enter the time the oven will maintain the Final temp. 7. To end the single ramp program, Ramp 2 must be Off. OPERATING PROCEDURE Set Up a Multiple Ramp Temperature Program This program raises the initial oven temperature to a specified final temperature through up to seven ramps, each having a specified ramp rate, time and temperature. 1. Press OVEN to access the Oven menu. 2. Scroll to Temp and enter the initial temperature. 3. Scroll to Initial time and enter the time you want the oven to maintain the initial temperature. 4. Scroll to Ramp 1 and press ON. Enter the ramp rate in °C/minute for the oven to reach the ramp’s Final temp. 5. Scroll to Final temp 1 and enter the final temperature for the ramp. 6. Scroll to Final time 1 and enter the time the oven will maintain the Final temp. 7. Scroll to Ramp 2 and press ON. Enter the ramp rate for the second temperature ramp. Service Manual 33 Chapter 2.1 Column Oven Oven Menu 8. Scroll to Final temp 2 and enter the final temperature for the ramp. 9. Scroll to Final time 2 and enter the time the oven will maintain the Final temp. 10. To end the multiple ramp temperature program, leave Ramp 3 set to Off. To add additional oven ramps, repeat the steps 7 through 9. 34 Service Manual Injectors This chapter describes the injectors available for use with the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter at a Glance… Split/Splitless Injector Overview ................................................................................ 36 Split/Splitless Injector Menus..................................................................................... 42 On-Column Injector Overview ................................................................................... 46 On-Column Injector Menu.......................................................................................... 49 HOT Cold On-Column Injector Overview ................................................................. 50 HOT Cold On-Column Injector Menu........................................................................ 52 Large Volume On-Column Injector Overview............................................................ 53 Large Volume On-Column Injector Menu .................................................................. 55 Packed Column Injector Overview............................................................................. 56 Packed Column Injector Menu ................................................................................... 58 Purged Packed Column Injector Overview................................................................. 59 Purged Packed Column Injector Menu ....................................................................... 61 Service Manual 35 Chapter 2.2 Injectors Split/Splitless Injector Overview Split/Splitless Injector Overview The Split/Splitless (S/SL) injector, shown in Figure 2.2-1, is optimized for either split or splitless applications to ensure effective sample transfer into the column, minimizing heavy component discrimination. For both split and splitless applications, the sample is injected through a septum into a glass liner in the vaporization chamber. The technique used, split or splitless, determines the choice of the glass liner and the length of the syringe needle employed. You can control the injector temperature from ambient to 450 °C, although the actual injector temperature you use depends on solvent choice and thermal stability of the samples. In GCs with Digital Pressure Flow Control (DPFC), an electronic device controls the split flow, while the septum purge flow is kept constant by a calibrated flow regulator. The S/SL injector is also equipped with electronically actuated On/Off valves for split and septum purge lines. Volatile components given off by the hot septum can produce ghost peaks in a chromatogram. The septum purge system can continually purge the septum with a flow of gas. This prevents the volatile components from the septum from entering the column. Figure 2.2-2 shows the septum purge system. Figure 2.2-3 shows the S/SL injector components. 36 Service Manual Chapter 2.2 Injectors Split/Splitless Injector Overview 1. Septum Cap 7. Graphite Ferrule for Column 2. Septum 8. Capillary Gas Column 3. Liner Graphite Seal A. Carrier Gas Inlet 4. Glass Liner B. Split Line 5. Fixing Nut C. Septum Purge Line 6. M4 Retaining Nut Figure 2.2-1. Split/Splitless Injector Service Manual 37 Chapter 2.2 Injectors Split/Splitless Injector Overview 1. Spring 6. Liner Graphite Seal 2. Septum 7. Glass Liner 3. Septum Holder A. Carrier Gas Inlet 4. Septum Support B. Septum Purge Line 5. Liner Cap C. Split Line Figure 2.2-2. Septum Purge System 38 Service Manual Chapter 2.2 Injectors Split/Splitless Injector Overview 1. Septum Cap 10. Securing Bracket 2. Spring 11. Metal Ring 3. Septum Holder 12. Fixing Nut 4. Septum 13. Silver Seal 5. Septum Support 14. Terminal Fitting 6. Liner Cap 15. Fixing Nut 7. Liner 16. Graphite Ferrule for Column 8. Liner Graphite Seal 17. M4 Retaining Nut 9. Injector Body Figure 2.2-3. Split/Splitless Injector Components Septum You should always use good quality septa, such as the BTO septa supplied with the TRACE GC 2000. Such septa resist deformation, have longer life expectancy, and have a low bleed level, even at high temperatures. Service Manual 39 Chapter 2.2 Injectors Split/Splitless Injector Overview Liners Different types of glass liners may be installed depending on the injection mode used. Table 2.2-1 shows the liner options currently available. Table 2.2-1. Liners Sizes and Applications ID mm OD mm Application 5 8 Split Injection 3 8 Split Injection 3 8 Splitless Injection 5 8 Splitless Injection 5 8 Direct injection into wide-bore column 5 8 Split injection at high flow rates or for the most polar solvents The glass liner used for direct splitless injection into a wide-bore column is tapered at the bottom. It is used with 0.53-mm ID columns. Figure 2.2-4 shows the tapered glass liner. 1. Carrier Gas Inlet 3. Split Line 2. Septum Purge Line Figure 2.2-4. S/SL Wide-Bore Injection Tapered Liner 40 Service Manual Chapter 2.2 Injectors Split/Splitless Injector Overview A laminar cup liner is used for split injections at high split flow rates or for the more polar solvents. This glass liner has a mixing chamber with an extended flow path that allows complete sample vaporization before the sample reaches the split point. Packed Columns With a special conversion kit, you can install packed columns in the S/SL injector, as shown in Figure 2.2-5. 1. Carrier Gas Inlet 3. Split Line 2. Septum Purge Line Figure 2.2-5. S/SL With a Packed Column Service Manual 41 Chapter 2.2 Injectors Split/Splitless Injector Menus Split/Splitless Injector Menus The INLET (S/SL) menu includes the operating parameters for the split/splitless injector. The parameters you can edit depend on the operating mode chosen: split, splitless, or splitless with surge. Press LEFT INLET or RIGHT INLET to display the LEFT or RIGHT INLET menu for the split/splitless injector. LEFT INLET (S/SL) Temp Pressure Mode: 250 250 10.6 10.6 split< The Mode: menu item displays the current operating mode. Press MODE/TYPE to open the INLET MODE submenu. XX INLET MODE * Split Splitless < Splitless w/surge Scroll to the mode you want to use and press ENTER to confirm the selection. An asterisk appears on the left of the operating mode selected. Tables 2.2-2 through 2.2-4 explain the ranges and functions of the parameters in the LEFT and RIGHT INLET menus for each of the four operating modes. NOTE 42 The injector and carrier gas menus are related. If you set a pressure at the carrier gas menu, that same pressure setting is reflected in the injector menu and vice versa. Service Manual Chapter 2.2 Injectors Split/Splitless Injector Menus The items in the inlet menu vary depending on the operating mode you select in the LEFT or RIGHT INLET MODE menu. Tables 2.2-2 through 2.2-4 show the split/splitless inlet menu for the four operating modes. Table 2.2-2. Inlet Menu in Split Mode Menu Range Title bar. RIGHT INLET (S/SL) On/Off, 30–400 C Temp On/Off, 2–250 kPa or 3–700 kPa1 Pressure Mode: Comments This line shows the base injector temperature. Press ON to enable the heater and to display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF to disable the heater and to display the actual value. This line shows the pressure. Press ON to display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF or 0 to display the actual value and to turn off all inlet flows. This line displays the inlet operating mode selected. Split Total flow Not editable This line shows the total gas flow consumption, which is the sum of the column flow, split flow (or gas saver flow), and septum purge flow. Split flow On/Off, 0, 10–500 mL/min This line shows the split flow. 1–5000 This line displays the actual value of the split ratio. This value is the ratio between the split flow and the column flow. Split ratio 1. Press ON to enable the split flow and to display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF or 0 to close the split valve and to disable the split flow. 0.05–100 psi, 0.03–7.00 bar. Table 2.2-3. Inlet Menu in Splitless Mode Menu Range Title bar. RIGHT INLET (S/SL) Temp Pressure Mode: Service Manual On/Off, 0–400 C This line shows the base injector temperature. On/Off, 2–250 kPa or 3– 700 kPa1 This line shows the pressure. Press ON to display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF or 0 to display the actual value and to turn off inlet pressure, thereby turning off the flow. Press ON to enable the heater and to display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF to disable the heater and to display the actual value. This line displays the operating mode selected. Press ENTER or MODE/TYPE to change the operating mode. Splitless Total flow Comments Not editable This line shows the total gas flow consumption, which is the sum of the column flow, split flow (or gas saver flow), and septum purge flow. 43 Chapter 2.2 Injectors Split/Splitless Injector Menus Table 2.2-3. Inlet Menu in Splitless Mode (Continued) Menu Range Comments On/Off, 0, 10– 500 mL/min This line shows the split flow. Splitless time 0–999.99 min This line shows the splitless time, which is the duration of split valve closure. Const sept purge? Yes/No Press YES to activate a constant septum purge to continuously flush the septum with a purge flow of 5 mL/min when using helium or nitrogen as a carrier gas, or 10 mL/min when using hydrogen as a carrier gas. Stop purge for: 0–999.99 min, This line appears only when Constant septum purge is set to No. Split flow 1. Press ON to enable the split flow and to display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF or 0 to close the split valve and to disable the split flow. 0.05–100 psi, 0.03–7.00 bar. Table 2.2-4. Inlet Menu in Surge Splitless Mode Menu Range Title bar. RIGHT INLET (S/SL) Temp Pressure On/Off, 0–400 C This line shows the base injector temperature. On/Off, This line shows the pressure. Press ON to display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF or 0 to display the actual value and to turn off inlet pressure, thereby turning off the flow. 2–250 kPa, 3–700 kPa1 Mode: 44 Comments Press ON to enable the heater and to display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF to disable the heater and to display the actual value. This line displays the operating mode selected. Press ENTER or MODE/TYPE to change the operating mode. Surge SL Total flow Not editable This line shows the total gas flow consumption, which is the sum of the column flow, split flow (or gas saver flow), and septum purge flow. Split flow On/Off, 0, 10–500 mL/min This line shows the split flow. Splitless time 0–999.99 min This line shows the splitless time, which is the duration of split valve closure. Surge pressure 2–250 kPa or 3–700 kPa1 This line indicates the surge pressure. Surge pressure is activated at Prep Run. Surge duration 0–999.99 min This line indicates the duration of the surge pressure. Press ON to enable the split flow and display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF or 0 to close the split valve and to disable the split flow. Service Manual Chapter 2.2 Injectors Split/Splitless Injector Menus Table 2.2-4. Inlet Menu in Surge Splitless Mode (Continued) Menu Range Const sept purge? Yes/No Stop purge for: 0–999.99 min, 1. Comments Press YES to activate a constant septum purge to continuously flush the septum with a purge flow of 5 mL/min when using helium or nitrogen as a carrier gas, or 10 mL/min when using hydrogen as a carrier gas. This line appears only when Constant septum purge is set to No. 0.05–100 psi, 0.03–7.00 bar. Service Manual 45 Chapter 2.2 Injectors On-Column Injector Overview On-Column Injector Overview With On-Column Injectors (OCI), you use a syringe to inject a liquid sample directly into the capillary column. The upper part of the injector has a needle guide and a rotary valve. The lower part attaches to the top of the column oven. The standard on-column injector does not have a septum. The on-column injector is shown in Figure 2.2-6. 1. Syringe 6. Seal 2. Valve Lever 7. M8x1 Fixing Nut 3. Upper Block 8. Cooling Sleeve 4. PTFE Valve Seal A. Carrier Gas Inlet 5. Stainless Steel Rotary Valve B. Secondary Cooling Inlet Figure 2.2-6. On-Column Injector Primary Cooling System The injection block is kept at ambient temperature by the primary cooling system, which maintains a permanent flow of air across the injector body through a special cooling fan. 46 Service Manual Chapter 2.2 Injectors On-Column Injector Overview Secondary Cooling System A stream of gas surrounds the area around the column at the point of injection. This gas is normally compressed air, but for special applications CO2 can be used. The secondary cooling flow keeps the injection zone at a temperature below the solvent boiling point, even when the oven runs at a higher temperature. Elevated oven temperature helps eliminate peak distortion in the chromatogram caused by flooding effects.1 The secondary cooling system ensures complete and effective sample transfer from the syringe to the column and improves reproducibility. Secondary cooling activates only immediately before an injection and remains on after the injection until all of the injected solvent has vaporized. The secondary cooling time, which is the duration of secondary cooling during a run, depends on the oven temperature, the volatility of the solvent, and the amount injected, but is normally in the range of 3–10 seconds. You program the parameters for secondary cooling in the INLET menu when an on-column injector is configured. Primary and secondary cooling systems are shown in Figure 2.2-7. 1. Injector Upper Block A. Carrier Gas Inlet 2. Injector Lower Block B. Secondary Cooling 3. Capillary Column C. Primary Cooling 4. Syringe Figure 2.2-7. Primary and Secondary Cooling Systems 1. Service Manual Journal of Chromatography, 279 (1983) 241–250. 47 Chapter 2.2 Injectors On-Column Injector Overview Optional Devices Several optional devices and special on-column injectors can be used for special applications or to help automate certain functions. Auxiliary Purge Line The optional auxiliary purge line allows the elimination of excess of solvent that could accumulate due to incorrect injection conditions. It purges the excess solvent to keep it from entering other parts of the GC system. Automatic Actuator The automatic actuator can semi-automate manual injections by automatically opening the rotary valve when the syringe needle is inserted. When the needle is removed, the automatic actuator closes the valve and starts the GC. High Oven Temperature (HOT OC) Device The HOT OC device allows on-column operation at high initial oven temperatures, eliminating the need to cool the oven to a lower temperature for the injection. Chapter 8, High Oven Temperature Cold On-Column Injector, in the TRACE GC 2000 Operating Manual, describes this device in detail. Large Volume On-Column Injector (LVOCI) The LVOCI is a special version of the standard on-column injector that allows large volume liquid sample analysis with an AS 2000 autosampler. Special software is required for this injector. Chapter 11, Large Volume On-Column Injector, in the TRACE GC 2000 Operating Manual, describes the principles and hardware for this injection technique. 48 Service Manual Chapter 2.2 Injectors On-Column Injector Menu On-Column Injector Menu The INLET menu contains the parameters for on-column injector operations if you have configured an on-column injector. Press LEFT INLET or RIGHT INLET to display the menu, depending on the injector position. NOTE The injector and carrier gas menus are related. If you set a pressure at the carrier gas menu, that same pressure setting is reflected in the injector menu, and vice-versa. Table 2.2-5. Inlet Menu in Split Mode Menu Range Comments Title bar. RIGHT INLET (OCI) Pressure On/Off, 2–250 kPa or 3–700 kPa1 This line shows the pressure. Press ON to display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF or 0 to display the actual value and turn off inlet pressure, thereby turning off the flow. Sec. Cool Time 0–999.99 min, This line shows the secondary cooling time, which is the duration of the secondary cooling. If programmed, the valve opens in the Prep Run stage. Const Aux Purge?2 Yes/No Press YES to enable a constant auxiliary purge to continuously flush the septum with a fixed purge flow. Stop purge for2 0–999.99 min, This line only appears when Const Aux Purge? is set to No. Enter the time the purge flow should be interrupted. 1. 2. 0.05–100 psi, 0.03–7.00 bar. This menu item appears only if the auxiliary purge option is installed and configured. NOTE When you press either COLUMN EVAL or LEAK CHECK while the INLET menu in S/SL mode is displayed, the GC immediately performs the selected function if the instrument is in the Standby status. Service Manual 49 Chapter 2.2 Injectors HOT Cold On-Column Injector Overview HOT Cold On-Column Injector Overview The On-Column Injector (OCI) requires an optional device for injection at oven temperatures at or above 200 °C, regardless of the solvent used. This High Oven Temperature (HOT) device must be attached below the on-column injector and configured in CONFIG menu. As with the standard on-column injector, you can manually inject samples into the HOT OC injector with or without an automatic valve actuator. Refer to Optional Devices in Chapter 7 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating Manual for more information about the automatic actuator. Figure 2.2-8 shows the HOT OC injector. 1. Cold On-Column Injector 4. Cooling Fluid Inlet 2. HOT Device 5. Solenoid Valve 3. Capillary Column 6. Thermocouple Figure 2.2-8. HOT Cold On-Column Injector Optional Devices In addition to the automatic actuator, the OCI with the HOT device can be modified with an auxiliary purge line or solvent vapor exit valve. Auxiliary Purge Line The optional auxiliary purge line allows the elimination of excess of solvent that could accumulate due to incorrect injection conditions. It purges the excess solvent to keep it from entering other parts of the GC system. 50 Service Manual HOT Cold On-Column Injector Overview Chapter 2.2 Injectors Solvent Vapor Exit Valve Large volume injection with the HOT OC technique requires an optional Solvent Vapor Exit (SVE) valve. This valve allows the venting of the solvent vapors formed during the sample injection. The SVE valve consists of a specially designed, electronically activated, heated three-way valve. The valve inlet is connected to a tee-shaped piece that links the desolvation precolumn to the analytical column. The solvent vapors are vented through the main outlet which is connected to a solvent reservoir. The SVE valve has a high flow restrictor. This restrictor, a fine capillary tube, is placed in a special support heated by the valve. This configuration ensures a very small purge rate (around 0.01 mL/min) when the SVE valve is closed. This prevents back-diffusion of solvent vapors into the analytical system. Service Manual 51 Chapter 2.2 Injectors HOT Cold On-Column Injector Menu HOT Cold On-Column Injector Menu The INLET (HOT OC) menu contains the parameters for the HOT OC injector when one has been configured on the GC. Press LEFT INLET or RIGHT INLET to display the menu shown in Table 2.2-6. NOTE The injector and carrier gas menus are related. If you set a pressure at the carrier gas menu, that same pressure setting is reflected in the injector menu and vice versa. Table 2.2-6. Inlet Menu for On-Column Injectors With the HOT Device Menu Range HOT OC Temp 25 C–initial oven temp This parameter defines the injector temperature. HOT OC duration 0.00–999.99 min, This parameter defines the duration of the secondary cooling. When programmed, the secondary cooling valve is opened during Prep Run. If set to zero, the valve remains in the default condition. Pressure On/Off, 2–250 kPa or 3–700 kPa1 This line shows the carrier gas inlet pressure. Press ON to display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF or 0 to display the actual value turn off the inlet pressure, thereby turning off the flow. Const Aux Purge?2 Yes/No Press YES to enable a constant auxiliary purge to continuously flush the septum with a fixed purge flow. Stop purge for2 This line only appears when Const Aux Purge? is set to No. Set the time the purge flow should be interrupted. SVE temp3 On/Off, 0–250 C (Only for large volume injections) This parameter defines the solvent vapor exit valve temperature. SVE duration3 0.00–999.99 min, (Only for large volume injections) This parameter defines the duration of the solvent vapor exit event. When the duration is set to zero, the SVE valve remains in the default condition. 1. 2. 3. 52 Comments Title bar. RIGHT INLET (HOT OC) 0.05–100 psi, 0.03–7.00 bar. This menu item appears only if the auxiliary purge option is installed and configured. This menu item appears only if the Solvent vapor exit valve option is installed and configured (for large volume injections). Service Manual Chapter 2.2 Injectors Large Volume On-Column Injector Overview Large Volume On-Column Injector Overview The Large Volume On-Column Injector (LVOCI) is a special version of the standard on-column injector. It allows the automatic introduction of large volume liquid samples with the AS 2000 autosampler. The autosampler injects the samples directly into a fused silica capillary column system as shown in Figure 2.2-9. 1. TRACE GC 2000 5. Analytical Column 2. On-Column Injector 6. Detector 3. Desolvation Pre-Column 7. AS 2000 Autosampler 4. Tee connection 8. SVE Solvent Vapor Exit Figure 2.2-9. TRACE GC 2000 Configuration for Large Volume On-Column Injection This injector is equipped with a Solvent Vapor Exit (SVE) valve to allow venting of the solvent vapor formed during the sample injection. The SVE valve is an electronically activated, heated three-way valve. The valve inlet is connected to a tee piece linking the desolvation pre-column to the analytical column. The solvent vapors vent through the main outlet, which is connected to a vapor condenser receptacle provided with a filter to the atmosphere. The outlet is connected with a high flow restrictor. The restrictor is placed in a special support heated by the valve. This configuration ensures a very small purge rate (around 0.01 mL/min) when the SVE is closed. This prevents the back diffusion of solvent inside the system. Service Manual 53 Chapter 2.2 Injectors Large Volume On-Column Injector Overview Auxiliary Purge Line The optional auxiliary purge line allows the elimination of excess solvent that could accumulate due to incorrect injection conditions. It purges the excess solvent to keep it from entering other parts of the GC system. 54 Service Manual Chapter 2.2 Injectors Large Volume On-Column Injector Menu Large Volume On-Column Injector Menu The INLET (LVOCI) menu contains the parameters for large volume on-column injectors if the GC has been configured for an LVOCI. Press LEFT INLET or RIGHT INLET to display the menu, depending on the injector position. Table 2.2-7. Inlet Menu for Large Volume On-Column Injectors Menu Range Comments Title bar. RIGHT INLET (LVOCI) Pressure On/Off, 2–250 kPa or 3–700 kPa1 This line shows the carrier gas inlet pressure. Press ON to display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF or 0 to display the actual value and to turn off the inlet flow. Sec. Cool Time 0–999.99 min, This line shows the secondary cooling time. This parameter controls the duration of the secondary cooling event. If set to , the solenoid valve remains in default condition. The valve opens at the beginning of the standby mode when programmed. SVE temp2 On/Off, 0–250 C This line only appears when the optional solvent vapor valve is installed in the system. This parameter defines the solvent vapor exit valve temperature. SVE duration3 0–999.99 min, This parameter defines the duration of the solvent vapor exit event. When the duration is set to zero, the SVE valve remains in the default condition. Const. Aux Purge?3 Yes/No Press YES to enable a constant auxiliary purge to continuously flush the injector with a fixed purge flow. Stop purge for3 1. 2. 3. This line only appears when Const Aux Purge? is set to No. Set the time the purge flow should be interrupted. 0.05–100 psi, 0.03–7.00 bar. This menu item appears only if the Solvent vapor exit valve option is installed and configured. This menu item appears only if the auxiliary purge option is installed and configured. Service Manual 55 Chapter 2.2 Injectors Packed Column Injector Overview Packed Column Injector Overview The Packed (PKD) column injector, shown in Figure 2.2-10, is used for injections with the sample vaporizing directly in the column or in a liner. The PKD standard injector accepts metal or glass packed columns. The injector temperature may range from ambient to 400 °C. Injector temperature is regulated by a temperature controller in the GC CPU board and monitored by a platinum wire sensor. 1. Septum Cap 2. Septum 3. Insert for .04-mm OD Column 4. Column Ferrule 5. Column Retaining Nut 6. Column A. Carrier In Figure 2.2-10. Packed Column Injector Septa You should use a high-temperature septum with a long life expectancy, good resistance to deformation, and a low bleed level, even with high temperatures. Use high-temperature septa for both manual and automatic injections. 56 Service Manual Chapter 2.2 Injectors Packed Column Injector Overview Liners and Adapters You can install different glass liners depending on the type of column used. Table 2.2-8 shows the liner options currently available. To install an Imperial-size packed column, you need a liner equipped with a metric/imperial adapter. Table 2.2-8. Liners and Adapters for Packed Column Injectors Liner/Adapter Type of Column Glass Liner 4-mm OD Glass Packed Column 6-mm OD (4-mm ID) Glass Liner 4-mm OD Metal Packed Column 4-mm OD (2-mm ID) Metal Packed Column 6-mm OD (4-mm ID) Service Manual Metric-Imperial Adapter 1/8-in. Metal Packed Column Metric-Imperial Adapter 1/4-in. Metal Packed Column 57 Chapter 2.2 Injectors Packed Column Injector Menu Packed Column Injector Menu The INLET (PKD) menu contains the parameters for packed columns if the GC has been configured for a PKD injector. Press LEFT INLET or RIGHT INLET to display the menu, depending on the injector position. NOTE The injector and carrier gas menus are related. If you set a pressure at the carrier gas menu, that same pressure setting is reflected in the injector menu, and vice-versa. Table 2.2-9. Inlet Menu for Packed Column Injectors Menu Range Comments Title bar. XXXX INLET (PKD) Temp On/Off, 50–450 C This line shows the base injector temperature. Press ON to enable the heater and display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF to disable the heater and to display the actual value. Pressure On/Off, This line shows the carrier gas inlet pressure. Press ON to display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF or zero to display the actual value and to turn off the inlet flow. 1 3–700 kPa 1. 0.05–100 psi, 0.03–7.00 bar. NOTE When you press either COLUMN EVAL or LEAK CHECK while the INLET menu in S/SL mode is displayed, the GC immediately performs the selected function if the instrument is in the Standby status. 58 Service Manual Chapter 2.2 Injectors Purged Packed Column Injector Overview Purged Packed Column Injector Overview The Purged Packed (PPKD) column injector is a packed column injector with a septum purge. The PPKD standard injector accepts wide-bore capillary columns. The sample vaporizes in a liner and enters the wide-bore capillary column. The injector temperature is controllable from 50 °C to 450 °C. Figure 2.2-11 shows the PPKD injector. 1. Septum Cap 2. Septum 3. Liner 4. Liner Seal 5. Adapter for Wide-Bore Columns 6. Column Ferrule 7. Column Fixing Nut 8. Column A. Carrier Input C. Septum Purge Figure 2.2-11. Purged Packed Column Injector Service Manual 59 Chapter 2.2 Injectors Purged Packed Column Injector Overview Septa You should use high temperature septa with a longer life expectancy, good resistance to deformation, and a low bleed level, even with high temperatures. Use high-temperature septa for both manual and automatic injections. Liners Two different glass liners can be used for wide-bore capillary columns: 60 • 2-mm ID • 4-mm ID Service Manual Chapter 2.2 Injectors Purged Packed Column Injector Menu Purged Packed Column Injector Menu The INLET (PPKD) menu contains the parameters for the purged packed injector if the GC has been configured for a PPKD. Press LEFT INLET or RIGHT INLET to display the menu, depending on the injector position. NOTE The injector and carrier gas menus are related. If you set a pressure at the carrier gas menu, that same pressure setting is reflected in the injector menu, and vice versa. Table 2.2-10. Inlet Menu for Purged Packed Column Injectors Menu Range Comments Title bar. XXXX INLET (PKD) Temp On/Off, 50–450=C This line shows the base injector temperature. Press ON to enable the heater and display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF to disable the heater and display the actual value. Pressure On/Off, This line shows the carrier gas inlet pressure. Press ON to display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF or zero to turn off the inlet flow. 1 3–700 kPa Total Flow Not editable This line shows the total gas flow consumption. The total gas flow consists of the sum of the column flow and septum purge flow rates. Surge pressure On/Off, 3–700 kPa1 This line indicates surge pressure. Surge duration 0–99.99 s This line displays the duration of surge pressure after run start. Const sept purge? Yes/No Press YES to activate a constant septum purge to continuously flush the injector with a purge flow of 5 mL/min for helium and nitrogen or 10 mL/min for hydrogen. Stop purge for 0–99.99 min, This line appears only when Constant septum purge is set to No. 1. 0.05–100 psi, 0.03–7.00 bar. Service Manual 61 Detectors This chapter describes the detectors available for use with the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter at a Glance… Flame Ionization Detector Overview.......................................................................... 64 FID Menu.................................................................................................................... 67 Electron Capture Detector Overview.......................................................................... 69 ECD Menu .................................................................................................................. 74 Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector Overview ................................................................. 75 NPD Menu .................................................................................................................. 77 Service Manual 63 Chapter 2.3 Detectors Flame Ionization Detector Overview Flame Ionization Detector Overview In the FID, the effluent from the column is mixed with hydrogen and burned in a stream of air as it emerges from the jet. The jet acts as polarizing electrode while the metal collar surrounding the flame forms the collecting electrode. A polarizing voltage is applied across the electrodes from the electrometer unit to accelerate and collect the ions that are generated during the combustion process of organic compounds. The resulting ionization current is sensed by an electrometer amplifier and converted to a suitable output signal. Figure 2.3-1. Flame Ionization Detector Jet The flame jet, mounted on the detector base body for capillary, wide-bore, or packed columns is suitable for operating temperatures up to 450 °C. It has ceramic insulation. Selectivity The FID responds to almost all organic compounds containing a carbon-hydrogen bond. The detector does not respond, or responds minimally, to a number of compounds such as permanent gases, oxides of nitrogen, sulfur compounds, ammonia and water. Temperature The FID is heated from the detector base body. It’s exact temperature is not critical. It only has to be sufficiently high to prevent condensation of the water vapor formed as a result of the hydrogen combustion of the flame. It cannot be used with a detector base body temperature of less than 150 °C. The TRACE GC 2000 will not allow flame ignition to proceed at temperatures less than 150 °C. The base body temperature is normally set to the upper temperature limit of the column in use. 64 Service Manual Chapter 2.3 Detectors Flame Ionization Detector Overview Carrier and Detector Gases The stability and analytical performance of the Flame Ionization Detector are greatly affected by the flow of the various gases through the detector. The gases normally used with FID are shown in Table 2.3-1. Table 2.3-1. FID Carrier Gases. Carrier Gas Capillary Columns Packed Column Helium X X Nitrogen X X Hydrogen X Argon X The carrier gas flow range depends on the type of the gas used and on the type and diameter of the capillary or packed column installed. The fuel and make-up gases used for the FID are: NOTE • Fuel Gas: Hydrogen or Air • Make-up Gas: Nitrogen (recommended) or Helium Make-up gas is not required when a packed column is used. The recommended ranges of detector gas flow rates tolerated by the FID are: NOTE • Hydrogen: 30–50 mL/min. • Air: 300–600 mL/min. • Make-up gas: 10–60 mL/min. Usually the air flow is about 10 times the hydrogen flow to keep the flame lit. To gain optimum performance from the FID, you should experiment with the hydrogen flow rate, keeping the carrier and air flows constant, to obtain the maximum signal intensity for the components of interest. Table 2.3-2 shows typical FID operating conditions. For high-sensitivity applications, it is essential to exclude all traces of organic contamination from the chromatographic system and/or detector gas lines. Such contamination may create ghost peaks in the chromatogram or, more often, an unstable baseline. Table 2.3-2. Typical Operating Conditions Parameter Capillary Columns Packed Column 200 °C 200 °C Carrier 2 mL/min 40 mL/min Hydrogen 35 mL/min 40 mL/min Oven Temperature Service Manual 65 Chapter 2.3 Detectors Flame Ionization Detector Overview Table 2.3-2. Typical Operating Conditions (Continued) Parameter 66 Capillary Columns Packed Column Air 350 mL/min 500 mL/min Make-up gas (Nitrogen) 50 mL/min Not used Service Manual Chapter 2.3 Detectors FID Menu FID Menu The DETECTOR (FID) menu contains the detector control parameters if the GC has been configured for an FID. Press LEFT DETECT or RIGHT DETECT to open the menu shown in Table 2.3-3. Table 2.3-3. FID Menu Menu Range Comments Title bar. RIGHT DET (FID) Flame On/Off This indicates the flame status: On, Off, Igniting, or Out. Hydrogen and air flow rates are required to light the flame. Press ON to turn on the hydrogen and air flows. This happens only if the Base temp is ∫ 150°C. If not, an error messages is displayed. The IGNITION message is displayed during the flame ignition sequence. The Out message is displayed when the flame is inadvertently extinguished. The Error LED will blink, and the hydrogen and air supplies will automatically turn off. Refer to Flame Out Conditions for more information. Press OFF to turn off the hydrogen and air flows. Base temp On/Off, 50–450 °C This indicates the detector base body temperature. Press ON to enable the heater and display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF to disable the heater and display the actual value. Signal pA Not editable This parameter shows the collector current in picoamperes (standing current level). The value displayed is also used to indicate the flame status. If the value is very low (such as 0.3 pA) the flame is off. When the value displayed is greater than Ignition threshold, the flame is on. Ignition thresh 0.0–9.9 pA Flameout retry Service Manual On/Off The FID produces a small signal current when lit. This parameter defines the flame ON condition. The TRACE GC 2000 uses this value to determine flame status (on or off) and control automatic re-ignition. If Flameout retry is On, the flame will re-ignite if the signal drops below this value. This indicates re-ignition status. Press ON to program flame re-ignition is attempted. Refer to Flame Out Conditions for more information. 67 Chapter 2.3 Detectors FID Menu Table 2.3-3. FID Menu (Continued) Menu H2 1 Air1 Range Comments On/Off, 0–200 mL/min for H2, These indicate the hydrogen and air flow supplied to the detector. Press ON to turn on the gas flows and to display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF or 0 to turn off the flows and to display the actual value. These flows can be turned on independently when the FID is off, but they are cut off when the FID is turned off, or when the FID fails the ignition sequence. On/Off, 0–600 mL/min for Air When you have a non-DGFC module, the actual values are not displayed, and you can only turn the flows on and off. Mkup1 (XX) On/Off, This indicates the make-up gas used with the FID. The type 0–100 mL/min of gas is displayed in parentheses (for example, N2). Press ON to turn on the make-up gas flow and to display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF or 0 to turn off the flow and to display the actual value. The flow turns off during the flame ignition sequence, then it turns back on before the ignition threshold test. The flow remains turned on when the FID is turned off. When you have a non-DGFC module, the actual value is not displayed and the setpoint allows only On and Off conditions. 1. If you have a non-DGFC module, the detector gases H2, air, and make-up, must be measured and adjusted manually from a pressure regulator located in the pneumatics. The range with the non-DGFC module is On/Off. Flame Out Conditions When the flame is accidentally extinguished, either permanently because of exhausted fuel gas supplies, or temporarily, due to the elution of water, the Flame Out message is displayed in the menu, and a message is recorded in the Run Log. If the Retry function is turned On, the system will attempt to re-ignite the flame up to three times. 68 Service Manual Chapter 2.3 Detectors Electron Capture Detector Overview Electron Capture Detector Overview The ECD has a low-volume ionization chamber and increased contamination resistance which ensure high sensitivity and reliability. The detector consists mainly of a stainless steel cylinder housing a 63Ni radioactive source. The source acts as cathode in the ionization cell while another cylindrical coaxial electrode acts as an anode (collecting electrode). High temperature resistant insulating material ensures effective insulation between the two electrodes and the detector body The detector is heated by a low-voltage resistor controlled by an electronic thermoregulator. Figure 2.3-2. Electron Capture Detector WARNING! The Electron Capture Detector (ECD) contains a 63Ni beta-emitting radioactive source of 370 MBq (10 mCi). The 63Ni radioisotope, electrically deposited as metal on a nickel foil, is in a cylindrical source holder made of 6-mm stainless steel. This holder is fixed to the detector body, also made of stainless steel, to protect it and make it inaccessible from the outside. The radioisotope is not released by its support at temperatures lower than 450 °C. This temperature can never be reached by the detector, whose maximum operating temperature is 400 °C and is protected by a safety device (thermo-resistor regulator complying with standard DIN 43760) that does not allow overheating to occur. The normal operation of the detector does not involve any dispersion of solid or gaseous radioactive material, and therefore the risk of direct or secondary radiation (Bremsstrahlung) coming from the detector is practically nil. Service Manual 69 Chapter 2.3 Detectors Electron Capture Detector Overview For no reason should the detector be opened or handled by the operator. Any maintenance or service operations involving even partial disassembling of the instrument must be performed ONLY by qualified personnel at the laboratory expressly authorized by ThermoQuest and specifically licensed to handle radioactive material. Wipe Test The ECD, before leaving the factory, is tested for surface contamination by means of a wipe test (leak test) method. Each detector is provided with a certificate reporting the results of the values found and the procedure followed. NOTE The users of this detector in the United States are required to perform a wipe test on their ECD at intervals not to exceed 3 years (36 months) following the reported procedure. For other countries, please refer to the appropriate agency for equivalent requirements. Carrier and Detector Gases In the ECD cell, the 63Ni sources releases ϒ particles that collide with the molecules at an easily ionizable carrier gas (or make-up gas) to produce low energy electrons. Nitrogen or argon/5–10% methane are the gases generally used. Argon/methane is recommended when a higher linear range is required or when contaminants in the carrier gas make a high mobility of electrons necessary to restore correct operating values. Both gases should be of high purity and must not contain more than 1–2 ppm of oxygen or water vapor, since their presence would reduce the concentration of free electrons and, therefore, the probability of capturing them. The gases normally used with ECD are shown in Table 2.3-4. Table 2.3-4. ECD Carrier Gases. Carrier Gas Capillary Columns Helium X Nitrogen X Hydrogen X Argon Packed Column X X When using helium or hydrogen as a carrier gas with capillary or wide-bore columns, the detector should be fed with nitrogen or argon/methane through the make-up gas line. WARNING! Hydrogen is a potentially dangerous gas. Refer to Using Hydrogen on page xxiv for safety information. 70 Service Manual Chapter 2.3 Detectors Electron Capture Detector Overview Operating Principle The ECD operates according to the principle of gas phase absorption by electron capturing molecules. The primary electrons emitted by the radioactive source (beta emission) collide with the molecules of carrier or make-up gas (such as nitrogen) and give rise to an ionization process with the formation of secondary electrons and positive ions (Equation 2.3-1). ϒ * + N2 ϒ + N2+ + e– 2.3-1 By the application of a weak electrical field between the electrodes, the electrons are rapidly collected at the anode generating a small current (standing current), while the possibility for heavy positive ions to recombine with electrons is negligible. When an electron capturing substance passes through the detector cell, the current is reduced because of the absorption of electrons by this substance according to one of the following reactions (Equations 2.3-2 and 2.3-3). e– + AB AB– + h↑ 2.3-2 e– + AB A· + B– 2.3-3 In Equation 2.3-2, an energized negative molecular ion forms, while in Equation 2.3-3, after the electron capture, the molecule dissociates (dissociative capture) generating a free radical A· and a negative ion B–. The energy freed during the capture in Equation 2.3-2 is the measure of the electron affinity of the molecule. The succession of phenomena determining the detector response ends by the neutralization of the negative ions formed by capture. The detector response is therefore related to the loss of electrons that occurs by capture in the system in equilibrium. The decrease in the electron concentration is converted into an electric signal proportional to the concentration of solute present. Molecular Structure and Detector Response The sensitivity and selectivity of the ECD response are determined by the electron affinity of the substances entering the detection cell and are affected by the operating parameters and analytical conditions. In the case of organic compounds, the electron affinity mainly depends on the presence of electrophores in the molecular structure, such as halogens, nitro groups, organometals or diketons. For halogens the ECD response decreases in the following order: I > Br > Cl > F Service Manual 71 Chapter 2.3 Detectors Electron Capture Detector Overview The response factor, and therefore selectivity, can vary between 1 and 106 as a function of the degree of the electron affinity of molecules, as shown in Table 2.3-5. These values are also affected by temperature that enhances the detector response for those compounds capturing electrons dissociatively. Considering the differences in response, you must calibrate the detector before performing quantitative determinations. To calibrate the detector, you inject standard mixtures under the same operating conditions used for the samples to be tested. The detector sensitivity is also affected by carrier and make-up gas flow rates, since the detector response is related to the solute concentration of the gaseous mixture. Table 2.3-5. Relative Response to Some Organic Compounds Substance Ethane Benzene Butanol Acetone Chlorobutane Chlorobenzene 1,2 Dichloroethane Relative Sensitivity 1 1–102 Anthracene Keto-steroids Tetraethyl lead Benzyl chloride Chloroform Nitrobenzene 102–104 Carbon disulphide Cinnamaldehyde Carbon tetrachloride Dinitrophenol 104–105 Diethyl fumarate Dinotrobenzene Hexachlorobenzene Hexachlorocyclohexane 105–106 Constant Current Operating Mode The detector control module operates in a constant current pulse-modulated mode. During pulse application, electrons migrate to the anode, and therefore their concentration in the cell rapidly drops to zero. During the interval between pulses, electrons gradually return to their original concentration and to thermal equilibrium in which the capturing process is favorable. In the relatively long interval between two short pulses, all electrons not consumed by capture are collected at the anode that measures the electron flow (cell current) present at that moment. 72 Service Manual Chapter 2.3 Detectors Electron Capture Detector Overview In Equation 2.3-4, the average cell current I is proportional to the concentration of electrons [e–] collected at each pulse, and to the frequency f of the applied pulses: I = K[e–]f 2.3-4 In constant current operating mode, the cell current is forced to be constant, at a preset reference value, through an electric feedback loop circuit that compares the cell current to the reference current at any time. When an electron capturing compound enters the detector cell, the electron concentration [e–] decreases and, according to Equation 2.3-4, the pulse frequency, required to collect the remaining free electrons, rises to maintain a constant cell current. The difference in the frequency when an electron capturing compound enters the cell and the base frequency, when no sample is present, is converted into an electric signal which is proportional to the concentration of the compound in the detector. Base Frequency Base frequency is an important parameter in evaluating the operating status of the ECD system. For a constant concentration of thermal electrons inside the detector cell, the base frequency is a function of the reference current, pulse amplitude and pulse width selected. The frequency increases when the reference current is increased, or when the pulse duration or pulse amplitude are reduced. For a given reference current, pulse duration, and amplitude, the base frequency remains constant when only carrier gas and make-up gas flow through the cell. The frequency generally increases, under the same operating conditions, because of decreased electron population inside the cell or reduced electron collecting efficiency. In the latter case, the collecting efficiency can be restored by cleaning or replacing the collecting electrode (anode). If the electron concentration has decreased due to contaminants entering the detector cell, you must remove the source of contamination. With a high base frequency, probability of electron capture tends to decrease, and therefore the signal to noise ratio generally decreases. You must select the appropriate reference current values to maintain the base frequency at acceptable levels in the DETECTOR (ECD) menu. Service Manual 73 Chapter 2.3 Detectors ECD Menu ECD Menu The DETECTOR (ECD) menu contains the detector control parameters if the GC has been configured for an ECD. Press LEFT DETECT or RIGHT DETECT to open the menu shown in Table 2.3-6. Table 2.3-6. ECD Menu Menu Range Title bar. RIGHT DET (ECD) Base temp On/Off, 30–400 °C1 This indicates the detector base body temperature. Press ON to enable the heater and to display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF to disable the heater and to display the actual value. ECD temp On/Off, 20–400 °C This indicates the detector temperature. Press ON to turn on the heater and to display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF to turn off the heater and to display the actual value. Ref current nA 0.0–3.0 nA in steps of 0.1 nA This indicates the cell reference current expressed in nanoamperes. Freq kHz 0–999.99 kHz This indicates the actual value of the pulse frequency rate. Refer to Base Frequency on page 73 for more information. Pulse amp V 5–50 V in a continuous mode This indicates the pulse amplitude expressed in volts. Pulse width us 0.1, 0.5, or 1.0 ℘s This indicates the pulse width expressed in microseconds. Press ENTER to open the submenu. An asterisk appears on the left of the pulse width selected. Mkup2 (XX) On/Off, This indicates the make-up gas used with ECD. The type of 0–100 mL/min the gas is displayed in parentheses (for example, N2). Press ON to turn on the flow and display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF the turn the flow off and display the actual value. 1. 2. 74 Comments Up to 500 °C if the GC is configured for high temperature operation. If you have a non-DGFC module, the make-up gas must be measured and adjusted manually from a pressure regulator located in the pneumatics. The menu only displays the flow mode On/Off. Service Manual Chapter 2.3 Detectors Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector Overview Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector Overview The NPD provides selective detection of nitrogen or phosphorous organic compounds. A ceramic matrix thermionic source, positioned above the jet, is electrically heated in a dilute hydrogen/air environment to create a hot, chemically reactive gas layer around the source. When compounds containing nitrogen or phosphorus atoms impact this hot source, electronegative decomposition products are formed and ionized by extraction of electrons from the thermionic source. The negative ions are then collected and detected through the electrometric amplifier. A thermionic source with a different surface coating is also available. This source provides high specificity and sensitivity to certain electronegative molecules when operating in an inert nitrogen gas environment. This is the Enhanced Nitrogen Selectivity (ENS) operating mode. The jet, mounted on the detector base body is suitable for operating temperature up to 450 °C. Figure 2.3-3 shows the NPD. Figure 2.3-3. Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector Thermionic Source Lifetime Source lifetime can vary depending on the individual source, the operating temperature, and the analytical conditions. The source heating current needs to be just high enough to produce an active layer around the source itself. When a readjustment of the source heating current is necessary, the magnitude of the detector standing current or the response to a standard sample can serve as a guide to the correct adjustment. Service Manual 75 Chapter 2.3 Detectors Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector Overview To prolong the source lifetime, we recommend you turn off the heating current and the hydrogen flow when the detector is not being used for a prolonged period of time (for example, overnight or on weekends), or when the carrier gas flow is interrupted. Bleed from silicone-based stationary phases or residual silanizing reagents (from derivatization procedures) may contaminate the source surface with silicone dioxide and reduce the operative lifetime. Also the extended use of halogenated solvents can adversely affect the source lifetime by the formation of reaction by-products on the source coating. Carrier and Detector Gases The gases normally used with the NPD are shown in Table 2.3-7. Table 2.3-7. NPD Carrier Gases Carrier Gas Capillary Columns Packed Column Helium X X Nitrogen X X Hydrogen X (only with DPFC) WARNING! Hydrogen is a potentially dangerous gas. Refer to Using Hydrogen on page xxiv for safety information. The carrier gas flow range depends on the type of the gas used and on the type and diameter of the capillary or packed column installed. The fuel and make-up gases for the NPD are: • Fuel Gas: Hydrogen, Air • Make-up Gas: Nitrogen, Helium Nitrogen is preferred over helium because it has a much lower thermal conductivity, and a lower heating current is required for the source. NOTE When a packed column is used, a make-up gas is not necessary. The detector gas flow rates generally used are: 76 • Hydrogen: 2–4 mL/min • Air: • Make-up: 10–20 mL/min 40–80 mL/min Service Manual Chapter 2.3 Detectors NPD Menu NPD Menu The DETECTOR (NPD) menu contains the NPD control parameters. Press LEFT DETECT or RIGHT DETECT to open the DET (NPD) menu. The parameters are explained in Table 2.3-8. Table 2.3-8. NPD Menu Menu Range Comments Title bar. RIGHT DET (NPD) Source curr. A On/Off, 1.000–3.500 A in steps of 0.01 A This is the current applied to heat the thermionic source. It is expressed in amperes. Press ON to enable the current and to display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF to disable the current and to display the actual value. Base temp On/Off, 30–450 °C This the detector base body temperature. Press ON to enable the heater and to display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF to disable the heater and to display the actual value. Signal pA Not editable This parameter shows the collector current in picoamperes (standing current level). Target level This is the target level, expressed in pA, to be used 0.0–99.9 as a reference value. (for input range of 0), 0–999 (for input range of 1–3) Auto adjust Yes/No, 0–999 pA This line indicates the automatic adjustment of the Signal pA to reach the given Target level. Press YES to enable auto adjust. The autoadjust range is limited to 0 to 999 pA. Polarizer V 1.0–99.0 in steps of 0.1 V This indicates the source polarizing voltage in volts. H2 On/Off, 0–10.0 mL/min in steps of 0.1 mL/min This indicates the hydrogen flow supplied to the detector. Press ON to enable the gas flow and to display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF to disable the flow and to display the actual value. When you have a non-DPFC module, the actual values are not displayed and you can select only On or Off. H2 delay time On/Off, 0.00–999.9 min This parameter may be set to interrupt the hydrogen flow during the solvent elution to protect the source. After this time, the hydrogen flow is automatically restored. Press ON to enable the delay and to display the actual and setpoint values. Service Manual 77 Chapter 2.3 Detectors NPD Menu Table 2.3-8. NPD Menu (Continued) Menu Comments Air On/Off, 0–600 mL/min This indicates the air flow supplied to the detector. Press ON to enable the gas flow and to display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF to disable the flow and to display the actual value. When you have a non-DPFC module, the actual values are not displayed and you can select only On or Off. Mkup (N2)1 On/Off, 0–100 mL/min This indicates the make-up gas used with NPD. The type of the gas is displayed in parentheses. Press ON to enable the gas flow and to display the actual and setpoint values. Press OFF or 0 to disable the flow and to display the actual value. The flow cuts off during the source ignition sequence. It turns back on before the ignition threshold test. The flow remains on when the NPD is off. When you have a non-DGFC module, the actual values are not displayed and you can select only On or Off. 1. 78 Range If you have non-DGFC module, the detector gases (H2, air, and make-up) must be measured and adjusted manually from a pressure regulator located in the pneumatics. The menu only displays the flow mode and On/Off. Service Manual SECTION III Functional Tests This section provides information about alarm, diagnostic, and error messages of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 3.1, Info Messages, contains information to help identify and troubleshoot info messages on the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 3.2, Error Messages, contains information to help identify and troubleshoot info, error, and diagnostic messages on the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 3.3, Diagnostic Messages, contains information to help identify and troubleshoot info, error, and diagnostic messages on the TRACE GC 2000. Info Messages This chapter contains information to help identify and troubleshoot info messages on the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter at a Glance… Info Messages ............................................................................................................. 82 Service Manual 81 Chapter 3.1 Info Messages Info Messages Info Messages Table 3.1-1 lists the TRACE GC 2000 info messages, which act as an internal help system. Each info message is accessed by pressing the INFO key. The info message displayed corresponds to the position of the cursor on a specific line of the display panel. NOTE Messages with AS denote autosampler. Table 3.1-1. Info Messages Info Message Info Message Info Message GCInfo GC UNIT INFO Displays information unique to this unit SN #runs mfg. date OKFailInfo DIAGNOSTIC INFO Displays powersupply Status as OK or Failed. ChanFailInfo DIAGNOSTIC INFO Temp Channel Status OK OPEN SHORTED NOT USED etc. MethNoInfo METHOD NUMBER INFO Enter the saved method number to be loaded (1 to 10). SpecCycInfo SPECIFIC CYCLE INFO Press ENTER to see how to set the specific cycle. SlctDayInfo SELECT DAY INFO Pick the day of the week that the event should occur on. ClkEvValveInfo VALVE EVENT INFO Press ENTER to see how to set up a valve event. DiagInfo DIAGNOSTIC INFO Enter an integer value for debugging the heater controls. DetTypeInfo DETECTOR TYPE INFO Pick the detector type and location (a=lft b=ctr c=rght) MakeupGasInfo MAKEUP GAS INFO Pick the makeup gas desired from the list of choices. DetectorInfo DETECTOR INFO Enter the submenu to be able to select the desired detector ListInfo LIST INFO Choose an item from the list. Current pick has a * by it. DblInletInfo DblPro INLET INFO Choose Yes if this GC has double SSL inlets for DblPro. DateTimeInfo DATE & TIME INFO Displays the current date and time as set in CONFIG. ConfigTimeInfo ENTER TIME INFO Enter the time of day as hhmm with all 4 numbers required. ConfigDateInfo ENTER DATE INFO Enter the date as mmddyy with all six digits required. TEVeditInfo TIMED EVENT INFO Choose an item from the list to be the event to occur. ExtEVeditInfo EXTERNAL EVENT INFO Press ENTER to setup the external timed event to occur. TEVInfo TIMED EVENT INFO Shows a timed event. Press CLEAR to be able to delete it. StoreMethodInfo STORE METHOD INFO Indicate the entry (1-10) to store the current method in. LoadMethodInfo LOAD METHOD INFO Indicate the entry (1-10 or default) to load the method from 82 Service Manual Chapter 3.1 Info Messages Info Messages Table 3.1-1. Info Messages (Continued) Info Message Info Message Info Message LSMethodInfo METHOD LD/STR INFO Indicate the method to be loaded from or to be stored into. DoLSMethodInfo LOAD/STORE INFO Indicate whether to Load from or Store to the chosen method SaveDefaultInfo SAVE AS DEFAULT INFO Will save this mthd as the default and saves into EEPROM. StoreSeqInfo STORE SEQUENCE INFO Indicate the entry (1-5) to store the current sequence in. LoadSeqInfo LOAD SEQUENCE INFO Indicate the entry (1-5) to load the sequence from. LeftInlInfo LEFT INLET INFO Enter inlet submenu to choose the inlet desired on the left. RightInlInfo RIGHT INLET INFO Enter inlet submenu to choose the inlet desired on the right ValveInfo SAMPLE/SWITCH VALVE Use ON/OFF in order to OPEN/CLOSE the valve. MultiValveInfo MULTIPOSITION VALVE Enter the valve position# or ON/OFF to go up/down by one InletValveInfo INLET VALVE INFO Use ON/OFF in order to OPEN/CLOSE the valve. EPCTypeInfo MODULE INFO Gives the type of gas control module in use for channel. EPCPresInfo AMBIENT PRESS INFO Displays ambient pressure sensed by the DPFC controller. ASInjectInfo SEQ CONTROL INFO Shows how many of the injections have been done. ASPauseInfo SEQ CONTROL INFO Press ENTER to pause the sequence at the end of the run. ASPriVialInfo SEQ CONTROL INFO Shows which vial is being used for this priority run. ASResumeInfo SEQ CONTROL INFO Press ENTER to start the sequence back up from where it was. ASRunPriInfo SEQ CONTROL INFO Press ENTER to start a priority sequence as the next run. ASStartInfo SEQ CONTROL INFO Press ENTER to start a regular sequence. ASStopInfo SEQ CONTROL INFO Press ENTER to stop the sequence after the current run. ASSubseqInfo SEQ CONTROL INFO Shows which vial is being used for which subsequence now. ASRegStatusInfo SEQ CONTROL INFO Indicates that a sequence is active. ASWaitStatusInfo SEQ CONTROL INFO Indicates that an active sequence is waiting for the GC. ASPauseStatusInfo SEQ CONTROL INFO Indicates the seq is on hold. Hit Resume to reactivate. ASStopStatusInfo SEQ CONTROL INFO Indicates that no sequence is active. ASAbortStatusInfo SEQ CONTROL INFO A sequence error was detected. Fix and Resume to reactivate ASNoSeqStatusInfo SEQ CONTROL INFO Indicates that no sequence is defined so it cant be run. ASPriStatusInfo SEQ CONTROL INFO Shows the state of the head space autosampler Service Manual 83 Chapter 3.1 Info Messages Info Messages Table 3.1-1. Info Messages (Continued) Info Message Info Message Info Message ASRepInfo SEQ CONTROL INFO Shows the repitition of this sample that is currently in use. GenericStatusInfo STATUS INFO Shows the status of the GC usually what it expects next. TempStatusInfo STATUS INFO Temp out of range. It currently is but is expecting OvenTempStatusInfo STATUS INFO Fatal temp in heated zone. Correct and cycle power on/off. ErrorStatusInfo ERROR STATUS INFO GC in error state. Contact Finnigan customer service. RunStatusInfo STATUS INFO This indicates where the system is in the oven profile. ISVialInfo INT STD VIAL INFO Enter vial# 1-90 for int std or 100-103 (a-d) for solv SLV. QuestionClear You have requested clearing the RUNLOG. Press <YES> to clear another key to exit. RunlogInfo RUN LOG INFO Shows the deviations during the run. Use arrows to see all. ShowOnlyInfo DIAGNOSTIC INFO Displays diagnostic results and internal calculated values. InletInfo INLET INFO Enter the submenu to be able to select the desired inlet. HeaderInfo INFO LINE INFO This line is for information only usually a comment. SplitRatioInfo SPLIT RATIO INFO Displays the split ratio = split flow/ column flow. TotalFlowInfo TOTAL FLOW INFO Displays total flow= split flow+col flow+ septum purge. PressureInfo PRESSURE INFO Displays pressure in psi kPa or Bar as configured. StopWatchInfo STOPWATCH INFO Displays flow and time elapsed in the stopwatch. DetOutInfo OUTPUT INFO Displays detector output from the V/F at a 10HZ rate. SignalpAInfo SIGNAL pA INFO Displays the offset adjusted signal value in picoamps. RunPresInfo PRESSURE INFO Displays the actual pressure during the run. DblProDlyInfo DOUBLEPRO DELAY INFO Displays injection delay between inlets using doublepro mode RunTimeInfo RUN TIME INFO Displays a run time in minutes to two decimal places. StartCompInfo START COMP INFO Will start the baseline compensation process. LoadBasicInfo LOAD BASIC MTHD INFO Loads a basic method in to clear out the current method. ColFlowInfo COLUMN FLOW INFO Displays the actual flow on the column in cc/min. CARInfo ONE MOMENT Setting Carrier Gas Type DETInfo ONE MOMENT Setting Detector Gas Type 84 Service Manual Error Messages This chapter contains information to help identify and troubleshoot info, error, and diagnostic messages on the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter at a Glance… Error Messages............................................................................................................ 86 Service Manual 85 Chapter 3.2 Error Messages Error Messages Error Messages Table 3.2-1 lists the TRACE GC 2000 error messages, a brief description, and troubleshooting options that may appear on the display panel. Errors must be corrected before proceeding further. Table 3.2-1. Error Messages Error Message CONSTANT Error Message CONSTANT Error Message CONSTANT OrderViolation These entries must be sequential. Verify adjacent values & re-enter. MissingInletJumper Configuration Error You have selected Configure Inlet but Hdwre shows NO inlet MethodNum2big When saving/loading a Method you requested method # >10 Try with number <=10 ClockError Error Setting/Reading Clock. Proceed with CAUTION. Press Any Key to Proceed. NoDetTimeParams XXX Detector has no time parameters. Any Key to Proceed. OvenMaxViolation New Oven Max Temp is below a SetPoint(s). SetPoint(s) will be reset to new maximum DetConfError The DPFC module is not compatible with the detector cards. LeakCheckinProcess LEAK CHK IN PROCESS No editing allowed while leak check is in process. ColumnEvalinProcess COL EVAL IN PROCESS No editing allowed while column evaluation is in process. TempOFFError Flame ignition can not be done with Det base temperature OFF or set below 150C. SplitRatioViolation Error: Calculated total flow exceeds max of 500 cc/min. Press any key. SplitFlowViolation Error: Calc'd total flow exceeds 500 cc/ min. Splt ratio will be reduced. Any key. MethodNotSavedorBad A good copy of the requested method does not exist. Try another or create it LoadMethodError LOAD METHOD Load method not allowed while GC is running. LoadSequenceError LOAD SEQUENCE Load sequence not allowed while GC is running. ConfigChecksum Config saved checksum is bad. Default is being loaded. Edit Meth and Cfg! MethodChecksum Method saved checksum is bad. Default is being loaded. Edit Meth and Cfg! NoHydrogenSensor Hydrogen sensor not available or not configured. Any Key to Proceed. ConfigHasChanged The GC Configuration has changed since Method saved. AnyKey to Proceed w/Care. MultipositionValveError Invalid valve # Must be 4 6 8 10 12 or 16. TimeFormatError Invalid Input. Input must be 4 digits. ClockTimeError Invalid Input. Must be hhmm where hh = (0-23) and mm = (0-59). DateFormatError Invalid Input. Input must be 6 digits. InActiveEditMode Can not alter GC run state while in NONACTIVE EDIT MODE. 86 Service Manual Chapter 3.2 Error Messages Error Messages Table 3.2-1. Error Messages (Continued) Error Message Error Message Error Message NOInlets ERROR: No Inlets have been installed. OnlyPKDInlet ERROR: Only Packed Inlet(s) installed. Col. Eval. or leak check not allowed. NoSampler SAMPLER ERROR No autosampler installed. EvalRColPresOFFmsg R COLUMN EVALUATION Column must be pressurized for evaluation. EvalLColPresOFFmsg L COLUMN EVALUATION Column must be pressurized for evaluation. FaultMsg7 Report to ThermoQuest Ph: (512)251-1571 Fax: (512)251-1547 Fault 7. Press a key FaultMsg8 Report to ThermoQuest Ph: (512)251-1571 Fax: (512)251-1547 Fault 8. Press a key DPFCPreprunError DPFC failure during preprun. Press any key to resume. DPFC_OCHOTError HOTOC failure during preprun. Press any key to resume. DPFC_GasOutError Loss of carrier. Oven will shutdown In 60 seconds. OvenShutDownError Oven shutdown Loss of carrier Press any key to Resume. DSHasAS Data system has the autosampler function locked out. ASOffline SAMPLER ERROR Sequence aborted: Sampler off-line ASBadMethod SAMPLER ERROR Sequence aborted: Method download failure ASNoStart SAMPLER ERROR Autosampler stopped with no remote start. OvenTempError TEMPERATURE SHUTDOWN Oven temperature exceeded the allowed temperature limit(s) OverTempError TEMPERATURE SHUTDOWN temperature zone(s) exceeded the allowed temperature limit(s) ShortedRTDError TEMPERATURE SHUTDOWN Shorted Temp sensor Run Temperature Diagnostics ShortedRTDOvenError TEMPERATURE SHUTDOWN Shorted Oven sensor Run Temperature Diagnostics OVENError TEMPERATURE SHUTDOWN OVEN is Over Heating out of Control Check Sensor OVENbusted TEMPERATURE SHUTDOWN OVEN Not Controlling and Not Heating Check Sensor PTVError TEMPERATURE SHUTDOWN PTV is Over Heating out of Control Check Sensor PTVbusted TEMPERATURE SHUTDOWN PTV not Controlling and not Heating Check Sensor ISOError TEMPERATURE SHUTDOWN Isothermal Zone is Over Heating out of control ISObusted TEMPERATURE SHUTDOWN Isothermal Zone is not Controlling or Heating TCDError TEMPERATURE SHUTDOWN TCD is Over Heating out of Control Check Sensor TCDbusted TEMPERATURE SHUTDOWN TCD not Controlling and not Heating Check Sensor Service Manual 87 Chapter 3.2 Error Messages Error Messages Table 3.2-1. Error Messages (Continued) Error Message Error Message Error Message VARIABLE VARIABLE OverHardwareError HARDWARE SHUTDOWN temperature zone(s) exceeded the allowed HARDWARE limit(s) VARIABLE TempViolation Maximum Temp is To enter a larger value you must chg configuration!. TempViolation Minimum Temp is This value will be entered. Violation Mxx. Entry is for this field. LimitViolation ERROR: The range for the value is between OffsetViolation The present signal can be subtracted by up to SplitRatioInformation Split ratio limited by max total flow of 500 cc/min. Split ratio max is 88 Service Manual Diagnostic Messages This chapter contains information to help identify and troubleshoot info, error, and diagnostic messages on the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter at a Glance… Diagnostic Messages................................................................................................... 90 Service Manual 89 Chapter 3.3 Diagnostic Messages Diagnostic Messages Diagnostic Messages Table 3.3-1 lists the TRACE GC 2000 diagnostic messages, a brief description, and troubleshooting options. Table 3.3-1. Diagnostic Messages Diagnostic Message Description Troubleshooting Software Info Press ENTER to display software information. Serial # The GC serial number is factory coded. Ver: Displays GC firmware version and year created. DPFC ROM Ver: Displays DPFC firmware version. DPFC firmware EPROM is located on the DPFC processor PCB. Manufactured: Factory coded with month/day/ year. Displays when the unit is initially powered up. Total Runs Keeps a running total of the number of times the GC start run was initiated. This total is reset when the GC firmware is replaced or reloaded. Temp Diagnostic Allows the operator to scroll all GC temperature zones and view the status. The status for each zone will indicate OK, NOT USED, OPEN, SHORTED, or NOT CONTROLLING. Note: All temperature controlled zones are disabled while this menu is on the GC screen. The Temp Diagnostics menu line will not appear when the GC is in a run. HARDWARE CONFIG Press ENTER to display hardware configuration. DPFC ROM Ver: Displays the DPFC firmware version. 90 Service Manual Chapter 3.3 Diagnostic Messages Diagnostic Messages Table 3.3-1. Diagnostic Messages (Continued) Diagnostic Message L inlet module R inlet module Service Manual Description Troubleshooting Identifies the type of carrier flow module that is installed in this location (not the inlet type). Possibilities include OCI, S/SL, and PKD. Identification of the carrier flow module occurs when the GC power is cycled or turned on. If the module is unplugged or defective, it will read None. Selecting the left or right inlet identifies the pressure range of this module. Scroll to pressure and press the INFO/DIAG key. The display will identify the usable range of the module. 91 Chapter 3.3 Diagnostic Messages Diagnostic Messages Table 3.3-1. Diagnostic Messages (Continued) Diagnostic Message L DET MODULE R DET MODULE AUX DET MODULE Description Identifies the type of detector gas flow module in this location. Possibilities include AA, AB, AC, AD, AE1, AE2, AE3. All gas modules have the capability for three gas paths: H2, Air, and Makeup. The module type will determine which gas paths are present. Gas path 1 is the H2 gas path. Gas path 2 is the Air gas path. Gas path 3 is the Makeup gas path. Troubleshooting If the module is unplugged or defective it will read None. Module coding is as follows: AA = Option 401. Uses gas module, path 3 only. AB = Option 402. Uses gas paths 1 and 2 without the makeup gas path. The ECD make-up will use gas path 1. The FPD/ FID use gas path 1 for H2, and path 2 for Air. The PID uses gas path 2 for sheath gas, and path 1 for Makeup. AC = Option 403. Uses gas paths 1, 2, and 3. The ECD uses Makeup gas path 3 only. The FID/FPD use gas path 1 for H2, and path 2 for Air. The FPD can not be configured for make-up. The FID uses gas path 3 for Makeup. The PID uses gas path 2 for sheath gas, and path 3 for Makeup. AD = Option 404. Uses gas path 1, 2, and 3. The ECD uses gas path 3 only. The FID/FPD uses gas path 2 for Air, and path 3 for H2. The NPD uses gas path 1 for low flow H2, path 2 for Air, and path 3 for Makeup. The AE gas module is used for auxiliary gases. This module may be configured with gas paths 1, 2, or 3. This module uses a proportional electronically controlled valve and pressure sensor. It is designed to furnish flow to a flow path containing a fixed or variable restrictor. 92 Service Manual Chapter 3.3 Diagnostic Messages Diagnostic Messages Table 3.3-1. Diagnostic Messages (Continued) Diagnostic Message DPFC Temp Description Temperature sensor on the DPFC processor PCB supplies ambient temperature information to the GC processor for front panel display. This value is updated continuously every two to three seconds. Ambient Press Displays atmospheric pressure. The displayed pressure unit is in KPA or PSIG, depending on the configuration that was selected as part of the display pressure unit configuration page. This value is updated only when the Ambient Pres display line is scrolled out of view then back into view on the display. Troubleshooting The temperature sensor is located on the DPFC processor PCs. Temperature sensor calibration is performed in the factory. Gross errors in displayed ambient temperature require the DPFC processor board to be recalibrated or replaced. The ambient pressure sensor is located on the DPFC processor PCB. Pressure sensor calibration is performed in the factory. Gross errors in displayed ambient pressure require the DPFC processor board TO be recalibrated or replaced. FID Transformer This line displays the type of detector transformer present in the power module when an FID is to be used on the GC. One transformer will support two FIDs. The transformer is supplied with a jumper that will connect to J6. This identifies which transformer is installed. J6 is a three-pin connector. Pins 1 and 3 are jumpered to designate an FID transformer has been installed. NPD Transformer This line displays the type of detector transformer present in the power module when an NPD is to be used on the GC. The NPD transformer is an additional transformer that supports only the NPD. One transformer will support dual NPDs. The transformer is supplied with a jumper that will connect to J5. This identifies which transformer is installed. J5 is a three-pin connector. Pins 2 and 3 are jumpered to designate an NPD transformer has been installed. STD Transformer This line displays the type of detector transformer present in the power module when an ECD or FPD is to be used on the GC. The STD transformer replaces any existing FID transformer. The standard transformer supports the FID, ECD, and FPD single or dual configuration. The transformer is supplied with a jumper that will connect to J6. This identifies which transformer is installed. J6 is a three-pin connector. Pins 2 and 3 are jumpered to designate an STD transformer has been installed. Service Manual 93 Chapter 3.3 Diagnostic Messages Diagnostic Messages Table 3.3-1. Diagnostic Messages (Continued) Diagnostic Message Description Troubleshooting A jumper is not correctly installed on J5 or J6 or the jumpered pins are incorrect. Rework as required. No DET Transformer Indicates no detector transformer is installed in the power module. Power Info Press ENTER to display power information. Wired for _____ Volts Designates if the unit is configured as a 115 V ac or 220 V ac unit. AC Voltage: Continually monitors the ac line voltage. The display is updated every 2 to 3 seconds. Accuracy of this display is calibrated in the hidden configuration. To calibrate, press CONFIG and enter 2000. Once in hidden configuration, scroll down to AC. Read the actual line voltage with a calibrated DVM and enter this value in volts ac. Max AC Amps Limits the GC line current to this value. Changes in this value will effect maximum heating rates. This value is set as part of the hidden configuration. To change this value, press CONFIG and enter 2000. Once in hidden configuration, scroll down to Max GC Amps. Enter the desired value in Amps in the range of 10 to 20. AC Limit % Limits the maximum percentage of power that can be applied to the oven heater. +24 Volts: OK indicates the presence of the 24-volt power supply. +15 Volts: OK indicates the presence of the +15-volt power supply. +5 Volts: OK indicates the presence of the +5-volt power supply. -15 Volts: OK indicates the presence of the –15-volt power supply. -5 Volts: OK indicates the presence of the –5-volt power supply. 94 An OK only indicates the +24-volt supply exists. It does not indicate the actual voltage. An OK only indicates the +15-volt supply exists. It does not indicate the actual voltage. An OK only indicates the +5-volt supply exists. It does not indicate the actual voltage. An OK only indicates the –15-volt supply exists. It does not indicate the actual voltage. An OK only indicates the –5-volt supply exists. It does not indicate the actual voltage. Service Manual Chapter 3.3 Diagnostic Messages Diagnostic Messages Table 3.3-1. Diagnostic Messages (Continued) Diagnostic Message Description Troubleshooting Oven Info Chassis Temp Monitors the temperature around the analog PCB. U12 on the analog board is used as a 2.5V reference device. This device also has an ambient temperature output. This output is used in some of the temperature calculating algorithms. Oven Offset This value is usually set to zero. Any entry offsets the oven actual temperature without changing the oven readout value. Oven Temp Monitors the actual oven temperature. Oven Power % Displays the actual percentage of power that is being applied to the oven heater. Full on equals 100%. Oven Predict % As the oven is heating toward an entered set point, the microprocessor calculates the power required for the oven to hold the specified set point. When the oven is equilibrated at a setpoint temperature, the Oven Power % and the Oven Predict % should be nearly the same value. Exhaust Doors % Indicates at what percentage the oven flapper door is open at the current oven temperature. P1 These are displayed values only, and can be changed only by factory programmer engineers. K1 DER Differences in the actual temperature in the oven (as measured by an external calibrated temperature measuring device) and the displayed oven temperature can be adjusted using the Oven Offset above. INTSUM0 INTSUM1 INTSUM2 INTSLOPE Service Manual 95 Chapter 3.3 Diagnostic Messages Diagnostic Messages Table 3.3-1. Diagnostic Messages (Continued) Diagnostic Message Description Troubleshooting Injector Info Lt Injector Reads the actual temperature. A value of 0 indicates a detector is not present. Rt Injector Reads the actual temperature. A value of 0 indicates a detector is not present. P1 These are displayed values only, and can be changed only by factory programmer engineers. K1 DER INTSUM0 INTSUM1 INTSUM2 INTSLOPE Detector Info Lt Detector Reads the actual temperature. A value of 0 indicates an injector is not present. Rt Detector Reads the actual temperature. A value of 0 indicates an injector is not present. P1 K1 These are displayed values only, and can be changed only by factory programmer engineers. DER INTSUM0 INTSUM1 INTSUM2 INTSLOPE 96 Service Manual SECTION IV Maintenance & Troubleshooting This section provides maintenance and troubleshooting for the GCQ Plus base unit and flow control for carrier and detector gases. NOTE For maintenance information regarding injectors and detectors refer to the Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual, PN 31709180. Chapter 4.1, GC Base Unit, contains procedures for replacing the components associated with the frame and oven assembly. It also explains how to remove the Power Control Module, the CPU, and the Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O unit. Chapter 4.2, Digital Pressure Flow Control for Carrier Gases, provides maintenance and troubleshooting for a Split/Splitless injector. Chapter 4.3, Detector Gas Flow Control for Detector Gases, provides maintenance and troubleshooting for a Cold On-Column injector. GC Base Unit This chapter contains procedures for replacing the components associated with the frame and oven assembly. It also explains how to remove the Power Control Module, the CPU, and the Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O unit. Chapter at a Glance… Overview Replace the Oven Motor Replace the Oven Heater Baffle Replace the Flapper Motor Remove the Power Control Module Remove the CPU and Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O Unit Operating Procedures Replace the Oven Motor Replace the Oven Heater Baffle Replace the Flapper Motor Remove the Power Control Module Remove the CPU and Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O Unit Service Manual 99 Chapter 4.1 GC Base Unit Overview Overview The TRACE central base unit consists of the following: • Frame and oven assembly • Power Control Module • Electronic compartment The frame and oven assembly consists of the following: • Oven blower motor • Oven cooling flapper assembly • Oven heater baffle The electronic compartment contains the following: NOTE 100 • Motherboard • Central Processing Unit (CPU) • Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O unit Since the TRACE GC 2000 is a modular design, the frame and oven assembly and its affiliated components are the only items requiring detailed maintenance instructions. Service Manual Chapter 4.1 GC Base Unit Replace the Oven Motor Replace the Oven Motor Required Tools You will need the following tools: • 3-mm Allen wrench • 4-mm Allen wrench • 7-mm nut driver • 10-mm x 8-mm open-ended wrench • Appropriate column wrench for removal of the gas chromatograph columns • Flat-tip screwdriver • Phillips screwdriver Required Parts You will need the following parts: • Replacement blower motor—includes mounting plate and grommets (PN 155 990 00) • Silver seal M8 x 1 for column adapter fitting (PN 290 071 00) • Tube of anti-seize compound (PN 76460-0014) Introduction Removing the blower motor will require the removal of several GC parts and assemblies. To access the oven baffle, the following items will be removed: • GC top cover • Rear panel • Analytical column(s) • Detector capillary column adapter(s) To access the blower motor, the following items will be partially removed or disassembled: • Pneumatic flow module (partial) • Oven heater baffle • Oven fan Read the entire procedure completely to familiarize yourself with the disassembly process before you proceed. Service Manual 101 Chapter 4.1 GC Base Unit Replace the Oven Motor OPERATING PROCEDURE Replace the Oven Motor 1. Reduce the oven temperature to 25 °C. Turn off all temperature zones. Allow the oven to cool. CAUTION Be sure that the oven has cooled to room temperature. 2. Turn off all carrier gas pneumatic flow to the columns. WARNING! Always turn the GC off before removing or replacing any parts. 3. Turn off the main power on the rear panel of the GC. Disconnect the main power cable from the rear of the GC. This may require loosening the clamp that secures the power cable to the rear panel. 4. Open the oven door. 5. Remove the columns. 6. Remove the detector capillary adapters from each detector using the 10-mm open-ended wrench. A flat silver-coated washer inside this fitting seals the fitting to the detector base. 7. Remove the autosampler if present. 8. Remove the detector inlet cover. NOTE 102 If an autosampler mounting bracket is installed, it may be necessary to remove it. The mounting screw that secures the autosampler bracket and GC top to a standoff is located under the top cover. Service Manual Chapter 4.1 GC Base Unit Replace the Oven Motor Figure 4.1-1 shows the retaining screws on the GC top cover. Retaining Screws Figure 4.1-1. Retaining Screws on the GC Top Cover 9. Remove the GC top cover by loosening the two retaining screws (Figure 4.1-1). Push the cover back approximately 3 cm. Lift the cover off the GC. 10. Locate the six Allen screws that secure the rear panel to the GC. Remove these screws using the 3.0-mm Allen wrench. 11. Carefully remove the rear panel of the GC. Notice that the cooling fan is attached to the rear panel. NOTE Pay attention to the orientation of the cooling fan plug, so it can be reconnected in the same way that it was removed. 12. Unplug the power cord to the rear panel cooling fan. Set the rear panel off to the side of the GC. Remove the Pneumatic Flow Module The pneumatic flow module should be partially lifted from the GC. This will allow access to the blower motor. It is not necessary to remove the plumbing or the electrical connections. The pneumatic flow module is attached with six screws. Four screws mount to the GC upper deck. Two screws secure it to the rear of the GC upper deck. NOTE The four screws securing the pneumatic flow module to the GC upper deck are different than the two screws securing the pneumatic flow module to the rear of the GC upper deck. Keep these screws separate for correct reassembly. 1. Remove the six screws securing the pneumatic flow module to the GC. 2. Lift the pneumatic flow module (with cables intact) high enough to expose the blower motor. 3. Prop the pneumatic flow module out of the way on the GC upper deck as illustrated in Figure 4.1-2. Service Manual 103 Chapter 4.1 GC Base Unit Replace the Oven Motor Figure 4.1-2 shows the pneumatic flow module propped on the GC upper deck. Note the blower motor screws. 1 2 1. Pneumatic Flow Module 2.Blower Motor Screws Figure 4.1-2. Pneumatic Flow Module Propped on the GC Upper Deck Remove the Oven Heater Baffle and Oven Fan The oven heater baffle is attached to the oven wall by four adjustable tabs. These tabs are attached to the oven heater baffle with four Allen screws. The four tab adjustment screws are located on the inside edge of the oven heater baffle (Figure 4.1-3). The tabs are adjusted by loosening these four Allen screws. 104 Service Manual Chapter 4.1 GC Base Unit Replace the Oven Motor Figure 4.1-3 shows the tab adjustment screws and the tab screws for the four adjustable tabs on the oven heater baffle. 1 2 1. Tab Adjustment Screws 2.Tab Screws Figure 4.1-3. Tab Adjustment Screws and Tab Screws on the Oven Heater Baffle NOTE Anti-seize compound is applied to all screws removed from inside the oven. 1. Loosen the four tab adjustment screws. 2. Remove the four Allen screws that secure the tabs to the oven heater baffle. 3. Slide each of the four tabs inward to allow each tab to clear the oven wall. 4. Rotate the oven heater baffle counterclockwise approximately 2 cm. 5. Push in on the right-hand side of the oven heater baffle, while pulling out on the left-hand side of the oven heater baffle. Swing the oven heater baffle so that it parallels the right oven wall. This will expose the oven blower fan. 6. The oven blower fan is attached to the shaft of the oven blower motor with a setscrew. This setscrew can be loosened with a 4-mm Allen wrench. 7. Loosen the setscrew. Carefully remove the oven fan from the blower motor shaft. Service Manual 105 Chapter 4.1 GC Base Unit Replace the Oven Motor Remove the Blower Motor 1. The blower motor plugs into J17 on the power control PCB (PN 236 995 00). Unplug the blower motor electrical plug by pushing down on the plug tab and pulling out. 2. The ground strap from the motor is secured to chassis ground on a terminal just below the starting capacitor. Locate this terminal. 3. Remove the terminal nut using a 4-mm nut driver; or, unplug the connector. Remove the ground wire. 4. The blower motor is secured to the rear of the oven wall with three #4 self-locking nuts. Using the same 4-mm nut driver, remove these nuts. 5. Locate and note the orientation of the six shoulder washers on each side of the three grommets, before removing the blower motor. 6. Locate the three flat washers between the locking nut and the shoulder washers. Remove and retain these washers for reassembly. 7. Remove the blower motor from the oven by pulling outward. Assemble the Oven Motor The replacement blower motor will contain the mounting brackets with the three grommets in place. The existing blower motor will have a total of six shoulder washers. Three shoulder washers are installed on each side of the grommets. 1. Remove the all of the shoulder washers from the old blower motor. 2. Place three of the shoulder washers over the mounting studs located on the rear oven wall. 3. Install the motor on the studs. 4. Place the remaining three shoulder washers over the studs, mating them with the grommets and the blower motor mounting bracket. 5. Place the three flat washers over the studs and against the shoulder washers. 6. Carefully screw the locking nuts back onto the studs, after all of the washers are in place. 7. Tighten the locking nuts until the grommets are flat. Loosen each locking nut by one complete turn. 8. Attach the ground wire to the grounding terminal on the rear oven wall. Secure it with the locking nut. 9. Connect the blower motor electrical plug to J17. 10. Reassemble the remaining components on the rear of the GC in the reverse order in which they were removed. 106 Service Manual Chapter 4.1 GC Base Unit Replace the Oven Motor 11. Plug in the rear panel cooling motor. 12. Carefully apply a small amount of anti-seize compound on the end of the blower motor shaft inside the GC oven. 13. Remove the setscrew from the fan. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to the setscrew. Replace the setscrew in the blower. 14. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to each one of the four Allen screws that hold the oven heater baffle to the tabs. 15. Reinstall the oven blower fan onto the shaft. The fan should be even with the beveled edge on the motor shaft. The motor shaft should not extend more than 1 mm beyond the blower fan. 16. Secure the fan to the motor shaft using the number M4 Allen wrench. Be sure that the setscrew is in place on the flat side of the blower motor shaft. 17. Replace the oven heater baffle in the reverse order in which it was removed. 18. Secure the oven heater baffle to the oven wall with the four Allen screws in the tabs. 19. The tab adjustment screws should be loose. Carefully center the oven heater baffle inside of the oven. Be sure that the center hole in the oven heater baffle screen is centered over the blower motor shaft. The tolerance is very small. The oven heater baffle will not move left or right, nor up or down more than a couple of millimeters. However, be sure that it is centered in the oven over the blower wheel. This will ensure that whenever the GC is turned on, the blower wheel will not be touching the heater coils mounted to the oven heater baffle. 20. Turn the GC on. 21. Close the oven door. Be sure that the oven blower is running. 22. Verify that the heater heats, and the fan rotates without contacting the heater coils. 23. Open the oven door. 24. Reinstall the capillary adapter to the detectors using new silver seals #290 07100. 25. Reinstall the column. 26. Reestablish all flows and temperatures. 27. Perform a column leak check and continue. Service Manual 107 Chapter 4.1 GC Base Unit Replace the Oven Heater Baffle Replace the Oven Heater Baffle Required Tools You will need the following tools: • 3-mm Allen wrench • 4-mm Allen wrench • 10-mm x 8-mm open-ended wrench • Appropriate column wrench for removal of the gas chromatograph columns • Flat-tip screwdriver • Phillips screwdriver Required Parts You will need the following parts: • Silver seal M8 x 1 for column adapter fitting (PN 290 071 00) • Tube of anti-seize compound (PN 76460-0014) Introduction To remove and replace the oven heater baffle, the following items will be partially or completely removed: 108 • Top cover • Rear panel • Right side panel • Power supply module (partial) Service Manual Replace the Oven Heater Baffle Chapter 4.1 GC Base Unit OPERATING PROCEDURE Replace the Oven Heater Baffle 1. Reduce the oven temperature to 25 °C. Turn off all temperature zones. Allow the oven to cool. CAUTION Be sure that the oven has cooled to room temperature. 2. Turn off all carrier gas pneumatic flow to the columns. WARNING! Always turn the GC off before removing or replacing any parts. 3. Turn off the main power on the rear panel of the GC. Disconnect the main power cable from the rear of the GC. This may require loosening the clamp that secures the power cable to the rear panel. 4. Open the oven door. 5. Remove the columns. 6. Remove the detector capillary adapters from each detector using the 10-mm open-ended wrench. A flat silver-coated washer inside this fitting seals the fitting to the detector base. 7. Remove the autosampler if present. 8. Remove the detector inlet cover. NOTE If an autosampler mounting bracket is installed, it may be necessary to remove it. The mounting screw that secures the autosampler bracket and GC top to a standoff is located under the top cover. 9. Remove the GC top cover by loosening the two retaining screws (Figure 4.1-1). Push the cover back approximately 3 cm. Lift the cover off the GC. Service Manual 109 Chapter 4.1 GC Base Unit Replace the Oven Heater Baffle Figure 4.1-4 shows the retaining screws on the GC top cover. Retaining Screws Figure 4.1-4. Retaining Screws on the GC Top Cover 10. Locate the six Allen screws that secure the rear panel to the GC. Remove these screws using the 3-mm Allen wrench. 11. Carefully remove the rear panel of the GC. Notice that the cooling fan is attached to the rear panel. NOTE Pay attention to the orientation of the cooling fan plug, so it can be reconnected in the same way that it was removed. 12. Unplug the power cord to the rear panel cooling fan. Set the rear panel off to the side of the GC. Remove the GC Right Side Panel The power control module is attached with five Phillips screws. Access to these screws requires removal of the right side panel of the GC. To remove the right side panel, proceed as follows: 1. Locate the large screw that secures the right side panel on the right upper rear corner of the GC. Unscrew this screw at least 1 cm. 2. Slide the side panel back until the panel contacts the thumbscrew. 3. Tilt the top of the side panel outward. Continue to slide the side panel toward the rear. 4. Hold the side panel parallel to the GC and pull the lower edge of the panel away from the GC. 110 Service Manual Chapter 4.1 GC Base Unit Replace the Oven Heater Baffle Remove the Power Control Module Six screws attach the Power Control Module. Two large Phillips screws are located in the rear of the right side of the GC (see Figure 4.1-5. Right Side View of GC Rear Panel). While the remaining four large Phillips screws are located just behind the front panel of the GC (Figure 4.1-6. Right Side View of GC Front Panel). Figure 4.1-5 shows the two large Phillips screws located towards the rear of the GC. Note the Motherboard, Microprocessor PCB, and Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O PCB. 2 4 3 1 GC Rear Panel 1. Two Large Phillips Screws 2. Motherboard 3. Microprocessor PCB 4. Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O PCB Figure 4.1-5. Right Side View of GC Rear Panel Service Manual 111 Chapter 4.1 GC Base Unit Replace the Oven Heater Baffle Figure 4.1-6 shows three large Phillips screws behind the GC front panel and one large Phillips screw located above the third expansion slot guide. Note the detector controllers plugged into expansion slots 1 and 2. In this illustration the third expansion slot is empty. 2 1 GC Front Panel 1. Four Large Phillips Screws 2. Detector Controller Expansion Slots Figure 4.1-6. Right Side View of GC Front Panel 1. Remove all of the screws. NOTE It is only necessary to slide the power control module out a few centimeters to gain access to the heater wire terminals. It may be necessary to remove a number of the connectors, so the power control module can be slid out far enough to gain access to the heater wire connections. Be sure to identify the location of these heater wire connections for reassembling purposes. 2. Slide the power control module outward toward the rear of the GC. Remove the Temperature Sensor CAUTION The temperature sensor wires are small and delicate, so care should be taken when disconnecting the sensor. The temperature sensors used for the various heating zones in the TRACE GC 2000 are located on the rear portion of the motherboard. 112 Service Manual Chapter 4.1 GC Base Unit Replace the Oven Heater Baffle 1. The oven temperature sensor is connected to J41. Disconnect the oven temperature sensor. 2. Feed the wires for the oven temperature sensor over the motherboard and into the rear of the oven. The oven heater is connected directly to the power control module board. Remove the Oven Heater Baffle The oven heater baffle is attached to the oven wall by four adjustable tabs. These tabs are attached to the oven heater baffle with four Allen screws. The four tab adjustment screws are located on the inside edge of the oven heater baffle (Figure 4.1-7). The tabs are adjusted by loosening these four Allen screws. Figure 4.1-7 shows the tab adjustment screws and the tab screws for the four adjustable tabs on the oven heater baffle. 1 2 1. Tab Adjustment Screws 2.Tab Screws Figure 4.1-7. Tab Adjustment Screws and Tab Screws on the Oven Heater Baffle NOTE Anti-seize compound is applied to all screws that you have removed from inside the oven. 1. Loosen the four tab adjustment screws. 2. Remove the four Allen screws that secure the tabs to the oven heater baffle. 3. Slide each of the four tabs inward to allow each tab to clear the oven wall. Service Manual 113 Chapter 4.1 GC Base Unit Replace the Oven Heater Baffle 4. Rotate the oven heater baffle counterclockwise approximately 2 cm. NOTE Before proceeding, it may be necessary to remove the capillary column adapters from the detector bases. 5. Pull the heater and temperature sensor wires through the holes located in the top right-hand corner of the rear oven wall. 6. Remove the baffle. Replace the Oven Heater Replacement of the oven heater requires replacing the complete oven heater baffle. This includes the plate, heaters, and temperature sensor. 1. Remove the oven heater baffle. 2. A single clamp attaches the oven heater temperature sensor. This clamp is located on the back of the oven heater baffle (Figure 4.1-8). Loosen the clamp. Figure 4.1-8 shows the clamp that attaches the oven heater temperature sensor to the oven heater baffle. Figure 4.1-8. Clamp for Oven Heater Temperature Sensor 3. Remove the oven heater temperature sensor. 4. Replace the oven heater temperature sensor in the reverse order in which it was removed. 114 Service Manual Replace the Oven Heater Baffle Chapter 4.1 GC Base Unit Reassemble the Oven Heater Baffle 1. Replace the oven heater baffle in the reverse order in which it was removed. 2. Apply a small amount of anti-seize compound to each one of the four Allen screws that hold the oven heater baffle to the tabs. 3. Secure the oven heater baffle to the oven wall with the four Allen screws in the tabs. 4. The tab adjustment screws should be loose. Carefully center the oven heater baffle inside of the oven. Be sure that the center hole in the oven heater baffle screen is centered over the blower motor shaft. The tolerance is very small. The oven heater baffle will not move left or right, nor up or down more than a couple of millimeters. However, be sure that it is centered in the oven over the blower wheel. This will ensure that whenever the GC is turned on, the blower wheel will not be touching the heater coils mounted to the oven heater baffle. 5. Connect the oven heater wires to the power control module terminals. 6. Plug the oven heater temperature sensor into J41 on the motherboard. 7. Reconnect the remaining wires previously disconnected from the power control module. 8. Slide the power control module in place and resecure it. 9. Replace the GC rear panel and side panel. 10. Turn the GC on. 11. Confirm that all circuits are functioning correctly. 12. Verify that the oven fan does not touch any part of the oven heater baffle. Service Manual 115 Chapter 4.1 GC Base Unit Replace the Flapper Motor Replace the Flapper Motor Required Tools You will need the following tools: • 3-mm Allen wrench • Phillips screwdriver Required Parts You will need the following parts: • Stepper motor (PN 318 070 46) • Self-locking Allen screws M4 x 10 (PN 76909-L410) Introduction To replace the oven flapper motor, you must remove the complete motor flapper and cooling duct assembly. The flapper motor plugs into the motherboard on the GC. Therefore, you must remove the right side panel of the GC. 116 Service Manual Chapter 4.1 GC Base Unit Replace the Flapper Motor OPERATING PROCEDURE Replace the Flapper Motor 1. Cool all temperature zones to room temperature. WARNING! Always turn the GC off before removing or replacing any parts. 2. Turn off the main power on the rear panel of the GC. Disconnect the main power cable from the rear of the GC. This may require loosening the clamp that secures the power cable to the rear panel. 3. Locate the six Allen screws that secure the rear panel to the GC. Remove these screws using the 3-mm Allen wrench. 4. Carefully remove the rear panel of the GC. Notice that the cooling fan is attached to the rear panel. NOTE Pay attention to the orientation of the cooling fan plug, so it can be reconnected in the same way that it was removed. 5. Unplug the power cord to the rear panel cooling fan. Set the rear panel beside the GC. 6. Locate the six Allen screws that secure the cooling ducts to the oven wall. Remove these screws. Each cooling duct has a self-tapping screw on the outer edge nearest the rear panel. These screws are accessible from a hole in the top of the cooling duct. 7. Locate the self-tapping screw that secures each cooling duct to the lower GC base. Remove the screw from each cooling duct. This will allow the complete motor flapper and cooling duct assembly to be removed from the rear of the GC. Disconnect the Flapper Motor Electrical Plug 1. Remove the right side cover of the GC. 2. Locate connector J12 in the rear upper corner of the motherboard. Disconnect the oven flapper motor electrical plug from J12. Service Manual 117 Chapter 4.1 GC Base Unit CAUTION Replace the Flapper Motor Be very careful not to cut any wires in the harness. 3. Use a pair of side-cutters to cut and remove the tie wraps that secure this cable to the main harness leading into the rear of the GC. 4. Feed the flapper motor cable through the rear of the GC. Remove the complete flapper motor cable. Remove and Replace the Flapper Motor The flapper motor is secured to the left-hand cooling duct with two Phillips screws. The flapper motor shaft is secured to the flapper with an M4 Allen screw. This Allen screw is accessible through a small hole located on the top portion of the left-hand cooling duct. CAUTION Be very careful not to rotate the flapper motor by applying pressure to the flappers. Rotate the flapper motor by gripping the lower portion of the railing that attaches to the flappers. 1. Loosen the M4 Allen screw. 2. Remove the flapper motor. 3. Reinstall the new motor. Align the flat side of the motor shaft with the Allen screw. Reassemble the Flapper Motor 1. Reassemble the flapper motor and cooling duct assembly in the reverse order in which it was removed. 2. Reconnect the power plug to connector J12. 3. Turn the GC on. 4. Turn on all zones, including the oven. 5. Confirm that all heated zones are functioning correctly. 6. Reestablish flows. 7. Perform a column leak check. 118 Service Manual Remove the Power Control Module Chapter 4.1 GC Base Unit Remove the Power Control Module Required Tools You will need the following tools: • 3-mm Allen wrench • Phillips screwdriver Required Parts In this procedure, you may require any of the items listed in the section below. Their part numbers have been included. Introduction The Power Control Module contains the following: • Main power input filter (PN 24128-0085) • Circuit breaker 115 V (PN 237 099 15) Circuit breaker 230 V (PN 237 099 16) • Varistor—attaches to circuit breaker (PN 119949-0001) • Main power thermal shutdown relay 20 A (PN 76269-0120) • Power supply module (PN 76330-0031) • Power Control Module PCB with fuses (PN 236 995 00) • ECD/FID detector transformer (PN 119917) • NPD detector transformer (PN 119918) • FID detector transformer (PN 119916) • Oven heater triac (PN 76379-0025) To remove the Power Control Module, it is necessary to remove the following: Service Manual • Power cord • GC rear panel • GC right side panel 119 Chapter 4.1 GC Base Unit Remove the Power Control Module OPERATING PROCEDURE Remove the Power Control Module Remove the GC Rear Panel WARNING! Always turn the GC off before removing or replacing any parts. 1. Turn off the main power on the rear panel of the GC. Disconnect the main power cable from the rear of the GC. This may require loosening the clamp that secures the power cable to the rear panel. NOTE If an autosampler mounting bracket is installed, it may be necessary to remove it. The mounting screw that secures the autosampler bracket and GC top to a standoff is located under the top cover. 2. Remove the GC top cover by loosening the two retaining screws (Figure 4.1-1). Push the cover back approximately 3 cm. Lift the cover off the GC. Figure 4.1-9 shows the retaining screws on the GC top cover. Retaining Screws Figure 4.1-9. Retaining Screws on the GC Top Cover 3. Locate the six Allen screws that secure the rear panel to the GC. Remove these screws using the 3-mm Allen wrench. 120 Service Manual Remove the Power Control Module Chapter 4.1 GC Base Unit 4. Carefully remove the rear panel of the GC. Notice that the cooling fan is attached to the rear panel. NOTE Pay attention to the orientation of the cooling fan plug, so it can be reconnected in the same way that it was removed. 5. Unplug the power cord to the rear panel cooling fan. Set the rear panel off to the side of the GC. Remove the GC Right Side Panel The Power Control Module is attached with five Phillips screws. Access to these screws requires removal of the right side panel of the GC. To remove the right side panel, proceed as follows: 1. Locate the large thumbscrew that secures the right side panel on the right upper rear corner of the GC. Unscrew the thumbscrew at least 1 cm. 2. Slide the side panel back until the panel contacts the thumbscrew. 3. Tilt the top of the side panel outward. Continue to slide the side panel toward the rear. 4. Hold the side panel parallel to the GC, and pull the lower edge of the panel away from the GC. Service Manual 121 Chapter 4.1 GC Base Unit Remove the Power Control Module Remove the Power Control Module Six screws attach the Power Control Module. Two large Phillips screws are located in the rear of the right side of the GC (see Figure 4.1-10. Right Side View of GC Rear Panel). While the remaining four large Phillips screws are located just behind the front panel of the GC (Figure 4.1-11. Right Side View of GC Front Panel). Figure 4.1-10 shows the two large Phillips screws located in the rear of the GC. Note the Motherboard, Microprocessor PCB, and Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O PCB. 2 4 GC Rear Panel 3 1 1. Two Large Phillips Screws 2. Motherboard 3. Microprocessor PCB 4. Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O PCB Figure 4.1-10. Right Side View of GC Rear Panel 122 Service Manual Chapter 4.1 GC Base Unit Remove the Power Control Module Figure 4.1-11 shows three large Phillips screws behind the GC front panel and one large Phillips screw located above the third expansion slot guide. Note the detector controllers plugged into expansion slots 1 and 2. In this illustration the third expansion slot is empty. 2 1 GC Front Panel 1. Four Large Phillips Screws 2. Detector Controller Expansion Slots Figure 4.1-11. Right Side View of GC Front Panel 1. Remove the screws. 2. Slide the Power Control Module outward toward the rear of the GC. 3. As the Power Control Module is being removed, disconnect the following in the order listed below: Service Manual • J1, 16-pin white connector • J8, 2-pin connector • J11, 16-pin white connector located in the upper rear quadrant of the chassis • J13, ribbon cable • Oven heater wire connected to the oven heater triac • TB1 and TB2, orange terminal strips for the heater wire connections 123 Chapter 4.1 GC Base Unit Remove the Power Control Module • J17, oven blower motor • J18, second oven heater wire • Chassis ground wire from the GC rear oven terminal NOTE It may be necessary to remove or unclip tie wraps that may bind some of the disconnected harnesses to the Power Control Module internal harnesses. CAUTION Be very careful not to cut any wires in the harness. Reinstall the Power Control Module 1. Reconnect the previously disconnected connections in the reverse order of their removal. 2. Reconnect the chassis ground wire to the GC rear oven terminal. 3. Secure the five Phillips screws that hold the Power Control Module in place. 4. Replace the GC rear panel. Be sure to reconnect the rear panel cooling fan. 5. Reconnect the main power. 6. Turn on main power. 7. Verify all keypad functions. 124 Service Manual Remove the CPU and Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O Unit Chapter 4.1 GC Base Unit Remove the CPU and Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O Unit Required Tools You will need the following tools: • 3-mm Allen wrench • Phillips screwdriver Required Parts You may need the following replacement assemblies: • Central Processing Unit (CPU) (PN 236 483 45) • Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O unit (PN 236 483 40) Introduction It may be necessary to replace the CPU or the Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O unit. This section describes how to remove and replace both of these units. Service Manual 125 Chapter 4.1 GC Base Unit Remove the CPU and Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O Unit OPERATING PROCEDURE Remove the CPU and Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O Unit WARNING! Always turn the GC off before removing or replacing any parts. 1. Turn off the main power on the rear panel of the GC. NOTE If an autosampler mounting bracket is installed, it may be necessary to remove it. The mounting screw that secures the autosampler bracket and GC top to a standoff is located under the top cover. 2. Remove the GC top cover by loosening the two retaining screws (Figure 4.1-1). Push the cover back approximately 3 cm. Lift the cover off the GC. Figure 4.1-12 shows the retaining screws on the GC top cover. Retaining Screws Figure 4.1-12. Retaining Screws on the GC Top Cover Remove the GC Right Side Panel After removing the GC right side panel you will have access to the CPU and temperature feedback and digital I/O unit. 1. Locate the large screw that secures the right side panel on the right upper rear corner of the GC. Unscrew this screw at least 1 cm. 2. Slide the side panel back until the panel contacts the thumbscrew. 3. Tilt the top of the side panel outward. Continue to slide the side panel toward the rear. 4. Hold the side panel parallel to the GC and pull the lower edge of the panel away from the GC. 126 Service Manual Remove the CPU and Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O Unit Chapter 4.1 GC Base Unit Remove the CPU The CPU is located in the fifth slot behind the keypad and display panel. The CPU is held in place with one 3-mm Allen screw that is located on the top of the GC under the top cover. 1. Remove the RS232 cables connected to the computer and the autosampler. 2. Remove the Allen screw. 3. Grasp the CPU. 4. Slide the unit outward away from the electronic compartment. Reinstall the CPU 1. Reinstall the CPU in the reverse order in which it was removed. 2. Turn the GC on. 3. Verify that the system completes the initial startup test. 4. Replace all covers. 5. Resume normal operation. Remove the Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O unit The Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O unit is located in the fourth slot behind the keypad and display panel. The Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O unit is held in place with one 3-mm Allen screw that is located on the top of the GC under the top cover. 1. Remove the Allen screw. 2. Grasp the Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O unit. 3. Slide the unit outward away from the electronic compartment. Reinstall the Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O unit 1. Reinstall the Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O unit in the reverse order in which it was removed. 2. Turn the GC on. 3. Verify that the system completes the initial startup test. 4. Verify all temperature zones read and control correctly. 5. Replace all covers. 6. Resume normal operation. Service Manual 127 Digital Pressure Flow Control for Carrier Gases This chapter contains information about the Digital Pressure Flow Control modules of the TRACE GC 2000. It also addresses maintenance and troubleshooting issues. Chapter at a Glance… Digital Pressure Flow Control Modules ................................................................... 130 Maintenance.............................................................................................................. 134 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................ 135 Service Manual 129 Chapter 4.2 Digital Pressure Flow Control for Carrier Gases Digital Pressure Flow Control Modules Digital Pressure Flow Control Modules Digital Pressure Flow Control (DPFC) modules refer to the TRACE GC 2000 inlet flow modules. These modules are specifically designed to control carrier gas, either by means of pressure sensing or actual flow sensing. DPFC flow modules are available in two pressure ranges: • 0–250 kPa (0–35 psig) • 0–700 kPa (0–100 psig) DPFC Purged Packed Carrier Pneumatic Module The DPFC purged packed carrier module is identified on the module as PKD-1100-250 or PKD-1100-700. The GC diagnostics identify this module as PKD. This configuration supplies carrier gas to the GC inlet and offers septum purge vent control. It is most commonly used with packed columns, wide-bore (megabore) columns, and the purged packed injector. For wide-bore columns, it operates in constant flow through calculated pressure. For packed columns, it operates in true closed loop flow control. The packed flow module uses a high and low auto range flow sensor, which sets to the high flow range for closed loop flow control. In inlets for packed column with septum purge operation, the flow control module supplies the requested column flow plus 5 cc/min for the septum purge. Figure 4.2-1 shows the DPFC purged packed carrier pneumatic module. Purged Packed Injector Filter F Sensor Prop Valve P Sensor Fixed Flow Regulator Outlet to Ambient On/Off Valve Purge 5 mL/min 77001-1600 980416 Figure 4.2-1. DPFC Purged Packed Carrier Pneumatic Module 130 Service Manual Chapter 4.2 Digital Pressure Flow Control for Carrier Gases Digital Pressure Flow Control Modules DPFC Packed Carrier Pneumatic Module The DPFC purged packed carrier module is identified on the module as PKD-1100-250 or PKD-1100-700. The GC diagnostics identify this module as PKD. The packed column module is the simplest in operation. This type of system is used for packed columns only, which operate in true constant flow mode. The packed column module is closed loop flow control design. This means that the module contains a flow sensor, and directly measures the flow being supplied to the column. The packed flow module uses a high and low auto range flow sensor, which sets to the high flow range for closed loop flow control. The packed column module does not require the column evaluation calculation to adjust column pressures during an analytical run. The packed column module operates from direct flow sensor readings in flow-controlled mode. Figure 4.2-1 shows the DPFC packed carrier pneumatic module. Packed Injector Filter F Sensor Prop Valve P Sensor 77001-1600 980416 Figure 4.2-2. DPFC Packed Carrier Pneumatic Module Calibration: The packed carrier pneumatic module is calibrated at 50 mL/min ± 5 mL and 250 mL/min ± 12 mL/min. Service Manual 131 Chapter 4.2 Digital Pressure Flow Control for Carrier Gases Digital Pressure Flow Control Modules DPFC On-Column Carrier Pneumatic Module This DPFC on-column carrier module is identified on the module as OC-1100-250 or OC-1100-700. The GC diagnostics identify this module as OC. This configuration is most commonly used with cold on-column injectors. This module controls column flow by means of pressure feedback. The flow sensor is only used during column characterization. Column characterization is necessary when used in this configuration. DPFC flow modules are available in two pressure ranges: • 0–250 kPa (0–35 psig) • 0–700 kPa (0–100 psig) This module has no septum purge or split vent flow control. Figure 4.2-3 shows the DPFC on-column carrier pneumatic module. Filter F Sensor Prop Valve P Sensor 77001-1602 980417 Figure 4.2-3. DPFC On-Column Carrier Pneumatic Module Calibration: The On-Column carrier pneumatics module is calibrated to deliver 2.5 mL of flow ± 2 mL at the column exit. 132 Service Manual Chapter 4.2 Digital Pressure Flow Control for Carrier Gases Digital Pressure Flow Control Modules DPFC for S/SL and PTV Carrier Pneumatic Module This DPFC module is identified as option on the module as SSL-1100-250 or SSL-1100-700. The GC diagnostics identify this module as SSL. This configuration is used with the split/splitless injector and the PTV split/splitless injector. This module controls column flow by means of pressure feedback. Carrier flow range is 0–10 cc/min. DPFC flow modules are available in two pressure ranges: • 0–250 kPa (0–35 psig) • 0–700 kPa (0–100 psig) This module has septum purge and split vent flow control. Figure 4.2-4 shows the DPFC for S/SL and PTV carrier pneumatic module. SSL/PTV Filter Gas Saver F Sensor Prop P Sensor Valve Outlet to Ambient Outlet to Ambient Prop Valve On/Off Valve Fixed Flow Regulator On/Off Valve Filter Split Purge 5 mL/min 77001-1601 980416 Figure 4.2-4. DPFC for S/SL and PTV Carrier Pneumatic Module The module used for split/splitless or PTV inlets is equipped with a dual range flow sensor and a pressure sensor. It also has a proportioning valve for split flow, and ON/OFF valves for split and purge flows. The mass flow sensor measures all flow moving into the inlet. Since capillary column flows are traditionally low (0.5–3 mL/min), flow through the capillary column is controlled by means of pressure. The mass flow sensor feedback is used to control split flow. Septum purge is maintained at a constant by means of a fixed flow regulator. The lowest column pressure that must be maintained to control flow is: Service Manual • 0–250 kPa module—5 kPa (0.7 psig) • 0–700 kPa module—14 kPa (14 psig) 133 Chapter 4.2 Digital Pressure Flow Control for Carrier Gases Maintenance Maintenance Calibration NOTE The DPFC electronic control module is trimless. All components are solid-state. Calibration of the A/D and D/A is a factory-performed operation requiring specialized test equipment. Any errors in calibration require the replacement of the DPFC module. Factory calibration is accomplished by measuring the appropriate parameter with a reference fixture. Then, the actual result is entered in the software. The module is calibrated for both pressure and flow. Figure 4.2-5 shows the DPFC electronic diagram of the carrier pneumatic module. Flow Sensor Diff Amp Gain full scale @ 500 mL/min He Gain full scale @ 10 mL/min He 10 mL/min Out 500 mL/min out +V Press/Flow mode + Press Sensor P P Out _ Dual D/R 12 bite Comparator Carrier Prop Valve Comparator Split Prop Valve E2Prom 77001-1 98042 Figure 4.2-5. DPFC Electronic Diagram of the Carrier Pneumatic Module 134 Service Manual Chapter 4.2 Digital Pressure Flow Control for Carrier Gases Troubleshooting Troubleshooting The DPFC module is not designed for component level troubleshooting. Table 4.2-1 shows the input and output voltages that may assist in isolating problems with the DPFC module. Table 4.2-1. DPFC Input and Output Voltages Pin CAUTION Service Manual Voltage Pin 1 +15 V Analog Pin 2 –15 V Analog Pin 3 Analog GND Pin 9 Digital GND Pin 10 +5 V Digital Pin 19 +15 V Valve Power Pin 20 +15 V Valve Power Pin 21 Return Ground of Proportional Valves Pin 22 Return Ground of Proportional Valves Pin 23 Split Valve +24 V Pin 24 Split Valve Return Pin 25 Purge Valve +24 V Pin 26 Purge Valve Return Valve power must be closed on the return ground of the valves. 135 Detector Gas Flow Control for Detector Gases This chapter contains information about the Detector Gas Flow Control modules of the TRACE GC 2000. It also addresses maintenance and troubleshooting issues. Chapter at a Glance… Detector Gas Flow Control Modules ........................................................................ 138 Detector Gas Connections......................................................................................... 143 Service Manual 137 Chapter 4.3 Detector Gas Flow Control for Detector Gases Detector Gas Flow Control Modules Detector Gas Flow Control Modules Detector Gas Flow Control (DGFC) modules are used primarily to control detector gas flow. Flow control is accomplished by applying pressure to a fixed restrictor. The GC microprocessor provides pressure control. The flow range of the module is determined by the fixed restrictor. The pressure sensor gage is accurate to 700 kPa (100 psig). Recommended inlet pressure is 480 kPa (60 psig). Each module is capable of controlling three independent gases. Hardware Configuration AA, Option 401 Figure 4.3-1 shows hardware configuration AA, option 401 for ECD only. Filter Prop Valve Gage P Sensor Make-up path Restrictor 200 cc H2 @ 60 psi 77001-160 980417 Figure 4.3-1. Hardware AA, Option 401 for ECD Only The make-up gas used for the ECD is either N2 (highest sensitivity) or 5% CH4/Ar (greater dynamic range). Calibration The AA module is calibrated with N2 at 13.5 mL/min and 45 mL/min. The tolerance is <2%. 138 Service Manual Chapter 4.3 Detector Gas Flow Control for Detector Gases Detector Gas Flow Control Modules Hardware Configuration AB, Option 402 Figure 4.3-2 shows hardware configuration AB, option 402 for ECD, PID, FPD, and FID without make-up. Filter Prop Valve Gage P Sensor H2 path Gas 1 Restrictor 200 cc H2 @ 60 psi Filter Prop Valve ECD PID FPD FID Gage P Sensor Gas Gas Gas Gas 1 1, 2 (1=make-up) 1, 2 1, 2 Air path Gas 2 Restrictor 600 cc H2 @ 60 psi Make-up path not mounted 77001-1604 980417 Figure 4.3-2. Hardware AB, Option 402 for ECD, PID, FPD, and FID Without Make-Up This module can be configured with a gas # 2 restrictor for delivering reference gas to the TCD (HWD). He, H2, N2, or Ar can be used for this purpose. For ECD operation, N2 or 5% CH4/Ar is plumbed to the Gas 1 input. The Air path is not used. For PID operation, He or N2 can be used as make-up, and is plumbed to the Gas 1 input. He or N2 is also used for the sheath gas, and is plumbed to the Gas 2 input. Calibration The AB module is calibrated using H2 for Gas 1. Gas 1 is calibrated at 20 mL/min and 100 mL/min. The tolerance is <2%. Gas 2 is calibrated using air. Gas 2 is calibrated at 90 mL/min and 300 mL/min. The tolerance is <2%. Service Manual 139 Chapter 4.3 Detector Gas Flow Control for Detector Gases Detector Gas Flow Control Modules Hardware Configuration AC, Option 403 Figure 4.3-3 shows hardware configuration AC, option 403 for ECD, PID, FPD, and FID with make-up. Filter Prop Valve Gage F Sensor H2 path Gas 1 Restrictor 200 cc H2 @ 60 psi Filter Prop Valve Gage F Sensor Air path Gas 2 Restrictor 600 cc Air @ 60 psi Filter Gas 3 Prop Valve ECD FID PID FPD Gas Gas Gas Gas 3 1, 2, 3 2, 3 1, 2, 3 Gage F Sensor Make-up path Restrictor 200 cc H2 @ 60 psi 77001-1605 980417 Figure 4.3-3. Hardware AC, Option 403 for ECD, PID, FPD, and FID With Make-Up For PID operation, He or N2 can be used as make-up, and is plumbed to the Gas 3 input. Sheath gas is connected to the Gas 2 input. The H2 path is not used. Calibration The AC module uses H2 as Gas 1. Gas 1 is calibrated at 30 mL/min and 100 mL/min. The tolerance is <2%. Gas 2 is calibrated using air. Gas 2 is calibrated at 90 mL/min and 300 mL/min. The tolerance is <2%. Gas 3 is calibrated using N2. Gas 3 is calibrated at 13.5 mL/min and 45 mL/min. The tolerance is <2%. 140 Service Manual Chapter 4.3 Detector Gas Flow Control for Detector Gases Detector Gas Flow Control Modules Hardware Configuration AD, Option 404 Figure 4.3-4 shows hardware configuration AD, option 404 for NPD, ECD, PID, FPD, and FID without make-up. Filter Prop Valve Gage P Sensor H2 path Gas 1 Restrictor 10 cc H2 @ 60 psi Filter Prop Valve Gage P Sensor Air path Gas 2 Restrictor 600 cc Air @ 60 psi Filter Gas 3 Prop Valve NPD PID FPD FID Gas Gas Gas Gas 1, 2, 2, 2, 2, 3 3 3 (H2) 3 (H2) Gage P Sensor Make-up path Restrictor 200 cc H2 @ 60 psi 77001-1606 980417 Figure 4.3-4. Hardware AD, Option 404 for NPD, ECD, PID, FPD, and FID Without Make-Up For PID operation, He or N2 may be used as make-up, and is plumbed to the Gas 3 input. He or N2 may also be used as sheath gas, and is plumbed to the Gas 2 input. The H2 path is not used. For FPD and FID operation, the H2 path is not used. Instead, H2 is plumbed to the Gas 3 path. Calibration The AD module is calibrated using H2 as Gas 1. Gas 1 is calibrated at 1.5 mL/min and 5 mL/min. The tolerance is <2%. Gas 2 is calibrated using air. Gas 2 is calibrated at 90 mL/min and 300 mL/min. The tolerance is <2%. Gas 3 is calibrated using N2. Gas 3 is calibrated at 13.5 mL/min and 45 mL/min. The tolerance is <2%. Service Manual 141 Chapter 4.3 Detector Gas Flow Control for Detector Gases Detector Gas Flow Control Modules Hardware Configuration AE Figure 4.3-5 shows hardware configuration AE, which is used for auxiliary gas control. Filter Prop Valve Filter Prop Valve Filter Prop Valve Gage P Sensor Gage P Sensor Gage P Sensor 7700 98 Figure 4.3-5. Hardware AE for Auxiliary Gas Control This module is used for auxiliary gas control. This module is recognized by the GC controller when mounted in detector position three. It includes up to three electronically controlled pressure regulators on a single module. It is necessary to supply this gas to an external restrictor to achieve flow control. 142 Service Manual Chapter 4.3 Detector Gas Flow Control for Detector Gases Detector Gas Connections Detector Gas Connections The following table simplifies the versatility of the different gas modules. The left column describes the information supplied in the column or row to the right of the first column. When the GC is configured for a specific detector/gas module, the microprocessor will automatically turn of the appropriate gas flow path to the detector. For example, an FID used with an AD module would require that H2 be connected to the input fitting labeled Mkup. Or, an ECD used with an AB module would require that the make-up/detector gas be connected to the input fitting labeled H2. Table 4.3-1. Detector Gas Connections Detector Type: FID ECD NPD Installed Module: AB AC AD AA AB AC AD AD Connect Hydrogen to fitting labeled: H2 H2 Mkup — — — — H2 Connect Air to fitting labeled: Air Air Air — — — — Air Connect Make-up gas to1 fitting labeled: — Mkup — Mkup H2 Mkup Mkup Mkup Detector Type: FPD PID TCD Installed Module: AB AC AD AA AB AC AD AB Connect Hydrogen to fitting labeled: H2 H2 Mkup — — — — — Connect Air to fitting labeled: Air Air Air — — Air — — Connect Make-up gas to fitting labeled: — — — — Mkup Mkup Mkup Mkup Connect Sheath gas to2 fitting labeled: — — — — Air — Air — 1. 2. For ECD detectors, the make-up gas is N2 or 5% CH4/Ar. For PID detectors, the sheath gas is N2 or He. WARNING! Hydrogen is a potentially dangerous gas. Refer to Using Hydrogen on page xxiv for safety information. Service Manual 143 Handshake Cables This chapter contains information regarding the different types of handshake cables and connections used with the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter at a Glance… TRACE to TEKMAR 2000/3000 Handshake Cable ................................................ 146 TRACE to TSQ Handshake Cable............................................................................ 147 TRACE to Generic Data System Remote Start ........................................................ 148 TRACE to GCQ........................................................................................................ 149 Autosampler Handshake Cables ............................................................................... 150 Service Manual 145 Chapter 4.4 Handshake Cables TRACE to TEKMAR 2000/3000 Handshake Cable TRACE to TEKMAR 2000/3000 Handshake Cable MINIDIN 6 POS (M) HP - DB25 3 3 5 1 3 22 4 21 (HP - DB25) 5 6 1 2 3 PIN 13 PIN 25 PIN 1 PIN 14 4 MINIDIN 6 POS (M) .650 O.D. MAX CABLE ASSEMBLY REMOTE START TRACE 2000 TO TEKMAR 3000 Figure 4.4-1. TRACE to TEKMAR 2000/3000 handshake cable, # b119521-0002 146 Service Manual Chapter 4.4 Handshake Cables TRACE to TSQ Handshake Cable TRACE to TSQ Handshake Cable 3 6 1 4 7 2 8 5 COLOR CODE : MD-8P REMOTE START IN INHIBIT READY GROUND START RUN READY OUT END RUN 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 N/A 8 SHELL PURPLE BLACK YELLOW ORANGE BLUE GREEN BROWN RED DRAIN TRACE - TSQ INTERFACE 3801 - 4004 Figure 4.4-2. TRACE to TSQ handshake cable, #3801-4004 Service Manual 147 Chapter 4.4 Handshake Cables TRACE to Generic Data System Remote Start TRACE to Generic Data System Remote Start 3 6 1 4 7 2 8 5 COLOR CODE : MD-8P REMOTE START IN INHIBIT READY GROUND START RUN READY OUT END RUN N/A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SHELL BROWN RED ORANGE YELLOW GREEN BLUE PURPLE BLACK 23043457 GC INTEGRATOR START Figure 4.4-3. TRACE to generic data system remote start, #23043457 148 Service Manual Chapter 4.4 Handshake Cables TRACE to GCQ TRACE to GCQ 3 6 1 4 5 9 1 6 7 2 8 5 PIN OUT : MD-8, MALE DE-9, MALE 2ND 3 INH_READY 2 ST_RUN 4 SHELL 3 6 4 5 SHELL TRACE GENERIC TO GCQ REMOTE 3801 - 4003 Figure 4.4-4. TRACE to GCQ, # 3801-4003 Service Manual 149 Chapter 4.4 Handshake Cables Autosampler Handshake Cables Autosampler Handshake Cables THE PRIMARY AS IS THE ONE INTERFACED TO THE AS/GC HANDSHAKE INPUT SECONDARY AS TWIN OUTPUT TWIN OUTPUT GND GC READY INJECT OUT 12 13 19 20 24 (AUX) * PRIMARY AS * * * 12 13 19 20 24 TWIN OUTPUT TWIN OUTPUT GND GC READY INJECT OUT (AUX) Two independent autosampler (AS or HS) use these connections to allow independent operation of either as without moving the AS/GC Handshake Cable. The GC/AS cable should be conneted to the Primary AS. The Primary AS must remain turned on with power even though it may not be used. Figure 4.4-5. Connections for AS2000 Gemini Interconnect Cable and Dual Autosampler Start Cable 150 Service Manual Autosampler Handshake Cables Service Manual Chapter 4.4 Handshake Cables 151 SECTION V Electronic Board Description This section provides a description of the electronic boards in the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 5.1, Analytical Unit, describes the Analytical Unit of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 5.2, Control Unit, describes the Control Unit of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 5.3, Motherboard, describes the Motherboard of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 5.4, Central Processing Unit (CPU), describes the PCB for the Central Processing Unit (CPU) of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 5.5, Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O, chapter describes the Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O (TF & DIO) PCB of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 5.6, Power Control Module, describes the PCB for the Power Control Module (PCM) of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 5.7, Digital Pressure Flow Control, describes the PCB for the Digital Pressure Flow Control (DPFC) of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 5.8, Keypad and Display Panel, describes the PCB for the Keypad and Display Panel of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 5.9, Theory of Detector Cards, describes the Flame Ionization Detector (FID) controller of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 5.10, Flame Ionization Detector Controller, describes the Electron Capture Detector (ECD) controller of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 5.11, Electron Capture Detector Controller, describes the Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector (NPD) controller of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 5.12, Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector Controller, contains a representative block diagram for the following 3 detectors (FPD, PID, and TCD). Chapter 5.13, Flame Photometric Detector Controller (FPD), describes the Flame Photometric Detector (FPD) controller of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 5.14, Photoionization Detector Controller (PID), describes the Photoionization Detector (PID) controller of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 5.15, Thermal Conductivity Detector Controller (TCD), describes the Thermal Conductivity Detector (TCD) controller of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 5.16, Thermocouple Preamplifiers, describes the PCB for the thermocouple preamplifiers of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 5.17, On-Column Semiautomatic Actuator, describes the PCB for an on-column semiautomatic actuator of the TRACE GC 2000. Special Printing Instructions: All schematics in Section 5 (Electronic Board Description) must be printed on Tabloid size paper in order to be viewed correctly. This applies only to the schematics sections of Section 5. The Section 5 chapters themselves can be printed on normal Letter or A4 Letter size paper. Schematic Drawings List Use this table for a listing of all schematics and component layouts in each chapter of Section V. The drawing and layout numbers have been included and chapter numbers are noted for easy reference. PCB Drawing Layout Chapter Analytical Unit Wiring Diagram SC750 — 5.1 Control Unit Wiring Diagram SC751 — 5.2 Motherboard 119828E 119826 5.3 BKPLN-Right Motherboard (alternate) 119828E 119991 5.3 CPU Central Processor Unit 119825B 119823 5.4 TF & DIO Temperature Feedback & Digital I/O 119822E 119820 5.5 Thermocouple Amplifier 119834 119832 5.5 RN4 Temperature Stabilizer 119978 119976 5.5 BKPLN-Standard Description PCM Power Control Module 119837D 119835 5.6 DPFC Digital Pressure Flow Control SE 1391 sh.2 PC 1111 5.7 KYPD & DISP Keypad and Display Panel 119841B FID Flame Ionization Detector SE 1388 sh.4 PC 1105 5.9 ECD Electron Capture Detector SE 1389 sh.5 PC 1106 5.10 NPD Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector SE 1424 sh.5 PC 1107 5.11 FPD Flame Photometric Detector SE 1436 sh.4 PC 1109 5.12 PID Photoionization Detector SE 1437 sh.5 PC 1437 5.13 TCD Thermal Conductivity Detector SE 1390 sh.3 PC 1113 5.14 Thermocouple Preamplifiers 119834E 119832 5.15 On-Column Semiautomatic Actuator 119947B 119945 5.16 NOTE 5.8 Schematics and component layouts are located in the Schematics and Component Layout section of the chapters listed in the table above. Analytical Unit This chapter describes the Analytical Unit of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter at a Glance… General Description .................................................................................................. 158 Service Manual 157 Chapter 5.1 Analytical Unit General Description General Description The TRACE GC 2000 Analytical Unit is divided in four main compartments: • Oven compartment • Injector/Detector (INJ/DET) cassette • Digital Pressure Flow Control/Detector Gas Flow Control (DPFC/DGFC) compartment • Power Control Module (PCM) compartment The following parts are located in the Oven compartment: • Oven fan • Oven motor • Oven heater • Oven temperature sensor The following parts are located in the INJ/DET cassette: • Two injectors • Two base bodies for detectors • Heaters • Temperature sensors The following parts are located in the DPFC/DGFC compartment: • Main DPFC PCB • Two DPFC modules (carrier gases) • Three DGFC modules (detector gases) The following parts are located in the Power Control Module compartment: • Main input voltage components (breaker, filter, and others) • Power supply • SSR devices The TRACE GC 2000 Wiring Diagram (see next page) illustrates internal cables and connectors used to connect all heaters, temperature sensors, boards, fans and transformers. 158 Service Manual MOD/RDM MODIFICHE FIRMA/VISTO DATA FAIR-RATE P/N 0443167251 GI/VE FAN OF REAR PANEL GI/VE FC1281 S.P.I. FC1293 FC1262-J34 BP FC367-L=500 J33 BP FC1261-J32 BP FC1271 J37 BP NPD DET OVEN RTD TC PTV-FC1277 DET B RTD INLET B RTD J12 BP DET A RTD J21 BP P6 STEPPER MOTOR FC1275 J18 BP FC1051 - L=650 FC1032 J4 OC ACT PCB FC1032 J3 OC ACT PCB J20 BP FC1263-J29 BP FC1265-J31 BP FC1265 FC803 - L=1200 FC428 FC428 P9 FC1293-J30 BP P1 CARR.1-RIGHT FC367 L=150 P3 DET.1-RIGHT L=250 SEC COOL VALVE P5 DET.3-AUX L=250 EPC P.C.B. FC367 P4 DET.2-LEFT L=150 P2 CARR.2-LEFT 2 x FC1032 FC803 - L=1200 FC1282 P8 A1 B2 B1 N L OC1 L A2 POWER OC2 N SAFETY RELAY MAIN FILTER FC1263 K1 S1-2 J22 BREAKER FC1275 FC1288 GI/VE FC1051 J2 FC1277 TB2 DET B DET B DET A DET A INLET B INLET B J16 J17 1 II ˚ J19 K1-A2 FC1288 FC1277 HEATER HEATER DUAL NPD TRF K1-A1 K1-B1 S1-4 S1-2 FC1281 INLET A FC1289 J11 TB1 J13 INLET B COOL FAN VALVE OVEN JET SEPARATOR 1 J18 K1-B2 Q1-3 Q1-2 I˚ J8 COOL FAN FC1267 FC1282 OVEN HEATER J15 GI/VE J16 = SINGLE VOLTAGE BLOWER MOTOR J20 J21 J22 J23 RTD RTD Jumper 1-3 for Ignitor TRF Jumper 2-3 for Main TRF J9 J14 J19 OVEN BLOWER STEPPER MOTOR J7 INLET A HEATER RTD OVEN HEATER J20 FC1290 FC1274 L=250 1 J10 Q1-2 GI/VE FC1274 L=250 Jumper 1-3 for Single NPD Jumper 2-3 for Dual NPD J6 J5 J12 Q1-3 FC1274 L=250 Jumper 1-2 for 120V Jumper 2-3 for 230V 1 THREE WAY VALVE SVE VALVE 1 J4 OVEN HEATER J3 J1 FC1282 OVEN BLOWER FC1051 - L=650 FC1275 FC1288 RTD S1-3 S1-4 J18 J20 J22 J21 S1-3 S1-1 FC803 2 x FC1032 S1-1 J21 COIL FC1271 POWER CONTROL P.C.B. J24 POWER SUPPLY P.C.B. II˚ I˚ FC1290 FID TRF INLET B DET B DET A FC1269 INLET A J2 J1 FC1267 FC1289 POS. DENOMINAZIONE DISEGNO disegnatore strumento GC TRACE 2000 Series DOOR SWITCH PEZZI assieme A.Lamperti CODICE data 21/7/98 sostituisce scala codice visto ANALITICAL UNIT (230V) particolare A2 Toll. Gen. + 0,1 + 30' - Wiring Diagram Fil. 6H-6g 1,6 THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A. NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED, DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A. THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A. AT ANY TIME. modif. disegno n SC750 159 Control Unit This chapter describes the Control Unit of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter at a Glance… General Description .................................................................................................. 162 Service Manual 161 Chapter 5.2 Control Unit General Description General Description The primary requirement for any GC is multiple independent temperature controlled zones. A GC also needs various input and output signals to synchronize and control peripheral devices. In the TRACE GC 2000, a Motorola 68332 microprocessor controls all functions. NOTE Throughout this manual, the term microprocessor pertains to the Motorola 68332, unless otherwise specified. Figure 5.2-1 shows a generalized block diagram of the TRACE GC 2000 base unit. Figure 5.2-1. Block Diagram of Base Unit The base unit contains six PCBs in the main electronic chassis, plus the Power Control Module (PCM). The main electronic chassis contains the following PCBs: • Motherboard • Central processing unit • Temperature feedback and digital I/0 • Detector controllers (three boards) The Power Control Module (PCM) contains an additional PCB. The functional blocks shown in Figure 5.2-1 are distributed among the PCBs. 162 Service Manual Chapter 5.2 Control Unit General Description Figure 5.2-2 illustrates the circuit functions in greater detail. Figure 5.2-2. Expanded Block Diagram of Circuit Functions The TRACE GC 2000 Block Diagram and the wiring drawing SC751 (see next two pages) show all internal cables and connectors used to connect all boards. Service Manual 163 MOD/RDM MODIFICHE DATA FIRMA/VISTO STEWARD P/N 28A2029-0A0 FC1261-J1 PWR 3WAY J12 J6 DISP LAY J7 FC1265-P9 EPC SVE VLV FC1275 J34 J8 GI/VE FC1051-L=650 FC803-L=1200 SEC COOL VLV FC1032 OPEN VLV FC1032 CLOSE VLV FC1293-P6 EPC STEPPER MOTOR FC1294 OC ACT J13 PWR FC367-L=500 FC1263 P8 EPC FC1262-J11 PWR DET A RTD DET B RTD OVEN RTD TC PTV-FC1277 FC1271 TRASFORMER INLET B RTD VLV FAIR-RITE P/N 0443665806 GI/VE EARTH J5 J4 J3 J1 J2 J46 J47 J45 J43 HYDROGEN SENSOR CPU BOARD DETECTOR C DETECTOR B DETECTOR A J19 J25 J18 J26 J17 J27 J16 J28 J38 J21 J33 8P J30 AS SIMUL. J3 SIGNALS J4 J10 J1A J32 AUTOSAMPLER 6P OC ACT P.C.B. THERMOCOUPLE CARD ADAPTER GENERIC HANDSHAKE J40 J42 = INLET A RTD J46 = JET SEP. RTD J47 = VLV OVEN RTD J37 FAIR-RITE P/N 0443166651 START/STOP INT 238.450.40 FC1293 (GND) J36 FC1278 J31 J2 J35 TIMED EVENTS SUB "D" 15 P. MALE J39 J15 (close) TEMP FEEDBACK BOARD J41 J42 GI/VE EARTH J23 J24 TB1 RTD INPUTS POWER UNIT J44 J22 J20 VALVE OUTPUTS FAIR-RITE P/N 0443166651 J14 GC PHASE (open) KEYB OAR D and J29 J48 OVEN CRYO 4P VALVE J11 INLET CRYO 4P VALVE BACKPLANE P.C.B. CPU CARD POL SOURCE SIGNAL SIGNAL GND 10V 1V 0V SIGNAL GND 10V 1V 0V GND 10V 1V 0V FC445 FC445 FC1276 AUTOSAMPLER POL/IGN COMPUTER NPD CARD HEATER ECD CARD FID CARD HWD CARD FPD CARD PID CARD FC1266 NPD DET SECONDARY L=2500 COMPUTER FC1276 L=1500 AUTOSAMPLER FC445 FC445 DENOMINAZIONE POS. PEZZI DISEGNO disegnatore strumento GC TRACE 2000 Series assieme A.Lamperti CODICE data 21/7/98 sostituisce scala codice visto CONTROL UNIT A2 Toll. Gen. + 0,1 + 30' - particolare Wiring Diagram Fil. 6H-6g 1,6 THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A. NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED, DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A. THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A. AT ANY TIME. modif. disegno n SC751 165 DET A BASE 2 DET_BASE_B_HI-9TB2-8) DET_BASE_B_LO_(TB2-7) VALVE_OV_HI_(TB1-4) VALVE_OV_LO_(TB1-3) DET B BASE 1 2 JET SEPARATOR 1 2 PTV_HI_48V_(J7-1) PTV_LO_48V_(J7-2) 1 2 PRI2_HI PRI2_LO SEC2_HI SEC2_LO PRI1_HI PRI1_LO PRI2_HI PRI2_LO PIN HEADER - INTERNAL CS0* +5VDC MOSI +5VDC MISO GND SCLK GND SCLK* GND TRACE J48 SPI ISOLATOR BOARD VALVE OVEN 1 2 3 1 2 3 PRI1_HI PRI1_LO Voltage Selection Header J? J? Heaters For Temperature Controlled Zones JET_SEP_HI_(TB1-2) JET_SEP_LO_(TB1-1) J12 STEPPER MOTOR TF and DIO (TC Amps Optional) CPU Detector C Detector B Detector A J3-1 Line Voltage J3-2 Selection J3-3 J4-1 NPD J4-2 Transformer J4-3 Selection Power Module OC FAN OC FAN OVEN BLOWER TRACE GC 2000 Block Diagram +5VDCB GNDB +15VDCB J29 15VRETB EPC -15VDCB POWER SPARE +15V_VALVE 15V_VRET 1 Power Control PCB DC_8.5VAC_2 J37 DC_8.5VAC_0 NPD DET 3 DC_8.5VAC_1 XFMR SEC 2 DET_BASE_A_HI_(TB2-6) DET_BASE_A_LO_(TB2-5) TPU0 TPU1 TPU2 TPU3 TPU4 TPU5 TPU6 TPU7 TPU8 TPU9 TPU10 TPU15 QSM_CS6* QSM_SCLK QSM_MOSI QSM_MISO WD_TIM OVERTEMP VMON IA_CF IB_CF +5V_PRES +15V_PRES +24V_PRES -15V_PRES DB_8.5VAC_2 J36 DB_8.5VAC_0 NPD DET 2 DB_8.5VAC_1 XFMR SEC OV_HTR_LO_(J18) SM_PH0 SM_PH1 SM_DP0&1 SM_PH2 SM_PH3 SM_DP2&3 DA_8.5VAC_2 J35 DA_8.5VAC_0 NPD DET 1 DA_8.5VAC_1 XFMR SEC OV_TRIAC_MT2_(J20) OV_TRIAC_G_(J19) TPU0_(J13-7) TPU1_(J13-8) TPU2_(J13-9) TPU3_(J13-10) TPU4_(J13-11) TPU5_(J13-12) TPU6_(J13-13) TPU7_(J13-14) TPU8_(J13-15) TPU9_(J13-16) TPU10_(J13-17) TPU15_(J13-20) QSM_CS6_(J13-1) QSM_SCLK_(J13-4) QSM_MOSI_(J13-2) QSM_MISO_(J13-3) WD_TIM_(J13-5) OVERTEMP_(J13-6) VMON_(J13-23) IA_CF_(J13-21) IB_CF_(J13-22) +5V_PRES_(J13-18) +15V_PRES_(J13-19) +24V_PRES_(J13-24) -15V_PRES_(J13-25) J32 POWER CONTROL MODULE DRIVE SIGNALS INLET B OVEN_INT_COM_(J8-1) OVEN_INT_NO_(J8-2) TB1 H2 MONITOR DETA_AX48 DETA_AX48 DETA_AXRT DETA_AXRT DETB_AX48 DETB_AX48 DETB_AXRT DETB_AXRT DETC_AX48 DETC_AX48 DETC_AXRT DETC_AXRT 8.0VAC_2 8.0VAC_2 8.0VAC_1 8.0VAC_1 1 INLET_B_HI_(TB2-4) INLET_B_LO_(TB2-3) J6-1 Ignitor/Main J6-2 Transformer J6-3 Selection H2_SENS GND J34 POWER SUPPLY 2 +5VDC +5VDC GND GND +15VDC 15VRET -15VDC +24VDC +24VDC 24VRET 24VRET +24VUN +24VUN 24VUNRET 24VUNRET SPARE INLET A SPARE_(J11-9) 24V_RET_(J11-14) 24V_RET_(J11-15) +24V_(J11-1) +24V_(J11-16) -15V_VLV_(J11-12) -15V_VLV_(J11-13) -15V_VLV_RET_(J11-10) -15V_VLV_RET_(J11-11) -15VDC_(J11-2) 15RET_(J11-3) +15VDC_(J11-4) GND_(J11-5) GND_(J11-6) +5VDC_(J11-7) +5VDC_(J11-8) 1 INLET_A_HI_(TB2-1) INLET_A_LO(TB2-1) 8.0VAC_1_(J1-9) 8.0VAC_1_(J1-10) 8.0VAC_2_(J1-11) 8.0VAC_2_(J1-12) DETC_AXRT_(J1-13) DETC_AXRT_(J1-14) DETC_AX48_(J1-15) DETC_AX48_(J1-16) DETB_AXRT_(J1-1) DETB_AXRT_(J1-2) DETB_AX48_(J1-3) DETB_AX48_(J1-4) DETA_AXRT_(J1-5) DETA_AXRT_(J1-6) DETA_AX48_(J1-7) DETA_AX48_(J1-8) 2 INLET_B_OC_FAN_HI_(TB1-6) INLET_B_OC_FAN_LO_(TB1-5) OVEN +5V_(J10-1) +5V_(J10-2) +5V_(J10-3) RET_(J10-4) RET_(J10-5) RET_(J10-6) RET_(J10-7) +15V_(J10-8) +15V_(J10-9) -15V_RET_(J10-10) -15V_(J10-11) KEY_(J10-12) +24V_(J10-13) 1 BREAKER INLET_A_OC_FAN_HI_(TB1-8) INLET_A_OC_FAN_LO_(TB1-7) 1 PS_LINE_HI_(J24-2) PS_LINE_LO_(J24-1) FAN_LINE_LO_(J23-2) FAN_LINE_HI_(J23-1) RELAY_CONT+_(J2-2) RELAY_CONT-_(J2-1) BLOWER_LEAD_1_(J17-1) BLOWER_LEAD_2_(J17-2) BLOWER_LEAD_3_(J17-3) BLOWER_LEAD_4_(J17-4) BLOWER_LEAD_5_(J17-5) OVEN TRIAC LINE_IN_SW_HI_(J20) LINE_IN_SW_LO_(J18) XFMR2_P1_HI_(J14-1) XFMR2_P1_LO_(J14-2) XFMR2_P2_HI_(J14-3) XFMR2_P2_LO_(J15-4) RELAY XFMR1_P1_HI_(J15-1) XFMR1_P1_LO_(J15-2) XFMR1_P2_HI_(J15-3) XFMR1_P2_LO_(J15-4) XFMR1_8VAC_1_(J5-1) XFMR1_8VAC_2_(J5-2) XFMR1_48VAC_LO_(J5-3) XFMR1_48V_HI_(J5-4) LINE_IN_HI_(J21) LINE_IN_LO_(J22) +24V NC-KEY -15V -15V_RET +12V +12V RET RET RET RET +5V +5V +5V 166 PL_HI PL_LO CHASSIS LINE FILTER POWER J30 EPC COMM J31 EPC VALVE CONTROL J15 INLET A VALVE 1 J16 INLET A VALVE 2 J17 INLET A VALVE 3 J18 INLET B VALVE 1 J19 INLET B VALVE 2 J20 INLET B VALVE 3 J22 DET A VALVE 1 J23 DET A VALVE 2 J24 DET A VALVE 3 J25 DET B VALVE 1 J26 DET B VALVE 2 J27 DET B VALVE 3 J28 DET C VALVE J21 THREE WAY VALVE TWV CS10* MOSI MISO SCLK GND SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE +24VUN IA_V1 +24VUN IA_V2 +24VUN IB_V1 +24VUN IB_V2 +24VUN IA_V1 +24VUN IA_V2 +24VUN IA_V3 +24VUN IB_V1 +24VUN IB_V2 +24VUN IB_V3 +24VUN DA_G1 +24VUN DA_G2 +24VUN DA_G3 +24VUN DB_G1 +24VUN DB_G2 +24VUN DB_G3 +24VUN DC_XM +24VUN FAN J40 AUTOSAMPLER SIGNALS SUPPLY J39 GENERIC HANDSHAKE J33 POWER CONTROL MODULE CONTROL SIGNALS J13 KBRD & DISP MOTHERBOARD J47 VALVE OVEN RTD J42 INLET A RTD J41 OVEN RTD SPARE RUNNING END_RUN RDY_OUT ST_RUN GND INH_RDY RMT_ST SPARE RDY_OUT ST_RUN GND INH_RDY RMT_ST J11 INLET CRYO VALVE +5VPU TPU12 J10 OVEN CRYO VALVE +5VPU TPU11 J38 TIMED EVENTS J14 GC PHASE TEV8 GND TEV7 GND TEV6 GND TEV5 GND TEV4 GND TEV3 GND TEV2 GND TEV1 4 PIN DIN CONNECTOR GC_PH0 GC_PH1 GC_PH2 GC_PH3 GC_PH4 GC_PH5 GND SPARE SPARE SPARE CHASSI DISP_SER +5VDC +5VDC +5VDC GND GND GND DISP_CLK CS1* SCLK MOSI MISO CHASSI J46 JET SEP RTD JS_RTD+ RET10 J45 DET B BASE RTD DB_RTD+ RET6 J44 DET A BASE RTD DA_RTD+ RET5 J43 INLET B RTD IB_RTD+ RET3 T T T T T T MOTOR STEPPER 15V_VRET +15V_VALVE SPARE -15VDCB 15RETB +15VDCB GNDB +5VDCB CS10* MOSI MISO SCLK GND SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE SPARE +24VUN IA_V1 +24VUN IA_V2 +24VUN IB_V1 +24VUN IB_V2 DOOR LOCK VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE VALVE Miscellaneous Gas Control Valves EPC MODULE Electronics Compartment 8 PIN DIN CONNECTOR 6 PIN DIN CONNECTOR 4 PIN DIN CONNECTOR Rear Panel 15 PIN "D" CONNECTOR PIN HEADER - INTERNAL CHASSI DISP_SER +5VDC +5VDC +5VDC GND GND DISPLAY MODULE GND DISP_CLK CS1* SCLK MOSI MISO CHASSIS VO_RTD+ RET11 OV_RTD+ RET0 IA_RTD+ RET1 1 PTV (48V) 2 SEC1_HI SEC1_LO SEC1_A SEC1_CT SEC1_B SEC2_A SEC2_CT SEC2_B T RTD Feedback for Temperature Controlled Zones Motherboard This chapter describes the Motherboard of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter at a Glance… Theory of Operations ................................................................................................ 168 Adjustment Procedures ............................................................................................. 173 Schematics and Component Layout ......................................................................... 173 Service Manual 167 Chapter 5.3 Motherboard Theory of Operations Theory of Operations The Motherboard provides communication between the TRACE GC 2000 PCBs and external devices. NOTE The schematic for the motherboard is labeled backplane. Throughout this manual, the term motherboard will be used instead of backplane; however, the two terms refer to the same thing. Most of the temperature control channels use RTDs (PT100) as feedback elements. All of these signals are routed through the motherboard. Most are connected to the motherboard in an area near PCB connector J1. Certain detectors require an additional temperature control channel. These detectors route the signals through the detector PCB and onto the motherboard. Any time that a temperature channel does not have an RTD connected, the RTD signal must be shorted to ground. In the connector area near J1, shorted connectors are installed wherever an open RTD connector exists. For the detectors, there are jumpers (J6-J8) located adjacent to each of the detector card connectors (J3–J5). When a detector is installed that requires an additional heater, the jumper should be positioned on the top two pins. When a detector is installed that does not require an additional heater, the jumper should be positioned on the bottom two pins. Three connectors (J3–J5) on the motherboard are dedicated to detector PCBs. Any detector card can be installed in any of these three locations. If the detector card is for a Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector (NPD), then a cable from the optional nitrogen phosphorous (NP) transformer must be plugged into the appropriate NP power connector (J35-J37). There are three NP power connectors on the motherboard, one for each detector card location. These are located at the bottom of the motherboard adjacent to each detector card location. One connector (J2) is dedicated to the CPU PCB. One connector (J1) is dedicated to the Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O (TF & DIO) PCB. See Schematics and Component Layout. A set of connectors is provided for ON/OFF control of the various gases when the DPFC option is not installed. These are located on the right end of the motherboard in an area labeled VALVE OVEN FTD. Table 5.3-1 indicates the function of each nonDPFC gas ON/OFF control connector. 168 Service Manual Chapter 5.3 Motherboard Theory of Operations Table 5.3-1. Non-DPFC Gas ON/OFF Control Connectors Connector / Description Valve Voltage J15 / Inlet A Valve 1 24 Volt J16 / Inlet A Valve 2 24 Volt J17 / Inlet A Valve 3 24 Volt J18 / Inlet B Valve 1 24 Volt J19 / Inlet B Valve 2 24 Volt J20 / Inlet B Valve 3 24 Volt J22 / Detector A Valve 1 12 Volt J23 / Detector A Valve 2 12 Volt J24 / Detector A Valve 3 12 Volt J25 / Detector B Valve 1 12 Volt J26 / Detector B Valve 2 12 Volt J27 / Detector B Valve 3 12 Volt J28 / Detector C 12 Volt J21 / Three Way Valve 24 Volt In the lower right corner of the motherboard is a connection (See the PCB Motherboard/Backplane Standard [119826] Layout for J48 in the section labeled On_Col Semi Auto Actuator and/or SPI Isolator Board), for a piggy-back PCB, which controls the semiautomatic on-column actuator. Two piggy-back boards may be stacked if the TRACE GC 2000 has two semiautomatic on-column actuators. Five connectors are positioned on the motherboard to provide control signals to peripheral devices from the rear panel of the TRACE GC 2000. These connectors are: Service Manual • Timed Event • Generic Handshake • Autosampler • Oven Cryo Valve • Inlet Cryo Valve 169 Chapter 5.3 Motherboard Theory of Operations Figure 5.3-1 shows the Timed Event connector, which provides generically timed control signals. Figure 5.3-1. Front View of Timed Event Connector (J38, 15-Pin Female) Individual pin assignments for the Timed Event connector, and associated control signals and electrical characteristics, are indicated in Table 5.3-2. Table 5.3-2. Timed Event Connector Pin Number Signal Electrical Characteristics 1 TEV 1 Open Collector, 25 V Max, 250 mA Current Sink 3 TEV 2 Open Collector, 25 V Max, 250 mA Current Sink 5 TEV 3 Open Collector, 25 V Max, 250 mA Current Sink 7 TEV 4 Open Collector, 25 V Max, 250 mA Current Sink 9 TEV 5 Open Collector, 25 V Max, 250 mA Current Sink 11 TEV 6 Open Collector, 25 V Max, 250 mA Current Sink 13 TEV 7 Open Collector, 25 V Max, 250 mA Current Sink 15 TEV 8 Open Collector, 25 V Max, 250 mA Current Sink 2,4,6,8,10,12,14 GND Figure 5.3-2 shows the Generic Handshake connector (J39, MINIDIN 8-Pin Female Circular), which provides generic handshake input/output control signals. Figure 5.3-2. Front View of Generic Handshake Connector NOTE 170 Signals on the Generic Handshake connector and the Autosampler connector are electrically parallel. Service Manual Chapter 5.3 Motherboard Theory of Operations Individual pin assignments for the Generic Handshake connector, and associated control signals and electrical characteristics, are indicated Table 5.3-3. Table 5.3-3. Generic Handshake Connector Pin Number Signal Electrical Characteristics 1 Remote Start—This signal is an input to the GC to signal that the run should start. Polarity is software selectable. TTL Input 2 Inhibit Ready—This signal is an input to the GC to indicate that the GC is not ready to start a run. Polarity is software selectable. TTL Input 3 Ground 4 Start Run—This signal is an output from the GC to signal external devices that a run has started. Polarity is software selectable. Open Collector, 20 V Max, 150 mA Current Sink 5 Ready Out—This signal is an output from the GC to signal external devices that the GC is ready to start a run. Polarity is software selectable. Open Collector, 20 V Max, 150 mA Current Sink 6 End Run—This signal is an output from the GC to signal external devices that the GC run has ended. Polarity is software selectable. Open Collector, 20 V Max, 150 mA Current Sink 7 Prep Run—This signal is an output from the GC to signal external devices that the GC is in the Prep Run condition. Polarity is software selectable. Open Collector, 20 V Max, 150 mA Current Sink 8 Not Used N/A Figure 5.3-3 shows the Autosampler connector (J40, MINIDIN 6-Pin Female Circular), which provides autosampler input/output control signals. Figure 5.3-3. Front View of Autosampler Connector NOTE Service Manual Signals on the Autosampler connector and the Generic Handshake connector are electrically parallel. 171 Chapter 5.3 Motherboard Theory of Operations Individual pin assignments for the Autosampler connector, and associated control signals and electrical drive capabilities, are indicated in Table 5.3-4. Table 5.3-4. Autosampler Connector Pin Number Electrical Drive Capability Signal 1 Remote Start—This signal is an input to the GC to signal that the run should start. Polarity is software selectable. TTL Input 2 Inhibit Ready—This signal is an input to the GC to indicate that the GC should not go Ready. Polarity is software selectable. TTL Input 3 Ground 4 Start Run—This signal is an output from the GC to signal external devices that a run has started. Polarity is software selectable. Open Collector, 20 V Max, 150 mA Current Sink 5 Ready Out—This signal is an output from the GC to signal external devices that the GC is Ready to start a run. Polarity is software selectable. Open Collector, 20 V Max, 150 mA Current Sink 6 Not Used N/A Figure 5.3-4 shows the Oven Cryo Valve (J10, MINIDIN 4-Pin Female Circular) and Inlet Cryo Valve connector (J11, MINIDIN 4-Pin Female Circular), which provide all input/output control signals to control an external cryo valve module. Figure 5.3-4. Front View of Oven Cryo Valve and Inlet Cryo Valve Connector Pin assignments for both the Oven Cryo Valve and the Inlet Cryo Valve connectors are indicated in Table 5.3-5. Table 5.3-5. Oven Cryo Valve and Inlet Cryo Valve Connectors Pin Number 172 Signal 1 Current Drive 2,3 No Connect 4 Cryo Control Signal Electrical Drive Capability ~10 mA drive for LED in Optoisolator Service Manual Chapter 5.3 Motherboard Adjustment Procedures Other connectors provide interchassis power distribution and communication. These connectors are itemized in Table 5.3-6. Table 5.3-6. Other Connectors Connector Function J13 Communication with Keypad and Display Panel J34 System Power Distribution to Motherboard J29 Power to DPFC Module J30 Communication with the DPFC J31 Valve Control (ON/OFF) in the DPFC J33 Communication with the Power Control Module J12 Oven Stepper Motor Control Adjustment Procedures No field adjustments are necessary. Schematics and Component Layout The schematics and component layout information for the motherboard (backplane) is listed below in Table 5.3-7. The number of drawings has been included for each schematic and its corresponding layout. There are nine drawings for reference in this section. Table 5.3-7. Motherboard Schematics Board BKPLN-Standard BKPLN-Right NOTE Service Manual PN Drawing Layout 23648350 119828E, 1–7 119826, 1 119996-0001 119828E, 1–7 119991, 1 The last two drawings in this section are the layout of the motherboard. One drawing is for the standard version, and the other is for the right version. 173 A B C D REV 1 ECO NO. DATE 1 Initial Proto04-18-97 2 Alpha Hwr 05-29-97 DRN 4183 01-19-98 A B C D BY CHK 1 ECO 31529 2-1-98 M GARRETT ECO 31549 4-8-98 L BALDWIN ECO 31552 4-8-98 L BALDWIN J COTTRELL 2 2 3 3 M. GARRETT M. GARRETT 4 01-19-98 04-10-97 TRACE, BACKPLANE 4 E 119828 01-19-98 A B C B 1 7 D 175 A B BLOCK 1 C D DIAGRAM, MOTHERBOARD VALVE OUTPUTS J15 - J28 J1 INLET VALVE GC PHASE J14 EPC VALVE CTL (SPI) J31 TEMP FEEDBACK BOARD RTD INPUTS J41 - J47 SPI PCB 2 J5 DETECTOR B DETECTOR A STEPPER MOTOR CTRL J12 IFACE J13 DETECTOR BUS C DETECTOR BUS B DETECTOR BUS B DETECTOR BUS A DETECTOR BUS A J30 PWR CTRL MOD (SPI) J33 AUTOSAMPLER J40 J4 DETECTOR C CPU BOARD EPC COMM (SPI) GEN HNDSHK J39 J3 J2 CRYO J11 KBD-DISPL (SPI) TIMED EVENTS OUTPUTS J38 1 OVEN CRYO VALVE J10 ISOLATOR (SPII) J9 ON-COL SEMI-AUTO ACTUATOR J9 CPU BUS CPU BUS DETECTOR BUS CPU BUS A 2 CPU BUS SPI ISO. BOARD +5VDC GND SPI BUS SPI BUS SPI BUS SPI BUS SPI BUS 3 NPD DET1 XFMR J35 +5V GND +15V -15V +24VDC AGND 24VRET 4 SERIAL EEPROM 3 +5VDC GND POWER CONTROL MODULE INPUT J34 +5V GND +15V -15V AGND +24VDC POWER CONTROL MODULE INPUT J32 +5V GND +15V -15V AGND 8.5VAC 0V 8.5VAC +5V GND +24VDC +15V 24VRET -15V 8.0VAC 48VAC AGND NPD DET2 XFMR J36 8.5VAC 0V 8.5VAC NPD DET3 XFMR J37 8.5VAC 0V 8.5VAC +5V GND +24VDC +15V 24VRET -15V 8.0VAC 48VAC AGND +5V GND +24VDC +15V 24VRET -15V 8.0VAC 48VAC AGND 12-15-97 PWR BUS PWR BUS PWR BUS 4 24VRET TRACE, 8.0VAC BACKPLANE 48VAC 119828 A 176 B C 2 D 7 A B C D TEMPERATURE-FEEDBACK BOARD CONNECTOR J38 J1 -15VDC 15VRET TEV6 TEV7 +24VDC TEV8 TP27 TP81 TP83 TP85 TP87 TP82 TP84 TP86 1 -15V_VALVE TP60 8 7 5 6 4 2 R7 3 Generic Handshake 1 1 15 21.00W 1 TP59 R6 1 SHIELD 15 1.00W 2 CR23 1 2 J28 -15V_VALVE J_DC_XM 1 2 -15V_VALVE J_DB_V3 1 2 -15V_VALVE J_DB_V2 1 2 -15V_VALVE J_DB_V1 1 2 -15V_VALVE J_DA_V3 1 2 -15V_VALVE J_DA_V2 1 2 -15V_VALVE J_DA_V1 1 2 CR21 2 Detector C Valve J27 Detector B Valve 3 1 9 10 11 TP58 R5 15 21.00W R4 15 21.00W R3 15 21.00W 1 1 2 CR17 J26 Detector B Valve 2 TP88 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -15V_VALVE TP28 1 1 TP41 ST_RUN RDY_OUT END_RUN RUNNING J40 17 16 TP21 Timed Events 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 1 +24VDC 15VALVE_RET 24VRET -15V_VALVE RESET~ J39 RMT_ST~ INH_RDY 1 TEV5 1 SHIELD To To To To To To J2 J33 J33 J33 J33 J33 [4] [4] [4] [4] [4] [4] TP57 RMT_ST~ INH_RDY ST_RUN RDY_OUT TB1 H2_SENS 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 6 5 4 1 3 2 1 1 2 CR20 J25 Detector B Valve 1 Autosampler Signals TP56 1 SHIELD 1 2 CR16 1 VMON OVERTEMP WD_TIM IB_CF IA_CF TEV8 TEV7 TEV6 TEV5 TEV4 TEV3 TEV2 TEV1 TWV DC_XM DB_V3 DB_V2 DB_V1 DA_V3 DA_V2 DA_V1 IB_V3 IB_V2 IB_V1 IA_V3 IA_V2 IA_V1 H2_SENS GC_PH5 GC_PH4 GC_PH3 GC_PH2 GC_PH1 GC_PH0 1 J24 Detector A Valve 3 7 8 9 H2 Monitor TP54 2 R1 1 15 1.00W 1 2 CR19 1 2 TP55 R2 1 15 21.00W 1 2 J23 CR13 1 Detector A Valve 2 J22 Detector A Valve 1 2 TP53 CR9 2 TP63 CR14 2 CR10 2 TP62 2 J47 Valve Oven RTD (AD Ch 11) VO_RTD+ RX4 RET11 2 1 GC_PH0 GC_PH1 GC_PH2 GC_PH3 GC_PH4 GC_PH5 J46 Jet Separator RTD (AD Ch 10) JS_RTD+ RX5 RET10 2 1 2 RET6 2 1 2 1 CR24 2 +24VDC IA_V2 1 2 +24VDC IA_V1 1 2 +24VDC TWV 1 2 IB_V2 IB_V1 IA_V2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 J17 Inlet A Valve 3 J16 Inlet A Valve 2 Inlet A Valve 1 3 J21 1 CR22 2 1 CR18 2 1 Three Way Valve CR15 2 1 2 1 CR12 J31 IA_V1 +24VDC +24VDC +24VDC +24VDC To J5 - Det C Aux RTD [5] (AD Ch 9) RET9 DBX_RTD+ +24VDC [5] To J4 - Det B Aux RTD (AD Ch 8) RET8 EPC Valve Control 1 DAX_RTD+ RX3 1 2 Inlet B Valve 1 J15 TP61 DCX_RTD+ RX1 +24VDC IA_V3 Inlet B Valve 2 J18 TP66 Det A Base RTD (AD Ch 5) DA_RTD+ RX2 1 2 J19 GC Phase J44 RET5 +24VDC IB_V1 Inlet B Valve 3 Det B Base RTD (AD Ch 6) DB_RTD+ RX6 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 1 1 J45 RX7 VO_RTD+ RET10_11 JS_RTD+ DCX_RTD+ RET8_9 DBX_RTD+ DAX_RTD+ RET6_7 DB_RTD+ DA_RTD+ RET3_5 IB_RTD+ IA_RTD+ RET0_1 OV_RTD+ CR8 J14 1 [5] [5] [5] [5] [5] [5] [5] [5] [5] [4] [4] +5VDC [4] [4] [4] ALM1 [6] 1 [6] 1 J3.A25 J3.C26 J3.A26 J4.A25 J4.C26 J4.A26 J5.A25 J5.C26 J5.A26 J2.B11 J2.A11 J2.C10 J2.B10 J2.B9 U2.21 U2.37 +24VDC IB_V2 1 1 TP65 To To To To To To To To To To To To To To To To 2 BEEPER~ CR11 1 2 1 1 RUNNING END_RUN RDY_OUT ST_RUN INH_RDY RMT_ST~ DETC_2 DETC_1 DETC_0 DETB_2 DETB_1 DETB_0 DETA_2 DETA_1 DETA_0 QSM_CS5~ QSM_CS4~ QSM_CS3~ QSM_CS2~ QSM_MISO TFB_SCLK TFB_MOSI +24VDC IB_V3 1 1 TP64 J20 1 1 4 TEV4 +15VDC 1 3 TEV3 +5VDC 1 2 TEV2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 1 C32 B32 A32 C31 B31 A31 C30 B30 A30 C29 B29 A29 C28 B28 A28 C27 B27 A27 C26 B26 A26 C25 B25 A25 C24 B24 A24 C23 B23 A23 C22 B22 A22 C21 B21 A21 C20 B20 A20 C19 B19 A19 C18 B18 A18 C17 B17 A17 C16 B16 A16 C15 B15 A15 C14 B14 A14 C13 B13 A13 C12 B12 A12 C11 B11 A11 C10 B10 A10 C9 B9 A9 C8 B8 A8 C7 B7 A7 C6 B6 A6 C5 B5 A5 C4 B4 A4 C3 B3 A3 C2 B2 A2 C1 B1 A1 TEV1 96 64 32 95 63 31 94 62 30 93 61 29 92 60 28 91 59 27 90 58 26 89 57 25 88 56 24 87 55 23 86 54 22 85 53 21 84 52 20 83 51 19 82 50 18 81 49 17 80 48 16 79 47 15 78 46 14 77 45 13 76 44 12 75 43 11 74 42 10 73 41 9 72 40 8 71 39 7 70 38 6 69 37 5 68 36 4 67 35 3 66 34 2 65 33 1 RMT_ST~ [5] To J3 - Det A Aux RTD (AD Ch 7) RET7 J43 IB_RTD+ RX8 RET3 1 2 Inlet B RTD (AD Ch 3) 2 All diodes located adjacent to the associated connector pin. 12-16-97 4 RX9 J42 IA_RTD+ RET1 NOTE: SIGNAL AND RETURN LINES ARE PAIRED AS SHOWN. COMMON RETURN CONNECTION POINTS SHOULD BE AS CLOSE AS POSSIBLE TO J1. 1 A 1 2 Inlet A RTD (AD Ch 1) TRACE, BACKPLANE J41 OV_RTD+ RX10 RET0 B 1 2 Oven RTD (AD Ch 0) 3 119828 C 7 D 177 A B C +5V CPU BOARD CONNECTOR D 1 1 1 330 R10 1 2 3 4 4 J11 2 2 TPU_11 -15VDC +5VDC 330 R11 J10 +15VDC 3 2 1 Oven Cryo Valve TPU_12 1 2 3 4 4 3 2 1 Inlet Cryo Valve Power LED On-board Display Orientation 1 +5V +15V -15V TP48 TP47 TP46 TP45 TP44 SHIELD SHIELD 5 6 7 5 6 7 +24V STEPPER MOTOR CABLE DETAIL TP42 1 1 1 1 BLU-WHT WHT BLK BLK-WHT RED BLU Stepper Motor 2 7 3 6 4 5 J1.A27 J1.A26 J1.C25 TP17 1 TP39 1 TP38 J1.C26 J1.B26 U2.25 U2.9 U2.39 TP16 TP40 [3] +5VDC TP6 TP18 TP5 TP7 TP4 TP8 TP9 TP3 TP10 TP11 TP2 TP12 TP13 TP15 [6] U1.1 J3.A16 [5] J4.A16 [5] J5.A16 [5] J30.5/U1.7 J1.A14 QSM_CS5~ QSM_CS4~ QSM_CS3~ QSM_CS2~ QSM_CS1~ To To To To To QSM_MISO QSM_SCLK QSM_MOSI QSM_SCLK~ To U2.15 To U2.3 To U2.4 RMT_ST~ QSM_CS7~ [3] QSM_CS8~ [6] QSM_CS9~ SPII_MOSI [6] QSM_MISO J1.C10 [3] J1.B10 [3] J1.A10 [3] J1.C9 [3] J13.10 [4] To U2.26 [6] To U2.27 [6] [6] [6] [6] SPII_SCLK AGND2 SPII_SCLK~ +24VDC GND GND 1 1 1 1 1 DISP_SER To J13.2 [6] DISP_CLK To U2.2 [6] 1K R13 2 2 2 3 +5V 1 1K R12 1 1 1 178 SPI Isolator Board .1UF C33 To To To To To To J3.C14 [5] J3.A14 [5] J4.C14 [5] J4.A14 [5] J5.C14 [5] J5.A14 [5] 01-08-98 4 TRACE, BACKPLANE 119828 A J48 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 TP23 DISP_CLK DETC_VFOUT DETC_GOUT DETB_VFOUT DETB_GOUT DETA_VFOUT DETA_GOUT 2 TP22 DISP_SER 1K R14 Power Control Module Control Signals 2 C32 .1UF 2 J33 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 +24VDC +5VDC +5VDC QSM_CS0~ To U2.40 TP24 [3] [3] [6] [6] [6] TP14 To To To To To TP26 VMON IB_CF IA_CF TPU_15 +15V_PRES~ +5V_PRES~ TPU_10 TPU_09 TPU_08 TPU_07 TPU_06 TPU_05 TPU_04 TPU_03 TPU_02 TPU_01 TPU_00 OVERTEMP WD_TIM PCM_SCLK PCM_MISO PCM_MOSI QSM_CS6~ [3] [3] [3] 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 QSM_CS14~ QSM_CS13~ QSM_CS12~ QSM_CS11~ QSM_CS10~ QSM_CS9~ QSM_CS8~ QSM_CS7~ QSM_CS6~ QSM_CS5~ QSM_CS4~ QSM_CS3~ QSM_CS2~ QSM_CS1~ QSM_CS0~ QSM_MISO QSM_SCLK QSM_MOSI QSM_SCLK~ TP25 1 -15V_PRES~ +24V_PRES~ 1 TP37 1 TP36 1 TP35 1 TP34 1 TP33 1 TP32 1 TP31 1 TP30 1 1 1 1 TP29 To J1 8 555-5303 TPU_15 TPU_12 TPU_11 TPU_10 TPU_09 TPU_08 TPU_07 TPU_06 TPU_05 TPU_04 TPU_03 TPU_02 TPU_01 TPU_00 RESET~ DIS1 J12 1 2 3 4 5 6 SM_RET23 SM_PH3 SM_PH2 SM_RET01 SM_PH1 SM_PH0 1 4 C34 .1UF 2 +5VDC 1 3 1 1 2 96 64 32 95 63 31 94 62 30 93 61 29 92 60 28 91 59 27 90 58 26 89 57 25 88 56 24 87 55 23 86 54 22 85 53 21 84 52 20 83 51 19 82 50 18 81 49 17 80 48 16 79 47 15 78 46 14 77 45 13 76 44 12 75 43 11 74 42 10 73 41 9 72 40 8 71 39 7 70 38 6 69 37 5 68 36 4 67 35 3 66 34 2 65 33 1 1 C32 B32 A32 C31 B31 A31 C30 B30 A30 C29 B29 A29 C28 B28 A28 C27 B27 A27 C26 B26 A26 C25 B25 A25 C24 B24 A24 C23 B23 A23 C22 B22 A22 C21 B21 A21 C20 B20 A20 C19 B19 A19 C18 B18 A18 C17 B17 A17 C16 B16 A16 C15 B15 A15 C14 B14 A14 C13 B13 A13 C12 B12 A12 C11 B11 A11 C10 B10 A10 C9 B9 A9 C8 B8 A8 C7 B7 A7 C6 B6 A6 C5 B5 A5 C4 B4 A4 C3 B3 A3 C2 B2 A2 C1 B1 A1 1 J2 B C 4 D 7 A B C D DETECTOR BOARD CONNECTORS J5 1 DETA_AX48 48V J8 RET7 To J1.B4 [3] DAX_RTD+ To J1.C4 DETA_1 To J1.B11 DETA_0 To J1.A11 DETA_2 To J1.C11 [3] [3] [3] [3] +5VDC QSM_MISO To J2.B9 DA_MOSI [4] To U2.30 [4] To U2.18 [6] To J2.B13 [4] DA_SCLK QSM_CS11~ DETA_VFOUT To J2.B2 [4] DETA_GOUT To J2.A2 +24VDC 1 [4] +24VDC 24V GND AC8V1 1 8.0VAC AC8V2 2 8.0VAC J35 DA85VAC_2 DA85VAC_0 DA85VAC_1 1 2 3 NPD Det. 1 Xfmr Secondary C32 B32 A32 C31 B31 A31 C30 B30 A30 C29 B29 A29 C28 B28 A28 C27 B27 A27 C26 B26 A26 C25 B25 A25 C24 B24 A24 C23 B23 A23 C22 B22 A22 C21 B21 A21 C20 B20 A20 C19 B19 A19 C18 B18 A18 C17 B17 A17 C16 B16 A16 C15 B15 A15 C14 B14 A14 C13 B13 A13 C12 B12 A12 C11 B11 A11 C10 B10 A10 C9 B9 A9 C8 B8 A8 C7 B7 A7 C6 B6 A6 C5 B5 A5 C4 B4 A4 C3 B3 A3 C2 B2 A2 C1 B1 A1 J3 96 64 32 95 63 31 94 62 30 93 61 29 92 60 28 91 59 27 90 58 26 89 57 25 88 56 24 87 55 23 86 54 22 85 53 21 84 52 20 83 51 19 82 50 18 81 49 17 80 48 16 79 47 15 78 46 14 77 45 13 76 44 12 75 43 11 74 42 10 73 41 9 72 40 8 71 39 7 70 38 6 69 37 5 68 36 4 67 35 3 66 34 2 65 33 1 DETB_AXRT 48VRET DETB_AX48 48V J7 RET8 To J1.B5 [3] To J1.A5 [3] DBX_RTD+ DETB_1 DETB_0 DETB_2 To J1.B12 [3] To J1.A12 [3] To J1.C12 [3] +5VDC QSM_MISO To J2.B9 DB_MOSI [4] To U2.31 [6] To U2.19 [6] To J2.C13 [4] DB_SCLK QSM_CS12~ DETB_VFOUT To J2.A3 [4] To J2.C2 [4] DETB_GOUT +24VDC 1 +24VDC 24V GND AC8V1 1 8.0VAC AC8V2 2 8.0VAC J36 DB85VAC_2 DB85VAC_0 DB85VAC_1 1 2 3 NPD Det. 2 Xfmr Secondary C32 B32 A32 C31 B31 A31 C30 B30 A30 C29 B29 A29 C28 B28 A28 C27 B27 A27 C26 B26 A26 C25 B25 A25 C24 B24 A24 C23 B23 A23 C22 B22 A22 C21 B21 A21 C20 B20 A20 C19 B19 A19 C18 B18 A18 C17 B17 A17 C16 B16 A16 C15 B15 A15 C14 B14 A14 C13 B13 A13 C12 B12 A12 C11 B11 A11 C10 B10 A10 C9 B9 A9 C8 B8 A8 C7 B7 A7 C6 B6 A6 C5 B5 A5 C4 B4 A4 C3 B3 A3 C2 B2 A2 C1 B1 A1 96 64 32 95 63 31 94 62 30 93 61 29 92 60 28 91 59 27 90 58 26 89 57 25 88 56 24 87 55 23 86 54 22 85 53 21 84 52 20 83 51 19 82 50 18 81 49 17 80 48 16 79 47 15 78 46 14 77 45 13 76 44 12 75 43 11 74 42 10 73 41 9 72 40 8 71 39 7 70 38 6 69 37 5 68 36 4 67 35 3 66 34 2 65 33 1 DETC_AXRT 48VRET DETC_AX48 1 48V J6 1 2 3 4 48V 1 2 3 3 J4 DETA_AXRT 96 64 32 95 63 31 94 62 30 93 61 29 92 60 28 91 59 27 90 58 26 89 57 25 88 56 24 87 55 23 86 54 22 85 53 21 84 52 20 83 51 19 82 50 18 81 49 17 80 48 16 79 47 15 78 46 14 77 45 13 76 44 12 75 43 11 74 42 10 73 41 9 72 40 8 71 39 7 70 38 6 69 37 5 68 36 4 67 35 3 66 34 2 65 33 1 1 2 3 2 C32 B32 A32 C31 B31 A31 C30 B30 A30 C29 B29 A29 C28 B28 A28 C27 B27 A27 C26 B26 A26 C25 B25 A25 C24 B24 A24 C23 B23 A23 C22 B22 A22 C21 B21 A21 C20 B20 A20 C19 B19 A19 C18 B18 A18 C17 B17 A17 C16 B16 A16 C15 B15 A15 C14 B14 A14 C13 B13 A13 C12 B12 A12 C11 B11 A11 C10 B10 A10 C9 B9 A9 C8 B8 A8 C7 B7 A7 C6 B6 A6 C5 B5 A5 C4 B4 A4 C3 B3 A3 C2 B2 A2 C1 B1 A1 RET9 To J1.B5 [3] To J1.C5 [3] DCX_RTD+ DETC_1 DETC_0 DETC_2 To J1.B13 [3] To J1.A13 [3] To J1.C13 [3] +5VDC 2 QSM_MISO DC_MOSI To J2.B9 [4] To U2.32 [6] DC_SCLK To U2.20 QSM_CS13~ To J2.A14 DETC_VFOUT [6] [4] To J2.C3 [4] To J2.B3 [4] DETC_GOUT +24VDC 1 +24VDC 3 24V GND NOTES 1. Jumpers E1, E2, and E3 are RTD shunts. These must be installed when a detecto present for the system to operate properly. AC8V1 1 8.0VAC AC8V2 2 8.0VAC J37 1 2 3 DC85VAC_2 DC85VAC_0 DC85VAC_1 NPD Det. 3 Xfmr Secondary 12-17-97 4 TRACE, BACKPLANE 119828 A B C 5 7 D 179 A B C D SIGNAL BUFFER CIRCUIT J2.C6 [4] DISP_SER J13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 DISP_SER +5VDC +5VDC 1 +5VDC BUF_DISP_CLK QSM_CS1~ KB_SCLK KB_MOSI KB_MISO 1 1 1 C15 .1UF 2 C14 .1UF 1 C36 47UF 1 2 2 1 CR1 SA6.0 2 1 2 [4] J2.C8 [4] J2.B9 2 [4] [4] J2A10 [4] J2.C11 [4] J2.A13 [4] 2 QSM_SCLK 3 QSM_MOSI 4 QSM_MISO 15 QSM_CS1~ 5 QSM_CS6~ 6 QSM_CS10~ 7 VCC2 DISP_CLK QSM_SCLK QSM_MOSI QSM_MISO QSM_CS1~ BUF_DISP_CLK KB_SCLK KB_MOSI KB_MISO ISPLSI1016E EPC_SCLK EPC_MOSI EPC_MISO EEPROM_SCLK_NOT EEPROM_MOSI J9 P_SDO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Key 14 P_ISPEN 13 P_MODE 36 P_SCLK 1 C13 .1UF 24 P_SDI 33 16 17 29 8 22 38 10 28 41 SPI_ISO_SCLK 26 SPI_ISO_SCLK_NOT 27 SPI_ISO_MOSI 40 PCM_SCLK 25 PCM_MOSI 39 PCM_MISO 9 QSM_CS6~ QSM_CS10~ SDO TFB_SCLK TFB_MOSI DA_SCLK DA_MOSI DB_SCLK DB_MOSI DC_SCLK DC_MOSI SDI ISPEN MODE SCLK GND2 GND1 23 1 CR2 SA6.0 CR7 2 SA6.0 2 NOTE: CR6 not used VCC1 +5VDC In-System Programming Plug 2 34 12 1 21 37 18 30 19 31 20 32 NC NC QSM_CS10~ EPC_SCLK EPC_MOSI EPC_MISO EE_SCLK~ EE_MOSI SPII_SCLK SPII_SCLK~ SPII_MOSI PCM_SCLK PCM_MOSI PCM_MISO J48.15 J48.17 J48.11 J33.4 J33.2 J33.3 [4] [4] [4] [4] [4] [4] TFB_SCLK TFB_MOSI DA_SCLK DA_MOSI DB_SCLK DB_MOSI DC_SCLK DC_MOSI J1.A9 J1.C8 J5.C16 J5.A18 J4.C16 J4.A18 J3.C16 J3.A18 [3] [3] [5] [5] [5] [5] [5] [5] J30 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 EPC Communication 2 1 J2.A6 J2.A9 DISP_CLK 1 CR5 SA6.0 CR6 2 SA6.0 1 510 R15 2 U2 119914 1 CR3 SA6.0 CR4 2 SA6.0 Keyboard And Display 1 C37 30PF 2 2 +5VDC 1 1 R8 10K Backplane Serial EEPROM 510 R18 J2.B14 [4] 2 2 3 2 1 2 R17 510 1 C26 47UF 1 C29 .1UF 2 2 U1 1 QSM_CS14~ 1 R9 10K 2 WP_PU 3 4 CS Vcc SO HOLD WP GND SCK SI 8 7 3 HOLD_PU 6 5 R16 1 2 510 01-19-98 4 4 TRACE, BACKPLANE 119828 A 180 B C 6 D 7 A B C MOUNTING AND ACCESS HOLES MISC I/O AND DECOUPLING 1 1 1 1 2 C49 100PF 1 2 C50 100PF 1 2 C51 100PF 1 2 C52 100PF 1 2 C35 100PF MH1 MH3 MH4 MH5 1 2 C48 100PF 1 C47 100PF 1 C46 100PF 2 MH8 MH9 1 Chassis Ground (signal CGND) is tied to the case via a FastOn connector attached at MH18, located near MH1 in the uppermost right corner of the board when looking at the component Mounting holes MH2, MH6, MH7, MH8, MH9 are for mec 6 stability only and have NO electrical connection. side with silk screened nomenclature right side up, and to MH19, another FastOn connector located adjacent to J13, providing Chassis Ground to the keyboard module. The 0.01uF capacitor, located adjacent to MH1 and MH18, is for AC coupling of Digital and Chassis Grounds for noise reduction. 5 +24VDC -15VDC MH14 MH101 +15VDC 1 100PF C45 1 1 1 1 MH7 1 1 2 100PF C44 1 1 2 100PF C43 1 1 2 100PF C42 MH6 MH2 MH19 1 1 2 100PF C41 MH18 1 1 2 100PF C40 MH13 1 MH15 MH16 MH17 MH102 1 1 +5VDC 1 MH101 and MH102 are 0.75 inch diameter access holes to screws for mounting the Power Control Module chassis. These have NO electrical connection. 7 1 POWER CONTROL MODULE DC VOLTAGES TP68 TP69 TP72 TP73 TP76 TP77 1 1 1 1 1 1 J34 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 2 100PF C39 MH12 1 1 2 100PF C38 MH11 1 2 POWER SUPPLY INPUTS MH10 2 1 1 D POWER AND GROUND TEST POINTS 1 -15V_VALVE DIGITAL GROUND (+5VDC Return) TP51 TP71 TP75 TP79 TP19 TP43 TP80 TP50 ANALOG GROUND #1 ANALOG GROUND #2 (+/-15VDC Return) (+24VDC Return) TP20 TP49 TP67 TP89 TP52 TP1 TP70 CHASSIS GROUND TP74 TP78 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 J29 RX12 2 RX13 RX14 RX16 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 15VRETB GNDB AVRG AVRG A15V +15VDCB -15VDCB +5VDCB 2 EPC Power RX15 +5VDC +15VDC -15VDC +24VDC MOTHER BOARD FILTER CAPACITORS RX17 Adjacent to J34 and J1 RX11 4 Jumpers (RX) for all connections from J29 should be located as close as possible to J34. These should be the same width as the traces they connect. Between J1and J2 Adjacent to J2 Between J2and J3 Adjacent to J3 Between J3 and J4 Adjacent to J4 Between J4 and J5 Adjacent to J5 +5VDC +5VDC 1 1 C22 47UF C23 .1UF 2 2 1 C12 47UF 1 C11 .1UF 2 2 1 C9 47UF 1 C8 .1UF 2 2 1 C6 47UF 2 1 C5 .1UF 2 1 C3 47UF 1 C2 .1UF 2 2 GND POPWER CONTROL MODULE AC VOLTAGES 3 J32 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 DETB_AXRT DETB_AXRT DETB_AX48 DETB_AX48 DETA_AXRT DETA_AXRT DETA_AX48 DETA_AX48 AC8V1 AC8V1 AC8V2 AC8V2 DETC_AXRT DETC_AXRT DETC_AX48 DETC_AX48 DETB_AXRT 48VRET DETB_AX48 48V DETA_AXRT 48VRET DETA_AX48 AC8V1 AC8V2 +15VDC +15VDC 1 48V 8.0VAC 48VRET DETC_AX48 48V C25 .1UF 2 1 C19 47UF 1 2 3 C18 .1UF 2 15VRET 8.0VAC DETC_AXRT 1 C24 47UF 2 1 1 C28 47UF 2 2 1 C17 47UF 1 C16 .1UF 2 2 -15VDC -15VDC +24VDC C27 .1UF 1 1 2 1 C31 47UF 35V C30 .1UF 2 1 2 C21 47UF 35V 1 C20 .1UF 2 1 2 C10 47UF 35V 1 C7 .1UF 1 2 2 C4 47UF 35V 1 C1 .1UF 2 12-17-97 4 4 TRACE, BACKPLANE 119828 A B C 7 7 D 181 PCB Layout for Motherboard/Backplane Standard (119826) 182 Central Processing Unit (CPU) This chapter describes the PCB for the Central Processing Unit (CPU) of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter at a Glance… Theory of Operations ................................................................................................ 184 Adjustment Procedures ............................................................................................. 186 Schematics and Component Layout ......................................................................... 187 Service Manual 183 Chapter 5.4 Central Processing Unit (CPU) Theory of Operations Theory of Operations The Central Processing Unit (CPU) PCB provides the control for all TRACE GC 2000 functions. Inside the main microcontroller resides: • A Motorola 68332 microprocessor • 2MB of flash memory • 750KB of static RAM If the PCB is not fully populated, the memory amounts will be less. NOTE Throughout this manual, the term microprocessor pertains to the Motorola 68332, unless otherwise specified. Three programmable logic devices (PLDs) provide most of the miscellaneous logic required. The decode required for the memory chip-selects is generated in PLD U17. The decode required for the on-board peripherals is generated by PLD U19. One 256KB bank of RAM has its power supplied from a battery circuit, so that it will retain its data when system power is off. The chip-selects for these two ICs are buffered by U10 and U11. The microprocessor incorporates a variety of subsystems that enhance its usefulness. These include the Queued Serial Module (QSM) and the Time Processor Unit (TPU). The QSM provides up to 16 channels of synchronous serial communication with peripheral devices. Motorola calls this communication type Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI). SPI communication is always between a master and a slave. In the TRACE GC 2000 the microprocessor is always the master. The SPI requires four signals: • Serial clock (SCLK) • Device select (CS) • Two serial data lines The serial data line carrying data from the master to the slave is labeled Master Out Slave In (MOSI). The data line for communication in the other direction is Master In Slave Out (MISO). 184 Service Manual Chapter 5.4 Central Processing Unit (CPU) Theory of Operations In the TRACE GC 2000, SPI communication is used with all peripheral devices not located on the CPU PCB. Since there are multiple devices to be serviced, multiple device select (CS) signals are needed. The microprocessor provides four select lines (PCS0–PCS3). These four lines are decoded in PLD U19 to provide 16 device select lines (QSM_CS*0–QSM_CS*15). Table 5.4-1 identifies the device serviced by each select line. Table 5.4-1. Select Lines and Devices Select Line Device QSM_CS*0 Not Used—Future Expansion QSM_CS*1 MMI—Keyboard QSM_CS*2 A/D Converter TFB PCB QSM_CS*3 D/A Converter TFB PCB QSM_CS*4 PCB Digital Input/Output TFB PCB QSM_CS*5 Serial EPROM on TFB PCB QSM_CS*6 Power Control Module QSM_CS*7 Not Used—Future Expansion QSM_CS*8 Not Used—Future Expansion QSM_CS*9 Not Used—Future Expansion QSM_CS*10 DPFC QSM_CS*l l Detector PCB A QSM_CS*12 Detector PCB B QSM_CS*13 Detector PCB C QSM_CS*14 Serial EPROM on Motherboard QSM_CS*15 Not Used—Idle State The TRACE GC 2000 has three serial channels. The first of these is the Serial Communication Interface (SCI), which is part of the microprocessor. This channel is used for driving the display panel. The other two channels are supplied by U22. These two channels are used for communication with the computer and the autosampler. The device that provides these two serial channels also provides a parallel port which is not used in the TRACE GC 2000. Time information for the TRACE GC 2000 is maintained by a Real Time Clock (U15). The power for this device is supplied by a battery circuit. Its chip-select is buffered by U12. Service Manual 185 Chapter 5.4 Central Processing Unit (CPU) Adjustment Procedures The TRACE GC 2000 uses the TPU functions for most of the controls required for temperature control. TPU Channel 15 is an input that receives a clock signal, which is twice the power line frequency, and is synchronized with the zero crossing of the power line. The functions of the other 15 TPU channels are listed in Table 5.4-2. Table 5.4-2. TPU Channels and Functions TPU Channel Function 0 Inlet A (Right Inlet) Heater 1 Inlet B (Left Inlet) Heater 2 PTV Heater 3 Detector A (Right Detector) Base Heater 4 Detector B (Left Detector) Base Heater 5 Detector A Auxiliary Heater 6 Detector B Auxiliary Heater 7 Detector C Auxiliary Heater 8 Aux (Jet Separator) Heater 9 Aux (Valve oven) Heater 10 Oven Heater 11 Oven Cryo Valve 12 Inlet Cryo Valve 13 Oven Door Stepper—Step 14 Oven Door Stepper—Direction The oven door stepper motor is driven by U21, which receives step and direction signals from the microprocessor through TPU channels. In order to minimize RF emissions, the CPU is enclosed in a metal shield. An auxiliary connector on the PCB will allow future expansion of devices that may require access to the data and address buses. Each detector card generates a frequency proportional to the analog voltage output. This frequency must be counted with a consistent sampling gate time. U19 controls the sample gate. Its time duration is managed by the software. U20 contains counters for all three detectors. Adjustment Procedures No field adjustments are necessary. 186 Service Manual Chapter 5.4 Central Processing Unit (CPU) Schematics and Component Layout Schematics and Component Layout The schematics and component layout information for the CPU PCB is listed below in Table 5.4-3. The number of drawings has been included for each schematic and its corresponding layout. There are eight drawings for reference in this section. Table 5.4-3. CPU Schematics Board CPU PN Drawing Layout 23648345 119825B, 1–7 119823, 1 The last drawing in this section is the layout of the board. Service Manual 187 A B C D REV 1 ECO NO. DATE BY CHK A DRN 4175 12/8/97 L. Baldwin L. Baldwin 1 B ECO 61510 1/5/98 L. Baldwin L. Baldwin C ECO 31693 7/6/98 L. Baldwin D ECO 31702 7/6/98 L. Baldwin 2 2 3 3 4 L. Baldwin 12/8/97 L. Baldwin 12/8/97 L. Baldwin 12/8/97 CPU PCB 4 119825 12/8/97 A B C D B 1 D 189 A B C D +5V QSM_CS*15 1 TV67 +5V QSM_CS*14 QSM_CS*13 QSM_CS*12 QSM_CS*11 QSM_CS*10 QSM_CS*9 QSM_CS*8 QSM_CS*7 QSM_CS*6 QSM_CS*5 QSM_CS*4 QSM_CS*3 QSM_CS*2 QSM_CS*1 QSM_CS*0 QSM_MISO QSM_SCLK QSM_MOSI QSM_SCLK* J3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ISP6 ISP3 ISP2 SDO SDI ISPEN ISP0 MODE ISP1 SCLK C15 1 2 .01 Test Points C38 1 1 1 100PF 2 100PF C39 2 2 J6 100 R60 1 DISP_SER 2 C37 100PF VF[0:2] DISP_CLK VF2 GVF2 VF1 GVF1 VF0 GVF0 GVF[0:2] C35 C36 1 1 2 2 220PF 100PF 190 B 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10K TYP R44 2 R30 2 R4 2 R5 2 R6 2 R18 2 R17 2 R16 2 R15 2 R21 2 R20 2 R7 2 R19 2 R14 2 R22 2 R13 2 R24 2 R25 2 R29 2 R41 2 TV54 TV60 TV58 TV55 TV61 TV56 2 2 1 1 R31 2 1 R32 2 1 R33 2 1 R34 2 1 R35 2 1 R36 2 1 1 R37 2 R38 2 1 R9 1 R8 2 2 TV87 TV85 TV86 TV29 TV69 2 TV72 TV62 TV71 TV68 ~MCS[0:12] DATA7 DATA8 ~MCS0 ~MCS1 ~MCS2 ~MCS3 ~MCS4 ~MCS5 ~MCS6 ~MCS7 ~MCS8 ~MCS9 DATA9 DATA10 DATA11 DATA12 DATA13 DATA14 DATA15 DSACK1* AS* RESET* ~CS8_9 DISABLE_CPU_MEM* WR* RD* ~MCS11 (RAM4_HI) ~MCS10 ~MCS12 (RAM4_LO) (CSBOOT) DSACK0* MISC_CONT7 (DS*) MISC_CONT14 MISC_CONT2 (R/W*) (BGACK) MISC_CONT1 MISC_CONT0 (BG) (BR) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TV48 TV49 TV50 TV4 TV20 TV16 TV52 TV46 TV47 TV51 3 MISC_CONT[0:14] +5V MISC_CONT3 MISC_CONT4 MISC_CONT5 MISC_CONT6 1 1 1 1 MISC_CONT13 1 TV66 TV45 TV35 TV32 ~MCS[0:12] TV25 MISC_CONT[0:14] 7-6-1998_11:54 4 RQI_4 CPU PCB 119825 A 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TV53 DATA5 DATA6 10K 2 QSM_CS*[0:15] +5V MISC_CONT14 R55 1 3 4.75K 2 4 R40 1 5 MISC_CONT9 6 U16 10K 2 100PF ~CS8_0 ~CS8_1 ~CS8_2 ~CS8_4 ~CS8_5 ~CS8_6 ~CS8_8 ~CS8_10 ~CS8_11 TV59 DATA3 DATA4 R39 1 1 ISP[0:6] MISC_CONT8 U16 10K 2 1 R48 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 TV23 DATA1 DATA2 MISC_CONT6 9 MISC_CONT18(~CS10) DATA0 10K 2 8 U16 C34 MISC_CONT16(~CS8) MISC_CONT17(~CS9) R54 1 U16 ADD19 MISC_CONT15(~CS7) MISC_CONT0 RESET* IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 IRQ6 TV63 ~CS8_[0:11] ADD17 ADD18 R10 TPU_[0:15] 1 1 1 1 ADD15 ADD16 1 1 51K R57 ADD13 ADD14 2 2 1 2 2 10UF ADD11 ADD12 R11 BIAS 1 PCS0 PCS1 PCS2 PCS3 IRQ[1:6] ADD9 ADD10 1 U21 6 9 4 5 12 13 1 10K R56 L1 L2 L3 L4 GND1 GND2 GND3 GND4 GND5 TPU_10 TPU_9 TPU_8 TPU_7 TPU_6 TPU_5 TPU_4 TPU_3 TPU_2 TPU_1 TPU_0 10 7 8 ADD7 ADD8 10K 2 TPU_12 TPU_11 VCC CCW/CW* STEP HS/FS* ADD5 ADD6 R50 1 TPU_15 VM VD 10K R58 TPU_14 3 1 16 14 TPU_13 2 10K R59 1 1 11 CR1 1N5333A 2 2 SM_RET SM_PH3 SM_PH2 SM_RET SM_PH1 SM_PH0 PCS[0:3] ADD3 ADD4 2 1N5333A DATA[0:15] R12 +5V 2 1 CR2 ADD1 ADD2 1 -15V ADD0 2 10UF 10UF R1 10UF 1 10UF R2 10UF 1 10UF TYP 10K 2 10UF J4 96 C32 64 B32 32 A32 95 C31 63 B31 31 A31 94 C30 62 B30 30 A30 93 C29 61 B29 29 A29 92 C28 60 B28 28 A28 91 C27 59 B27 27 A27 90 C26 58 B26 26 A26 89 C25 57 B25 25 A25 88 C24 56 B24 24 A24 87 C23 55 B23 23 A23 86 C22 54 B22 22 A22 85 C21 53 B21 21 A21 84 C20 52 B20 20 A20 83 C19 51 B19 19 A19 82 C18 50 B18 18 A18 81 C17 49 B17 17 A17 80 C16 48 B16 16 A16 79 C15 47 B15 15 A15 78 C14 46 B14 14 A14 77 C13 45 B13 13 A13 76 C12 44 B12 12 A12 75 C11 43 B11 11 A11 74 C10 42 B10 10 A10 73 C9 41 B9 9 A9 72 C8 40 B8 8 A8 71 C7 39 B7 7 A7 70 C6 38 B6 6 A6 69 C5 37 B5 5 A5 68 C4 36 B4 4 A4 67 C3 35 B3 3 A3 66 C2 34 B2 2 A2 65 C1 33 B1 1 A1 R3 +15V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 4 TV1 2 3 ADD[0:19] TV44 15 2 1 1 +5V 1 J5 96 64 32 95 63 31 94 62 30 93 61 29 92 60 28 91 59 27 90 58 26 89 57 25 88 56 24 87 55 23 86 54 22 85 53 21 84 52 20 83 51 19 82 50 18 81 49 17 80 48 16 79 47 15 78 46 14 77 45 13 76 44 12 75 43 11 74 42 10 73 41 9 72 40 8 71 39 7 70 38 6 69 37 5 68 36 4 67 35 3 66 34 2 65 33 1 C32 B32 A32 C31 B31 A31 C30 B30 A30 C29 B29 A29 C28 B28 A28 C27 B27 A27 C26 B26 A26 C25 B25 A25 C24 B24 A24 C23 B23 A23 C22 B22 A22 C21 B21 A21 C20 B20 A20 C19 B19 A19 C18 B18 A18 C17 B17 A17 C16 B16 A16 C15 B15 A15 C14 B14 A14 C13 B13 A13 C12 B12 A12 C11 B11 A11 C10 B10 A10 C9 B9 A9 C8 B8 A8 C7 B7 A7 C6 B6 A6 C5 B5 A5 C4 B4 A4 C3 B3 A3 C2 B2 A2 C1 B1 A1 +5V C 2 D 7 A B C D DATA[0:15] ADD[0:19] TV27 2 2 10K 1 R51 VSS0 VSS1 VSS2 VSS3 VSS4 VSS5 VSS6 VSS7 VSS8 VSS9 VSS10 VSS11 VSS12 VSS13 VSS14 VSTBY 2 8 17 29 34 40 51 59 67 83 95 101 106 127 117 19 C44 10K PCS[0:3] 1 .01 C48 2 2 .01 .01 .01 .01 TV42 .01 C49 C50 C51 C52 2 TV41 2 1 C47 2 1 .01 .01 .01 .01 1 1 C46 2 22PF C45 2 2 .01 TV38TV36 S 2 AS* DISABLE_CPU_MEM* QSM_SCLK* SYSTEM_CLK 1 DISP_CLK TV43 TPU_[0:15] 4 .01 3 2 .01 1 1 TV14 .01 C43 +5V 1 G 1 C42 2 Q1 2N7002LT1 QSM_SCLK RESET* .1 32.768KHZ 22PF TV40 2 2 D C41 .1+5V 4 1 TV88 2 3 .01 2 2 2 1 1 330K Y1 1 TV34 TV28 2 1 10M R46 R47 820 1 C40 +5V 1 1 R45 1 10K R43 +5V TV30 1 1 18 35 52 1 10K 2 CS_EN R42 ISP2 ISP0 ISP1 ISP3 ISP4 1 11 +5V DS* R/W* SCLK_IN RESET* 19 ISPEN 55 MODE 49 PCLK 21 SDI 34 SDO 66 C11 1 MISC_CONT12 46 47 2 48 RESET* 68 RESET +5V 12 ENABLE 44 DISPCLK 42 SCLK*OUT 79 1 1 MISC_CONT7 MISC_CONT14 55 IFETCH*/DSI 54 IPIPE*/DSO 57 TSC 1 MISC_CONT10 RESET* MISC_CONT11 MISC_CONT11 MISC_CONT12 MISC_CONT13 R/W* CLKOUT 2 MISC_CONT9 85 DS* 70 BERR* 56 BKPT*/DSCLK 58 FREEZE/QUOT 1 MISC_CONT14 2 MISC_CONT7 MISC_CONT8 MISC_CONT7 MISC_CONT8 MISC_CONT9 MISC_CONT10 TV24 53 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 RXD 2 J2 DATA0 DATA1 DATA2 DATA3 DATA4 DATA5 DATA6 DATA7 DATA8 DATA9 DATA11 CSBOOT 2 .01 U17 112 1 2 +5V 8 7 6 5 4 3 67 66 65 64 63 DATA0 DATA1 DATA2 DATA3 DATA4 DATA5 DATA6 DATA7 DATA8 DATA9 DATA11 ADDR19 ADDR18 ~MCS0 ~MCS1 ~MCS2 ~MCS3 ~MCS4 ~MCS5 ~MCS6 ~MCS7 ~MCS8 ~MCS9 ~MCS10 ~MCS11 DISP_SER 1 C20 10 9 ~MCS12 27 28 29 30 31 38 32 39 33 40 37 41 52 1 ADD19 ADD18 +5V 5 TXD 119817 FLASH1 FLASH2 FLASH3 FLASH4 RAM1LO RAM1HI RAM2LO RAM2HI RAM3LO RAM3HI RAM4LO RAM4HI HALT 1 MXD1210 CE 69 PCS0 PCS1 PCS2 PCS3 1 U10 MISC_CONT6 2 QSM_MISO QSM_MOSI QSM_SCLK 1 GND 2 VB1 7 VB2 13 16 U14 VALUE=MC68332-132PIN 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 1 4 CEO TOL VCC BOOT SYSCLK MISO MOSI SCLK PCS0 PCS1 PCS2 PCS3 1 6 3 ~CSBUF4 1 TV15 VCCO 8 CS10~ CS9~ CS8~ CS7~ CS5~ CS4~ BR* BG* BGACK* CS3* CS4* CS5* DSACK0* 1 22 14 24 23 26 25 113 114 115 118 119 120 SIZ0 SIZ1 +5VSTBY1 TV33 81 80 CE MISC_CONT0 MISC_CONT1 MISC_CONT2 MISC_CONT3 MISC_CONT4 MISC_CONT5 DSACK1* MXD1210 +5V 5 TV37 1 DSACK0* DSACK1* AVEC* RMCC* AS* GND U11 8 2 VB1 7 VB2 17 36 53 68 CEO TOL VCC1 VCC2 VCC3 VCC4 4 VCC VCCO GND1 GND2 GND3 GND4 6 3 ~CSBUF5 1 TV21 MISC_CONT4 MISC_CONT5 MISC_CONT15 MISC_CONT16 MISC_CONT17 MISC_CONT18 1 2 1 IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 IRQ6 IRQ7 1 V_BATT +5V 89 88 87 86 82 ~MCS[0:12] +5VSTBY2 78 77 76 75 74 73 72 71 1 MISC_CONT[0:14] MODCLK IRQ1* IRQ2* IRQ3* IRQ4* IRQ5* IRQ6* IRQ7* 2 TV10 MISC_CONT[0:18] 1 +5V 1 4 TV12 R52 2 1 1 R49 TV26 DATA15 DATA14 DATA13 DATA12 DATA11 DATA10 DATA9 DATA8 DATA7 DATA6 DATA5 DATA4 DATA3 DATA2 DATA1 DATA0 IRQ[1:7] 1 10K 1 1 R53 2 STDP 20 CS1 2 RTC-72423 CS0* GND GND TESTOUT TV39 10K 1 1 TV13 4 16 TPUCH0 15 TPUCH1 14 TPUCH2 13 TPUCH3 12 TPUCH4 11 TPUCH5 10 TPUCH6 9 TPUCH7 6 TPUCH8 5 TPUCH9 4 TPUCH10 3 TPUCH11 132 TPUCH12 131 TPUCH13 130 TPUCH14 129 TPUCH15 1 ALE ADDR18 ADDR17 ADDR16 ADDR15 ADDR14 ADDR13 ADDR12 ADDR11 ADDR10 ADDR9 ADDR8 ADDR7 ADDR6 ADDR5 ADDR4 ADDR3 ADDR2 ADDR1 ADDR0 TPU_0 TPU_1 TPU_2 TPU_3 TPU_4 TPU_5 TPU_6 TPU_7 TPU_8 TPU_9 TPU_10 TPU_11 TPU_12 TPU_13 TPU_14 TPU_15 1 1 11 RD* 13 WR* RD* WR* 42 41 38 37 36 35 33 32 31 30 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 90 128 T2CLK TV17 TV11 ADD18 ADD17 ADD16 ADD15 ADD14 ADD13 ADD12 ADD11 ADD10 ADD9 ADD8 ADD7 ADD6 ADD5 ADD4 ADD3 ADD2 ADD1 ADD0 TPU_15 TV18 1 1 2 1 U15 12 HDR1X2 J1 TV8 TV19 61 VDDSYN 1 1 1 1 2 TV7 2 5 6 10 12 14 16 15 ADD19 XFC TV9 VOUT BATT_ON LOW_LINE* 9 PFO* PFI 13 CEOUT* CEIN U12 11 WDO* WDI 7 RESET OSC_IN 8 RESET* OSC_SEL VBATT 19 DATA8 D0 16 DATA9 D1 15 DATA10 D2 14 DATA11 D3 EXTAL 1 1 BT1 5 A0 7 A1 9 A2 10 A3 64 ADD0 ADD1 ADD2 ADD3 VCC 91 DATA15 92 DATA14 93 DATA13 94 DATA12 97 DATA11 98 DATA10 99 DATA9 100 DATA8 102 DATA7 103 DATA6 104 DATA5 105 DATA4 108 DATA3 109 DATA2 110 DATA1 111 DATA0 1 VDD 62 MAX691 CS10* CS9* CS8* CS7* ADDR19 1 TV31 60 XTAL 3 10 24 2 1 1 125 124 123 122 121 MISC_CONT18 MISC_CONT17 MISC_CONT16 MISC_CONT15 R28 VDD0 VDD1 VDD2 VDD3 VDD4 VDD5 +5V V_BATT 1 1 7 18 28 39 50 +5VSTBY 63 VDD7 65 VDD8 84 VDD9 VDD10 96 VDD11 107 VDD12 116 VDD13 126 +5V RD* WR* ~CS8_4 7-6-1998_11:54 4 ISP[0:6] CPU PCB 119825 A B C 3 7 D 191 A B C D ADD[0:19] +5V +5V +5V +5V DATA[0:15] TV2 TV22 11 AM29F400BB CE ~MCS1 26 28 C1 OE 12 RESET 1 WR* +5V 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 48 17 .01 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 DO0 DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 DO5 DO6 DO7 DO8 DO9 DO10 DO11 DO12 DO13 DO14 DO15 U13 BYTE 29 31 33 35 38 40 42 44 30 32 34 36 39 41 43 45 47 DATA0 DATA1 DATA2 DATA3 DATA4 DATA5 DATA6 DATA7 DATA8 DATA9 DATA10 DATA11 DATA12 DATA13 DATA14 DATA15 +5V AM29F400BB CE ADD1 ADD2 ADD3 ADD4 ADD5 ADD6 ADD7 ADD8 ADD9 ADD10 ADD11 ADD12 ADD13 ADD14 ADD15 ADD16 ADD17 ADD18 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 48 17 ~MCS2 26 C6 OE RESET .01 28 12 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 RY/BY* VCC DO0 DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 DO5 DO6 DO7 DO8 DO9 DO10 DO11 DO12 DO13 DO14 DO15 U5 BYTE 29 31 33 35 38 40 42 44 30 32 34 36 39 41 43 45 47 DATA0 DATA1 DATA2 DATA3 DATA4 DATA5 DATA6 DATA7 DATA8 DATA9 DATA10 DATA11 DATA12 DATA13 DATA14 DATA15 +5V ~MCS3 AM29F400BB CE C8 OE RESET ADD1 ADD2 ADD3 ADD4 ADD5 ADD6 ADD7 ADD8 ADD9 ADD10 ADD11 ADD12 ADD13 ADD14 ADD15 ADD16 ADD17 ADD18 .01 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 48 17 26 28 12 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 1 15 RY/BY* DO0 DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 DO5 DO6 DO7 DO8 DO9 DO10 DO11 DO12 DO13 DO14 DO15 U9 BYTE 29 31 33 35 38 40 42 44 30 32 34 36 39 41 43 45 DATA0 DATA1 DATA2 DATA3 DATA4 DATA5 DATA6 DATA7 DATA8 DATA9 DATA10 DATA11 DATA12 DATA13 DATA14 DATA15 47 +5V AM29F400BB CE OE C10 2 12 47 ADD1 ADD2 ADD3 ADD4 ADD5 ADD6 ADD7 ADD8 ADD9 ADD10 ADD11 ADD12 ADD13 ADD14 ADD15 ADD16 ADD17 ADD18 VCC 37 2 RESET* BYTE DATA0 DATA1 DATA2 DATA3 DATA4 DATA5 DATA6 DATA7 DATA8 DATA9 DATA10 DATA11 DATA12 DATA13 DATA14 DATA15 RY/BY* 2 28 U1 29 31 33 35 38 40 42 44 30 32 34 36 39 41 43 45 2 2 RD* DO0 DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 DO5 DO6 DO7 DO8 DO9 DO10 DO11 DO12 DO13 DO14 DO15 TV6 15 2 RESET 1 26 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 A17 VCC 37 1 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 48 17 RY/BY* 15 1 ADD1 ADD2 ADD3 ADD4 ADD5 ADD6 ADD7 ADD8 ADD9 ADD10 ADD11 ADD12 ADD13 ADD14 ADD15 ADD16 ADD17 ADD18 37 1 VCC 15 1 37 1 1 1 TV3 11 WE 11 WE 11 WE .01 WE GNDB GNDA GNDB GNDA GNDB GNDA GNDB 46 27 46 27 46 27 46 27 ~MCS0 GNDA ~MCS[0:12] 3 3 7-6-1998_11:54 4 4 CPU PCB 119825 A 192 B C 4 D 7 A B C +5VSTBY1 D +5V ADD[0:18] DATA[0:15] 8 8 DATA0 DATA1 DATA2 DATA3 DATA4 DATA5 DATA6 DATA7 +5VSTBY1 1 8 21 22 23 25 26 27 28 29 +5V .01 6 CS2 30 CS1* 5 WE* 32 OE* ~MCS6 C7 R23 .01 10K 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 3 2 31 1 12 4 11 7 10 ADD1 ADD2 ADD3 ADD4 ADD5 ADD6 ADD7 ADD8 ADD9 ADD10 ADD11 ADD12 ADD13 ADD14 ADD15 ADD16 ADD17 DATA0 DATA1 DATA2 DATA3 DATA4 DATA5 DATA6 DATA7 A0 VCC D0 A1 D1 D2 A2 D3 A3 D4 A4 D5 A5 D6 A6 D7 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 U2 A13 KM681000 A14 A15 A16 6 CS2 30 CS1* 5 WE* 32 OE* VSS VSS VSS 24 24 24 1 2 8 +5VSTBY2 2 R26 10K 6 CS2 30 CS1* 5 WE* 32 OE* A0 VCC D0 A1 D1 D2 A2 D3 A3 D4 A4 D5 A5 D6 A6 D7 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 U8 A12 KM681000 A13 8 21 22 23 25 26 27 28 29 +5V A14 A15 A16 C21 .01 ~MCS7 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 3 2 31 1 12 4 11 7 10 ADD1 ADD2 ADD3 ADD4 ADD5 ADD6 ADD7 ADD8 ADD9 ADD10 ADD11 ADD12 ADD13 ADD14 ADD15 ADD16 ADD17 DATA8 DATA9 DATA10 DATA11 DATA12 DATA13 DATA14 DATA15 VSS 24 DATA8 DATA9 DATA10 DATA11 DATA12 DATA13 DATA14 DATA15 +5V 3 C4 .01 6 CS2 30 CS1* 5 WE* 32 OE* ~MCS9 24 21 22 23 25 26 27 28 29 A14 A15 A16 .01 6 CS2 30 CS1* 5 WE* 32 OE* VSS A0 VCC D0 A1 D1 D2 A2 D3 A3 D4 A4 D5 A5 D6 A6 D7 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 U6 A12 KM681000 A13 2 C9 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 3 2 31 1 12 4 11 7 10 2 2 A14 A15 A16 ADD1 ADD2 ADD3 ADD4 ADD5 ADD6 ADD7 ADD8 ADD9 ADD10 ADD11 ADD12 ADD13 ADD14 ADD15 ADD16 ADD17 1 DATA8 DATA9 DATA10 DATA11 DATA12 DATA13 DATA14 DATA15 1 21 22 23 25 26 27 28 29 1 1 3 C2 .01 +5V 8 A0 VCC D0 A1 D1 D2 A2 D3 A3 D4 A4 D5 A5 D6 A6 D7 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 U7 A12 KM681000 A13 +5V TV5 +5VSTBY2 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 3 2 31 1 12 4 11 7 10 DATA0 DATA1 DATA2 DATA3 DATA4 DATA5 DATA6 DATA7 6 CS2 30 CS1* 5 WE* 32 OE* ~MCS8 2 ADD1 ADD2 ADD3 ADD4 ADD5 ADD6 ADD7 ADD8 ADD9 ADD10 ADD11 ADD12 ADD13 ADD14 ADD15 ADD16 ADD17 1 21 22 23 25 26 27 28 29 2 A0 D0 VCC A1 D1 D2 A2 D3 A3 D4 A4 D5 A5 D6 A6 D7 A7 A8 A9 A10 U4 A11 KM681000 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 2 ~CSBUF4 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 3 2 31 1 12 4 11 7 10 2 C3 ADD1 ADD2 ADD3 ADD4 ADD5 ADD6 ADD7 ADD8 ADD9 ADD10 ADD11 ADD12 ADD13 ADD14 ADD15 ADD16 ADD17 1 21 22 23 25 26 27 28 29 2 A0 VCC D0 A1 D1 D2 A2 D3 A3 D4 A4 D5 A5 D6 A6 D7 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 U3 A13 KM681000 A14 A15 A16 2 10K 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 3 2 31 1 12 4 11 7 10 1 1 R27 ADD1 ADD2 ADD3 ADD4 ADD5 ADD6 ADD7 ADD8 ADD9 ADD10 ADD11 ADD12 ADD13 ADD14 ADD15 ADD16 ADD17 1 1 VSS 1 24 TV70 ~MCS[0:12] ~CSBUF4 9-11-1997_10:27 4 ~CSBUF5 4 RD* CPU PCB WR* 119825 A B C 5 7 D 193 A B C D VCC2 65 VF2 VF1 ~CS8_8 59 INTP* 45 INTA 60 INTB RQI_1 RQI_2 RQI_3 55 56 57 58 63 65 66 68 67 GND 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 19 26 27 29 2 I1 I2 I3 I4 I5 TV91 TV97 1 4 5 9 10 12 13 INB1 INB2 INC1 INC2 IND1 IND2 DS14C88M TV109 -12V +12V V+ OUTA OUTB OUTC OUTD V- 14 3 6 8 11 2 1 TV105 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1 7 -12V TV75 1 14 1 OUTA VCC INA 2 CA 6 4 OUTB INB 5 CB 8 10 OUTC INC 9 CC 11 13 OUTD IND 12 GND CD DS14C89AM 7 +5V TV113 1 TV82 1 TV114 1 1 .01 1 TV102 1 TV111 1 TV119 1 TV101 DB9MALE_RT J9 +15V 14 1 OUTA VCC INA 2 CA 6 1 4 OUTB INB 5 CB 8 10 1 OUTC INC 9 CC 11 13 OUTD IND 12 GND CD DS14C89AM 7 +5V 1 VOUT MC78L12ACD +12V 1 TV117 TV116 GND1 GND2 GND3 GND4 .1 TV92 1 2 3 6 7 1 .1 1 1 1 1 1 1 TV99 TV108 TV107 TV106 TV115 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 TV98 TV95 +5V U25 14 3 5 .01 MC79L12ACD 1 -12V 1 TV93 2 3 6 7 1 70 1 OUTA VCC INA 2 CA 4 OUTB INB 5 CB 8 10 OUTC INC 9 CC 11 13 OUTD IND 12 GND CD DS14C89AM 7 J8 6 GND VOUT .1 1 U24 .1 VIN1 VIN2 VIN3 VIN4 C22 FEMALE_9PIN_D VIN U23 3 3 8 ~CS8_[0:11] U27 1 LATCHCNTR 7 INA1 1 1 J7 1 U29 58 ~CS8_8 CS8_8B 59 ~CS8_9 CS9_8B 60 ~CS8_10 CS10_8B 68 ~CS8_11 CS11_8B 71 IOW 72 IOR 31 RESETOUT 32 RESETIN* 30 TESTOUT 1 IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 IRQ6 13 14 15 16 17 18 IRQ1 IRQ2 IRQ3 IRQ4 IRQ5 IRQ6 VCC1 VCC2 GND1 GND2 GND3 GND4 1 22 43 64 ~CS8_0 ~CS8_1 ~CS8_2 ~CS8_4 ~CS8_5 ~CS8_6 V- 3 6 8 11 3 2 MODE SCLK ISPEN SDI SDO CS0_8B CS1_8B CS2_8B CS4_8B CS5_8B CS6_8B 52 53 54 55 56 57 OUTA OUTB OUTC OUTD 14 U26 +5V 2 42 61 23 25 44 PCS0 PCS1 PCS2 PCS3 CS8BIT CLK R/W DS QSM_CS*0 QSM_CS*1 QSM_CS*2 QSM_CS*3 QSM_CS*4 QSM_CS*5 QSM_CS*6 QSM_CS*7 QSM_CS*8 QSM_CS*9 QSM_CS*10 QSM_CS*11 QSM_CS*12 QSM_CS*13 QSM_CS*14 QSM_CS*15 INB1 INB2 INC1 INC2 IND1 IND2 DS14C88M +12V V+ +5V C28 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 4 5 9 10 12 13 2 TV64 2 ISP0 ISP1 ISP2 ISP4 ISP5 U19 44 1 INA1 1 MISC_CONT3 SYSTEM_CLK MISC_CONT14 MISC_CONT7 9 10 11 12 83 20 73 74 ADD0 ADD1 ADD8 ADD9 ADD10 ADD11 CLR_INT TV77 +5V 2 PCS0 PCS1 PCS2 PCS3 21 65 +5V 4 5 6 7 8 3 67 QSM_CS0 QSM_CS1 QSM_CS2 QSM_CS3 QSM_CS4 QSM_CS5 QSM_CS6 QSM_CS7 QSM_CS8 QSM_CS9 QSM_CS10 QSM_CS11 QSM_CS12 QSM_CS13 QSM_CS14 QSM_CS15 RDOUT* TV76 2 ADD0 ADD1 ADD8 ADD9 ADD10 ADD11 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 RQI_5 2 PCS[0:3] 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 RQI_4 1 3 DATA8 DATA9 DATA10 DATA11 DATA12 DATA13 DATA14 DATA15 2 7 27 54 IRQ[1:6] 43 INTSEL* 1 1 1 ~CS8_2 32 CSA* ~CS8_1 3 CSB* ~CS8_0 38 CSP* TV89 BIDEN TV90 GND1 GND2 GND3 GND4 TV65 QSM_CS*[0:15] RESET* 2 MALE_9PIN_D 39 TV96 U28 TV79 GND 64 GND4 43 GND3 GND1 ADD[0:23] TXB RXB RTSB* CTSB* DSRB* DTRB* RIB* CDB* ST16C452PS TV103 TV100 TV80 1 2 37 IOR* 36 IOW* 10 62 12 13 5 11 6 8 TV78 1 1 CLK TV57 TV110 1 4 1 U22 TV118 1 1 35 A0 34 A1 33 A2 TV81 1 ADD0 ADD1 ADD2 TXA RXA RTSA* CTSA* DSRA* DTRA* RIA* CDA* TV83 1 TV73 TV84 26 41 24 28 31 25 30 29 1 1 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 1 CLRINT TV74 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 1 1 57 DATA8 DATA9 DATA10 DATA11 DATA12 DATA13 DATA14 DATA15 STROBE* AUTOFDX INIT SLCTIN* ERROR* SLCT BUSY ACK* PE 55 DATALATCH PD0 PD1 PD2 PD3 PD4 PD5 PD6 PD7 VF2_ 17 F2 18 GVF2 G2 VCC1 23 VCC2 40 VCC3 64 VCC1 21 119811 22 GND2 1 +5V VF1_ 15 F1 16 GVF1 G1 1 33 IOR 34 CS 13 VF0_ F0 14 GVF0 G0 U20 DATA8 DATA9 DATA10 DATA11 DATA12 DATA13 DATA14 DATA15 ADD0 ADD1 ADD2 U18 74VHC14 1 83 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 28 26 27 U18 74VHC14 1 DATA8 DATA9 DATA10 DATA11 DATA12 DATA13 DATA14 DATA15 ADD0 ADD1 ADD2 U18 74VHC14 2 2 .01 MODE SCLK ISPEN SDI SDO 12 C23 42 61 23 25 44 4 ISP0 ISP1 ISP2 ISP5 ISP6 1 +5V 3 +5V 1 13 VF0 ISP[0:6] CONN26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 VF[0:2] DATA[0:15] RIBBON_HEADER_TO_25D_ON_CHASSIS GVF[0:2] 1 TV104 1 TV112 1 TV94 DB9FEMALE_RT -15V TESTOUT 12-1-1997_15:50 4 4 RESET* CPU PCB WR* RD* 119825 A 194 B C 6 D 7 A B C D 1 1 5 U18 74VHC14 6 9 U18 74VHC14 8 11 U18 74VHC14 10 MH6 MH7 MH4 MH3 U16 74LS04 12 13 MH5 FID3 MH2 FID1 MH1 FID2 2 2 U16 11 74LS04 10 3 3 9-11-1997_10:27 4 4 CPU PCB 119825 A B C 7 7 D 195 PCB Layout for CPU (119823) 196 Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O This chapter describes the Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O (TF & DIO) PCB of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter at a Glance… Theory of Operations ................................................................................................ 198 Adjustment Procedures ............................................................................................. 201 Schematics and Component Layout ......................................................................... 201 Service Manual 197 Chapter 5.5 Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O Theory of Operations Theory of Operations The Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O (TF & DIO) PCB provides the microprocessor with the following information: • Temperature of temperature controlled zones • Ambient temperature inside the electronics compartment • Value of the line voltage • State of various digital control inputs In addition, it provides digital output control for values, timed events, handshake signals, and other functions. Figure 5.5-1 shows a more detailed block diagram of the temperature feedback circuit. Figure 5.5-1. Block Diagram of Temperature Feedback Circuit Input channels are provided for 10 RTDs (temperature sensors), 2 thermocouples, ambient temperature, and power line voltage. The temperature channels are separated into two classes: low priority and high priority. The high priority channels are those that require the most stable temperature control or the most frequent temperature monitoring. 198 Service Manual Chapter 5.5 Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O Theory of Operations Figure 5.5-2 shows a more detailed block diagram of the temperature feedback circuit for a high priority channel. Figure 5.5-2. Detailed Block Diagram of Temperature Feedback Circuit The voltage across the RTD is amplified by Al and input into one channel of the A/D. This signal provides the microprocessor with information about the RTD temperature. The signal resolution is approximately 0.2 °C/bit on the A/D. The microprocessor uses a D/A to generate a voltage representing the desired setpoint temperature. The setpoint and the actual temperature from Al are fed into error amplifier A2. The output of the error amplifier represents the difference between the desired temperature and the actual temperature. This signal is presented to a second channel on the A/D with a resolution of about 0.0025 °C/bit. The low priority channels function the same way, except the signals are multiplexed instead of having dedicated A/D channels. The signal names of the temperature controls are listed in Table 5.5-1. Table 5.5-1. Temperature Controls Temp Zone Signal Name on Schematic RTDs Service Manual Oven OV-RTD Right Detector Base DA-RTD Left Detector Base DB-RTD Right Inlet IA-RTD Left Inlet IB-RTD Detector 1 Secondary DAX-RTD Detector 2 Secondary DBX-RTD Detector 3 Secondary DCX-RTD Jet Separator JS-RTD Valve Oven VO-RTD 199 Chapter 5.5 Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O Theory of Operations Table 5.5-1. Temperature Controls (Continued) Temp Zone Signal Name on Schematic Thermocouples PTV Inlet-A-TC OCI Inlet-B-TC Most of the required binary input and output signals are controlled or monitored through PLD U42. The signals that control devices external to the PCB are listed in Table 5.5-2. In addition, U42 provides the control signals for the analog multiplexer. All of the RTD input channels are monitored with comparator circuits. This allows checking of the oven temperature conditions. If any channel goes over approximately 525 °C, a signal is generated to the power control module that turns off all heaters. An open RTD represents a very high temperature. Therefore, all unused RTD channels must have a jumper in place of the RTD. Some temperature zones are controlled through the detector cards. If no detector is installed, or if the detector installed does not have a secondary heater, a jumper must be installed on the motherboard adjacent to the detector card connector. Table 5.5-2. External Input/Output Signals Input Signals Detector A ID (3 bits) Detector B ID (3 bits) Detector C ID (3 bits) Handshake Signals (2 bits) and Inhibit Ready Output Signals Handshake Signals (4 bits) and Start Run, Ready Out, End Run, Running GC Phase (6 bits) Right Inlet Valves (3 bits) Left Inlet Valves (3 bits) Right Detector Valves (3bits) Left Detector Valves (3 bits) Auxiliary Makeup Valve (1 bit) Three-way Inlet Valve (1 bit) Timed Events (8 bits) Right Inlet Cooling Fan Left Inlet Cooling Fan Watch Dog Two options for the TRACE GC 2000 require temperature feedback using thermocouples instead of RTDs. These options are the PTV and the OCHOT. 200 Service Manual Chapter 5.5 Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O Adjustment Procedures When a thermocouple is required, an additional amplifier circuit is needed. This circuit is in the form of a “piggyback” PCB which is plugged onto the TF & DIO PCB. Up to two of these amplifiers may be installed. When installed, they plug on to connector J1 or J2. Some of the early assemblies of the TF & DIO PCB included a special circuit which stabilized the temperature of RN4. The network RN4 was moved onto a special piggyback PCB and the temperature of RN4 was controlled by the circuitry on the piggyback PCB. Adjustment Procedures The Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O (TF & DIO) card is factory-calibrated with values stored in EEPROM on the card. No field adjustments are possible. Schematics and Component Layout The schematics and component layout information for the Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O (TF & DIO) PCB is listed below in Table 5.5-3. Also included are the schematics and component layout information for the Thermocouple Amplifier piggyback circuit (used for PTV and OCHOT options) and the RN4 Temperature Stabilizer piggyback circuit (used on some early assemblies). The number of drawings has been included for each schematic and its corresponding layout. There are 13 drawings for reference in this section. Table 5.5-3. Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O Schematics Board PN Drawing Layout TF & DIO 23648340 119822F, 1–8 119820, 1 Thermocouple Amplifier 23648400 119834, 1 119832, 1 119977 119978, 1 119976, 1 RN4 Temperature Stabilizer NOTE Service Manual The last drawing in this section is the layout of the board. 201 A B C D 1 REV ECO NO. DATE BY CHK B DRN 4175 12/8/97 L BaldwinL Baldwin 1 C ECO 31511 1/6/98 L BaldwinL Baldwin D ECO 31537 4/8/98 L BaldwinG Phinney E ECO 31607 4/8/98 L BaldwinG Phinney F ECO 31693 7/6/98 L Baldwin 2 2 3 3 Larry Baldwin 10/16/97 Larry Baldwin 10/16/97 Larry Baldwin 10/16/97 Temperature Feedback and Digital I 4 4 F 119822 12/8/97 A B C B 1 8 D 203 A B C D J3 1 2 3 4 A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2 A3 B3 C3 A4 B4 C4 A5 B5 C5 A6 B6 C6 A7 B7 C7 A8 B8 C8 A9 B9 C9 A10 B10 C10 A11 B11 C11 A12 B12 C12 A13 B13 C13 A14 B14 C14 A15 B15 C15 A16 B16 C16 A17 B17 C17 A18 B18 C18 A19 B19 C19 A20 B20 C20 A21 B21 C21 A22 B22 C22 A23 B23 C23 A24 B24 C24 A25 B25 C25 A26 B26 C26 A27 B27 C27 A28 B28 C28 A29 B29 C29 A30 B30 C30 A31 B31 C31 A32 B32 C32 1 33 65 2 34 66 3 35 67 4 36 68 5 37 69 6 38 70 7 39 71 8 40 72 9 41 73 10 42 74 11 43 75 12 44 76 13 45 77 14 46 78 15 47 79 16 48 80 17 49 81 18 50 82 19 51 83 20 52 84 21 53 85 22 54 86 23 55 87 24 56 88 25 57 89 26 58 90 27 59 91 28 60 92 29 61 93 30 62 94 31 63 95 32 64 96 DGND A 204 TFB[0:14] A1 OV_RTD+ RET_0 IA_RTD+ IB_RTD+ RET_1 DA_RTD+ DB_RTD+ RET_2 DAX_RTD+ DBX_RTD+ RET_3 DCX_RTD+ JS_RTD+ RET_4 VO_RTD+ VMON A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A16 1 BEEPER A1 QSM[0:6] QSM_MOSI QSM_SCLK QSM_MISO QSM_CS2* QSM_CS3* QSM_CS4* QSM_CS5* DETA_0 DETA_1 DETA_2 DETB_0 DETB_1 DETB_2 DETC_0 DETC_1 DETC_2 RMT_ST INH_RDY ST_RUN RDY_OUT END_RUN RUNNING GC_PH0 GC_PH1 GC_PH2 GC_PH3 GC_PH4 GC_PH5 H2_SENS IA_V1 IA_V2 IA_V3 IB_V1 IB_V2 IB_V3 DA_G1 DA_G2 DA_G3 DB_G1 DB_G2 DB_G3 DC_XM TWV TEV1 TEV2 TEV3 TEV4 TEV5 TEV6 TEV7 TEV8 IA_CF IB_CF WD_TIM OVERTEMP VMON ~RESET A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 DETID[0:8] A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 2 CB[0:5] A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A1 PHA[0:5] A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A1 VLV[0:13] A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 A1 TEV[1:8] 3 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 -15VNVLV +24VUN -15V +15V GND_N15VLV +5VD 1 1 C61 2 .01uF C56 2 1 .01uF 4-8-1998_16:09 4 C51 2 .01uF Temperature Feedback and Digital I 119822 AGND B C 2 D 8 A B TP2 .1UF C45 7 1 1 10K0 A2 OV_RTD+ 95K3 3 C69 100PF 3 U23 ACT_TEMP[0:11] 2 2 .1UF C46 R1 AGND C1 100PF CER 1 10K0 OP-470 7 6 5 A1 OV_ACT DA_ACT DB_ACT IA_ACT IB_ACT DAX_ACT DBX_ACT DCX_ACT JS_ACT VO_ACT TCA_ACT TCB_ACT 5 U23 825K AGND RX2 11 .1UF C55 CER 10K0 95K3 DB_RTD+ 9 10 OP-470 8 9 825K 14 10 10K0 A4 95K3 IA_RTD+ 12 U23 RET_1 9M09 R5 +5VB ISO[0:7] 2 12 2 AGND RX3 1 .1UF C39 1 C4 2 .01uF 14 FSIN* 16 CLKIN 15 SDIN 11 SDOUT CER 10K0 95K3 6 9M09 825K 4 2 OP-470 1 3 95K3 RET_0 RET_1 RET_2 RET_3 RET_4 10 U14 AGND 9M09 825K RX4 .1UF C52 CER 14 10K0 -15VA 13 119908 -10VREF 12 3 8 7 9M09 +15VA AD7564 9 AGND1 1 7 6 R/C C Q 5 9 A* U1 Q*12 12 10B 10 C8 15PF 13 AGND U4 14 CLR* 11 74LS123 AGND1 3 C34 +2.5VREF MUX[0:3] +15VA .1UF C50 -15VA .1UF C47 C16 4.7UF 1 2 .1UF C48 200K 1 2 1 R10 10.0K 2 R9 C37 -15VA .1UF C38 AGND LT1014 U6 AGND1 AGND1 AGND 9 Decoupling Caps for PreAmps 8 10 1 2 10.0K R23 OP-470 1 R17 200K 4 Temperature Feedback and Digital 8 119822 3 2 AGND1 7-6-1998_13:41 U6 LT1014 U22 RX6 AGND1 B .1UF 1 3 R15 1.00K 119908 +15VA 2 R13 3.74K 3 2 1 309K R28 1.00M R20 2 RET_4 -15VA AGND 2 .1UF C49 2 CER 1 +2.5VREF 1 2 +15VA +2.5VREF R22 10.0k .1UF C15 J2 INLET_B_TC 2 CER 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 J5 13 2 10.0 AGND AMB_TEMP VMON A 1 1 .1UF C43 14 AGND RN3 R6 10K 1 5 4 3 2 1 825K 8 LT1014 LT1014 5 95K3 4 OP-470 7 U22 10K0 A16 VO_RTD+ 12 3 9M09 2 1 J1 5 10 U4 10 R19 10.0K INLET_A_TC 10K0 4 9 +5VA OP-470 8 5 95K3 C9 15PF 147K R18 6 A14 JS_RTD+ 9 1 12 .1UF C44 AGND 11 2 10.0 2 RX5 4 95K3 825K 1 DGND 10 10K0 9M09 LT1014 2 .01uF CER A13 DCX_RTD+6 5 2 CER 2 825K U4 R8 9 RFBD 8 IO1D 7 IO2D AV[0:10] DAX_ACT A2 DBX_ACT A3 DCX_ACT A4 OV_ACT A5 TCA_ACT A6 DB_ACT A7 MUX_ACT A8 OT_SET A9 TCA_SET A10 DB_SET A11 MUX_SET A12 7 AGND U22 9M09 6 R4 1 95K3 A1 C7 15PF 2 +5VB -15VA 825K 1 50V .1UF C53 10K0 A11 DBX_RTD+3 +5VB AGND U22 RET_3 +2.5VREF RN2 OP-470 14 2 10.0 27 13 .01uF V+ I16 I15 I14 28 I13 OUT I12 I11 DG506A I10 12 I9 GND U11 I8 18 EN I7 I6 14 A3 I5 15 A2 I4 16 A1 I3 17 A0 I2 I1 V- 1 1 95K3 12 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 11 10K0 27 AGND 825K CER MUX0 MUX1 MUX2 MUX3 9M09 A3 A6 A9 A12 A15 +15VA .1UF C36 R7 20 RFBA 21 IO1A 22 IO2A 5 RFBC 4 IO1C 2 IO2C U2 C26 RET_2 5 LT1014 24 RFBB 25 IO1B 28 IO2B U14 95K3 9 OP-470 7 5 10K0 A10 DAX_RTD+6 18 A0 17 A1 2 1 IB_RTD+ 3 U4 3 ISO_A2DCVT ISO_4MHZ ISO_MOSI ISO_SCLK ISO_CS2 ISO_CS3 ISO_SCLK* A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 1 R44 2 7 OP-470 14 U23 A5 C6 15PF 2 1 1 13 825K +2.5VREF A1 10.0K R43 -10VREF 9M09 1 2 10.0K 8 2 10.0 CER 119908 +2.5VREF 1 AGND .1UF C54 13 RN4 CLR* 3 DGND A8 GND 8 10 6 23 19 9M09 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 REFD REFC REFB REFA 95K3 DA_RTD+ 6 1 A7 +5VA RET_0 4 2 2 1 20.0K 15 14 16 VCC R/C C 1 A* Q 13 U1 2 B Q* 4 VDD 3 825K 1 1 +5VB 9M09 12 CLR* 13 LDAC* TFB[0:14] A1 R45 1.00K OP-470 1 2 825K 2 9M09 D 1 1 -10VREF 8 1 +2.5VREF C TP1 C D 205 A B 4.99K 804K 4 1 2 1 .01uF 3 4K99 804K 2 2 6 R33 715 10UF 8 4K99 .22UF 1 7 2 2 10UF 2 .01uF 50V 1 715 402K C19 5 Normally TCA Error May be Det A or any of the Det Aux Channels RX7 +15V AGND1 LT1014 7 6 4K99 11 12 AGND1 13 .22UF Normally Det B Error May be any of the Det Aux Channels 1 .01uF 4K99 LT1014 8 9 402K C5 +15VA C20 4K99 804K 2 1 1 U7 10 1 2 1 4.99K R12 R49 4.99K 402K 2 804K C2 100UF 2 1 2 .1UF 50V 1 C14 C3 2 RX1 10 14 U7 AGND1 15 AGND 4K99 17 C17 1 NOTE: C17 NOT USED 2 2 1 4.99K R48 2 4K99 MUXed Channel Error 13 119909 C12 .01UF 1 16 NOTE: JUMPER TO SELECT INPUT CHANNEL RN1 LT1014 14 C13 1 .01uF 10UF2 16V 50V 2 2 10UF RX8 -15VA 12 -15V J8 (NORMAL) AUX AUX AUX 7 5 3 1 U7 8 6 4 2 AGND1 +5VA AV[0:10] A1 C28 A2 DAX_ACT A3 DBX_ACT A4 DCX_ACT A5 OV_ACT A6 TCA_ACT A7 DB_ACT A8 MUX_ACT A9 OT_SET A10 TCA_SET A11 DB_SET A12 MUX_SET C35 TANT .01UF 10UF +5VB +15VA 50V C10 LT1014 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 LT1014 LT1014 3 4 C22 C23 5 C41 TANT 50V CER CER .1UF C27 CER .01UF .01UF 50V .01UF 10UF C24 .1UF C29 C42 .01uF U6 LT1014 CH0 CH4 CH1 CH5 CH2 U10 CH6 AD7858 CH3 CH7 C32 C31 10K TANT DVDD DGND 18 C11 .01UF 10UF 50V AGND .01UF 19 -15VA AGND 3 22 CLKIN 1 CONVST* 2 BUSY 3 SLEEP* REF 7 CREF1 8 CREF2 17 CAL* 6 7 +2.5VREF AVDD 5 8 10 21 DIN 7 5 .01UF AGND1 24 SYNC* 1 3 R25 U8 9 AGND 6 U8 6 20 DOUT U8 2 23 SCLK B C B A C21 R32 ADJ 1 243 5 J10 DET DET DET DET 1 C59 R21 4.99K 2 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 7&8 5&6 3&4 1&2 C25 U7 2 R46 R11 4.99K J7 2 3 R24 ADJ 1 243 AGND1 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 LT1014 1 2 1 2 4&5 VI C57 2 5&6 2&3 2 4.99K 3 1 2&3 HIGH R47 COPPER PAD FOR HEATSINK VI 1 Oven Error 4K99 2 NORMAL VO 1 1 J9 6 5 4 3 2 1 5&6 2 +5VA 1 2 JUMPER PINS 1&2 U9 LM317T C18 .22UF 402K 2 4.99K 1 VO 1 9 3 LOW 2 +5VB 2 1 R3 -2.5VREF 2 R2 NOTE 1 D U27 LM317T J6 6 5 4 3 2 1 DESIRED GAIN C 10UF C40 AGND1 40.2K -10VREF +5VA R30 10UF 2 6 1 Q2 C33 9 1 8 2 2N4403 C30 1 2 .01uF R26 3 10 U14 OP-470 VOUT 10.0K R29 VIN AD780 5 TRIM VSEL GND -15VA ISO[0:9] A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 ISO_A2DCVT ISO_4MHZ ISO_MOSI ISO_SCLK ISO_CS2 ISO_CS3 ISO_SCLK* ISO_MISO 4 AD780 R27 4 R35 2 1 10.0K 13 100PF 2 1 2 100 14 12 1 -2.5VREF 3 TEMP U12 8 2 1 10.0K 13 14 12 U14 OP-470 4 2 AGND1 LT1014 U8 AMB_TEMP 119822 AGND A 206 Temperature Feedback and Digital C58 B C 4 D 8 A B C D VLV[0:13] +5VD 1 2 SCLK 2 18 1 119912 CLEAR C66 5000pF U42 2 19 4MHZ 23 25 42 44 61 +5VD J4 24 A2D_CLK ISPEN SDI MODE SDO PCLK A2D_CVT RESET SCLK_OUT DGND GND1 GND2 GND3 GND4 1 15 19 16 18 17 17 18 2 1 12 11 8 6 15 13 4 3 2 14 2 12 GND1 GND2 V1 V2 A1 GND_N15VLV 1 20 2 19 3 18 4 17 5 16 6 15 7 14 IA_V1 IA_V2 IA_V3 IB_V1 IB_V2 IB_V3 DA_G1 DA_G2 DA_G3 DB_G1 DB_G2 DB_G3 DC_XM TWV DGND A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 VLV[0:13] 2 79 13 8 80 U40 81 82 UDN2588A DGND 3 -15VNVLV 28 3 1 8 9 11 13 VCC U38 20 4 4 MOSI_G SCLK* U38 U38 DGND U38 15 TEV1 TEV2 TEV3 TEV4 TEV5 TEV6 TEV7 TEV8 A2D_CVT U38 10 5 6 7 14 15 16 17 SCLK_G 19 12 UDN2596A GND1 GND2 DGND 18 1 22 43 64 U39 2 DGND 11 U41 +5VD SO C63 .01UF 2 G_SO G_SCLK 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 11 C64 100pF SI OUT0 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 OUT8 OUT9 OUT10 OUT11 OUT12 OUT13 OUT14 OUT15 OUT16 OUT17 OUT18 OUT19 OUT20 OUT21 OUT22 OUT23 OUT24 OUT25 OUT26 OUT27 OUT28 OUT29 OUT30 OUT31 OUT32 OUT33 OUT34 OUT35 OUT36 OUT37 OUT38 OUT39 8 1 ~RESET 3 7 12 17 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 7 A2 QSM_MOSI A3 QSM_SCLK A4 QSM_MISO A5 QSM_CS2* A6 QSM_CS3* QSM_CS4* A7 A8 QSM_CS5* 2 6 13 16 CS_DIO 26 CS_A2D 27 CS_D2A C65 5000pF 2 C67 5000pF 8 6 1 IN0 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 A1 1 5 1 U38 10 2 DGND QSM[0:6] 1 +24VUN 11 VSS 2 U38 +5VD H2_SENS OVERTEMP C68 5000pF U43 9 DETB_2 DETC_0 DETC_1 DETC_2 1 U43 4 3 DETA_0 DETA_1 DETA_2 DETB_0 DETB_1 21 VCC1 65 VCC2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 DGND A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 U43 U43 U43 3 2 A1 DETID[0:8] U43 U43 16 .1uF 10 10UF 1 1 UDN2596A VCC 14 U43 2 16 +5VD 17 18 1 RMT_ST INH_RDY ST_RUN RDY_OUT END_RUN RUNNING 5 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 7 A1 CB[0:5] GC_PH0 GC_PH1 GC_PH2 GC_PH3 GC_PH4 GC_PH5 13 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 20 A1 PHA[0:5] A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 BEEPER DGND A2 A3 A4 A5 4 A1 TEV[1:8] A1 MUX[0:3] MUX0 MUX1 MUX2 MUX3 TEV[1:8] U38 WD_TIM 14 5 IB_CF 4 Temperature Feedback and Digital 8 119822 5 IA_CF A B C D 207 A B C 1 +5VB 1 D +5VD +5VD R42 U35 2 619 A2D_CVT 3 SG51P-4MHZ GND 7 2 EN OUT 1 619 8 8 7 6 5 VI EN VO GND 2 1 ISO_A2DCVT HCPL2400 U29 R36 14 VCC 8 7 6 5 VI EN VO GND 2 1 3 ISO_4MHZ HCPL2400 U36 DGND 4MHZ 2 2 MOSI_G SCLK_G R37 U30 2 619 3 2 3 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 QSM_MOSI 2 U37 25320 1 QSM_MISO 2 3 3 4 CS Vcc SO HOLD WP SCK GND SI 8 619 +5VD 3 7 6 2 619 3 2 619 3 SCLK* 8 7 6 5 VI EN VO GND 2 1 3 ISO_CS3 HCPL2400 U34 R41 DGND 8 7 6 5 VI EN VO GND 2 1 ISO_CS2 HCPL2400 U33 R40 5 ISO_SCLK 8 7 6 5 VI EN VO GND 2 1 QSM_CS5* ISO[0:7] HCPL2400 U32 R39 QSM_MISO QSM_CS2* QSM_CS3* QSM_CS4* QSM_CS5* 8 7 6 5 VI EN VO GND 2 619 QSM[0:6] A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 ISO_MOSI HCPL2400 U31 R38 1 8 7 6 5 VI EN VO GND 2 1 ISO_SCLK* HCPL2400 AGND Q1 1 ISO_MISO 2 2N4403 3 +5VD U28 8 7 6 5 4 VI EN VO GND R34 AGND 2 2 1 619 3 4 HCPL2400 Temperature Feedback and Digital I/ 6 8 119822 DGND A 208 B C D A B C D U16 +5VD 1M U13 1M U18 1M 1 R31 10K +2.5VREF 1M 2 1 U25 10K R16 1.00K 13 9 2 14 1 12 1 7 U25 U6 2 1 8 10K 10 U17 10K 9 10 U24 10K 9 10 2 U26 4 R14 7.32K 2 10 9 5 2.232 Volts 1 2 U16 1 1 LM339 U16 1M 8 2 7 7 LT1014 U16 5 U25 1M 1 U26 6 AGND1 6 10K LM339 6 5 9 14 U26 8 3 U25 4 10K U16 LM339 1M 4 3 11 1 U25 U18 LM339 6 2 2 U21 4 7 U17 2 10K 1M 5 5 2 8 10K LM339 U18 1M 10 9 ACT_TEMP[0:11] 13 U26 10 A1 7 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 OV_ACT DA_ACT DB_ACT IA_ACT IB_ACT DAX_ACT DBX_ACT DCX_ACT JS_ACT VO_ACT TCA_ACT TCB_ACT U18 1M 1 U21 6 5 U17 6 10K LM339 8 7 9 8 3 U17 14 U21 4 10K U18 LM339 1M 4 3 11 10 1 U17 3 U13 LM339 3 1M 4 3 11 13 U20 10 7 U24 13 U21 2 10K 8 10K LM339 U13 1M 6 5 5 U13 1M 2 U20 4 5 U24 6 10K LM339 10 9 7 6 3 U24 4 10K U20 1 U13 LM339 1M 8 7 9 8 1 U24 4 2 10K U20 14 LM339 4 Temperature Feedback and Digital I 7 8 119822 OVERTEMP A B C D 209 A B C D 1 1 2 2 MHP1 MHP2 MHP3 3 3 4 4 Temperature Feedback and Digital I 8 8 119822 A 210 B C D PCB Layout for Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O (119820) 211 A B European Thermocouple United States Thermocouple Chromel Constatan 1 C Chromel Red Purple Constantan Black Red D REV ECO NO. DATE BY D DRN 4215 5/1/98 L BALDWIN E ECO 31652 7/6/98 L BALDWIN CHK L BALDWIN 1 1 2 J2 2 2.5VREF 1 3 .01uF C5 50V 2 C3 50V .01uF 1 +15VDC 2 OP-470 U1 1 3.65K +15VDC 6 VOUT 5 R1 TEMP OP-470 U1 OP-470 U1 5 TRIM 14 2 U2 1 3.65K R3 R12 249K 8 1.00K R6 +5VDC 1.00K 2 2 R5 7 2 1 1 GND VSEL 4 2 1 R4 12 1 3 2 1 AD780 2 2 1 1.00K R11 13 2 VIN 46.4K R2 7 2 261K R7 2 1 113K 6 2 1 1.00K R8 U3 2 9 1 6 3 2 1 5 8 AD780 4 AD820 2 2 1 1.00K R9 U1 OP-470 R10 1.00K 1 1 R13 249K 2 10 -15VDC MH1 3 3 MH2 +15VDC J1 +5VDC -15VDC MH3 1 2 3 4 5 MH4 1 2 C4 .01uF 50V 1 2 C8 10UF 16V 1 2 C1 .01uF 50V 2 1 16V 10UF C7 1 2 C2 .01uF 50V 1 2 C6 10UF 16V 4 Larry Baldwin 4/29/98 Larry Baldwin 4/29/98 THERMOCOUPLE PRE-AMPLIFIER 4 E 119834 B A 212 B C 1 D PCB Layout for Thermocouple Amplifier (119832) 213 B C C6 Not Used 2 1 1 R1 R8 1 1 1 Temperature Sensor RT1 1 2 499K 2 R5 2.94K D +15V A REV ECO NO. A DRN ______ DATE BY CHK 1 220 2 2 C5 Not Used 10K_25C 1 2 LT1014 R7 6 5 U1 LT1014 10.0K 3 2 7 1 2 3 U1 1 LT1014 C Q1 2N4401 1E R2 9 U1 8 1 10 2 2 2 1 R6 10.0K B 499K R4 3.01K C 3 E Q2 TIP31A 1 1 1 R3 3.01K 2 B DGND 2 2 1 DGND 2 R10 5 Oven Heater 2 119908 1 Resistor Network in Oven 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 RNet 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 R11 0 Shorted 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 2 2 RN1 J1 R9 0 Shorted DGND 1 Oven OV1 2 3 3 13 12 U1 14 LT1014 1 C1 .01uF 50V 1 2 C4 10UF 35V +15V 2 J2 DGND 1 2 3 4 5 1 2 C2 .01uF 50V 4/28/98 Larry Baldwin 4/28/98 MH1 MH2 4 1 Larry Baldwin 2 119978 Not Used 4/15/98 -15V A 214 R-Net Temperature Controller 4 C3 B C A B 1 D 1 PCB Layout for RN4 Temperature Stabilizer (119976) 215 Power Control Module This chapter describes the PCB for the Power Control Module (PCM) of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter at a Glance… Theory of Operations ................................................................................................ 218 Adjustment Procedures ............................................................................................. 219 Schematics and Component Layout ......................................................................... 219 Service Manual 217 Chapter 5.6 Power Control Module Theory of Operations Theory of Operations The Power Control Module (PCM) provides the system power supply and the controls for all of the heaters. The dc voltages required by the GC are supplied by a commercial power supply. This supply provides +5 V, +15 V, –15 V, and +24 V. The +5 V is used by the microprocessor and the logic circuits. The +15 V and –15 V are used by the analog circuitry in the basic frame and oven of the GC. The +24 V is used by the detectors to provide local voltages for the analog circuitry and for driving valves. A relay in the PCM chassis controls power to all of the heaters. If it is open, no power is available to any of the heaters. The watchdog signal generated on the Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O (TF & DIO) PCB triggers a retriggerable one-shot (U13) that controls the relay. The software must trigger the one-shot several times per second to maintain power availability to the heater and the inlet cooling fans. The PCM has a thermal cutout (SW1 on the PCB) that will disable the heater power if the temperature in the PCM exceeds 55 °C. Each line voltage heater channel is controlled by a triac interfaced to the microprocessor with an optocoupler. Each low-voltage heater is controlled by a triac interfaced to the microprocessor with a transistor. The PCB in the PCM contains a transformer with two secondary windings. One winding drives a comparator (U10) that generates a square wave from the line voltage sine wave. The square wave drives two one-shots (U11) that trigger on opposite edges. The outputs of the one-shots are combined in the PLD (U3) to create a clock two times the power line frequency and synchronized to the zero crossing of the power line voltage. The second winding of the transformer generates an unregulated DC voltage. This voltage is proportional to the line voltage and is monitored by the microprocessor. Circuits are provided to monitor the voltages from the DC power supply. If any supply is not present, the power available to the heaters is disabled. The status of the DC supplies is input to the microprocessor through the PLD (U3). In addition, these signals drive LEDs on the motherboard. An oven door interlock switch provides an override for the control of the oven heater and the oven blower. If the door is open, both the heater and the blower are disabled. Depending on the GC configuration, a combination of up to two out of three possible transformers may be installed in the PCM. Transformer 1 (119916) provides voltage for the FID ignitor. This transformer is used when an FID is present, but there are no requirements for low-voltage heaters. Transformer 2 (119917) provides voltage for ignitors and low-voltage heaters. This transformer is used when there is a requirement for low-voltage heaters. 218 Service Manual Chapter 5.6 Power Control Module Adjustment Procedures Transformers 1 and 2 are mutually exclusive. A pigtail on the transformer leads must be plugged into J6 on the Power Control PCB to indicate to the microprocessor which transformer (if any) is present. Transformer 3 (PN 230 43444) (119917) provides power for the NPDs. It is present only when the NPD is present. A pigtail on the transformer leads must be plugged into J4 on the Power Control PCB to indicate that the transformer is present. The Power Control PCB can be configured for 115- or 230-volt operation. A jumper on J3 indicates the selected voltage configuration to the microprocessor. Place the jumper between pins 1 and 2 for 115 V ac or between pins 2 and 3 for 230 V ac. The jumper assembly on J 12 changes the connections to the transformers and the oven fan motor. For 115 V ac, position the block with the black lead toward the end near the transformer on the PCB. For 230 V ac, position the block with the black lead away from the end near the transformer on the PCB. WARNING! For conversion from 120 V ac to 230 V ac, all line voltage heaters must be changed. For European configuration, it is necessary to convert from 230 V ac to 120 V ac. Again, all line voltage heaters must be changed. Adjustment Procedures No field adjustments are necessary. Schematics and Component Layout The schematics and component layout information for the Power Control Module (PCM) PCB is listed below in Table 5.6-1. The number of drawings has been included for each schematic and its corresponding layout. There are six drawings for reference in this section. The Power Supply PCB schematics and component layout are not included in this manual because the PCB must be replaced as a unit. When ordering a replacement Power Supply PCB, refer to the part number (PN) in Table 5.6-1. Table 5.6-1. Power Control Module PCB Schematics Board PCM PCB Power Supply PCB NOTE Service Manual PN Drawing Layout 23699500 119837D, 1–5 119835, 1 76330 0031 — — The last drawing in this section is the layout of the board. 219 A B C D REV 1 ECO NO. DATE BY CHK B DRN 4175 12/8/97 L BaldwinL Baldwin C ECO 31512 1/7/98 L BaldwinL Baldwin D ECO 31601 4/7/98 L Baldwin 1 2 2 3 3 4 L Baldwin 12/8/97 L Baldwin 12/8/97 L Baldwin 12/8/97 L Baldwin 12/8/97 Power Control PCB 119837 12/8/97 A B C 4 D B 1 5 D 221 A B C D LINE_VOLTAGE_HI_SW LINE_VOLTAGE_LOW_SW 1 1 +5V RX16 1 IA_CF 1 6 2 4 F5 2 2 MOC3021 U12 1 1 1 1 6 5 IB_SW 4 UDN2595A 5 14 U18 TPU_4 2 4 G_DB_B 3 1 UDN2595A 13 Q25 1 BTA06-600T 6 DB_A 25 U19 Inlet B Cooling Fan 5 4 Valve Oven 3 2 Jet Separator 1 1 6 2 4 2 G_DB_A 3 MOC3021 U12 Det Base B 7 6 Det Base A 5 4 4 G_IB Q27 1 BTA06-600T 1 6 2 4 2A_250V 1 2 F12 2 R36 2 100 2 MOC3021 G_IA 3 Q28 1 BTA06-600T C24 .1UF 500V 1 2 MOLEX_39-28-804 3-26-1998_16:30 4 J7 4 J1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 J5 1 2 3 4 PTV_HI PTV_RT DETA_AX_HI DETA_AXRT DETB_AX_HI DETB_AXRT DETC_AX_HI U12 1 C23 .1UF 500V IA _IA U21 2 UDN2595A 11 100 1 2 2 2 2 DETC_AXRT 8VAV_2 8VAC_1 3 3 RX23 1 R22 200 8 2 R35 F11 2 MOC3021 U12 TPU_0 3 2A_250V 1 2 1 2 Inlet A 1 C22 .1UF 500V IB 2 1 2 100 _IB 6 1 Inlet B 3 2A_250V 1 2 TPU_1 U20 1 F4 5A_250V 1 F2 F1 5A_250V 1 1 F3 5A_250V 1 5A_250V UDN2595A 7 12 R34 Q26 1 BTA06-600T 1 R27 200 2 F10 2 1 2 C21 .1UF 500V 2 _DB_A 2 6 TPU_3 100 F9 2 MOC3021 R21 200 C1 .1UF 500V R33 _DB_B 6 2 1 1 1 C3 .1UF 500V 2 3 IA_SW R26 200 1 BTA06-600T C20 .1UF 500V 2A_250V 1 2 1 RX1 7 DB_A_SW 100 DB_B RX22 1 48VAC-1 48VAC-2 R32 Q24 1 BTA06-600T 2 BTA06-600T 3 1 U2 G_JS RX20 1 2 Q1 2 100 2 2 U2 4 RX21 1 2 1 6 2 MOC3021 R1 100 3 3 1 6 TB2 8 8 F8 2 1 U12 2 3 UDN2595A 15 1 1 Q10 2N4403 2 2A_250V 1 2 2 1K 4 TPU_8 2 2 1 C2 .1UF 500V 1 1 JS_SW C19 .1UF 500V JS RX19 1 2 2 U4 TPU_7 Q23 1 BTA06-600T _JS U17 U12 Q3 4 100 3 4 DB_B_SW R3 100 3 +5V 3 1 3 VO_SW 1 2 1K G_VO MOC3021 2 4 2 5 Inlet A OC Cooling Fan 7 1 TPU_6 3 1 Q9 2N4403 1 4 R20 200 2 U4 5 2 U12 2 Q2 6 100 100 2 1 R2 100 3 +5V 6 F7 2 1 U2 3 6 2A_250V 1 1 1K 2 R31 _VO U16 1 1 2 6 5 UDN2595A 16 2 BTA06-600T TPU_5 3 TPU_9 Q8 2N4403 1 R25 200 C4 .1UF 500V 1 U4 VO 1 BTA06-600T U2 1 IBCF_SW C18 .1UF 500V 3 2 8 100 2 2 Q4 Q22 1 BTA06-600BW 2 7 MOC3021 U12 2 2 +5V G_IABF 3 RX18 1 3 100 1 3 R30 7 2A_250V 1 2 1K 4 2 8 7 2 R5 100 1 Q7 2N4403 1 2 1 U4 TPU_2 2 F6 2 6 TB1 8 8 IACF_SW _IABF U15 1 C17 .1UF 500V IBCF 2 1 1 Q21 1 BTA06-600BW RX17 1 R19 200 +5V 100 2 G_IACF 3 TPU_[0:15] UDN2595A 2 17 R29 2 1 2A_250V 1 2 _IACF U14 IB_CF UDN2595A 1 18 IACF 1 R24 200 MOLEX_39-31-016 PTV Heater Power Control PCB Connector to Motherboard 119837 A 222 B C 2 D 5 A B C D +5V +5V 1 1 R15 249K R13 1.0K 2 1 100K 1 5000pF 1 2 2 C7 C14 2 +15V 2 R12 1 .01UF 6 5 8 7 LM311N 3 1 4 1 2 1 1 2 XFMR_P1LO XFMR_P2HI 3 4 9 10 LINE_VOLTAGE_LOW 6 12 1N914A CR5 R9 200PF .01UF U10 C11 50V 2 B U11 Q* 4 1 CR7 1N914A 1 C10 .01UF 50V 2 2 1 10.0K 7 + 2 1 2 LINE_VOLTAGE_HI 16 15 14 R/C VCC C Q 13 1 A* 74LS123 1 2 R10 C9 GND 8 -15V CLR* 3 2 1 1.00K +5V 1 T1 MAGNATEK_VPP24-100 CR2 +5V 2 2 1 VMON 1 1 1N4001 R8 174K 2 2 1 10UF 35V C6 2 +5V 2 1 2 3 MOLEX_22-23-2031 3 TPU_10 +5V J8 1 Oven Door Interlock 2 C5 .01uF 7 6 R/C C 9 A* Q 5 U11 10 Q*12 12 10B 74LS123 CLR* 11 +5V 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 24 SDO 14 SDI 13 ISPEN* 36 MODE 33 PCLK 34 119815 PLSI1016-60 U3 OUT0 OUT1 OUT2 OUT3 OUT4 OUT5 OUT6 OUT7 18 19 20 21 22 25 26 27 28 PLFX2 29 PLF1 30 PLF2 1 GND1 23 GND2 1 R4 10K J3 Jumper 1-2 for 120V Jumper 2-3 for 230V IN0 IN1 IN2 IN3 IN4 IN5 IN6 IN7 IN8 IN9 IN10 IN11 IN12 IN13 IN14 IN15 10 SCLK 15 MOSI 16 MISO 17 CS* 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 +5V VCC2 MOLEX_22-23-2031 VCC1 J4 Jumper 1-3 for Single NPD 1 2 Jumper 2-3 for Dual NPD Pigtail on Xfmr Cable 3 12 2 1 MOLEX_22-23-2031 5000pF 2 J9 J6 Jumper 1-3 for Ignitor Xfmr1 Jumper 2-3 for Main Xfrmr 2 Pigtail on Xfmr Cable 3 R14 249K C12 RESET TPU10_BUF TPU_15 3 31 OVEN_EN +5V +15V_PRES 1-6-1998_12:11 10 -15V_PRES +5V_PRES QSM_CS6* 4 +24V_PRES QSM_MISO Q11 2N4401 QSM_MOSI E QSM_SCLK 1 2 9 U1 10K 1 C 2 R40 499 2 2 3 B R39 499 R38 499 8 R7 2 1 1.0K 1 1 7 U1 10K 4 Power Control PCB 119837 A B C 3 5 D 223 A B C Line Voltage Switched D Oven & Fan Control Line Voltage High 1 "RELAY" Line Voltage Low 2 1 MH3 J20 J18 2 J22 1 2 J21 1 J2 1 1 3 LINE_VOLTAGE_LOW_SW RX15 1 RX26 1 RX14 1 RX13 1 RX24 1 1 RX25 MOLEX_39-28-8020 J24 1 2 RX12 LINE_VOLTAGE_HI_SW 2 1N4001 1 1 J19 CR1 LINE_VOLTAGE_HI LINE_VOLTAGE_LOW J14 +5V 1 C13 C16 47UF 16V 1 RX11 74LS123 2 B GND 8 1 3 XFMR_P2HI XFMR_P1LO Q* 4 CLR* 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 White Brown Blue Orange Yellow 2 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 2 Jumper for 230 VAC Operation 2 +5V 1 Thermal Cut Out +24V SW1 OT R6 1 5 R28 U5 10K 1 6 1N5250B CR3 2 1 1.00K 3 5 8 7 C 10K Q14 2 2N440110K U5 1 E 2 6 9 3 J23 1 2 200 B 3 3 4OTG MOC3021 +24V_PRES +15V_PRES R23 U5 +5V_PRES +24V U23 1 6 BMT 2 4 BMTG 2 1 200 10 10K 2 C Q12 2N4401 1E B 6 2 1 TPU10_BUF U5 U22 1 OVEN_EN 2 7 6 R/C C 9 A* Q -15V_PRES 4 MOC3021 U1 10K 10 10B 1 2 +5V OVERTEMP Q5 2N4403 2 1 2 1 10 4 10 4 3 U1 10K 1 E Q6 2N4401 12-23-1997_13:14 4 Power Control PCB 119837 2 2 4 2 1 1 224 B C 2 -15V 12V A 3 B U5 CR9 U8 1N914A 1K CR8 1N5242B Loss of any supply will disable this relay driver. 4 10 2 Q18 2N4401 E 10K U7 10K E 1 1 U6 10K U6 10K 8 Q20 2N4401 E 6 2 10K Q19 U7 2N4401 3 5 B E 9 3 U9 10K 1 C 1 3 2 7 3 2 10K U6 2 B E B Q17 2N4401 2 C U13 Q*12 12 74LS123 CLR* 11 U1 10K C 1 1 C B 8 7 3C 10K Q15 U6 2N4401 1E 9 2 9 3 10K 10 8 2 8 7 3 C Q13 2N4401 1 E Q16 2N4401 2 C B B U9 3 10K B 2 1 3 U7 10K 9 7 U9 U8 1K 3 U8 1K 2 3 4 6 6 CR6 1N5221B2 6 CR4 U6 10K 1 1 U7 10K U7 10K 5 5 1 U9 10K 1N5242B 12V 3 5 +15V 10K 5 1 WD_TIM U8 1K BLOWER Single Voltage Blower Motor 1 2 Jumper for 115 VAC Operation +24V MOLEX_39-28-802 U9 OVEN MOLEX_39-28-806 J16 2 1 10.0K RX2 4 SEC2_HI SEC2_LO 2 R37 100 J12 R17 U8 1K Fan PRI2_HI PRI2_LO J17 MOLEX_26-48-1241 +24V_MAIN SEC1_HI SEC1_LO 1 C8 .01uF PRI1_HI PRI1_LO Q29 +5V RX8 1 SEC2_A SEC2_CT SEC2_B BM2 BM3 BM4 BM5 BM6 -15V 1 J11 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 BM1 16V 15 14 R/C C U13 Q 13 16 VCC 1 A* RX9 +15V_MAIN MOLEX_26-60-413 R11 10K 1 MOLEX_39-31-016 1 RX10 1 2 To Motherboard RX6 PRI2_HI PRI2_LO BTA06-600BW R16 10.0K RX3 2 1 1 2 3 4 2 RX5 +15V XFB1 XFB2 XFB3 XFB4 SEC1_A SEC1_CT SEC1_B PRI1_HI PRI1_LO J15 1 1 1 2 3 4 +5V R18 20.0K C15 1 2100UF RX7 1 2 1 SUPPLY 3 RX4 DGND_MAIN 1 2 2 J10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 .01uF 1 POWER +5V +5V +5V RET RET RET RET +15V +15V -15V_RET -15V NC-KEY +24V -15V_MAIN CHASSIS PL_LO PL_HI +5V 1 2 +5V_MAIN XFA1 XFA2 XFA3 XFA4 C D 4 5 A B C D 1 1 SO1 MH2 MH4 SO2 MH1 SO3 J13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 2 MH5 QSM_CS6* QSM_MOSI QSM_MISO QSM_SCLK WD_TIM OVERTEMP TPU_0 TPU_1 TPU_2 TPU_3 TPU_4 TPU_5 TPU_6 TPU_7 TPU_8 TPU_9 TPU_10 MH6 2 TPU_[0:15] TPU_15 IA_CF IB_CF VMON 3M_3429-6302 +5V_PRES +15V_PRES +24V_PRES 3 3 -15V_PRES 3-26-1998_16:33 4 4 Power Control PCB 119837 A B C 5 5 D 225 PCB Layout for Power Control Module (119835) 226 Digital Pressure Flow Control This chapter describes the PCB for the Digital Pressure Flow Control (DPFC) of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter at a Glance… Theory of Operations ................................................................................................ 228 Adjustment Procedures ............................................................................................. 229 Schematics and Component Layout ......................................................................... 229 Service Manual 227 Chapter 5.7 Digital Pressure Flow Control Theory of Operations Theory of Operations Circuit Function The Digital Pressure Flow Control (DPFC) PCB is located on the rear of the Analytical Unit. The DPFC PCB is controlled by SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) signals that come from the motherboard through the P6 connector (MOSI, MISO, SS, OVEN, SCK), and take the +5L, +/–15A, +15P, COMMON (Analog, Digital, Power) through the P8 connector. An X1 quartz crystal generates the clock frequency of 8 MHz. The crystal is connected directly to the local MC68HC11A1 microprocessor (U14, Xtal and Extal) through the resistor (R11). NOTE The DPFC PCB uses an on-board MC68HC11A1 microprocessor. In this section, the term microprocessor refers specifically to the MC68HC11A1. The 8-bit single-chip microprocessor 68HC11A1 (U14) includes 512B of EPROM and 256B of static RAM. This microprocessor controls: • EPROM 27C512 memory (U13, 64KB) • Data bus (AD0–AD7) • Address (A8–A15) bus Two stages of the integrated circuit 74HCT00 (U19) generate the RESET signal (active low) to initialize the microprocessor to a known startup state. The microprocessor provides an E output frequency signal on pin 5 (used as reference timing). Pin 5 is actually one-fourth of the input frequency of 8 MHz at the Xtal and Extal pins. Two CNY17/II optocouplers (U4, U5) read the PURG1 and PURG2 input signals to recognize the presence of the purge line of the split/splitless injectors controlled by DPFC devices. Chip-selects (O10–O16, O20–O24) are generated by two 74HCT374 3-State buffers. The other two stages of the integrated circuit 74HCT00 generate the digital output signals to select the 74LS138 decoder (U23) and the 27C512 EPROM (U13). The following connectors control all signals for five DPFC devices: 228 • DET1 (right) • DET2 (left) • DET3 (aux) • CAR1 (right) • CAR2 (left) Service Manual Chapter 5.7 Digital Pressure Flow Control Adjustment Procedures The circuit consists of two TL082 integrated circuits (U17, U21) and the NPC1210. The purpose of the circuit is to read the ambient pressure. Integrated circuits 74LS139 (U12) and 74LS04 (U11) generate three enable signals to select three ADG408 integrated circuits (U2, U6, U8), which read all analog inputs for DPFC pressure and flow data. The output D of the ADG408 is an analog serial data output. The microprocessor will digitally read this output (DADY, AMISO, ASCLK, AMOSI, RES) through the AD7715 (U1). The voltage regulator 78L05 (U26) supplies the +5 V dc. Adjustment Procedures No field adjustments are necessary. Schematics and Component Layout The schematics and component layout information for the Digital Pressure Flow Control (DPFC) PCB is listed below in Table 5.7-1. The number of drawings has been included for each schematic and its corresponding layout. There are three drawings for reference in this section. Table 5.7-1. Digital Pressure Flow Control Schematics Board DPFC (EPC) NOTE Service Manual PN Drawing Layout 23648330 SE 1391 - sh. 2, 1–2 PC 1111, 1 The last drawing in this section is the layout of the board. 229 MOD/RDM SH2 SH2 SH2 SH2 SH2 5/2/98 SH2 499R P6 VCC SS' MOSI SH2 2 4 6 8 10 1 3 5 7 9 OVEN SCK MISO 1 1 1 D A MODB RN1 19 5 18 7 RN1 6 8 4K7 4K7 4K7 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 D S.P.I. 10K R18 1/4-1 2 2 3 U19 5 U19 (14=VCC,7=D) 2 22uF16V C37 +1 1 C32 HCT00 HCT00 6 1 2 (14=VCC,7=D) D 22pF 2 C30 O17 SH2 SH2 SH2 SH2 SH2 SH2 SH2 O10 O11 O12 O13 O14 O15 O16 SH2 SH2 SH2 SH2 SH2 O20 O21 O22 O23 O24 SH2 CLK2 VCC 1 10M R11 1/4-1 D 4 D 3 1D 4 2D 7 3D 8 13 4D 14 5D 17 6D 18 7D 8D 2 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 3 4 7 8 13 14 17 18 U24 OC' CP 1D 2D 3D 4D 5D 6D 7D 8D 1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 5Q 6Q 7Q 8Q D 2 5 6 9 12 15 16 19 O25 O26 O27 HCT374 U23 HCT373 D A11 RW A15 1 2 3 A13 6 4 G1G'2A 5 G'2B A B C VCC Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6 Y7 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 7 D 74LS138 CLK2 2 C29 1 1 11 OC' C C40 2 22pF 2 1 12 8MHz VCC VCC 1 X1 1 1Q 25 2Q 6 3Q 9 4Q 12 5Q 15 6Q 16 7Q 19 8Q VCC 100nF 1 C31 2 D U25 D 100nF 1 2 VCC 4 1 OE' 8 7 5 4K7 31 2 3 RN1 HCT374 11 22 RN1 100nF 1 D 2 5 6 9 12 15 16 19 100nF RW 1 D 26 27 20 4 6 17 SH2 D 52 51 2 13 14 17 18 1Q 2Q 3Q 4Q 5Q 6Q 7Q 8Q 100nF 499R 2 R20 21/4-1 R21 21/4-1 R19 1/4-1 499R PE7 20 21 22 23 24 25 25 24 21 23 1D 2D 3D 4D 5D 6D 7D 8D 2 D D D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 OC' CP C39 4 2 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 O0 O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 O7 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 3 4 7 8 1 VCC 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 D U20 2 1 U14 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 A15 CS' 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 1 11 C38 2K21 2 R3 1/4-1 43 45 47 49 44 46 48 50 A0 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12 A13 A14 10 (20=VCC,10=D) D 6 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 (20=VCC,10=D) U5 1 AD1 AD2 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 (16=VCC,8=D) VCC 4 5 SH2 1 U13 27C512 VCC PA0 (28=VCC,14=D) 1 2K21 2 R2 1/4-1 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 1 5 D 26 2 6 2 4K74 2 R4 1/4-1 100nF 68HC11A1 U4CNY17/II 1 100nF 1 VCC C18 4K74 2 R1 1/4-1 SH2 SH2 22/7/97 1 (20=VCC,10=D) 2 CNY17/II OVEN 22/12/97 C20 P24V5 SH2 PVRG2 A PR/REV DEL.TEST & RS232 CIRCUIT;MASTER REV. 1.1. B PR/REV ADDED R19,R20,R21 ON SPI CONN. - MASTER REV. 1.2 . C PR/REV MOD. U21 FROM TL082 TO OP200,ON SHEET 2 . FIRMA/VISTO VCC P24V4 SH2 PVRG1 DATA 1 DRDY' AMISO ASCLK AMOSI RES' MODIFICHE A15 U19 13 11 HCT00 (14=VCC,7=D) 9 D A14 U19 10 8 (14=VCC,7=D) HCT00 disegnatore strumento TRACE GC data BOLLA C. assieme 16/5/97 sostituisce scala codice visto A3 EPCTRC - Rev. 1.2 particolare CPU & MEM SECTION THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF CE INSTRUMENTS SpA NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED,DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF CE INSTRUMENTS SpA. THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY CE INSTRUMENTS SpA AT ANY TIME. disegno n. mod SE1391-1/2 C 231 MOD/RDM DET3 CAR1 CAR2 C5 100nF 1 SPLIT&PURGE 2 U3 A A 100nF 8 A 2 SH1 D2 CLK2 PR D CLK2 Q' +15V VCC OVEN SH1 3 A 1 U22 1 + 10K R16 1/4-1 6 2 5 7 + 8 -15V U21 + 10 (14=VCC,7=D) PR12 Q9 D 14 A 11 Y1 13 B 9 11 CP CLR 13 D Y3 74LS139 (16=VCC,8=D) 232 5 100nF - 2 1 (16=VCC,8=D) 1 6 O10 O11 O12 U11 74LS04 (14=VCC,7=D) 2 8 3 1 4 3 2 1 C7 -15V VCC 100nF 2 1 C9 A0 1 16 15 U8 2 R14 1/4-1 OP200GP 4 7 C16 2 100nF B Y2 Y3 EN -15V C34 A D D U11 74LS04 (14=VCC,7=D) 12 D 11 78L05 +5V -15V A U11 74LS04 (14=VCC,7=D) 9 U11 D 74LS04 (14=VCC,7=D) O14 O15 O16 1 SH1 SH1 A AVRG AVRG A15V VCC +15V -15V +15V 1 3 A C42 100uF35v C43 100uF35v A D A + P8 P8 P8 P8 P8 P8 3 4 5 8 6 7 P8 P8 1 2 D -15V disegnatore strumento TRACE GC BOLLA C. assieme 8 data 16/5/97 sostituisce scala codice visto A3 EPCTRC - Rev. 1.2 A 10 3 U12 particolare 13 15 EN O13 O10 O11 O12 2 8 32 Y1 2 A U26 14 1 A D 2 C10 Y0 74LS139 1 CER25 7 U17 5 6 U11 VCC D 4 U11 74LS04 2 13 - 5 2 4 7 1 10K U21 + C17 100nF 74LS04 (14=VCC,7=D) TL082 2 5 U12 10 Y2 U18 Q'8 C33 A6 A 12 Y0 +15V 6 8 2 1 C27 -15V 16K5 1 R10 1/4-1 74LS74 100nF 2 1 NPC1210 100nF 4 1 5 6 3 +IN U16 2 + A -15V 4 8 100K 1 R12 1/4-1 1 C25 A 1 U17 R13 1/4-1 A (14=VCC,7=D) 4 5 6 7 12 11 10 9 2 2 3 C26 - 1 1 10K 100K 1 R15 1/4-1 TL082 8 2 2 FLO13 FLO23 FLO33 FBAK3 FB24 3 FB25 OP200GP 2 100nF A0 1 16 15 U6 ADG408 2 8 +15V A 4 100nF +15V SH1 SH1 SH1 SH1 SH1 D 74LS138 C6 +15V +15V 2 1 O10 O11 O12 O13 O14 1 O20 A2 O21 B3 O22 C VCC 6 4 G12AG' O24 5 2BG' -15V 1 A 1 100nF SH1 SH1 SH1 SH1 SH1 3 2 1 13 14 4 P10 3 14 100nF + -15V - O10 O11 O12 7 U10 A 2 A DACS1 E2CS1 DACS2 E2CS2 DACS3 E2CS3 2 A U7 15 14Y0 13Y1 12Y2 11Y3 10Y4 9 Y5 7 Y6 Y7 O20 O21 O22 O23 O24 2 8 A 4 5 6 7 12 11 10 9 2 1K66 1 R5 1/4-1 C36 TL082 - 1 2 2 1 10K R17 1/4-0,1 4 15K R8 1/4-0,1 - U22 FLO11 FLO21 FLO31 FBAK1 FLO12 FLO22 FLO32 FBAK2 +15V 4 100nF -15V 5 2 TL082 2 2 1 -15V 8 6 U2 +15V ADG408 74LS74 1 (14=VCC,7=D) 100nF C35 A0 1 16 15 C4 6 CLR 2 1 2 C3 4 5 6 7 12 11 10 9 100nF D KTY10-6 CP 1 5 Q A 8 1 CER25 U18 3 VCC SH1 SH1 SH1 SH1 C28 4 2 IN4148 A C14 TL082 C41 100nF VCC D1 1N4148 2 1 +15V PRES4 FLOW4 SPFL4 FB14 PRES5 FLOW5 SPFL5 FB15 2 4 100nF 100nF +15V 13 D +5V + -15V ADG408 16 A 2 U10 3 2 1 1 TL082 C15 - 1 2 1 2 D RES' ASCLK AMOSI AMISO DRDY' U1 DGND 11 C13 15K 1 R7 1/4-1 2 1 +15V 2 2 D C1 5 1 14 13 12 4 D 74LS138 C8100nF 1 PVRG1 P24V4 PVRG2 P24V5 +12 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 +1 10nF P9 P9 P9 P9 P9 P9 P9 P9 2 4 2 PVRG2 SVRG2 PVRG1 SVRG1 S24V4 P24V4 S24V5 P24V5 1 O20 A2 O21 B3 O22 C VCC 6 G12AG' 4 O23 5 2BG' (16=VCC,8=D) SH1 15K R6 1/4-1 9 10 7 8 2 3 -15V PRES5 SPFL5 FB25 VCC E2CS5 AMOSI LDA5' O16 A15V AVRG SVRG2 PVRG2 15 14Y0 13Y1 12Y2 11Y3 10Y4 9 Y5 7 Y6 Y7 DACS4 E2CS4 DACS5 E2CS5 LDA4' LDA5' C12 10uF25v 1 15 DVDD REF+ 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 2 16K5 1 R9 1/4-1 RES' 1 6 C2 6 VIN VOU 100nF P2 (16=VCC,8=D) A U9 VCC 2 -15V +15V PRES4 A SPFL4 FLOW5 FB24 FB15 D VCC 11 E2CS4 DACS5 13 AMOSI ASCLK 15 LDA4' AMISO 17 O15 LDA5' 19 A15V A15V 21 AVRG AVRG 23 SVRG1 S24V5 25 PVRG1 P24V5 1 3 5 7 9 C11 1 REF03 2 5 11 13 15 17 19 100nF +5V AD7715 +15V A 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 +1 VCC E2CS3 AMOSI A15V A15V AVRG -15V +15V FLO23 A FBAK3FLOW4 D FB14 D DACS3 11 ASCLKDACS4 13 AMISOASCLK 15 A15V AMISO 17 AVRG LDA4' 19 AVRG A15V 21 AVRG 23 S24V4 25 P24V4 P1 1 3 5 7 9 2 11 13 15 17 19 +15V FLO13 FLO33 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 10uF25v A VCC E2CS2 AMOSI A15V A15V AVRG -15V FLO22 FBAK2 D DACS2 ASCLK AMISO A15V AVRG AVRG P5 1 3 5 7 9 TE1 +15V FLO12 FLO32 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 2 11 13 15 17 19 -15V FLO21 FBAK1 D DACS1 ASCLK AMISO A15V AVRG AVRG P4 1 3 5 7 9 T A VCC E2CS1 AMOSI A15V A15V AVRG 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 1 +15V FLO11 FLO31 P3 1 3 5 7 9 FIRMA/VISTO VCC D +1 DET2 DATA 2 DET1 MODIFICHE ADC SECTION THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF CE INSTRUMENTS SpA NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED,DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF CE INSTRUMENTS SpA. THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY CE INSTRUMENTS SpA AT ANY TIME. disegno n. mod SE1391-2/2 C 20 10 2 20 10 2 1 1 C17 + C40 C38 10 1 2 2 C43 + 7 8 U25 1 C42 C18 R18 U23 U13 1 P10 1 1 C36 C30 C29 C28 1 1 R16 R17 R14 R15 C27 4 1 1 C34 1 1 1 1 POWER R9 R10 C14 C16 R5 1 R6 1 D1 C25 D2 C26 R7 11 R8 5 8 R12 R13 C33 C35 1 C12 1 U16 U20 + 1 C32 C31 U19 R11 U26 R20 R21 U18 C37 U22 P6 R19 1 1 + U21 SPLIT & X1 RN1 C39 + U17 PURGE VALVES U14 C20 U24 1 1 1 1 U12 S.P.I. U5 R3 R4 U4 R1 R2 U7 1 U11 C15 C13 C2 U8 TE1 C11 CARR.1-RIGHT C10 U10 U6 C7 C4 U9 DET.1-RIGHT C8 C5 U3 P9 C9 U2 P1 1 DET.3-AUX C6 U1 20 1 P3 1 DET.2-LEFT C3 C1 C41 CARR.2-LEFT 10 2 20 P5 P4 1 P2 10 2 20 10 2 4 PEM KFSE-M3-3 P8 PCB Layout for Digital Pressure Flow Control (PC 1111) 233 Keypad and Display Panel This chapter describes the PCB for the Keypad and Display Panel of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter at a Glance… Theory of Operations ................................................................................................ 236 Adjustment Procedures ............................................................................................. 236 Schematics and Component Layout ......................................................................... 236 Service Manual 235 Chapter 5.8 Keypad and Display Panel Theory of Operations Theory of Operations The keypad and display panel are the primary means by which the user communicates with the GC. Drawing 119841 shows the keypad schematic. See Schematics and Component Layout. One PLD provides control for scanning the display and for driving the status display LEDs. The microprocessor communicates with the PLD through the SPI bus several times per second. With each communication, the PLD sends data to the microprocessor to indicate which key, if any, is pressed. The microprocessor then interprets this information and takes the appropriate action. The display receives serial data from the microprocessor’s SCI output and displays it on the vacuum florescent display. NOTE The display is a purchased assembly. It is a non-repairable component. The keypad and display panel module is designed to be replaced and not repaired. Adjustment Procedures No field adjustments are possible. Schematics and Component Layout The schematics and component layout information for the keypad and display panel PCB is listed below in Table 5.8-1. The number of drawings has been included for each schematic and its corresponding layout. There are two drawings for reference in this section. Table 5.8-1. Keypad and Display Panel Schematics 236 Board PN Drawing Layout Keypad and Display Panel 43210025 119841B, 1–2 not available Service Manual A B C D REV ECO NO. DATE BY CHK 1 1 Key Definition 2 SW1 STOP SW28 STATUS SW2 PREPARE RUN SW29 PRESS SW3 START SW30 TEMP SW4 OVEN SW31 FLOW SW5 LEFT INLET SW32 TIME SW6 RIGHT INLET SW33 RAMP # SW7 LEFT DETECTOR SW34 3 SW8 RIGHT DETECTOR SW35 2 SW9 LEAK CHECK SW36 1 SW10 AUX SW37 INFO/DIAG SW11 LEFT CARRIER SW38 RUN LOG SW12 RIGHT CARRIER SW39 0 SW13 LEFT SIGNAL SW40 . (DECIMAL) SW14 RIGHT SIGNAL SW41 - (MINUS) SW15 COLUMN EVAL SW42 SEQUENCE SW16 CONFIG SW43 METHOD SW17 "UP ARROW" SW44 STORE SW18 "DOWN ARROW" SW45 LOAD SW19 9 SW46 EDIT/ACTIVE SW20 8 SW47 RUN TABLE SW21 5 SW48 CLOCK TABLE SW22 7 SW49 VALVE # SW23 ENTER SW50 AUTO SAMPLER SW24 MODE/TYPE SW51 ON/YES SW25 OFF/NO SW52 "INFINITY SIGN" SW26 6 SW53 CLEAR SW27 4 SW54 SEQ CONTROL 2 3 3 4 L Baldwin 12/10/97 L Baldwin 12/10/97 Keyboard Assembly 4 B 119841 12/10/97 A B C B 1 2 D 237 A B C D NOTES: SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 1. U1 IS A 44 PIN PLCC DEVICE AND MUST BE SOCKETED 2. ALL COMPONENTS SHOWN ON THE SCHEMATIC CAN BE MOUNTED ON THE SIDE OF THE PCB OPPOSITE THE KEY PATTERN. SW8 SW9 SW10 SW11 SW12 SW13 SW14 SW15 SW16 SW17 SW18 SW19 SW20 SW21 SW22 SW23 SW24 SW25 SW26 SW27 SW28 SW29 SW30 SW31 SW32 SW33 SW34 SW37 SW36 SW37 SW38 SW39 SW40 SW41 SW42 SW43 SW44 SW45 SW46 SW47 SW48 SW49 SW50 SW51 SW52 SW53 SW54 1 3. J2-1 AND J2-14 CONNECT TO A COPPER TRACE WHICH ENCIRCLES THE KEYPAD AND WILL BE IN CONTACT WITH THE KEYBOARD/DISPLAY HOUSING WHEN ASSEMBLED. 4. ALL RESISTORS ARE 1/8 WATT SW6 5% OR BETTER +5VDC 2 510 12 VCC1 2 510 44 36 6 2 510 SCLK SS* KD6 KD5 KD4 KD3 KD2 KD1 KD0 2 +5VDC CLK 1 200 2 NON ACTIVE MET/SEQ EDIT D1 ORANGE 1 510 2 28 21 26 19 37 8 9 22 OUT14 20 OUT13 16 OUT12 2 27 STAT OUT11 41 OUT10 15 OUT9 25 OUT8 7 OUT7 29 OUT6 38 OUT5 43 119810 OUT4 40 OUT3 31 OUT2 39 OUT1 32 OUT0 GND1 GND2 1 23 11 1 MOSI 2 1 MISO 2 42 2 3 5 17 4 18 10 30 24 STANDBY D2 YELLOW 1 2 1 200 200 2 1 1 INITIAL TEMP D3 YELLOW 2 1 34 VCC2 KR7 KR6 KR5 KR4 KR3 KR2 KR1 KR0 2 1 RAMP D4 YELLOW 1 2 1 200 FINAL TEMP D5 YELLOW 2 200 2 1 1 +5VDC 2 1 SW6 3 200 2 1 1 2 200 COOL D7 BLUE 1 2 1 3 RUN LOG D6 ORANGE 1 2 1 2 2 .01UF 2 1 GAS SAVER D8 YELLOW 1 10UF BASELINE COMP D9 YELLOW 2 200 2 1 1 2 200 CLOCK TABLE D10 YELLOW 1 2 1 SEQUENCE D11 YELLOW 2 200 2 1 2 1 READY TO INJECT D12 GREEN 1 200 1 200 2 1 238 This may either be a connector or a pigtail This may either be a connector or a pigtai A 1 2 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 4 J1 J2 2 200 NOT READY D13 ORANGE 4 KEYBOARD / DISPLAY MODULE - ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC 119841 B C 2 D 2 Theory of Detector Cards This chapter contains a representative block diagram for the following 6 detector chapters: • 5.10, Flame Ionization Detector Controller • 5.11, Electron Capture Detector Controller • 5.12, Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector Controller • 5.13, Flame Photometric Detector Controller (FPD) • 5.14, Photoionization Detector Controller (PID) • 5.15, Thermal Conductivity Detector Controller (TCD) The diagram is representative of only the detector cards in the above listed chapters. Chapter at a Glance… Block Diagram for Detector Cards ........................................................................... 240 Service Manual 239 Block Diagram for Detector Cards DIN64A Bus Motherboard 24V +15V/-15v DC-DC Converter +5V MISO MOSI SPI I/O decoder SCLK CS Det. Cell +5V Detector Cell amplifier & control detector signal Det type Diodes 1V & 10V analogic outputs A B C S D/A zero suppression F-OUT V/F Converter GF Figure 5.9-1. Block Diagram for Detector Cards Flame Ionization Detector Controller This chapter describes the Flame Ionization Detector (FID) controller of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter at a Glance… Theory of Operations ................................................................................................ 242 Adjustment Procedures ............................................................................................. 243 Schematics and Component Layout ......................................................................... 244 Service Manual 241 Chapter 5.10 Flame Ionization Detector Controller Theory of Operations Theory of Operations Circuit Function The main purpose of the Flame Ionization Detector (FID) PCB is to control the IGNIT (flame igniter coil), –300 V (flame jet polarization), and input (low current produced) of the FID. The FID PCB takes all digital inputs/outputs (P1 connector) and the power voltages (+5 V dc, +/–15 V dc, +24 V dc) from the motherboard. The low-current signal (DET CABLE) produced from the FID is connected to the input of the 2N5909 preamplifier (U24) by a dedicated cable with coaxial connector. The output signal then goes to the OP07 amplifier (U25). There are four J201 FETs (Q8–Q11) to select the range of the input current. The input current then goes to the first analog input of the amplifier OP77 (U26) on pin 3, together with the second analog input on pin 2 as a back-off current signal (VBO). A back-off bucking current is generated from the DAC0801 converter (U18, U19) and the OP07C amplifier (U23). The LM324 integrated circuit (U22) generates four signals to select the range input current (PN1–PN4). Three 74HC595 integrated circuits (U13, U15, U16) generate the output chip-select (O1–O6) and the background chip-select (Z0–Z15). Integrated circuit 74HC240 takes the input serial data (CLOCK, MOSI, MISO), the chip-select (CS), the +5 V dc, and GND from the motherboard. Custom chip 24SCR4.5D15M (U12) takes the input voltage of +24 V dc to generate the +/–15 V dc and the +5 V dc through the 78L05 regulator (Q1). The integrated circuit MOC3020 (U20) takes the input voltage of 8 V dc through the BTA06 triac to supply the flame igniter coil of the FID (P5). The integrated circuit MOC3020 (U20) is selected from two signals (O4, O5) generated by 74HC595 (U16). The electronic circuit includes: • BC107–BC177 transistors (Q2–Q7) • IN4148 diodes (D3–D13) • Capacitors (C12–C45) The function of the electronic circuit is to generate a negative voltage of –300 V to polarize the flame jet of the FID. The P2 connector gives 0 V (signal common), 1 V, 10 V, and GND (chassis) outputs to connect an integrator or to handle chromatograph data externally. 242 Service Manual Chapter 5.10 Flame Ionization Detector Controller Adjustment Procedures Output Specifications +/–15 V @ 130 mA +5 V @ 25 mA Adjustment Procedures Calibration Adjustments Refer to the calibration of potentiometers shown in the F1/4 drawing located in Schematics and Component Layout. Special Notes In order to verify the FID electrometer noise level, follow this technical procedure: 1. Remove the coaxial connectors of the signal cable from the FID 2. Wrap up the coaxial connectors using aluminum foil 3. Connect the analog output signal (0–10 mV) to recorder 4. Set parameters ATT=0 and RNG=0 (max sensitivity) The noise level must be within 1% of full scale. Service Manual 243 Schematics and Component Layout The schematics and component layout information for the FID controller is listed below in Table 5.10-1. The number of drawings has been included for each schematic and its corresponding layout. There are two sets of five drawings for reference in this section. The first set of drawings is for version 1.3 of the FID controller. The second set of drawings is for version 1.4 of the FID controller. Table 5.10-1. FID Controller Schematics Board NOTE PN Drawing Layout FID 1.3 23648320 SE 1388 - sh. 4, 1–4 PC 1105, 1 FID 1.4 23648320 SE 1388 - sh. 4, 1–4 PC 1105, 1 The last drawing in each set is the layout of the board. MOD/RDM A B C D MODIFICHE DATA ADDED RV10 ON SH4 CHANGE R78,R79 FROM 2K21 TO 332R ON SH1 CHANGE U27 FROM TL082 TO OP200G ON SH1 CHANGE R83 FROM 1K TO 150 Ohm ON SH2 PR/REV PR/REV PR/REV PR/REV FIRMA/VISTO 3/6/97 8/9/97 9/12/97 28/01/98 +15A IO 12 CNTRL 11 IO 13 A A 2 1 1 1 10K R17 +15A OP07C 2 2 3 2 0.1uF 1 -U3 7 C8 + 4 0.1uF A 3 2 A1 2 1 P2 P2 P2 3 4 O6 1N4148 2 D221 CNTRL A -15A 0.1uF 1 C53 8 9 7 2 4 C10 A 6 + 5 A 5 2.5V 3 - 6 1 U27 5 7 8 IO OI 1/4-1 A 2 4 3 1/4-1 1 4066 0.47uF 10K 1K1 R3 2 2 R4 U4 1 R77 1/4-1 4 2 1 A 14 22K1 C2 C54 C11 8 OP200G VFC110AP 2 U5 0.1uF 1 F OUT 14C M A AGND +15A 13 2 P1 -15A 10 - 0.1uF 2 6N137 +15A 0.1uF 3 1 5 2 U27 1/4-1 + 1 1 2 C14 8 6 12 11 4 475R R76 1 U6 2 7 C7 -15A +5M 2 1 A 2 2 2 3 1/4-0,1 A 309K R15 1/4-0,1 1/4-1 +15A1 1/4-0,1 C5 A -15A 2 14A 2.5V 0.1uF 1 C1 0.47uF 22K1 1 R5 1/4-1 1 OI P1 2 20C P2 GND CASE 20A P1 1 GND CASE 2 2 3 2 -U1 7 C6 + 4 0.1uF IO 1 2 1 10 3K32 1 R21 1/4-0,1 649K R75 2 +15A OP07C 2 1 0.1uF OI GF 6N137 7 1 1/4-0,1 1 SHEET4 8K87 1 R2 1/4-0,1 1 9K09 R16 1 649K R8 2 3 P3 2 P3 1 P3 2K21 2 R1 1/4-0,1 2 1/4-0,1 6 2K 1 3 9 A P1 5 2K A VDET CW 8K06 R13 OI 3 CNTRL 1 2 RV2 U4 2 A 8 0.1uF 1/4-1 1 -15A 2 1/4-1 CNTRL 2 6 14 0.1uF 6 1 2 2 C13 332R R78 2 1/4-1 100K R14 4066 +5M 8 7 2 RV3 A 1 C9 1 1N4148 1/4-0,1 8 D2 2 +U2 - 4 22K1 R12 1 2 +15A CW A 10K R9 1 Z2 2 CW 500K 1 1N825A 2 2 1 U7 2 2 1/4-1 1K21 R7 1 2 1 RV1 3 M 10uF25V SHEET3 M 393 3 2 1/4-0,1 +1 +5M 2 SHEET3 0.1uF C4 +5M 2 -15A 1N825 SHEET2 Z1 -15A 221K R10 1 C3 1 A SHEET2 +15A 1 1K21 1 R6 1/4-1 A 2 +15A SHEET2 +5M 1 +15A 7 332R 1 R79 1 1/4-1 +15A +U2 - 6 1/4-1 22M1 R11 2 -15A 1/4-1 +15A A1 SHEET2 6K81 R18 +15A1 1 A 5 6 +15A SHEET2 SHEET3 O6 SHEET3 A A 2 A A GND 10V 0V WEIDMULLER ANALOGUECONNECTOR CALIBRATION: 1 V-DET= 0mV ADJ RV1 FOR F.OUT=400KHz 2 V-DET=250mV ADJ RV2 FOR F.OUT=2.9MHz 3 V-DET=10V ADJ RV3 FOR F.OUT=3.137MHz 4 REPEAT POINT 1...3 UNTIL ALL OK strumento disegnatore TRACE assieme FID particolare Schematic diagram E.CARRARA data 22/04/97 sostituisce scala codice visto A3 F1/4 THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED,DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA. THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA AT ANY TIME. disegno n. SE 1388 mod D 245 MOD/RDM MODIFICHE DATA FIRMA/VISTO +15B D13 2 1 1N4148 1 P1 BTA06-200B 2 182R R27 1/4-1 2 U20 4 1N4148 10nF400V 2 C31 0.1uF100V 1 2 C23 1 C18 D3 D4 0.1uF100V 2 C12 D6 1 C15 2 1 IGNIT CABLE P5 1 -300V P5 2 IGNITER 2 0.1uF100V 1 D5 10M R20 D8 2 1 1/4-1 D7 2 1 B B 0.1uF400V 2 2 1 1 1N4148 100K 1 R26 1/4-1 D10 0.1uF100V B 2 1 10M R19 1/4-1 1 C16 1 2 1 2 1N4148 10nF400V C19 1N4148 1 2 1N4148 10nF400V C24 1N4148 1 2 1N4148 10nF400V 1 1N4148 2 1 22nF 2 1 D9 2 P1 C32 1N4148 2 1 1 2 1 2 2 1 2 2 1 BC107 1 2 1 BC107 BC107 D12 3 2 Q2 3 D11 Q6 2 P1 1 Q4 1 2 15k R35 1/4-1 1 8Vac-1 8A 8C 7A 1 BC177 3 2 1 1N4148 Q7 3 22nF 15K R25 1/4-1 1/4-1 2 3K92 R37 1/4-1 C45 2 1 BC107 2 332R R28 1/4-1 3 2 C41 2 C44 2 15K R38 1/4-1 1 2 1 1 1 C40 100pF 2 2 BC107 1 1 Q5 100pF 1 3 33K2 R36 2 22K1 R44 1/4-1 2 332K R43 1 1/4-1 2 332K R42 1/4-1 1 1 B 22K1 R41 1/4-1 2 Q3 2 +15B -15B 2 1 150R R83 1/4-1 A3 2 SHEET3 05 SHEET3 04 5 U17 1 1 3 6 MOC3020 12A 12C 11A 11C P1 P1 A3 +15B +15A P1 SHEET1 +15A1 P1 SHEET3 +15B P1 2 5 C29 A1 SHEET4 A2 SHEET3 B 2 GI A SHEET1 1 24SCR4.5D15M 4 S1-3-4 1 3 + U12 C30 2 VI + 1 100uF25V P1 P1 1 78L05 Q1 2 P1 2 + 1 3 S1-3-4 -15A SHEET3 -15B SHEET3 +5L 100uF25V C33 P1 +24V-2 -15B S1-3-4 100uF25V 10A 10C 9A 9C B P1 +24V-1 P1 8Vac-2 7C 6A 6C SHEET3 D1 25C P1 DET TYPE 2 1 P1 26A 1N4148 DET TYPE-A strumento assieme particolare disegnatore TRACE FID F2/4 Schematic diagram THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED,DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA. THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA AT ANY TIME. 246 E.CARRARA data 22/04/97 sostituisce scala codice visto disegno n. SE 1388 L A3 mod D MOD/RDM MODIFICHE DATA FIRMA/VISTO SHEET2 +15B B -15B SHEET2 SHEET2 B -15B 2 10M R47 1/4-1 2 5K62 R46 1 1/4-1 2 1/4-1 221K R48 1 2 7K5 R29 2 1K R49 1/4-1 1 2 7K5 R33 1/4-1 8 TL081 2 D15 2 O2 -15B 7 5 100K RN2 100K 1 PN2 6 PN3 RN1 6K81 R32 2 2 2 1 33K2 R40 1 RN2 PN4 C28 1 U14 7 12 U14 10 U14 8 U14 2 0.1uF L SHEET4 SHEET4 +15B 2 1/4-1 2.5V SHEET1 disegnatore TRACE FID particolare Schematic diagram SHEET4 PN4 +U22 - 3 1 4 1 1N4148 D14 1 1N4148 2 PN4 100K 2 RN2 8 3 33K2 R39 1/4-1 C35 1 100K SHEET4 1 4 6 7 SHEET4 PN5 2 1 2 0.1uF 2 2K21 R80 1/4-1 U21 + 1 C20 1 2 0.1uF 3 data E.CARRARA assieme 13 +15B 11 -15A - 1/4-1 9 SHEET2 2 PN1 -15B +U22 - 5 strumento A -15A 8 +5L 6 SHEET2 1 2 B U14 +15A O3 6 L 5 A SHEET2 Z0 Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6 Z7 L 6N137 M PQH 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 5 -5M SHEET1 QA QB QC QD QE QF QG QH SER 7 5 RN2 22K1 R31 1/4-1 3 4 +15A 6 L SHEET2 SHEET1 M 8 7 9 +15B SRCLR' SRCK +5L 14 +5M 2 3 L +5L 2 10 100K 14 1 4 14 +5L 909R R22 1/4-1 -15A RN1 L U13 +U224 324 +U22 - 11 13 100K 6N137 10 11 16 G' RCK A 12 6 RN1 3 L HC04 1 100K 1 13 12 2 5 U9 5 1N4148 1 2 U14 2 +15B A 1 SHEET4 0.1uF 1 C42 A A D16 3 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 4 IOUT B6 2 B7 IOUT' B8 VLC COMP VREF+ VREFV+ V- 74HC595 7 VBO 6 A U19 O1 A 2 C43 -15A 1 8 2 +5L C25 U10 2 C21 2 0.1uF 909R R23 1/4-1 6 SHEET2 A L 2K21 R81 1/4-1 M 1 +5L 7K5 R34 2 P1 +5L 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 16 14 15 13 3 1/4-1 C36 +5L 1 1 P1 +15A 0.1uF 8 24A 24C 1/4-1 1 PQH Z8 Z9 Z10 Z11 Z12 Z13 Z14 Z15 2 L 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 0.1uF 1 - U237 + 4 3 1 QA QB QC QD QE QF QG QH 10nF SER 2 14 C37 6N137 SRCLR' SRCK 2 C46 +15A 2 -15A DAC0801 Z7 Z6 Z5 Z4 Z3 Z2 Z1 Z0 2 5 10 11 U15 1 3 L 10 MAIN MAIN A 74HC595 2 6 2 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3 G' RCK 0.1uF 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4 1 7 U8 13 12 C26 P1 16 8 1 OP07C A +5L 1 P1 U11 2 20 1 1G 19 2G 2 1A1 4 1A2 6 1A3 8 1A4 11 2A1 13 2A2 15 2A3 17 2A4 P1 +5L C22 1 2K21 R82 1/4-1 C17 1 2 74HC240 A +5L 2 2 18A P1 909R R24 1/4-1 0.1uF MOSI 16A 16C 1 L 0.1uF CS CLK 22A 22C 18C 0.1uF +5 MAIN +5 MAIN MISO P1 P1 10nF 1 A 2 1/4-1 DAC0801 0.1uF 8 2 5K11 R45 1 +15A B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 4 IOUT B6 2 B7 IOUT' B8 VLC COMP VREF+ VREFV+ V- 1 1 U18 1 7K5 R30 1/4-1 C38 +15A 2 O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 C34 +5M 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 16 14 15 13 3 1 PQH QA QB QC QD QE QF QG QH 10nF SER 2 14 C39 SRCLR' SRCK 2 10 11 U16 Z15 Z14 Z13 Z12 Z11 Z10 Z9 Z8 1 O6 G' RCK 0.1uF L 13 12 C27 O5 0.1uF SHEET1 16 1 SHEET2 O4 2 SHEET2 74HC595 +5L 22/04/97 sostituisce scala codice visto A3 F3/4 THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED,DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA. THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA AT ANY TIME. disegno n. SE 1388 mod D 247 MOD/RDM D17 2 2 22M1 R50 1/4-1 1 G5 3 G Q9 2 1 100pF 1G R73 2 D18 2 C50 2 1 1 SHEET3 FIRMA/VISTO 1 BA129 PN2 DATA D SHEET3 S PN1 MODIFICHE 1 J201 C51 2 BA129 2 SHEET3 Q10 S 1 3 G G4 2 +15A 1 D19 PN3 100M R74 2 1 22M1 R53 1/4-1 2 1nF D 1 J201 1 1 C48 20K R51 2 1/4-1 2 BA129 22M1 R59 1/4-1 1 3 G S 10K R55 1/4-1 2 3 2 J201 1 2 SHEET3 1 1 8 7 +U26 - 4 6 SHEET1 VDET SHEET3 VBO OP77 10G R72 100K R56 1/4-1 C47 -15A 1 1 22M1 R65 1/4-1 A 1 D S 1 22pF 1 Q11 2 2 G7 1 C52 3 G 2 BA129 0.1uF 2 PN4 2 Q8 1 D20 G3 2 D 1 1 2 2 10nF 10M R70 1/4-1 10K R52 1 A 2 1/4-1 J201 G6 2 1 +15A 90K9 R54 1/4-1 2 20K 1 2 RV10 1 C49 3 1 22K1 R57 1/4-1 +15A 2 -15A A -15A A2 SHEET2 +15A SHEET2 A SHEET2 -15A SHEET2 A2 2 RV6 -15A A strumento disegnatore TRACE FID particolare Schematic diagram data E.CARRARA assieme 22/04/97 sostituisce scala codice visto A3 F4/4 THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED,DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA. THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA AT ANY TIME. 248 RV7 2 2 10M R66 1/4-1 1 10K 1 2 RV5 1 10K RV4 2 1 200K 3 3 3 10K 1 3 2 221R R61 1/4-1 1 10K R64 1/4-1 1 A +15A 2 1 -15A +15A 6 332R R62 1/4-1 2 3 200K 2 1 1 100K R67 1/4-1 2 1 RV8 2 -15A OP07C 3K32 R63 1/4-1 A 1M R69 1/4-1 182R R68 1/4-1 3 RV9 2 1 1 3 - U257 + 4 2 2 1N4148 2 S1 A 200K 1 5 1 4 +15A D21 SHEET3 U24 C A2 PN5 S2 2 3 G1 6 D2 1 SCHERMO D1 2 7 G2 681K R58 1/4-1 2 1/4-1 2N5909 1 5M6 R71 2 681K R60 1/4-1 1 DET CABLE G2 1 G1 P4 2 2 10pF disegno n. SE 1388 mod D MOD/RDM MODIFICHE DATA A REV/PR AGGIUNTO RV10 ESEGUITO REV 1.2 DEL MASTER B REV/PR MOD.U27 DA TL082 A OP200G. ESEGUITO REV 1.3 DEL MASTER RV1 RV2 RV3 P3 1 C8 C7 U1 1 1 1 U3 1 1 1 U9 U14 C28 R51 R52 R54 R55 R56 R57 R58 R60 R61 R62 R63 R64 R66 R67 R68 R69 1 R53 D18 D1 c 32 a 1 C47 R59 D19 1 R65 D20 P1 U22 1 RN2 C39 C27 C35 C21 U13 R81 R80 C25 C26 U15 U18 C34 C20 C38 1 1 1 1 1 1 R34 R33 R32 R31 R30 R29 1 1 1 1 1 D16 D15 D14 R40 1 1 R39 C37 C32 U12 15 14 13 24 23 22 R27 2 1 RN1 R82 1 P5 1 3/06/97 9/12/97 R49 R48 R47 R46 R45 C46 C43 U23 C42 R83 U20 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R50 D17 U21 C36 U19 U16 C30 Q1 C33 C29 10 11 12 Q9 G5 R21 R79 R78 R24 R23 R22 1 2 3 1 G6 1 1 1 C22 Q11 Q10 G4 U10 C13 C11 U17 G2 U26 FEMMINA /FEMALE= 1 P5 MASCHIO/MALE = 2 P5 1 U5 1 U8 U6 C10 R17 U25 1 7 G7 Q8 R16 R15 U11 C14 D21 G1 G3 C53 1 1 U7 U27 R77 D22 1 RV4 RV5 RV6 RV7 RV8 RV9 RV10 U24 G2 U4 R12 R11 R10 R9 R75 C5 C6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 C17 C54 1 R20 C12 C24 1 1 C16 C19 + 1 U2 1 R8 Z2 R7 Z1 R6 R5 R4 R3 R2 R1 P4 R18 1 + C1 C2 C3 + D2 C9 1 R76 + P2 R14 R13 1 1 C4 FIRMA/VISTO R19 D10 D9 C31 D4 D3 C15 D6 D5 C18 D8 D7 C23 Q6 C45 Q7 1 R26 D12 Q2 1 D11 R25 C44 Q4 Q3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R28 1 C40 R44 R43 R42 R41 R38 Q5 R37 R36 D13 R35 C41 R71 G1 U24 G2 U25 C52 strumento G6 C51 R74 U26 assieme Q10 C50 G4 Q8 R73 G3 G7 R72 C49 C48 R70 Q11 particolare disegnatore TRACE C.S. FID data E.CARRARA 22/04/97 sostituisce scala codice visto A3 Q9 G5 THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF CE INSTRUMENTS SpA NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED,DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF CE INSTRUMENTS SpA. THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY CE INSTRUMENTS SpA AT ANY TIME. disegno n. PC 1105 mod B 249 MOD/RDM A B C D E MODIFICHE DATA ADDED RV10 ON SH4 CHANGE R78,R79 FROM 2K21 TO 332R ON SH1 CHANGE U27 FROM TL082 TO OP200G ON SH1 CHANGE R83 FROM 1K TO 150 Ohm ON SH2 ADDED J6 CONN. ON SH2. MASTER REV. 1.4 . PR/REV PR/REV PR/REV PR/REV PR/REV FIRMA/VISTO 3/6/97 8/9/97 9/12/97 28/01/98 9/4/98 +15A 1 2 1N4148 A CNTRL 11 IO 13 CNTRL 10 OI 2 1 10K R17 1/4-0,1 2 1 - U3 + 4 3 2 0.1uF 7 2 0.1uF 1 1 C5 A -15A A A A 1 5 4 1N4148 2 O6 0.1uF 1 2 332R R78 1/4-1 8 9 7 2 12 4 6 5 1 A 3 A C10 U5 + 5 -15A 1 2.5V 2.5V SHEET3 O6 SHEET3 A A 2 C53 A P2 P2 P2 P2 1 2 3 4 3 1 A D22 1 U27 - 6 IO 1K1 R4 1/4-1 OI 2 2 U4 10K R3 1/4-1 7 4 CNTRL 0.47uF 1 R77 1/4-1 2 8 A 1 1 4066 2 C2 22K1 C54 VFC110AP 14 2 8 OP200G -15A 0.1uF 1 14C F OUT A1 +15A +15A P1 5 M A AGND 2 0.1uF 6N137 C7 13 - 2 2 1 3 2 10 U27 1 6 0.1uF 1 C14 8 7 2 C8 -15A 0.1uF 1 3 2 2 + C11 1 475R R76 1/4-1 U6 2 P1 4 1 2 3 +15A OP07C 332R R79 1/4-1 C6 2 1 - U17 + 4 2 +5M 3K32 R21 1/4-1 9K09 R16 1/4-0,1 A 309K R15 1/4-0,1 2K 2 1 +15A1 1 1 14A GF 6N137 0.1uF C1 2 OI 0.1uF 5 1 22K1 R5 1/4-1 9 3 A 2 2 IO OI 11 20C 0.47uF 2 GND CASE 20A IO U4 7 1 0.1uF OP07C 3 GND CASE 8 2 6 0.1uF CW 649K R75 1/4-0,1 +15A 2 2 1/4-0,1 2K 2 1 8K06 R13 1 3 1 P3 P3 SHEET4 1 8K87 R2 1/4-0,1 CNTRL 12 1 649K R8 1/4-0,1 CW 2 3 2 1 P3 2 2K21 R1 1/4-0,1 6 1 2 A 14 2 +5M C13 8 7 RV3 1 6 A P1 1 2 2 100K R14 1/4-1 1 22K1 R12 1/4-1 RV2 1 U7 C9 1 4066 1 2 +5M 2 +15A 2 2 1/4-0,1 + U2 - 4 8 -15A 1 A 393 D2 3 2 10K R9 1N825A 1 Z2 A VDET 7 6K81 R18 1/4-1 +15A 1 221K R10 1/4-0,1 2 500K M SHEET3 +15A 2 2 M + U2 - 6 1 2 1 RV1 3 CW 1 10uF25V + 1 2 Z1 +5M SHEET3 1 +5M 1 0.1uF C4 -15A SHEET2 1 A SHEET2 22M1 R11 1/4-1 2 1K21 R7 1/4-1 2 +15A -15A 1K21 R6 1/4-1 SHEET2 +15A 1N825 C3 2 -15A A1 1 A SHEET2 2 +15A +15A1 6 A SHEET2 P1 +15A 5 A A GND 10V 0V WEIDMULLER ANALOGUECONNECTOR CALIBRATION: 1 V-DET= 0mV ADJ RV1 FOR F.OUT=400KHz 2 V-DET=250mV ADJ RV2 FOR F.OUT=2.9MHz 3 V-DET=10V ADJ RV3 FOR F.OUT=3.137MHz 4 REPEAT POINT 1...3 UNTIL ALL OK 250 disegnatore strumento assieme particolare TRACE FID Rev. 1.4 Schematic diagram data E.CARRARA 22/04/97 sostituisce scala codice visto A3 F1/4 THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED,DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA. THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA AT ANY TIME. disegno n. SE 1388 mod E 2 P1 P1 1 BTA06-200B 2 182R R27 1/4-1 4 1 28A 28C 2 1 2 B 0.1uF100V 1 2 C31 1 0.1uF100V 2 C23 1 C18 D3 D4 0.1uF100V 2 1 D6 10M R20 D7 D5 1/4-1 0.1uF100V D8 1 1 D10 10M R19 1 B C15 P5 1 -300V P5 2 IGNITER 1/4-1 B 0.1uF400V 2 C12 1 2 1 2 2 2 1 C16 1N4148 10nF400V 2 1 1N4148 10nF400V 2 C19 1N4148 2 1 1N4148 10nF400V 1 1N4148 C24 1N4148 2 1 2 D12 2 1N4148 C32 1N4148 10nF400V 22nF 15K R25 1/4-1 1 22nF 150R R83 1/4-1 A3 2 SHEET3 05 SHEET3 04 S1-3-4 +15A P1 P1 A3 +15B B -15B P1 P1 P1 U12 100uF25V C29 C30 Q1 3 P1 2 SHEET1 A1 SHEET4 A2 SHEET3 B GNDCASE P1 P1 strumento P1 assieme P1 HEATER 5 6 2 8 P1 S1-3-4 -15A SHEET3 -15B SHEET3 +5L SHEET3 L 2 100uF25V P1 7 A C33 78L05 1 P1 P1 S1-3-4 1 P1 + 5 GI +15B 2 P1 2 SHEET3 2 4 24SCR4.5D15M P1 +15A1 1 100uF25V P1 P1 + VI 3 SHEET1 1 1 + P1 J6 PT100-B PT100-A 1 1 P1 3 48V-B 30A 30C 29A 29C 1 2 J6 J6 J6 48V-A 32A 32C 31A 31C 2 MOC3020 9 +24V-2 10A 10C 9A 9C 1 2 3 4 +24V-1 12A 12C 11A 11C 1 5 U17 J6 J6 8Vac-2 2 IGNIT CABLE -15B U20 2 6 7C 6A 6C 1 P1 1 D9 2 BC107 BC107 2 1 D11 1 2 1N4148 2 1 1 BC107 J6 J6 J6 8A 8C 7A 3 Q2 3 2 1 2 15k R35 1/4-1 1 8Vac-1 Q6 3 2 1 Q4 1/4-1 Q7 BC177 3 3K92 R37 C45 2 1 2 1 C44 2 332R R28 1/4-1 1 BC107 2 2 33K2 R36 1/4-1 1 3 2 1/4-1 2 1 15K R38 1 1 C40 2 1 2 1 Q5 100pF C41 2 2 1/4-1 1 1 1 1/4-1 22K1 R44 2 2 332K R42 332K R43 1/4-1 2 22K1 R41 1/4-1 1 100pF 3 BC107 2 2 1N4148 Q3 B FIRMA/VISTO 1 +15B 1 25C DET TYPE DATA D13 2 P1 MODIFICHE +15B 1N4148 100K 1 R26 1/4-1 D1 1 26A DET TYPE-A 1N4148 MOD/RDM P1 particolare disegnatore TRACE FID Rev. 1.4 Schematic diagram data E.CARRARA 22/04/97 sostituisce scala codice visto A3 F2/4 THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED,DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA. THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA AT ANY TIME. disegno n. SE 1388 mod E 251 MOD/RDM MODIFICHE DATA FIRMA/VISTO 2 2 -15A +15B SHEET2 +15B -15B SHEET2 B SHEET2 -15B 2 10M R47 1/4-1 2 5K62 R46 1 1/4-1 221K R48 1/4-1 2 1 2 7K5 R29 1/4-1 2 2 7K5 R33 1/4-1 1 1N4148 + 4 -15B SHEET4 8 3 100K 7 5 100K TL081 + U22 - 6 3 1 O2 1 100K RN1 6K81 R32 1/4-1 RN2 4 PN2 6 PN3 +U22 - 2 2 2 1 33K2 R40 1/4-1 RN2 2 C28 1 0.1uF U14 7 12 U14 TRACE FID Rev. 1.4 particolare Schematic diagram 2 L SHEET4 PN4 1 PN4 SHEET4 +15B 2.5V SHEET1 disegnatore data E.CARRARA assieme SHEET4 1 2 2 1N4148 1 D14 1N4148 PN4 SHEET4 PN5 2 8 PN1 33K2 R39 1/4-1 RN2 2 1 100K RN2 2 6 7 100K -15B 5 D15 U21 14 1 22K1 R31 1/4-1 C35 C36 1 3 324 1 1 2 0.1uF 2 2K21 R80 1/4-1 O3 5 - 1 C20 1 0.1uF 2 1 strumento 13 SHEET2 +5L 10 A 7 2 A B 11 SHEET2 9 L U14 +15A Z0 Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6 Z7 8 8 SHEET2 PQH 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 C42 +U224 + U22 - 11 10 L 6N137 6 M -15A B 252 -5M SHEET1 QA QB QC QD QE QF QG QH SER 5 U14 A L 5 +15A 6 3 SHEET1 M 7 4 +5M SHEET2 8 14 L +5L 2 9 SHEET2 2 3 +5L 909R R22 1/4-1 +15B +5L U14 1 U13 SHEET4 2 4 +5L SRCLR' SRCK 12 6 RN1 RN1 L 10 11 14 100K 100K 6N137 G' RCK 5 3 L HC04 13 12 -15A 13 A 16 2 VBO +15B 2 U14 1 1 A A 5 U9 4 2 D16 6 3 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6IOUT B7IOUT' B8 VLC COMP VREF+ VREFV+ V- 74HC595 7 2 A U19 1 8 0.1uF 1 - U237 C43 + 4 0.1uF -15A +5L C25 U10 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 16 14 15 13 3 1 2 C21 909R R23 1/4-1 1 1 DAC0801 O1 A L 2K21 R81 1/4-1 M 3 A 2 P1 0.1uF 24A 24C +5L 2 MAIN MAIN +5L 2 1/4-1 8 P1 7K5 R34 1 1 C38 1 +15A 2 Z8 Z9 Z10 Z11 Z12 Z13 Z14 Z15 10nF 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 QA QB QC QD QE QF QG QH PQH 2 1 SER L 10 74HC595 14 2 6N137 SRCLR' SRCK 0.1uF 5 10 11 C37 3 L 2 6 0.1uF 18 16 14 12 9 7 5 3 A Z7 Z6 Z5 Z4 Z3 Z2 Z1 Z0 1 1Y1 1Y2 1Y3 1Y4 2Y1 2Y2 2Y3 2Y4 U15 C26 P1 7 U8 G' RCK 1 18A P1 1 1G 19 2G 2 1A1 4 1A2 6 1A3 8 1A4 11 2A1 13 2A2 15 2A3 17 2A4 2 P1 16 13 12 2 C46 +15A OP07C -15A A +5L 8 1 16A 16C U11 2 20 0.1uF 74HC240 A +5L +5L 10nF 1 DAC0801 2 2 P1 909R R24 1/4-1 C22 1 2K21 R82 1/4-1 C17 1 2 1 0.1uF MOSI P1 2 1/4-1 6 L 2 CS CLK 22A 22C 18C 0.1uF +5 MAIN +5 MAIN MISO P1 +15A 1K R49 A 8 5K11 R45 1 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 IOUT 4 B7 2 IOUT' B8 VLC COMP VREF+ VREFV+ V- 1/4-1 7K5 R30 1/4-1 U18 1 1 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 16 14 15 13 3 1 +5M O1 O2 O3 O4 O5 O6 +15A C34 PQH 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9 10nF C27 1 QA QB QC QD QE QF QG QH 1 SER 2 14 0.1uF SRCLR' SRCK L U16 C39 O6 10 11 2 G' RCK 0.1uF 13 12 0.1uF SHEET1 O5 2 SHEET2 16 Z15 Z14 Z13 Z12 Z11 Z10 Z9 Z8 1 O4 SHEET2 74HC595 +5L 22/04/97 sostituisce scala codice visto A3 F3/4 THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED,DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA. THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA AT ANY TIME. disegno n. SE 1388 mod E MOD/RDM D17 2 100pF 1 Q9 2 2 1 2 D18 SHEET3 G5 1G R73 S 1 22M1 R50 1/4-1 2 G 1 2 C50 BA129 PN2 FIRMA/VISTO 1 3 SHEET3 DATA D PN1 MODIFICHE 1 J201 C51 2 BA129 PN3 2 SHEET3 G 3 G4 1 +15A 1 D S 2 2 D19 22M1 R53 1/4-1 2 Q10 1 1nF 100M 1 R74 J201 1 1 C48 20K R51 1/4-1 2 2 BA129 22M1 R59 1/4-1 3 G D S 10K R55 2 3 1/4-1 2 J201 1 2 SHEET3 1 1 8 + U267 6 - 4 OP77 SHEET1 VDET -15A 1 1 C47 0.1uF 22M1 R65 1/4-1 A 1 D S 1 22pF 10K R52 1 A 2 1/4-1 J201 10G R72 1 Q11 2 2 G7 1 C52 3 G 2 BA129 100K R56 1/4-1 2 PN4 2 Q8 1 D20 G3 2 2 1 1 1 2 10nF 10M R70 1/4-1 G6 2 1 +15A 90K9 R54 1/4-1 2 1 20K 3 SHEET3 VBO 2 RV10 1 C49 1 22K1 R57 1/4-1 +15A 2 -15A A -15A A2 SHEET2 +15A SHEET2 A SHEET2 -15A SHEET2 A2 3 2 1 10M R66 1/4-1 2 1 200K 1 RV6 2 3 1 10K 2 RV5 10K 1 RV4 2 3 3 1 10K R64 1/4-1 RV7 2 221R R61 1/4-1 1 A +15A 2 -15A 3K32 R63 1/4-1 -15A +15A 10K 3 1 200K 2 2 182R R68 1/4-1 100K R67 1/4-1 RV8 1 1 2 -15A 6 1 A 1M R69 1/4-1 2 2 RV9 3 200K 1N4148 1 3 OP07C 1 A 2 1 1 SHEET3 1 -U257 + 4 332R R62 1/4-1 D21 2 2 4 +15A 5 S1 C A2 PN5 U24 S2 2 3 G1 D1 6 D2 2 7 G2 681K R58 1/4-1 2 2N5909 1 SCHERMO 5M6 R71 1/4-1 2 681K R60 1 DET CABLE G2 1/4-1 G1 1 P4 2 2 10pF A strumento disegnatore TRACE FID Rev. 1.4 particolare Schematic diagram data E.CARRARA assieme 22/04/97 sostituisce scala codice visto A3 F4/4 THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED,DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA. THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA SpA AT ANY TIME. disegno n. SE 1388 mod E 253 MOD/RDM MODIFICHE DATA A REV/PR AGGIUNTO RV10 ESEGUITO REV 1.2 DEL MASTER B REV/PR MOD.U27 DA TL082 A OP200G. ESEGUITO REV 1.3 DEL MASTER C REV/PR AGGIUNTO CONN. HEATER J6.ESEGUITO REV. 1.4 DEL MASTER. RV1 RV2 RV3 1 1 C4 + U2 1 1 1 1 1 1 P3 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 P4 G2 2 U1 U24 1 R18 U27 R77 D22 1 C53 1 1 R16 R15 C10 C8 C7 U7 1 U3 R17 C22 C14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 R21 R79 R78 1 R24 R23 R22 1 1 U9 U16 U19 C36 U13 R81 R80 C25 C26 U15 C38 C34 U18 C20 Q9 G5 6 1 1 J6 R51 R52 R54 R55 R56 R57 R58 R60 R61 R62 R63 R64 R66 R67 R68 R69 1 1 R59 D19 C47 1 15 14 13 24 23 22 R27 C33 Q1 C30 R65 D20 C29 D1 c 32 a R53 D18 10 11 12 G6 R50 D17 1 2 3 1 Q8 U12 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 G4 5 C32 U20 P1 9 5 Q10 RN2 1 R34 R33 R32 R31 R30 R29 1 1 1 1 1 D16 D15 D14 R40 1 1 R39 R49 R48 R47 R46 R45 C46 C43 U23 C42 R83 R20 1 C12 C24 1 1 C16 C19 + G3 1 1 1 1 1 1 C37 + U26 U22 1 R82 + G7 RN1 C39 Q11 1 U21 C27 C21 C13 C11 C28 C35 U10 U17 G2 U14 U11 U8 U6 U5 U25 1 7 C17 C54 RV4 RV5 RV6 RV7 RV8 RV9 RV10 G1 P5 U4 R12 R11 R10 R9 R75 C5 C6 1 C1 C2 C3 R8 Z2 R7 Z1 R6 R5 R4 R3 R2 R1 D2 C9 R76 1 R14 R13 D21 P2 FIRMA/VISTO 3/06/97 9/12/97 10/4/98 R19 D10 D9 C31 D4 D3 C15 D6 D5 C18 D8 D7 Q6 C44 Q7 1 R26 D12 Q2 Q4 1 1 Q3 1 1 1 1 1 1 R28 1 R44 R43 R42 R41 R38 Q5 R37 R36 D13 R35 D111 R25 C40 C41 FEMMINA/FEMALE = 1 P5 MASCHIO/MALE = 2 P5 C23 C45 G1 R71 U24 U25 G2 C52 strumento Q8 G6 C51 R74 C49 U26 C50 R73 G3 G7 assieme Q10 G4 C48 R70 R72 Q11 disegnatore TRACE C.S. FID Rev. 1.4 particolare E.CARRARA 22/04/97 sostituisce scala codice visto A3 Q9 G5 THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF CE INSTRUMENTS SpA NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED,DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF CE INSTRUMENTS SpA. THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY CE INSTRUMENTS SpA AT ANY TIME. 254 data disegno n. PC 1105 mod C Electron Capture Detector Controller This chapter describes the Electron Capture Detector (ECD) controller of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter at a Glance… Theory of Operations ................................................................................................ 256 Adjustment Procedures ............................................................................................. 258 Schematics and Component Layout ......................................................................... 258 Service Manual 255 Chapter 5.11 Electron Capture Detector Controller Theory of Operations Theory of Operations Circuit Function The main purpose of the Electron Capture Detector (ECD) PCB is to control the pulse frequency (FC1034, J5) of the radioactive source (63Ni) and the input (low current produced) of the ECD. The ECD PCB takes all digital inputs/outputs (J8 connector) and the power voltages (+5 V dc, +24 V dc, GND) from the motherboard. The low-current input signal (FC1033) produced by the ECD is connected to the input of the 5909 preamplifier (U1, point N1) by a dedicated cable with a coaxial connector. The output signal then goes to the OP07 amplifier (U11). The 48 V dc output voltage required to supply the heater elements (thermoregulation) and the input signal of the PT100 sensor (reading temperature) of the ECD are connected to the female connector (J9). The analog output signal (V DET) of the operational amplifier OP07 (U12) goes to the VFC110AP converter circuit (U26) through two OP07 operational amplifiers (U2, U3). The output frequency signal (F-OUT) of the VFC110AP (pin 8) goes to the motherboard through 6N137 (I1) and the J8 connector to be read by the main TRACE microprocessor. The same V DET signal goes to the TL082 output stage (U4A) and three resistors (R50, R56, R57) to generate the output voltages of 0–1 V and 0–10 V. These outputs are used for external connections to: • A recorder • An integrator • A data handling system (ChromCard or ChromQuest) The circuit for the autozero function consists of the OP200 (U4B) and 4066 (U5A), which are controlled from the DOING AZ input signal. The autozero analog signal is generated by: • Two 74HC273 integrated circuits (U27, U28) • Two DAC0800 converters (U22, U23) • OP07 amplifier (U20) A local MC68HC705 microprocessor (U24) controls the following: 256 • Data bus • Address bus • Clock • Interrupt • Reset • SPI signals Service Manual Chapter 5.11 Electron Capture Detector Controller Theory of Operations The integrated circuits 74HC240 (U29A–B) and four 6N137 (I3–I6) are used to perform the serial communication with the motherboard through the J8 connector. The pulse width (0.1µS, 0.5µS, 1µS) of the outpulse frequency (J5 connector) is generated by four 74LS221 circuits (U8, U13) and the 74LS153. The circuit consists of: • Diodes • Resistors • Capacitors • Transistors (Q3–Q7) The current circuit consists of: • Integrated circuit 74HC273 (U18) • Converter DAC0800 (U14) • Amplifier OP07 (U9) The voltage circuit consists of: • Integrated circuit 74HC273 (U19) • Converter DAC0800 (U15) • Amplifier OP07 (U10) The regulator LM7805 (U31) generates the +5 V dc. Two regulators, LM7815 (U32) and LM7915 (U33), generate the +/–15 V dc. The J2 connector gives the 0 V (signal common), 1 V, 10 V, and GND (chassis) outputs to connect an integrator or to handle chromatograph data externally. Detector Heat The Electron Capture detectors require additional heat control for the detector cell. This heater voltage is furnished from the Power Control PCB on the power control module. The heater voltage output from the power control PCB is passed through the detector control electronic module which is mounted on the right side of the GC. The heater voltage enters the detector control module through the main jack on the motherboard slot A, B, or C. The voltage is then passed through J9 to the ECD Heater. Each detector control module slot has an independent heater channel on the Power Control PCB. The temperature feedback from the detector RTD is also fed through this module to the motherboard. A jumper must be made on the motherboard to enable the RTD. Module A uses J8, module B uses J7 and module C uses J6. The top two pins must be jumped to enable the RTD. Service Manual 257 Chapter 5.11 Electron Capture Detector Controller Adjustment Procedures Output Specifications +/–15 V @ 165 mA +5 V @ 25 mA Frequency read @ 0–1000 kHz Adjustment Procedures No field adjustments are necessary. Schematics and Component Layout The schematics and component layout information for the ECD controller is listed below in Table 5.11-1. The number of drawings has been included for each schematic and its corresponding layout. There are six drawings for reference in this section. Table 5.11-1. ECD Controller Schematics Board ECD NOTE 258 PN Drawing Layout 23648325 SE 1389 - sh. 5, 1–5 PC 1106, 1 The last drawing in this section is the layout of the board. Service Manual MOD/RDM MODIFICHE DATA FIRMA/VISTO TP23 C51 +5L SCH 22pF XT1 22pF +5 C50 1nF 35 37 0 R73 D13 10K +5 R72 47.5K 2 OSC1 OSC2 TCMP TCAP 1 RESET RESET 36 PD7 RESET C46 1uF 29 30 +5 J6 1 2 3 4 0 31 32 33 34 MISO MOSI SCK CSI CON4 SCI/RDI SCI/TDO SPI/MISO SPI/MOSI SPI/SCK SPI/SS 0 3 +5 VPP 8 909 R108 2K2 3 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 PA0 PA1 PA2 PA3 PA4 PA5 PA6 PA7 U29B SEL_A SEL_B 19 17 15 13 11 CLK CS 6 G DOING_AZ MOSI 5 7 3 5 7 9 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 A4 A3 A2 A1 C82 100nF 74HC240 IRQ D14 1N4148 2 U24 39 38 IRQ +5 R107 PIN10 R74 10M 4Mhz C52 +5L PIN20 C76 100nF PIN40 (VDD) = Vcc PIN20 (VSS) = gnd0 +5L +5 0 R105 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 PB0 PB1 PB2 PB3 PB4 PB5 PB6 PB7 2 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 TX 909 3 G 8 6 4 2 6 12 14 16 18 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 A4 A3 A2 A1 CLKL CLKM CLKI CLKV 5 7 C81 100nF 74HC240 +5L 2 CCLK CCLKEN CCLR MC68HC705C8 13 QA QB QC QD QE QF QG QH RCLK 14 +5 0 R103 U21 11 12 10 R106 2K2 U29A 1 RX 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 PC0 PC1 PC2 PC3 PC4 PC5 PC6 PC7 8 G 15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 9 RCO 8 909 R104 2K2 0VL 3 6 CSI 5 7 C80 100nF IRQ 74HC590 +5L +5 0 R102 8 R101 2K2 U8A +5 U17 R16 1K V/F C12 22pF 1 2 3 6 5 4 3 0.1uS 0.5uS 1uS A B CLR Q Q 13 10 11 12 13 V/F 4 74LS221 14 2 1 15 SEL_A SEL_B U8B 6 CEXT C11 47pF R15 6.81K 7 9 10 11 1C0 1C1 1C2 1C3 1Y 2C0 2C1 2C2 2C3 2Y A B CLR 909 7 3 +5 MISO 6 7 5 R79 10 9 A B 1G 2G C79 100nF C57 R80 150 TP25 0.47uF 74LS153 REXT/CEXT 2 R81 0 Q Q 221 5 R75 1K 4W R77 10K 12 74LS221 R59 1.1K 2 Q3 2N2219A Q6 2N2905A TP26 U13A Q5 0 U16B 8 9 D 11 S Q R Q 13 R14 6.81K CLK C10 100pF 1 2 3 A B CLR Q Q 0 7 9 10 11 R76 221 R78 475 Q 5 5 12 3 D D15 PULSE S Q R Q R62 100 Q7 2N2905A C56 100nF D17 10V U16A 6 REXT/CEXT 1N4148 1 -Vp CLK 74LS221 0 C59 1uF D16 Q OUT 1 2 CON2 4 CEXT A B CLR J5 Q4 2N2219A U13B 6 R60 10K 13 74LS221 12 1 0 4013 R61 100 2N2369A 4013 2 POS. DENOMINAZIONE 4 PEZZI DISEGNO disegnatore strumento 0 A.Lamperti TRACE assieme CODICE data 19/11/97 sostituisce scala codice visto C.S. ECD rev. 1.1 Toll. Gen. + 0,1 + 30' - particolare Schematic Diagram - A3 CPU Freq. & Pulse gen. THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED, DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. AT ANY TIME. Fil. 6H-6g 1,6 disegno n modif. SE1389 sh.1/5 259 MOD/RDM +15 +15 MODIFICHE PIN13 C38 100nF 3 3 R40 R39 7K5 C37 100nF 7K5 -15 PIN3 +24V_COM +5 U14 1 11 CLKI 18 17 14 13 8 7 4 3 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 U18 15 CLR CLK 14 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 Q8 Q7 Q6 Q5 Q4 Q3 Q2 Q1 19 16 15 12 9 6 5 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 VR- +24V_POS 1 VLC 3 GF VR+ C24 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 16 COMP +15 -15 10nF 2 6 1 2 5.62K R17 10M -15 7K5 R42 P12 2K R18 J8 J7 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 FIRMA/VISTO +24V_COM +24V_POS F-OUT CLK TX GND_CASE +5L 0VL D23 1N4148 DETECT for ECD DIN64A +15 6 R43 0VL 8 PIN13 C40 100nF 6 +5L +15 4 3 +15 CURR 4 IOUT +15 GND_CASE 3 DAC0800 74HC273 RX U9 OP07 7 R41 IOUT CS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 DATA 4.75K C39 100nF 7K5 -15 PIN3 +5 U15 CLKV D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 1 11 18 17 14 13 8 7 4 3 U19 15 CLR CLK 14 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 74HC273 Q8 Q7 Q6 Q5 Q4 Q3 Q2 Q1 19 16 15 12 9 6 5 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 VR- VLC 1 VR+ B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 J9 6 C25 COMP 16 +15 U10 OP07 7 R44 3 2 6 1 2 5.62K IOUT TP16 -15 10nF IOUT 1 6 2 7 3 8 4 9 5 VOLT GND_CASE 4 48V-A 48V-B PT100-A PT100-B GND DB9F +15 DAC0800 4 TP15 R19 10M 8 -15 6 R20 P14 2K +15 4.75K POS. DENOMINAZIONE PEZZI DISEGNO disegnatore strumento A.Lamperti TRACE assieme CODICE data 19/11/97 sostituisce scala codice visto C.S. ECD rev. 1.1 D/A converter & I/O connector THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED, DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. AT ANY TIME. 260 Toll. Gen. + 0,1 + 30' - particolare Schematic Diagram - A3 Fil. 6H-6g 1,6 disegno n SE1389 sh.2/5 modif. MOD/RDM TP6 +15 -15 TP2 100nF C26 R29 R28 10K +15 -15 475K J4 C15 10nF C29 0.47uF R55 3G 100nF 3 4 C27 1 6 R50 4K7 C28 100nF 100pF R48 R52 5.62M 30G R51 R27 90K 50G J3 J1 2 4 1 7 8 2 5 3 TP4 R23 R66 R67 5.62K 10M 8 R24 C14a 7 4 4 I O U T 1 6 221K 1 C O M P 2 4 U22 DAC0800 V L C 4 I O U T +15 I O U T 1 C O M P U23 DAC0800 V L C 4 +15 TP28 B B B B B B B B 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 C14 4 100nF 100nF 1K R68 10nF 1 6 2 4 I O U T R65 5.62K +15 3 C13 4 10nF 7 +15 C49 U20 OP07 15K4 -15 C48 3 +15 10nF R47 150K -15 R69 -15 4 2 R25 10K R46 150K R22 4 1 6 3 R21 470 TP5 330E 4 475K -15 -15 5909 U1 C64 100nF PIN13 (V+)= +15 PIN3 (V-) = -15 3 U11 OP07 1 6 4 C62 100nF +15 22.1K 6 3 +15 4 R45 +15 C65 100nF 7 +15 P15 20K -15 R49 100K 3 +15 C63 100nF U12 OP07 C31 N3 V_DET 3 3 +15 VERSO TP8 8 2 R26 10K N1 FIRMA/VISTO DATA TP7 CURR TP1 MODIFICHE 1 1 1 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 3 V R + R63 V R 1 4 R64 7K5 B B B B B B B B 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 7K5 1 1 1 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 1 5 V R + R70 V R 1 4 R71 7K5 7K5 1 5 -15 3 3 1 1 1 1 9 6 5 2 9 6 5 2 1 1 1 1 9 6 5 2 9 6 5 2 TP3 R9 Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1K C6 1uF TP18 +5 C7 1uF C C L L R K +5 5 5 R13 1K U7 1 2 C8 1000 pol 3 4 R10 15K R11 3.65K 6 7 V.OUT +IN 9 C.IN 8 F.OUT -IN ON1 B.O.C. ON2 O.S.C. +VS -VS A_GND D_GND N.C. Q Q Q Q Q Q Q Q 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 C C L L R K D D D D D D D D 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 8 7 4 3 8 7 4 3 +5 1 1 1 U28 74HC273 D D D D D D D D 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 1 8 7 4 3 8 7 4 3 CLKM CLKL D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 V/F 14 13 12 5 11 10 1 1 1 U27 74HC273 R12 243K AD650 +15 C9 51pF pol -15 5 5 -15 TP17 C22 100nF POS. DENOMINAZIONE 5 0 PEZZI DISEGNO disegnatore strumento C21 100nF A.Lamperti TRACE assieme CODICE data 19/11/97 sostituisce scala codice visto C.S. ECD rev. 1.1 Toll. Gen. + 0,1 + 30' - particolare Schematic Diagram - A3 Electr.,autozero, V/F conv. THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED, DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. AT ANY TIME. Fil. 6H-6g 1,6 disegno n modif. SE1389 sh.3/5 261 MOD/RDM MODIFICHE DATA FIRMA/VISTO +15 5 R36 7 6 +15 -15 22M1 R54 1K21 U6A 393 +5L R34 100K 4 3 R35 TP11 C35 1N825 D3 1N825 100uF 25V 8 6 8 A 9 B +15 D2 1N4148 1 GF 5 7 1 C19 100nF +15 1 3 C 22K1 R37 10K C34 100nF 2 R99 2K2 U5D 4066 6 1 221K 8 2 1 R38 D4 R100 6K81 C20 100nF -15 R53 1K21 U6B 393 +15 U5C 4066 5 1 C78 100nF PIN14 (VDD) C18 100nF C 4 A 3 B +15 0VL PIN7 (VSS) R98 3K32 1 +5L U5B 4066 TP30 2 8 R97 2K2 3 6 TP8 TP9 TP10 R3 R5 649K TP12 R8 V_DET C77 100nF TP13 8K06 7 309K -15 1 R1 -15 C5 1 R4 649K 1 100nF 4 R2 2 2K21 C16 100nF +15 U4A TL082 1 C1 0.47uF 8 8 100nF 1 6 R6 U2 OP07 10K C2 1 C4 1 +15 +15 7 14 9 100nF 3 +15 C17 100nF 1 10 +15 R31 33K2 1 -15 4 -15 U5A 4066 1 A C45 0.47uF J2 3 AGND DGND I-COM I-IN +5V EN C-OS NC +VS V-OUT -VS COMP 8 TP29 7 1 3 5 6 12 11 6 1 5 1 OP200 2 1 C73 100nF 7 13 22K1 B CON4 SIGNAL-OUT F-OUT R32 6K81 U4B R33 C R56 1K1 4 3 2 1 V-IN VFC110AP C72 100nF R57 10K 2 13 1 4 GND_CASE U26 1 6 3 7 100nF 1 TP31 8 U3 OP07 1 1 2 R58 470R 4 2 3 8K87 R30 22K1 0VL TP14 C3 GND 10V 1V 0V F-OUT 5 7 R7 90K9 D1 1N4148 DOING_AZ POS. DENOMINAZIONE PEZZI DISEGNO disegnatore strumento A.Lamperti TRACE assieme CODICE data 19/11/97 sostituisce scala codice visto C.S. ECD rev. 1.1 V/F converter signal out THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED, DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. AT ANY TIME. 262 Toll. Gen. + 0,1 + 30' - particolare Schematic Diagram - A3 Fil. 6H-6g 1,6 disegno n SE1389 sh.4/5 modif. MOD/RDM MODIFICHE FIRMA/VISTO DATA GND_CASE +24V_POS TP20 Q16 BC547 U32 LM7815 D27 R115 3 2K2 VI V+ 1N4935 1 VO G N D +15 D26 C84 47uF 35V R94 1N4935 1 F1 R95 630mA-T 1 +24V_COM C32 100uF 25V 2 7 C86 D24 C85 47uF 35V 1nF 1N4935 C33 100uF 25V U33 LM7915 D25 U30 5 4 6 8 12 PIN14 C61 100nF PIN7 AST AST -T +T RET 3 C60 1.5nF 2 Q 11 Q 13 OSC 1 VO G N D 1N4935 -15 VTP19 3 7 RCC 1 VI 10 11 CX TP24 R113 6K8 2 9 RX RST 12 4047 2 C71 R114 D9 1.5K 13 C83 D10 1N4935 Q2 MJE350 47uF R88 10K R82 3 D5 4 5 7 6 8 R85 100K D6 1N4935 C70 +15 LM358 2 100nF C69 100nF R84 R93 2K2 C58 10uF 100V R89 30.1K R87 10K R91 R92 11K 11K VOLT 1N4935 475 Q10 8 R83 1 -Vp MJE340 D19 100 TP27 TR1 1N4148 U25B 10K 2 3 1N4148 100nF 4 R90 5.62K 475 C54 10uF 100V 9 C67 0.1uF 2 1 1N4935 10 D20 U25A LM358 R86 6 R96 2K2 -15 D18 1N4148 TP22 C68 220uF 35V R110 4K7 U31 LM7805 R112 4K7 3 Q12 BU806 Q13 BU806 Q14 BC547 Q15 BC547 D12 D11 1N4935 1N4935 D8 D7 1N4935 1N4935 VI V/F D/A VO G N D 1 5 A.ZERO 4 N4 2 C55 220uF 6 +5 C30 220uF CPU TP21 0 7 1 2 V/Fout ALIM 3 ELETT. PULSE +5 6 4 3 8 9 10 C47 100uF 25V 11 VDD 1 PIEDINATURA TRASFORMATORE VISTA LATO COMP. 7 VCC 12 C23 C36 C41 C42 C43 C44 C66 C75 C74 C53 100nF 100nF 100nF 100nF 100nF 100nF 100nF 100nF 100nF 100nF 13 0 GND VSS POS. DENOMINAZIONE PEZZI DISEGNO disegnatore strumento A.Lamperti TRACE assieme CODICE data 19/11/97 sostituisce scala codice visto C.S. ECD rev. 1.1 Toll. Gen. + 0,1 + 30' - particolare Schematic Diagram - A3 +5/+15/-15/-Vp THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED, DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY CE INSTRUMENTS S.p.A. AT ANY TIME. Fil. 6H-6g 1,6 disegno n modif. SE1389 sh.5/5 263 264 Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector Controller This chapter describes the Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector (NPD) controller of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter at a Glance… Theory of Operations ................................................................................................ 266 Adjustment Procedures ............................................................................................. 267 Schematics and Component Layout ......................................................................... 268 Service Manual 265 Chapter 5.12 Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector Controller Theory of Operations Theory of Operations Circuit Function The main purpose of the Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector (NPD) PCB is to amplify the low current produced from the detector and to supply its thermionic source. A local single-chip microprocessor 68HC05 (U34), part of 74HC240 (U35A–B), and four optocouplers 6N137 (I4–I7), control the SPI interface bus for the serial communication (MOSI, SCK, CSI, MISO) to the main microprocessor (CPU PCB) through the motherboard (J6, J7). Integrated circuit MAX538 (U12) and amplifier TLO82 (U11A) generate the analog output command VOLT (0–10 V) to select the polarization source circuit (LM741, U21). The input electrometer current amplifier circuit consists of: • Integrated circuits 5909 (U2), OP07 (U19), JFN FET (Q1–Q4), and OP07 (U20) • Resistors • Capacitors • Potentiometers • Diodes The integrated circuit LM324 (U3A–U3C) gives the gain (1–3) commands to select the range (0–3). The LM324 (U3D) gives the filter command to the input electrometer through JFN FET (Q2). Two digital/analog converters DAC0800 (U30–U31) and the amplifier OP07 (U25) make up the zero suppression circuit (back-off current, 16 bits). The analog output of the amplifier OP07 (U20) goes through TP15–TP16 (split points) to the integrated circuit OP200 (U6A). The integrated circuit generates the analog output voltages of 0–1 V and 0–10 V for the integrator and computer external connections (J1, 4-pin). The output of OP07 (U20) also goes to the OP07 amplifiers (U7, U8), a v/f converter VFC110AP (U13), and an optocoupler 6N137 (I2) to generate a frequency output (F-OUT, 0–4 MHz) to be read from the main microprocessor (CPU). The regulator U4 (LM78L05) supplies the +5 VB. The regulator LM7815 (U36) supplies the +15 VB. The regulator LM79L15 (U17) supplies the –15 VB. Integrated circuit MAX538 (U5) is selected from the single-chip microprocessor 68HC05 (U34) signal (SEL_I) to enable the driving source current circuit. This circuit consists of: 266 • LM358 (U10, U27A) • TL082 (U18A–B) Service Manual Chapter 5.12 Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector Controller Adjustment Procedures • LM311 (U29) • NE555 (U32) • Transistors (Q7, Q8) • Resistors • Diodes The amplifier OP07 (U26) and the amplifier TL082 (U28B) are a protection source circuit for generating an alarm output signal (STS). A special oscillator circuit is formed by: • Integrated circuit 4047 (U33) • Two transistors BC547 (Q16–Q17) • Resistors • Capacitors • A diode This oscillator circuit is the primary supply of the internal transformer. The amplifier LM741 (U21) is selected from the input VOLT (variable voltage 0–10 V) for generating the source polarization voltage (0–100 V). The regulator LM7815 (U23) supplies +15 V. The regulator LM7915 (U22) supplies –15 V. The regulator 7805 (U24) supplies +5 V. Two input voltages (8.5 V ac, 8.5 V ac 2) come from an external transformer in the GC oven through the motherboard (J6). The P2 connector gives the 0 V (signal common), 1 V, 10 V, and GND (chassis) outputs to connect an integrator or to handle chromatograph data externally. Output Specifications +/–15 V @ 165 mA 100 V @ 0.01 A +5 V @ 25 mA Adjustment Procedures No field adjustments are necessary. Service Manual 267 Chapter 5.12 Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector Controller Schematics and Component Layout Schematics and Component Layout The schematics and component layout information for the NPD controller is listed below in Table 5.12-1. The number of drawings has been included for each schematic and its corresponding layout. There are six drawings for reference in this section. Table 5.12-1. NPD Controller Schematics Board NPD NOTE 268 PN Drawing Layout 23648355 SE 1424 - sh. 5, 1–5 PC 1107, 1 The last drawing in this section is the layout of the board. Service Manual MOD/RDM +5L TP27 C72 4Mhz SCLK 19 U34 35 37 0 2 +5 OSC1 OSC2 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 PA0 PA1 PA2 PA3 PA4 PA5 PA6 PA7 TCMP TCAP 1 RESET PB0 PB1 PB2 PB3 PB4 PB5 PB6 PB7 RESET R106 36 PD7 2K21 29 30 STS 0 0 31 32 33 34 MISO MOSI SCK CSI 3 +5 SDATA SEL_I SEL_V SDATA SEL_I 17 15 13 11 CLK GAIN1 GAIN2 GAIN3 FLT DAZ CS 6 G SCI/RDI SCI/TDO 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Z0 Z1 Z2 Z3 Z4 Z5 Z6 Z7 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 Z8 Z9 Z10 Z11 Z12 Z13 Z14 Z15 MOSI 5 7 3 5 7 9 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 A4 A3 A2 A1 C93 100nF 74HC240 +5L I6 6N137 R140 0 +5 8 2 IRQ 1N4148 C88 1uF R139 2K2 909 22pF SCLK 8 U35B 39 38 +5 R144 47.5K +5 2 3 R105 10M C71 FIRMA/VISTO R138 PIN20 (VDD) PIN10 (VSS) PIN40 (VDD) PIN20 (VSS) XT1 DATA +5L C89 100nF SCH 22pF D43 MODIFICHE TX R141 2K21 909 U35A 1 8 6 4 2 RX 3 G SCK 6 12 14 16 18 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1 A4 A3 A2 A1 5 7 C94 100nF 74HC240 PC0 PC1 PC2 PC3 PC4 PC5 PC6 PC7 SPI/MISO SPI/MOSI SPI/SCK SPI/SS VPP +5L I7 6N137 R142 +5 0 8 2 909 R143 2K21 0VL 3 6 CSI MC68HC705C8 5 7 Z[0..15] Z[0..15] C95 100nF +5 +5L +5 0 R137 8 C84 100nF 2 R136 2K21 C18 100nF 909 3 MISO 6 7 5 0 C92 100nF +15 TP24 R7 C4 10M 100nF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 8.5VAC1 R6 -15 8.5VAC2 150K +5 +15 U12 1 2 3 SDATA SCLK SEL_V 4 DIN SCLK CS VDD VOUT REFIN DOUT AGND 8 7 6 8 R5 2 U11A 24V_COM 1 47.5K VOLT 3 5 24V_POS TL082 GF 4 MAX538 R4 47.5K CS RX -15 GND_CASE 2 2 +5L 0VL +15 +15 R3 12K5 C16 100nF U11B 7 +2.5 C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 8.5VAC1 8.5VAC2 24V_COM 24V_POS F-OUT CLK TX GND_CASE +5L 0VL 2 5 D42 TL082 C17 100nF 2 1 J6 A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A DIN64A 6 3 J7 1N4148 DETECT for NPD U1 LM336 -15 POS. DENOMINAZIONE 2 PEZZI DISEGNO disegnatore strumento A.Lamperti TRACE assieme CODICE data 5/2/98 sostituisce scala codice visto C.S. NPD rev. 1.1 A3 Toll. Gen. + 0,1 + 30' - particolare Schematic Diagram - CPU A/D & SPI Interface THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A. NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED, DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A. THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A. AT ANY TIME. Fil. 6H-6g 1,6 disegno n modif. SE1424 sh.1/5 269 MOD/RDM FIRMA/VISTO DATA -15 1 1 U3A 3 GAIN3 MODIFICHE U3C U3B 5 GAIN2 1 2 U3D 10 GAIN1 7 8 12 FLT G1 14 9 6 FLTR +15 13 LM324 LM324 LM324 +15 LM324 4 +15 C44 100nF +15 R2 100K R61 100K 1nF R150 R1 15K R38 100K 100K R60 22M 5% 1N4148 N9 R154 100M D11 -15 -15 D10 C103 1N4148 100pF 4 +15 8 2 N6 R151 10M V_DET U20 OP07 R59 22M 5% R49 10K R44 10M R50 100K 7 PIN13 =+15 PIN3 =-15 +15 C26 -15 100nF R21 100K C104 1 6 3 R40 22M 5% TP5 3 R68 N5 R52 TP1 1 6 R152 J3 -15 R45 10K 0.01uF R19 U2 6 22.1K 4 3 1 2 7 5 3 8 3 R23 681K I O U T 221K 1 C O M P B B B B B B B B 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 C37 100nF V L C 4 I O U T +15 1 6 2 4 U30 DAC0800 I O U T 1 C O M P U31 DAC0800 V L C 4 +15 4 1 1 1 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 V R + V R 1 4 R101 R102 7K5 7K5 B B B B B B B B 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 0 9 8 7 6 5 1 5 V R + V R 1 4 R108 R107 7K5 7K5 1 5 3 R48 221 R47 332 Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Z Z Z Z Z Z Z Z 8 9 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 C36 100nF 7 +15 R41 I O U T 4 10nF 1 6 2 C73 1K R70 TP20 U19 OP07 R24 681K +15 +15 1 6 5909 4 R42 R67 5.11K OP07 7 J2 +15 4 TP3 C98 +15 2 4 10nF 2 C105 10pF C61 U25 3 90.9K 10G 3 4 -15 R71 -15 4 -15 20pF 5M6 4 5.11K R22 22M 5% 8 R153 -15 R51 10K 3 10nF C74 100nF +15 1G C102 4 C43 100nF D6 R39 C101 N7 C75 100nF 4 -15 Z[0..15] Z[0..15] R46 100K 1M -15 3K32 R43 182 -15 3 TP7 G1 3 3 POS. DENOMINAZIONE strumento PEZZI DISEGNO disegnatore A.Lamperti TRACE assieme CODICE data 5/2/98 sostituisce scala codice visto C.S. NPD rev. 1.1 Toll. Gen. + 0,1 + 30' - particolare Schematic Diagram - Electrometer & Autozero THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A. NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED, DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A. THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A. AT ANY TIME. 270 A3 Fil. 6H-6g 1,6 disegno n SE1424 sh.2/5 modif. MOD/RDM MODIFICHE DATA FIRMA/VISTO +15 5 R34 7 6 +15 -15 R31 1K21 U14A 393 I3 6N137 1 R36 100K 3 R35 1 C21 1N825 C22 100nF 3 8 1 A 2 B 1 +15 D4 C23 100nF +15 GF 5 7 1 100uF 25V 6 PIN14 (VDD) PIN7 (VSS) C 22K1 R33 10K R134 2K21 U15A 4066 1 3 TP2 2 221K +5L 8 2 4 R32 D2 R135 6K81 C24 100nF -15 R30 1K21 U14B 393 +15 22M1 C91 100nF 1N4148 1 U15B 4066 1 2 1 C25 100nF C 11 A +15 10 B R133 3K32 1 U15C 4066 5 0VL I2 6N137 TP12 +5L 2 8 C 4 A R132 2K21 3 B 3 6 TP15 TP11 TP9 R13 R15 649K V_DET TP4 R18 C90 100nF TP6 8K06 309K R11 -15 C10 1 R14 649K 1 100nF 4 R12 2 U6A OP200 2K21 C5 100nF 8K87 R10 22K1 1 8 8 100nF 1 6 R16 U7 OP07 10K C8 1 7 C11 1 +15 +15 2 7 14 9 +15 C6 100nF 10 C19 100nF U15D 4066 A C53 0.47uF J1 I-IN +5V EN C-OS V-OUT -VS COMP TP13 7 1 3 5 6 12 11 6 6 1 7 5 22K1 B C20 100nF R9 6K81 U6B R37 C R91 1K1 4 3 2 1 I-COM 8 VFC110AP 8 R92 10K DGND +VS 4 -15 AGND NC 1 +15 R8 33K2 1 F-OUT V-IN 13 100nF 3 -15 U13 1 4 GND_CASE 1 6 3 100nF 1 TP19 8 U8 OP07 1 1 2 R93 475 4 2 3 C7 0.47uF 0VL TP8 C9 +15 0 -15 3 GND 10V 1V 0V F-OUT 5 7 R17 9K09 1 OP200 9 D5 1N4148 DAZ CON4 3 SIGNAL-OUT 1 POS. DENOMINAZIONE PEZZI DISEGNO disegnatore strumento A.Lamperti TRACE assieme CODICE data 5/2/98 sostituisce scala codice visto C.S. NPD rev. 1.1 A3 Toll. Gen. + 0,1 + 30' - particolare Schematic Diagram - V/F Converter Signal-out THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A. NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED, DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A. THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A. AT ANY TIME. Fil. 6H-6g 1,6 disegno n modif. SE1424 sh.3/5 271 MOD/RDM MODIFICHE DATA FIRMA/VISTO +12B C54 100nF +24B +12B +12B C82 R94 2K21 100nF R124 10K +15B U32 Q8 BD137 U29 8 5 6 2 R125 10K 3 2K21 4 1 R104 R103 L1 47.5 2K21 150 uH R95 7 Q7 BD138 LM311 NE555 C48 R78 1 5 I1A ISQ74 2 R53A 2 +15B SCLK R73 470 4 3 1 3 R28 C14 10M 100nF 5 R76 4 R74 3.32K -15B 1 1 5 R58 1 2 1 2 3 5 1 3 4 R53C 6 DIN SCLK CS VDD VOUT REFIN DOUT AGND 8 7 6 8 R29 +2.5B 2 8 2 U10A R54 1 47.5K 3 10K LM358 5 R80 10K 2M2 5% +15B 3 +5 3.32K TL082 47.5K 4 I1D ISQ74 4 R26 47.5K R115 +15B -15B 7K5 -15B SEL_I R20C R79 TL082 R56 U18A R62 2.21K TL082 1 R55 2 4 7 5 +15B D8 +15B MAX538 2k2 2k2 2k2 470 6 7 5 C69 2.2uF U18B 6 10K 200K CONV +5B 5 U28B 6 R27 U5 6 10K R57 RES_CURR 10K +5B -15B I1C ISQ74 R113 10K 0 +5 R131 0.1 3W 10nF 6 LM358 LM358 I1B ISQ74 R100 3.32K 7 +15B 10K 3 1 4 47 C55 7 1 TP17 3 R97 3.32K 3 U27B 2 4 +15B R98 2 R75 10K 8 +5B U26 4 1 6 2M2 5% U27A 470 R53B -15B 8 10K 1 6 1 J5 OP07 R77 R72 T E R M O I O N I C A 100K 33.2K 100nF SDATA S O R G E N T E R99 D24 6V8 +5B 1 C79 220uF 25V 10nF R96 3K3 +5 C70 220uF 25V D26 SS84P C83 C81 3.3nF J4 R20A R114 3K32 C31 100nF R20B R81 R82 10K 332K STS RES_CURR +15B 8 2 1 -15B 3 CONV D30 TP23 +12B TP21 +24B U4 LM78L05 1 +15B R25 12K5 VI U36 LM7815 VO G N D U10B 3 6 7 2 3 +5B C1 2.2uF 25V VI R112 1 +15B C34 2.2uF 25V 2 C12 100nF C32 100nF C45 100nF C49 100nF C13 100nF C33 100nF C46 100nF C50 100nF 3.32K R109 2.21K +2.5B -15B LM358 2 47K C57 22uF 25V 5 3 R111 -15B VO G N D C38 100nF C2 100nF R110 15K 4 U28A TL082 TP30 3 1 C35 2.2uF 25V 2 C39 100nF VI G N D VO 1 -15B U17 LM79L15 -24B TP22 POS. DENOMINAZIONE PEZZI DISEGNO disegnatore strumento A.Lamperti TRACE assieme CODICE data 5/2/98 sostituisce scala codice visto C.S. NPD rev. 1.1 Toll. Gen. + 0,1 + 30' - particolare Schematic Diagram - Current Generator THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A. NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED, DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A. THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A. AT ANY TIME. 272 A3 Fil. 6H-6g 1,6 disegno n SE1424 sh.4/5 modif. MOD/RDM MODIFICHE DATA FIRMA/VISTO GND_CASE 24V_POS TP18 TP14 U23 LM7815 3 R119 Q10 BC547 VI C52 47uF 50V R117 1-5% R118 FUSE 1-5% +15 U24 LM7805 1 VO G N D 2K21 F1 V+ 3 VI C27 100uF 25V 2 24V_COM VO G N D 1 4 +5 A.ZERO N8 ALI.log. 2 C29 100uF 25V TP16 ALIM.ana 0 7 7 V/F anal. C30 47uF 50V PIN14 (VDD) PIN7 (VSS) C87 100nF 3 C86 1nF 2 Q AST AST -T +T RET Q OSC 10 VI 1 VO G N D 11 ELETTR. -15 V- U22 LM7915 13 TP10 RCC 1 CX 2 9 RX RST 4047 7 7 C41 1 R129 2 1K ZPY12 3 TP25 R130 6K81 D41 2 A/D volt 3 U33 5 4 6 8 12 1 C28 100uF 25V 8 3 D17 +15 D13 1N4148 D19 Q5 C96 10uF 200V RGP10G 5 U21 7 R64 6 R121 2K21 R120 2K21 10 D37 D38 11 D16 C51 100nF -15 5 R85 75K 100nF R66 D18 C56 10uF 200V 4 C42 R65 100K 4 10K 2 LM741 8 9 VOLT 475 MJE350 22uF 25V R84 8K25 R63 3 6 1 C80 100nF R83 10K RGP10G Q6 12 475 R88 MJE340 475 TP32 1N4148 1N4148 13 C76 470uF 35V +24B TP28 R122 8K25 Q13 BU806 Q16 BC547 R123 8K25 Q17 BC547 Q12 BU806 R86 22.1K D28 C97 0.1uF 250V TP29 8.5VAC1 D34 8.5VAC2 D36 RGP10G D33 D35 +12B SK1540 C64 10uF 35V C78 10000uF 16V C77 10000uF 16V TP26 C63 10uF 35V RGP10G POS. DENOMINAZIONE PEZZI DISEGNO disegnatore strumento TP31 A.Lamperti TRACE -24B assieme CODICE data 5/2/98 sostituisce scala codice visto C.S. NPD rev. 1.1 A3 Toll. Gen. + 0,1 + 30' - particolare Schematic Diagram - Power Supply THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A. NONE WHICH SHALL BE COPIED, DISCLOSED OR USED IN WHOLE OR IN PART FOR ANY PURPOSE WITHOUT WRITTEN PERMISSION OF THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A. THIS DOCUMENT IS SUBJECT TO RECALL BY THERMOQUEST ITALIA S.p.A. AT ANY TIME. Fil. 6H-6g 1,6 disegno n modif. SE1424 sh.5/5 273 274 Flame Photometric Detector Controller (FPD) This chapter describes the TRACE GC 2000 Flame Photometric Detector (FPD) controller. Chapter at a Glance… Theory of Operations ................................................................................................ 275 Circuit Functions....................................................................................................... 275 Output Specifications................................................................................................ 277 Adjustment Procedure............................................................................................... 277 Protection Circuits .................................................................................................... 277 Special Notes ............................................................................................................ 277 Schematics and Component Layout ......................................................................... 278 Theory of Operations Circuit Functions The FPD pcb controls: • input analogic current • flame ignition • photomultiplier voltage through the J5, J3, J4 and J1 connectors on the FPD detector board. The cell is independently heated and requires 100W @ 48 Vac (2 resistors 24V 50W in series). Cell temperature is controlled by a FEEDBACK ANALOG pcb and CPU pcb through the motherboard and PT100 temperature sensor. On the J6 and J7 DIN64A connector, all voltages (24vdc, 8v, 5vdc, 0v, GND) and all digital signals (F-OUT, CLK, Tx, Rx, CS, GF) interfacing with the motherboard bus pcb are present. Two diodes, IN4148 (D28-D29), set the type of detector controller automatically recognized by the main CPU microprocessor. Service Manual 275 The electronic circuit created with 74HC240 (U22A/B), three 6N137 (I1,I3,I6) and three 74HC595 (U9-U11) is a serial communication interface (SPI) between the FPD pcb, the motherboard, and the CPU pcb bus connection. IGNITER 48V A-B (from an additional transformer located in the Power Module) and PT100 A-B signals are present on the J5 connector. The integrated circuit 2N5909 (U1), OP07 (U7), and OP07 (U14) with some resistors, and FET J201 (Q2) create the electrometer input current amplifier. The low input current signal (pA) produced from the FPD is present at J2(N1). The electronic circuit created by two LM358 (U26A/B) select the RANGE (10n; 0-1-2) through two bits, GAIN 1 and GAIN 0. Two integrated circuits DAC0800 (U3-U4) and OP07 (U2) create the zero suppression circuit by 16 bits input digital values (Z0-Z15). The amplifier OP200 (U5A) takes the electrometer amplifier output (V_DET) giving the analogic output voltages (0V, 1V, 10V, GND), which connect the integrator or computer through terminal block J1 (SIGNAL_OUT). Integrated circuits 4066 (U12D) and OP200 (U12B) hold the above analogic outputs voltage when they are selected during the autozero. Two amplifiers, 393 (U17A/B) and 6N137 (I5), give the output signal (GF) for a gain of the frequency (1 bit, L=gain 1 or H=gain 32). Two amplifiers OP07 (U6, U13), VFC110AP (U16) and 6N137(I4) have voltagefrequency-converter (0-10V to 0-3,5Mhz), which reads the CPU pcb through a digital signal F-OUT. The DC-DC converter 4047 (U21) takes the input voltage 24Vdc and using high voltage resistors, transistors, diodes, transformer TR2, and the elevator voltage circuit (D12-D19) generates a 800/900 v voltage. This is used for photomultiplier excitation voltage. Chapter 5.13 Flame Photometric Detector Controller (FPD) Adjustment Procedure Regulators LM7815 (U19) and LM7915 (U18) supply the +15/-15Vdc (TP17/18). Regulator LM7805 (U20) takes the input voltage +15Vdc (TP15) to supply +5Vdc. Two amplifiers LM358 (U25A/B), transistor PNP (Q3) and transistor MJE340 (D11) select the HIGH (-900V) or LOW (-800V) voltage for the photomultiplier through the input signal HIGH_V. The electronic circuit created by integrated circuit MOC3020 (I2) and triac BTA06400 (Q7) supplies the igniter voltage 8Vac for the flame detector. Output Specifications +15/-15 Vdc @ 165mA (generated by 5W DC-DC converter from 24Vdc). FPD may use +5Vdc @25mA max taken from main system. FPD flame ignition 2.0A@8Vac. Adjustment Procedure No field adjustments are necessary Protection Circuits None. Special Notes FPD cell temperature is variable from ambient to 350 ºC in increments of 1 ºC. Service Manual 277 Chapter 5.13 Flame Photometric Detector Controller (FPD) Schematics and Component Layout Schematics and Component Layout The schematics and component information for the FPD controller is listed below in table 5.13-1. The number of drawings has been included for each schematic and its corresponding layout. There are 5 drawings in this section. Table 5.13-1. Board NOTE 278 PN Drawing Layout FPD 236 48365 SE 1436 sh. 1/4 PC 1109 FPD 236 48365 SE 1436 sh. 2/4 PC 1109 FPD 236 48365 SE 1436 sh. 3/4 PC 1109 FPD 236 48365 SE 1436 sh. 4/4 PC 1109 FPD 236 48365 SE 1436 PCB PC 1109 The last drawing in this section is the layout of the board. Service Manual 279 280 281 282 283 284 Photoionization Detector Controller (PID) This chapter describes the TRACE GC 2000 Photoionization Detector (PID) controller. Chapter at a Glance… Theory of Operations ................................................................................................ 285 Circuit Function ........................................................................................................ 285 Output Specifications................................................................................................ 287 Adjustment Procedures ............................................................................................. 287 Protection Circuits .................................................................................................... 287 Special Notes ............................................................................................................ 287 Schematics and Component Layout ......................................................................... 288 Theory of Operations Circuit Function The PID pcb controls: • input analogic current • lamp current • polarization voltage through J2, J6 and J7 connectors present on the PID detector board. On the J9 and J10 DIN64A connector all voltages (24v, +5v dc, 0v, Gnd) and all digital signals (FOUT, CLK, Tx, Rx, CS, GF) interfacing with Mother board bus pcb are present. Two IN4148 diodes (D38-D39) set the type of detector controller automatically recognized by the main CPU microprocessor on the motherboard. The electronic circuit created with 74HC240 (U28), three 6N137 (I4-I6) and three 74HC595 (U9-U11) is a serial communication interface (SPI) between PID pcb, the Motherboard, and CPU pcb bus connections. Integrated circuits 74HC165 (U8) and 6N137 (I7) read the Status lamp (ON, OFF and Open Circuit) in serial mode. Service Manual 285 Integrated circuits 2N5909 (U1), OP07 (U14), OP07 (U15) with some resistors, and FET J201 (Q1-Q4) realize the electrometer input current amplifier. The low input current signal (pA) produced from the PID detector is present to J2. The electronic circuit is created by three 74HC00 (U7) and four LM324 (U2). The RANGE (10n; 0-1-2-3) is selected by two bits, RNG L and RNG H. Two integrated circuit DAC0800 (U4-U5) and OP07 (U3) create the autozero circuit (Az) by 16 bits digital values. The amplifier OP200 (U12A) takes the electrometer amplifier output (V_DET) and passes it to the analogic output terminal (0V, 1V, 10V, GND), which connects the integrator or computer. Integrated circuits 4066 (U13D) and OP200 (U12B) hold the analogic outputs voltage when they are selected during the autozero. Two amplifiers 393 (U27A/B) and 6N137 (I9) select the output signal (GF) for a frequency gain (1 bit, L=gain 1 or H=gain 32). Two amplifiers OP07 (U6, U24), VFC110AP and 6N137 (I8) realize a voltage-frequency-converter (0-10V to 0-3,5Mhz) read from the CPU pcb through a digital signal F-OUT. The electronic circuit has three transistors, TIP137 (Q10), BC237 (Q12), and BU806 (Q9); resistors; capacitors; a transformer (TR1). Diodes (D23, D24, D27, D32, D33) supplies -2000V to the PID detector lamp through the J7 connector. The amplifier, LM358 (U23B), and optocoupler, CNY17 (I2), give the output signal for the detector’s lamp status (LMP_ST; 0=OK, 1=OPEN CIRCUIT). Two integrated circuits, 4066 (U16A/B) and optocoupler CNY17 (I1), are selected from the input signal (LMP_H/L), and they activate two equal circuits, which have two 4066 ( U16C/D) and two amplifiers (LM358 (U21A/B)) to get a LOW or HIGH lamp current. Chapter 5.14 Photoionization Detector Controller (PID) Adjustment Procedures The electronic circuit created with optocoupler CNY17 (I3), diodes IN4148 (D25, D26, D35), and amplifier LM358 (U23A) is a safety protection circuit which disables the -2000V circuit through the output signal (BLOC). The DC-DC converter 4047 (U25) takes the input voltage (24V) to generate +300V using resistors, transistors, diodes and transformer TR2 to polarize the PID detector. Four regulators, two LM7815 (U18,U20) and two LM7915 (U17,U22), supply two different +15/-15Vdc. The regulator LM7805 (U19) takes the input voltage +15Vdc (TP16/V+) to supply +5Vdc. Output Specifications +15/-15Vdc @ 130mA, +5Vdc @25mA Adjustment Procedures No field adjustments are necessary. Protection Circuits Lamp Status (1 bit, 0=OK / 1=Open circuit) Special Notes +300V polarize is generated by +15/-15Vdc and 4W DC-DC converter from 24Vdc. 2000V is generated from 24V 4W DC-DC converter from 24Vdc Service Manual 287 Chapter 5.14 Photoionization Detector Controller (PID) Schematics and Component Layout Schematics and Component Layout The schematics and component information for the PID controller is listed below in table 5.14-1. The number of drawings has been included for each schematic and its corresponding layout. There are 6 drawings in this section. Table 5.14-1. Board NOTE 288 PN Drawing Layout PID 236 48360 SE 1437 sh. 1/5 PC 1110 PID 236 48360 SE 1437 sh. 2/5 PC 1110 PID 236 48360 SE 1437 sh. 3/5 PC 1110 PID 236 48360 SE 1437 sh. 4/5 PC 1110 PID 236 48360 SE 1437 sh. 5/5 PC 1110 PID 236 48360 SE 1437 PCB PC 1110 The last drawing in this section is the layout of the board. Service Manual 289 290 291 292 293 294 Thermal Conductivity Detector Controller (TCD) This chapter describes the TRACE GC 2000 Thermal Conductivity Detector (TCD) controller. Chapter at a Glance… Theory of Operations ................................................................................................ 295 Circuit Functions....................................................................................................... 295 Output Specifications................................................................................................ 297 Adjustment Procedures ............................................................................................. 297 Protection Circuits .................................................................................................... 297 Special Notes ............................................................................................................ 297 Schematics and Component Information.................................................................. 298 Theory of Operations Circuit Functions The HWDTRC pcb controls the TCD bridge filaments the 9 pole Male connector (P3). The differential input amplifier INA114BP (U19) takes the unbalance input signal from two points of the bridge detector through connector P3 (pin 6 and 2). Two OP07C buffers (U25,U26) control two other bride detector points (sensing) through connector P3 (pin 3 and 4). Use RV1 potentiometer for COARSE ZERO adjustments. Use the AD7541AJP (U20), with two OP07 amplifiers (U12, U13), is used for FINE ZERO adjustments. Analogic output signals of the INA114BP (U19, pin 6) go to the input of two OP07 amplifiers (U11, Gain x 10 and U4, Gain x1), which are selected by digital-analogic switch DG413 (U2, GSET). A digital input signal (ENA0) selects the DG413 digital-analogic switch (U3) and the OP07 amplifier (U1) to enable the analogic outputs (0V, 1V, 10V, GND), which are Service Manual 295 present on the P2 terminal block. These outputs are used for external connections to: • A recorder • An integrator • A chromatography data handling system The OP07 amplifier (U7) inverts the analogic signal polarity while the LP311N comparator (U27) and 6N137 optocoupler (U31) give the "threshold" digital output to the main microprocessor (P1). The analogic output of the OP07 (U14, pin 6) goes to the OP07 amplifier (U6, gain change) to be converted in frequency by VFC110AP (U33). The output frequency (0-4Mhz at 0-10V) is then optoisolated through 6N137 (U32) and read from the main microprocessor. Integrated circuit PM7524 (U28) and amplifier OP07 (U29) generate two setpoints: • Filaments Temperature (SETT), which is read through the comparator OP07 (U24) giving a CT (constant temperature) output signal. • Filaments Voltage (SETV) which is read through the comparator OP07 (U23) giving a CV (constant voltage) output signal. Using the comparator OP07 (U10) to give a CC output signal, the amplifier OP07 (U16) reads the filaments current (10V max). The purpose of the hybrid circuit CE 9760 (U15) is to memorize all internal signals to be interfaced with the main microprocessor by a serial communication (SPI). DC/DC converter IMR15 (U18) takes the +24 V input voltage to generate two +/- 15 V (A-P) output voltages and regulator 7805 (Q3) generates a +5 V voltage. Regulator LT1021 (U30) and amplifier OP07 (U39) generate the -10 V voltage (A). An additional 48V transformer and PT100 sensors are used for a second TCD transfer line through connectors P7 (9 poles Female) and P1 (Bus mother board). Two IN4148 diodes (D19,D20) set the type of detector controller (for example DETAB = TCD) for an automatic recognition by the motherboard’s main Chapter 5.15 Thermal Conductivity Detector Controller (TCD) Adjustment Procedures microprocessor. The P2 connector gives the 1V/10V/OV/GND outputs to connect an external integrator or data handling. Output Specifications +/-15 V @ 350 mA +5 V @ 25mA Adjustment Procedures No field adjustments are necessary. The RV2, RV3, RV4, RV5 and RV7 potentiometers concerning the off-set and full-scale are factory adjusted. Protection Circuits The filament current is limited to 250 mA. Special Notes The CE9761(U40) hybrid circuit is present and the R54 resistance has a different value only if the TCD detector bridge has two filaments instead of four. Service Manual 297 Chapter 5.15 Thermal Conductivity Detector Controller (TCD) Schematics and Component Information Schematics and Component Information The schematics and component information for the TCD controller is listed below in table X.X. The number of drawings has been included for each schematic and its corresponding layout. There are 5 drawings in this section. Table 5.15-1. Board 298 PN Drawing Layout TCD 236 48335 SE 1390 sh. 1/3 PC 1113 TCD 236 48335 SE 1390 sh. 2/3 PC 1135 TCD 236 48335 SE 1390 sh. 3/3 PC 1135 TCD 236 48335 SC 763 - Wiring Diagram PC 1135 TCD 236 48335 SE 1390 PCB PC 1135 Service Manual 299 300 301 302 303 304 Thermocouple Preamplifiers This chapter describes the PCB for the thermocouple preamplifiers of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter at a Glance… Theory of Operations ................................................................................................ 306 Adjustment Procedures ............................................................................................. 306 Schematics and Component Layout ......................................................................... 307 Service Manual 305 Chapter 5.16 Thermocouple Preamplifiers Theory of Operations Theory of Operations Two inlet configurations require temperature feedback from thermocouples instead of RTDs. These are the PTV and the OC HOT. Refer to schematic 119834 in Schematics and Component Layout. The thermocouple is an optional PCB which plugs onto the TFB & DIO PCB. It amplifies and offsets the temperature signal, so the A/D on the TFB & DIO PCB can input the temperature to the microprocessor. The thermocouple amplifier is designed for use with a type E (Chromel/Constantan) thermocouple. Integrated circuit U2 provides a 2.5 V reference and a voltage proportional the temperature of U2. Circuit U1(output pin 1) buffers the 2.5 V reference from U2 and supplies it as a fixed offset to the summing amplifier U3. Circuits U1(output pin 7) and U1(output pin 14) buffer and scale the temperature output of U2 and supply it to the summing amplifier U3. The thermocouple feeds the circuit via J2. Amplifier U1(output pin 8) buffers the signal, which allows the thermocouple to be shorted to ground. The output of this amplifier also feeds the summing amplifier U3. The output of U3 is a voltage representing the temperature of the thermocouple. It has been compensated for the unwanted thermocouple effects at J2. Adjustment Procedures No field are adjustments possible. 306 Service Manual Chapter 5.16 Thermocouple Preamplifiers Schematics and Component Layout Schematics and Component Layout The schematics and component layout information for the thermocouple preamplifiers PCB is listed below in Table 5.16-1. The number of drawings has been included for each schematic and its corresponding layout. There are two drawings for reference in this section. Table 5.16-1. Thermocouple Preamplifiers Schematics Board Thermocouple Preamplifiers NOTE Service Manual PN Drawing Layout 23648400 119834E, 1 119832, 1 The last drawing in this section is the layout of the board. 307 Chapter 5.16 Thermocouple Preamplifiers 308 Schematics and Component Layout Service Manual A B European Thermocouple United States Thermocouple Chromel Constatan 1 C Chromel Red Purple Constantan Black Red D REV ECO NO. DATE BY D DRN 4215 5/1/98 L BALDWIN E ECO 31652 7/6/98 L BALDWIN CHK L BALDWIN 1 1 2 J2 2 2.5VREF 1 3 .01uF C5 50V OP-470 C3 2 U1 50V .01uF 2 1 +15VDC 1 3.65K +15VDC 113K 6 5 R1 5 TRIM TEMP U1 OP-470 U1 2 U2 1 3.65K R3 R12 249K 4 2 +5VDC 8 1.00K 2 2 R5 7 2 1 1 GND VSEL 1.00K R6 2 1 1.00K R8 U3 2 1 2 AD780 6 3 9 1 5 8 4 AD820 2 1 1.00K R9 U1 OP-470 R10 1.00K 1 1 R13 249K 2 10 2 3 14 1 R4 12 1 OP-470 AD780 2 2 1 2 1 1.00K R11 2 6 VOUT VIN 46.4K R2 13 7 2 261K R7 2 1 -15VDC MH1 3 3 MH2 +15VDC J1 +5VDC -15VDC MH3 1 2 3 4 5 MH4 1 2 C4 .01uF 50V 1 2 C8 10UF 16V 1 2 C1 .01uF 50V 2 1 16V 10UF C7 1 2 C2 .01uF 50V 1 2 C6 10UF 16V 4 Larry Baldwin 4/29/98 Larry Baldwin 4/29/98 THERMOCOUPLE PRE-AMPLIFIER 4 E 119834 B A B C 1 D 309 PCB Layout for Thermocouple Preamplifiers (119832) 310 On-Column Semiautomatic Actuator This chapter describes the PCB for an on-column semiautomatic actuator of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter at a Glance… Theory of Operations ................................................................................................ 312 Adjustment Procedures ............................................................................................. 312 Schematics and Component Layout ......................................................................... 312 Service Manual 311 Chapter 5.17 On-Column Semiautomatic Actuator Theory of Operations Theory of Operations Some on-column inlet options include a semiautomatic actuator for opening and closing the valve. These require a small PCB which must be installed on the motherboard. If the system has two on-column actuators, then two of these PCBs can be installed with one on top of the other. The insertion of the syringe is sensed by an opto-interruptor (see schematic 119947 in Schematics and Component Layout). A flag mechanism on the assembly causes the beam to be unbroken when the syringe is inserted. Inserting the syringe causes light from the LED to strike the phototransistor in the opto-interruptor. This causes the signal SYR_IN to go high. As a result, the output of U1 switches low. Transistor Q1 inverts the output of U1. These two signals are buffered by U3, and control the valves which pneumatically open or close the valve in the injector assembly. A start pulse is generated by one-shot U2. Jumper E2 permits selection of the polarity of the start pulse to be generated. Adjustment Procedures No field adjustments are necessary. Schematics and Component Layout The schematics and component layout information for the on-column semiautomatic actuator PCB is listed below in Table 5.17-1. The number of drawings has been included for each schematic and its corresponding layout. There are three drawings for reference in this section. Table 5.17-1. On-Column Semiautomatic Actuator Schematics NOTE 312 Board PN Drawing Layout On-Column Semiautomatic Actuator 23648395 119947B, 1–2 119945, 1 The last drawing in this section is the layout of the board. Service Manual A B C D 1 REV ECO NO. B DRN DATE BY CHK 1 2 2 3 3 4 M. Garrett 01-23-98 M. Garrett 12-01-97 ON-COLUMN SEMIAUTOMATIC ACTUATOR B 119947 01-23-98 A B C 4 B 1 2 D 313 A B C D ON-COLUMN SEMIAUTOMATIC ACTUATOR CIRCUIT +5VDC +5VDC 1 +5VDC 1 +24VDC +24VDC 1 R1 470 OPTO-INTERRUPTOR 2 1 1 YEL RED WHT GRN E 1 R8 1K R7 1K J2 1 2 3 4 R3 SYR_IN 10K 1 5 SSYR_IN 2 1 C BEAM IS NORMALLY BROKEN WHEN NO SYRINGE IS INSERTED OR WHEN SYRINGE IS REMOVED. SYRINGE INSERTION CAUSES THE OPTOSENSOR BEAM TO BE UNBROKEN. U3 UDN2596A 2 20 VCC J4 10 8 1 2 6 OPEN~ 7 LM311 C1 1 1 R2 470 3 R11 10K 2 2 4 3 OC_OPEN~ 2 CR1 2 4 1 1 1 U1 2 2 C2 .1UF CLOSE~ 5 1 OC_CLOSE~ 1N4001 RM_ST~ 8 6 9 7 RMT_ST~ CR2 2 R5 100K 1 J3 1 2 2 R6 2 1K 1 3 Q1 2N3904 2 2 1 1N4001 1 1 11 14 13 15 19 16 18 17 R4 1K 2 2 2 1 2 3 E B C PCB COMPONENT SIDE XSTR ORIENTATION +5VDC 1 J1B 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 3 NOTES 1 4 HEADER E1 IS NOT INSTALLED ON THE PCB. CONNECTIONS AT RX1 TAKE ITS PLACE FOR NORMAL USAGE. IF HEADER E1 IS NEEDED, RX1 MAY BE CUT. J1A 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 GND1 GND2 2 12 +5VDC C5 .1UF 2 R10 100K R9 1K 2 2 AGND2 QSM_CS8~ 1 QSM_CS9~ 2 1 SPII_MOSI SPII_MISO 1 SPII_SCLK AGND2 SPII_SCLK~ +24VDC GND GND E1 1 2 3 2 U2 14 C3 74LS123 16 15 VCC R/C1 C1 0.1UF 1 A1 2 3 RX1 C10 22UF 16V Q1 Q1 B1 13 4 RS RM_ST~ RS~ E2 1 2 3 2 3 CLR1 1 +24VDC +5VDC 9 A2 Q2 10B2 5 12 Q2 +5VDC 11 CLR2 QSM_CS0~ RMT_ST~ QSM_CS7~ QSM_CS0~ GND N.C. QSM_CS8~ N.C. QSM_CS9~ N.C. SPII_MOSI SPII_MISO SPII_SCLK AGND2 SPII_SCLK~ +24VDC GND GND 8 QSM_CS7~ N.C. N.C. R/C2 7 C2 6 QSM_CS8~ QSM_CS9~ SPII_MOSI SPII_MISO SPII_SCLK MOUNTING HOLES SPII_SCLK~ C11 2 1 1 1 QSM_CS0~ RMT_ST~ QSM_CS7~ C4 .1UF 2 REMOTE START (RMT_ST~) CONNECT E2 PINS 1 AND 2 (TOP TWO PINS) TO GENERATE ACTIVE HIGH RMT_ST~ SIGNAL. CONNECT E2 PINS 2 AND 3 (BOTTOM TWO PINS) TO GENERATE ACTIVE LOW RMT_ST~ SIGNAL (THE NORMAL SETTING). REMOVE THE SHUNT ENTIRELY FROM E2 TO PREVENT RMT_ST~ FROM BEING GENERATED. 2 10UF 1 35V C12 2 10UF 1 35V MH1 MH2 MH3 MH4 NP NP NP NP MH5 MH6 MH7 MH8 NP NP NP NP 01-23-98 4 ON-COLUMN SEMIAUTOMATIC ACTUATOR 2 119947 A 314 B C D 2 PCB Layout for On-Column Semiautomatic Actuator (119945) 315 SECTION VI Service Equipment This section provides specifications for recommended test equipment used with the TRACE GC 2000. The TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit is also included. Chapter 6.1, Recommended Test Equipment, provides test equipment specifications that should enable isolation of problems, repair, and calibration of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 6.2, TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit, provides a list of the parts found in the TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit. Part numbers are included. Recommended Test Equipment This chapter provides test equipment specifications that should enable isolation of problems, repair, and calibration of the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter at a Glance… PCB Replacement ..................................................................................................... 320 Digital Flowmeter ..................................................................................................... 320 Digital Voltmeter (DVM).......................................................................................... 320 Oscilloscope.............................................................................................................. 320 Leak Test Meter ........................................................................................................ 320 Service Manual 319 Chapter 6.1 Recommended Test Equipment PCB Replacement PCB Replacement The TRACE GC 2000 has a modular design intended for printed circuit board (PCB) replacement. The complexity of the various PCBs used in the TRACE GC 2000 discourages component level troubleshooting. Troubleshooting to the PCB level may require the use of specialized test equipment. Digital Flowmeter A variety of digital flowmeters are available for monitoring flows on the TRACE GC 2000. Some flowmeters require selection of a specific gas type. Monitoring detector flows on the TRACE GC 2000 may require the mixing of gas types. To reduce errors in flow measurement, it is recommended you use a flowmeter that is not gas type dependent. Hand-held digital flowmeters are available that are independent of gas type. Digital bubble flowmeters intended for laboratory use are also available. Digital Voltmeter (DVM) Troubleshooting and monitoring of voltages and resistance on the TRACE GC 2000 and its associated peripherals can be accomplished with a 3½ digit DVM. It is recommended that the DVM have manual range selection as opposed to auto ranging. The input impedance should be >10 meg ohm. Alligator-type clip leads (or similar) should be available to make reliable contact to test points. Oscilloscope Most troubleshooting to isolate problems to the PCB level can be performed with a DVM. Should an oscilloscope be required, it is recommended to use one with a 100 MHz time base, 5 mV to 50 V/division range, and an X1 and X10 selectable input probe. Leak Test Meter The TRACE GC 2000 can perform an automatic injector leak test. However, it cannot identify the actual location of the leak or identify leaks other than those associated with the injector. Liquid leak detectors are not recommended since these may introduce contaminates into the gas stream. 320 Service Manual Leak Test Meter Chapter 6.1 Recommended Test Equipment Leak testing should be performed using an electronic leak detector. Portable as well as bench-mounted electronic leak detectors are available for use. Most electronic leak detectors calibrate using room air as a reference, so the detection of air leaks may not be possible. Air supplied to a GC may have to be substituted with helium to perform leak test of the air flow paths. Service Manual 321 TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit This chapter provides a list of the parts found in the TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit. Part numbers are included. Chapter at a Glance… Electronics ................................................................................................................ 324 Oven.......................................................................................................................... 325 Injector Assemblies................................................................................................... 325 Injector Consumables ............................................................................................... 325 Large Volume Injections ........................................................................................... 326 Detector Assemblies ................................................................................................. 326 Detector Consumables .............................................................................................. 327 Fans ........................................................................................................................... 327 Pneumatics ................................................................................................................ 328 AS 2000 Left/Right................................................................................................... 328 HS 2000 .................................................................................................................... 328 Service Tools............................................................................................................. 328 Service Manual 323 Chapter 6.2 TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit Introduction Introduction The TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit includes parts necessary for the installation and repair of the TRACE GC 2000. It is recommended that service representatives have these parts on hand when performing installation and repair. However, additional parts may be necessary to resolve unusual service problems. NOTE Contents of the TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit are subject to change based on service history. Table 6.2-1. Electronics Item 324 PN Power Supply Assembly 208 060 10 Keypad/Display Panel 432 100 25 Analog Feedback PCB 236 483 40 CPU PCB 236 483 45 Motherboard 236 483 50 DPFC PCB 236 483 30 FID Controller 236 483 20 ECD Controller 236 483 25 Transformer 48V (ECD Heaters) 230 434 43 TCD Controller 236 483 35 Transformer 48V (TCD Heaters) 230 434 43 NPD Controller 236 483 55 Transformer (NPD bead) 230 434 44 PID Controller 236 483 60 Transformer 48V (PID Heaters) 230 434 43 FPD Controller 236 483 65 Transformer 48V (FPD Heaters) 230 434 43 Breaker 16 A (230 V) 237 099 16 Breaker 20 A (115 V) 237 099 15 Service Manual Chapter 6.2 TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit Introduction Table 6.2-2. Oven Item PN Oven Baffle with Heater and RTD PT100 (230 V) 354 080 30 Oven Baffle with Heater and RTD PT100 (115 V) 354 080 20 Replacement Oven Blower Motor with Bracket 155 990 00 Door Switch Assembly 230 434 45 Oven PT100 RTD 119884-0001 Stepper Motor 318 070 46 Table 6.2-3. Injector Assemblies Item PN Terminal Fitting at Bottom of Injector 347 054 51 Septa Support S/SL — Package of Two 350 254 33 Septa Holder S/SL 233 030 15 Table 6.2-4. Injector Consumables Item Service Manual PN Injector Heater (230 V) 354 250 57 Injector Heater (115 V) 354 250 58 PT100 Temperature Sensor 403 112 30 SVE Heater (230 V) 354 250 59 SVE Heater (115 V) 354 250 60 Split Liner, 5-mm ID — 2 Each 453 200 30 Split Liner, 3-mm ID — 2 Each 453 200 31 Splitless Liner, 3-mm ID — 2 Each 453 200 32 Splitless Liner, 5 mm — 2 Each 45 3200 33 Wide-Bore Liner for S/SL Injector 453 003 10 Wide-Bore Injector, 4-mm Glass Liner — 2 Each 453 220 49 Wide-Bore Injector, 2-mm Glass Liner — 2 Each 453 220 50 Septa, BTO Type, S/SL Injector — Package of 10 313 032 11 Septa, Wide-Bore Injector, High Temp — Package of 50 313 032 09 Ferrules 0.35 mm for 0.25-mm ID Column — Set of 2 290 134 88 Ferrules 0.45 mm for 0.32-mm ID Column — Set of 2 290 134 87 Ferrules 0.8 mm for 0.53-mm ID Column — Set of 2 290 134 86 Nuts for Column Connection — Package of 5 350 324 23 S/SL Septum Cap Tool 205 070 10 325 Chapter 6.2 TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit Introduction Table 6.2-4. Injector Consumables (Continued) Item NOTE PN Graphite S/SL Liner Seal 290 034 06 S/SL Silver Seal for Terminal Fitting — Package of 10 290 336 29 The PT100 is the same for all hot injectors except the PTV. Both devices have the same physical dimensions as the temperature sensing end. The heater is the same for all hot injectors except the PTV. Each injector has one heater. However, the DoublePro has two. The entire PTV must be replaced if the PTV heater or thermocouple fails. Table 6.2-5. Large Volume Injections Item PN OCV80T (for AS2000) 299 022 70 Secondary Cooling Value 24V 405 160 15 SVE Valve Assembly 405 171 46 Seal, PTFE OCI 290 070 01 Clip 426 003 57 Vespel Ferrule, 0.45-mm ID for 0.32-mm Column — Set of 2 290 134 60 Vespel Ferrule, 0.35-mm ID for 0.25-mm Column — Set of 2 290 134 61 Vespel Ferrule, 0.8-mm ID for 0.53-mm Column — Set of 2 290 134 71 Septa for Automatic LVI/OCI — Package of 100 350 158 50 Ferrules 1-mm ID for 0.8-mm ID Tube — Set of 2 290 134 85 Low Volume Tee Connector 347 084 48 Syringe, 250 µL with 80-mm Needle 365 050 23 Backwasher/Cooling Sleeve for OC Injector 452 000 01 Column Retaining Nut and Backwasher for OC Injector 452 100 01 Table 6.2-6. Detector Assemblies Item 326 PN Base Body Heater (230 V) 354 250 53 Base Body Heater (115 V) 354 250 52 PT100 Temperature Sensor 403 112 30 Silver Seal, Base Body Terminal Fitting — 10 Each 290 371 00 Capillary Adapter — 2 Each 347 254 36 Service Manual Chapter 6.2 TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit Introduction Table 6.2-7. Detector Consumables Item PN FID/NPD Jet Tool 205 019 00 FID Jet 404 043 01 FID Collector Electrode Assembly 259 011 15 FID/NPD Ceramic Insulator 302 023 10 FID/NPD Base Retaining Screw 311 060 08 Ignitor/Polarizer Assembly 206 016 03 FID Collector Electrode Assembly 206 016 02 NPD Jet 404 043 02 NPD TD-2 Source 465 002 55 NPD Collector 259 011 10 NPD Ceramic Insulator 302 023 10 ECD Collector 277 003 50 ECD Jet Seal 290 150 60 ECD Tool 205 021 50 ECD Heater and Sensor Assembly 190 500 87 ECD Seal, Top — Package of 10 290 326 08 Table 6.2-8. Fans Item Service Manual PN OC/PTV Fan, 230 V 406 006 82 OC/PTV Fan, 115 V 406 006 87 Rear Fan (230 V) 24170-0016 406 007 05 Rear Fan (115 V) 24170-0015 406 007 10 327 Chapter 6.2 TRACE GC 2000 Service Kit Introduction Table 6.2-9. Pneumatics Item PN Flow Regulator MOD ECD Only, AA 425 090 50 Flow Regulator MOD ECD, PID, FPD FID (without makeup), AB 425 090 51 Flow Regulator MOD ECD, PID, FPD FID (with makeup), AC 425 090 53 Flow Regulator MOD NPD, ECD, PID, FPD FID (without makeup), AD 425 090 54 Flow Regulator MOD 250 for PKD/Megabore Injector 425 090 60 Flow Regulator MOD 700 for PKD/Megabore Injector 425 090 61 Flow Regulator MOD 250 for S/SL Injector 425 090 58 Flow Regulator MOD 700 for S/SL Injector 425 090 59 Flow Regulator MOD 250KPA, Pack/Widebore 425 090 71 Flow Regulator MOD 700 for Packed Injector 425 090 62 Flow Regulator MOD TCD Ref., AB 425 090 52 Table 6.2-10. AS 2000 Left/Right Item PN CNT800/CNS800/CNN810 PCBs (Turret) 236 482 55 CP800 PCB (EPROM DX) 236 483 00 ANB801 PCB 236 482 90 AC801 PCB 236 482 95 Transformer 413 250 56 Motor, Plunger 318 079 00 Motor, Plunger, Tray, Turret 318 078 00 Table 6.2-11. HS 2000 Item PN CP850 PCB (EPROM version) 236 483 05 ANB850 PCB 236 483 10 AC850 PCB 236 483 15 Transformer 413 250 57 Table 6.2-12. Service Tools Item Service Manual 328 PN 317 092 70 Tools Kit, Standard Metric Wrenches t.b.d. Travel Kit with Containers t.b.d. Service Manual SECTION VII Replacement Parts List For a list of replacement parts and component part numbers for the TRACE GC 2000 please refer to the Spare Parts Catalog, PN 31709210. SECTION VIII Service Information This section provides service and technical information for the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 8.1, Service Notes (TSB), contains service notes and Technical Service Bulletins (TSBs) for the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter 8.2, Additional Technical Information, contains additional technical information for the TRACE GC 2000. Service Notes (TSB) This chapter contains service notes and Technical Service Bulletins (TSB) for the TRACE GC 2000. NOTE Service Manual Insert any TSBs you receive into this section. 333 Additional Technical Information This chapter contains additional technical information for the TRACE GC 2000. Chapter at a Glance… How to Update Your TRACE GC 2000 Software .................................................... 336 Using the Configure Menu ....................................................................................... 337 Using the Hidden Configuration Menu .................................................................... 338 Controlling LVOCI Inlet Parameters ........................................................................ 341 Service Manual 335 Chapter 8.2 Additional Technical Information OPERATING PROCEDURE How to Update Your TRACE GC 2000 Software It is necessary to periodically update the software for the TRACE GC 2000. Follow these steps to update the embedded systems software in the TRACE GC 2000: For a boot load, it will be necessary to cycle the power on and off before you begin. 1. Turn the GC off. 2. Press the enter key and hold. 3. Turn the GC on. Now you are ready to load the new software. 4. Insert the diskette into the computer. 5. Run the install.exe program. • From the Windows NT Explorer, click on the A drive. Double-click the install.exe icon. • From the Windows NT toolbar, choose Start»Run. Type a:install. Click OK. The Install New TRACE 2000 Software dialog box is displayed. See Figure 8.2-1. 6. Select the GCs to install on. Click OK to continue. The software installation will be monitored by the computer. The software will be loaded in 1000-byte increments. A message will be displayed when the installation is complete. 7. Turn the power off, and then back on. The GC now displays the updated software version. 336 Service Manual Chapter 8.2 Additional Technical Information Figure 8.2-1 shows the Install New TRACE 2000 Software dialog box. Figure 8.2-1. Install New TRACE 2000 Software Dialog Box OPERATING PROCEDURE Using the Configure Menu Use the Configure menu to view and modify your hardware configurations. Press the CONFIG key to go to the Configure menu. However, inlets and detector items need to be added or deleted by going to the Hidden Configuration menu. For example, if your Right Inlet is a split/splitless, and your Configure menu does not list the Left Inlet item, you must go into the Hidden Configuration menu. 1. Press Left Inlet to verify that the displayed selection matches your hardware configuration. 2. Press Right Inlet to verify that the displayed selection matches your hardware configuration. 3. Press Valves to verify that the displayed selection matches your hardware configuration. Service Manual 337 4. Press CONFIG to verify that the displayed selections matches your hardware configuration. Table 8.2-1. Configure Menu Oven Right CARRIER LEFT INLET LEFT CARRIER AUX ZONES TIME AUTOSAMPLER HANDSHAKING KEYBOARD & DISPLAY If an item matches, use the down key to scroll down the menu. Use the up key to scroll up the menu. If they do not match, press ENTER at the selection and make the change. To get back to the beginning of the Configure menu press the CLEAR key. OPERATING PROCEDURE Using the Hidden Configuration Menu When you need to change items (add or remove inlets and detectors) listed in your Configure menu, all you have to do is press Config and enter 2000 to enter the Hidden Configuration menu. While in the Hidden Configuration menu, use the down key to scroll to options where you can make other hardware selections based on your hardware configuration. Press ENTER on each configuration display that matches your hardware. Press CLEAR to step backwards in the menu. Chapter 8.2 Additional Technical Information 1. After powering on your TRACE GC, press the CONFIG key. The Configure menu displays your current GC configuration. Table 8.2-2. Configure Menu OVEN RIGHT CARRIER LEFT INLET LEFT CARRIER AUX ZONES TIME AUTOSAMPLER HANDSHAKING KEYBOARD & DISPLAY 2. Move the cursor to the Left Inlet and press the ENTER key. The CONFIG LEFT INLET menu displays. If your Configure menu does not list a left inlet then you must enter the Hidden Configuration menu. 3. Press Enter at the CONFIG LEFT INLET display. A list of available inlets displays. OCI* HOTOC LVOCI To change the inlet configuration move the cursor to the appropriate inlet choice and press the ENTER key twice. A menu showing available inlets display. An asterisk indicates your current choice. 4. If the desired inlet is not selected, move the cursor to select it and press the ENTER key to return to the Configure menu. OCI HOTOC LVOCI * If for example, you see NONE for the Right Inlet listed in the Configure menu, then you must access the Hidden Configuration menu to activate the Inlet. Service Manual 339 Chapter 8.2 Additional Technical Information 5. To access the Hidden Configuration, press the key labeled Configure and then enter 2000. The Hidden Configuration displays. Table 8.2-3. HIDDEN CONFIGURATION Menu ver. 3.01.10 R (c) 1998 DS Baud Rate RTD Offsett MAX GC Amps AC Oven Cryo Right Detector Left Detector Aux Detector L Det Module A Det Module Hydrogen Sensor Aux 1 Aux 2 Double Pro Inlets R Inlet L Inlet Serial # Manufactured Total Runs Saave Default Mthd Erase / Mthd / Cnfg 6. Move the cursor to Right Inlet and press ENTER. The Config Right Inlet menu displays the Right Inlet Type and the current inlet choice. Table 8.2-4. Config Right Inlet Menu Right Inlet Type 340 S/SL Service Manual Chapter 8.2 Additional Technical Information 7. Press ENTER again to view to view the list of available inlets. Move the cursor to the inlet choice and press the ENTER key. This marks the inlet choice and returns you to the beginning of the Configure Right Inlet menu. For example, if you select the S/SL an asterisk will mark it the next time you enter the Config Right Inlet menu. Table 8.2-5. Config Right Inlet Type Menu S/SL PKD PPKD PTV OCI NONE 8. Press the CLEAR key to return to the Hidden Configuration menu. OPERATING PROCEDURE Controlling LVOCI Inlet Parameters There may be times you need to manually control your LVOCI parameters. Using your keypad you can: • Check existing LVOCI parameters • Verify the carrier flows • Open and Close the secondary valve 1. Press the Left Inlet key, the following parameters will be displayed: Table 8.2-6. Left Inlet Menu Service Manual Left Inlet LVOCI Pressure 24 Sec. Cool Time 0.50 SVE Temp 150 SVE Duration 0.45 Evap Pressure 100 Evap Duration 0.50 341 Chapter 8.2 Additional Technical Information 2. Press Left Carrier to view the flow rates: Table 8.2-7. Left Carrier Col Flow Rates Menu Col. Flow 1.5 Pressure 7 Flow Mode Con Flow Vacuum Comp On 3. Press Valves to LVOCI valves.:Press ENTER to view the left Valves menu.To Table 8.2-8. Valves Menu Valves Inlet Valves turn the valve on, move the cursor to the appropriate line item and press the ON/ YES key. : Table 8.2-9. Left Valves Menu L SVE Valve Off L Sec Cool Valve Off 4. Press the Right Inlet or Right Carrier key to view Split/Splitless inlet parameters. Scroll down to the Save Default Mthd line and press ENTER. OK displays, indicating you saved your configuration. Press Clear again to return to the Config menu. 342 Service Manual Flame Ionization Detector This appendix contains the manual FID Installation Instructions (PN M 317 09 327), which provides instructions for installing and configuring the Flame Ionization Detector on your TRACE GC 2000. Guide at a Glance… About This Guide ............................................................................................... 344 Introduction ........................................................................................................ 345 Getting Started.................................................................................................... 346 Configuration...................................................................................................... 353 Set FID Parameters............................................................................................. 354 Operating Procedures Installing FID Upgrade Kit................................................................................. 346 Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas ............................................................ 353 Parameters Setting.............................................................................................. 354 Service Manual 343 Appendix A Flame Ionization Detector About This Guide About This Guide It provides the instructions to install and configure the Flame Ionization Detector on your TRACE GC™ 2000. NOTE 344 For Conventions, Symbols and Costumer Communications, please refer to the TRACE GC 2000 Operating Manual. Service Manual Appendix A Flame Ionization Detector Introduction Introduction The upgrade kit contains all the material required to install the Flame Ionization Detector on your TRACE GC 2000: CAUTION • FID Assembly for TRACE • FID Control Card • FID Standard Outfit The detector gas control module is not part of this kit. Who Performs the Installation of the Kit If, for any reason, the kit is not installed by ThermoQuest technical personnel, you must carefully adhere to the following instructions. Detector Gases Requirements The FID requires air and hydrogen as fuel gases. The use of the make-up gas is optional. Optimum performance with capillary column are achieved with make-up gas. According to the required gases, the DGFC or the Non-DGFC module may be: • Type AB for the control of air and hydrogen. • Type AD for the control of air and hydrogen. • Type AC for the control of air, hydrogen and make-up gas. 1. Verify that the detector gas control module installed on your GC is compatible with the FID gas requirements. 2. The connections of the detector gases must be performed as described in the following table: Installed Module Connect Hydrogen to Connect Air to Connect Make-up Gas to AB Gas 2 Gas 1 — AC Gas 2 Gas 1 Gas 3 AD Gas 3 Gas 1 — For further details, refer to Chapters 15 and Chapter 16 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating Manual. Transformer for FID NOTE Service Manual If your GC has serial number lower than 983808 (Milan) or TR101089 (Austin), the installation of a dedicated transformer might be necessary. Please contact us for details. 345 Appendix A Flame Ionization Detector Getting Started Getting Started This paragraph contains the instruction to install the FID on your GC. To properly install the FID upgrade kit, the following sequential operations must be performed: • Remove the top and right side panels of the GC. • Install the detector control card into the GC electronic compartment (control unit). • Mount the FID on the GC. • Remount GC panels. • Restart the GC. • Configure the detector. Before starting, the following preliminary operations must be carried out: 1. Cool the oven and detector base body to room temperature. 2. Make sure that the detector base body is leak free. 3. Close the gas supplies. 4. Turn off the main power on the rear panel of the GC. 5. Disconnect the main power cable from the rear of the GC. Installing FID Upgrade Kit Follow this instruction to properly install the FID Upgrade Kit. 1 3 2 4 1. Injector and detector cassette 2. Column oven door 3. Upper cover 4. Right hand-side panel Figure A-1. TRACE GC 2000 346 Service Manual Appendix A Flame Ionization Detector Getting Started Removing the GC Panels This operation allows to access the GC upper parts and the electronic compartment. Materials needed: • 2-mm Allen wrench • 3-mm Allen wrench Remove the GC Top Cover 1. Lift the detector cover off the GC top cover. 2. Open the oven door and unscrew the two top cover fastening screws. 3. Push the cover back about 1 cm and lift it up and off the GC. Figure A-2. TRACE GC 2000 Top Cover Remove the GC Right Side Panel 1. Loosen and remove the screw that secures the right side panel to the right upper rear corner of the GC by using the 3-mm Allen wrench. Refer to Figure A-3. 2. Slide the side panel towards the back of the GC and then tilt the top of the side panel outwards. Continue to slide the panel towards the rear of the GC. 3. Hold the side panel parallel to the GC, and pull the lower edge of the panel away from the GC. Service Manual 347 Appendix A Flame Ionization Detector Getting Started 1 1. Right Panel Securing Screw Figure A-3. TRACE GC 2000 Rear Panel Installing the FID Control Card The FID control card must be installed into the proper expansion slot marked A, B or C located on the left part of the GC mother board in the electronic compartment. Refer to Figures A-4 and A-5. NOTE In the case all the expansion slots are occupied, it is necessary to remove one of the three detector control card currently installed and replace it with the FID control card. Materials needed: 348 Service Manual Appendix A Flame Ionization Detector Getting Started • 3-mm Allen wrench C 1 B 3 2 A 1. Slot cover plate 2. Cover plates fixing screw 3. Free slot A B C. Extension slot position Figure A-4. Extension Slots Top View 1. Loosen the fixing screw of the slot cover plate that corresponds to the selected A, B or C expansion slot on the mother board. 3 2 1. Detector control card expansion 2. Additional heat control jumpers Slots 3. Mother board Figure A-5. Detector Control Card Expansion Slots Service Manual 349 Appendix A Flame Ionization Detector Getting Started 2. Verify that the jumper marked Jx, adjacent to the defined detector control card connector on the mother board, is positioned between the pins 2 and 3. Refer to the following table. Expansion slot Corresponding Jumper A J8 B J7 C J6 Jumper Positioning Pins 1-2 = additional heat control enabled Pins 2-3 = additional heat control not enabled WARNING! The jumper marked “Jx” must be positioned between the pins 2 and 3. 3. Guide through the slot mentioned at point 1 the signal and ignition cables coming from the top of the card. 4. Plug the detector control card into the selected expansion slot on the mother board. 5. Fix the control card by using the same screw previously removed at point 1. Mounting the FID on the GC This operation allows the correct installation of the FID on your TRACE GC 2000. Materials needed: 350 • Jet for FID • Tool for jet Service Manual Appendix A Flame Ionization Detector Getting Started 1. Place the jet into the detector base body housing and tighten it with the proper tool. Ensure the jet is perfectly vertically aligned to avoid damaging its ceramic part. 1 2 3 1. Tool for jet 2. Jet 3. Detector base body Figure A-6. Jet for FID 2. Install the FID on the detector base body and secure it by using the fixing screw on the front of the detector cell. 3. Carefully, connect the signal and ignition polarization cables coming from the detector control card, to the detector cell. 1 2 4 3 1. FID 2. Fixing screw 3. Detector base body 4. Signal cable 5. Ignition polarization cable Figure A-7. Installation of the FID Service Manual 351 Appendix A Flame Ionization Detector Getting Started Reinstall the GC Panels This operation allows to reinstall the GC panels Materials needed: • 3-mm Allen wrench 1. Reconnect the chassis ground wire to the GC rear oven terminal. 2. Reinstall all the GC panels proceeding in the reverse order of their removal (refer to Removing the GC Panels on page 347) being sure to reconnect the rear panel cooling fan. Restarting the GC 1. Verify that the connections of the detector gases has been correctly performed. 2. Open the gas supplies. 3. Reconnect the main power. 4. Turn on main power. 352 Service Manual Appendix A Flame Ionization Detector Configuration Configuration This paragraph contains the instructions to configure your GC to operate with FID. You configure the detector and make-up gas in the CONFIGURE menu. Refer to Chapter 15 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating manual. Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas 1. Press CONFIG then scroll to Left detector or Right detector depending on the location of the detector to configure. Press ENTER to open the detector gas menu. LEFT DETECTOR Detector type < 1 Makeup gas 1 This line appears only if the DGFC module is present. Refer to note. 2. Select Detector type. This line indicates the type of detector mounted and the slot (A, B or C) of the relevant control board. Press ENTER to display the submenu. 3. To change detector type, scroll to the desired detector and press ENTER to confirm the selection. An asterisk appears beside the detector selected. 4. When the DGFC Module is present scroll to Makeup gas and press ENTER. The gases applicable to the detector in use are displayed in the submenu. An asterisk appears beside the currently active make-up gas is also displayed in parentheses in the title bar. 5. To change the make-up gas, scroll to the desired gas and press ENTER to confirm the selection. An asterisk appears beside the make-up gas selected. Service Manual 353 Appendix A Flame Ionization Detector Set FID Parameters Set FID Parameters To set FID parameters, it is necessary to open the FID menu and the FID Signal menu. NOTE • The DETECTOR (FID) menu contains the detector control parameters. To set parameters, refer to the Chapter 16 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating Manual. • The DETECTOR SIGNAL menu contains the parameters that control the detector signal. To set parameters, refer to the Chapter 15 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating Manual. To verify the correct installation of the detector on your GC, perform the FID Checkout as described in Section II of the TRACE GC 2000 Standard Operating Procedures manual PN 31709200. Parameters Setting 1. To open FID menu, press LEFT DETECTOR or RIGHT DETECTOR depending on the location of the detector. The following menu is displayed: LEFT DETECTOR (FID)1 Flame Off Base temp Signal 250 pA2 (5.5) Ign.thresh2 3 Air Off 35 35 3 Mkup N2 2.0 retry2 Flameout H2 250 350 350 3 30 30< 1. These settings could also be for a right detector. 2. This parameter lines will be displayed according to the Range parameter in the DETECTOR SIGNAL menu. See Range Parameter on page 16. 3. If you have a non-DGFC module, the actual value are not displayed, and you can only turn the flows on and off. 2. To open FID Signal menu, press LEFT SIGNAL or RIGHT SIGNAL according to the location of the detector. The following menu is displayed: LEFT SIGNAL (FID)1 Output Offset Auto zero? (1000) 100 Y/N Range 10^(0..3) Analog filter 354 0< Off Service Manual Appendix A Flame Ionization Detector Set FID Parameters 1. These settings could also be for a right signal Range Parameter The Range 10^ parameter is an input attenuation value. It is set from 0 (high sensitivity) to 3 (low sensitivity). The dynamic of the FID card is as follows: Range Input Signal Output Signal 0 1 nA 1 Volt 1 10 nA 1 Volt 2 100 nA 1 Volt 3 1 ←A 1 Volt This means that if we have a small variation (in pA) of the baseline value when the Range 10^ is set 0 or 1, the input amplifier circuit of FID card can read it, and, according with threshold value set, can qualify the Flameout retry (if it is set ON). If the Range 10^ is set 2 or 3, the small variation (in pA) of the baseline is not detected from the FID card. For this reason, when the Range 10^ is set 2 or 3, the Signal pA, Ign. thresh and Flameout retry parameters will be not displayed in the DETECTOR FID menu. Service Manual 355 Appendix A Flame Ionization Detector 356 Set FID Parameters Service Manual Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector This appendix contains the manual NPD Installation Instructions (PN M 317 09 329) which provides the instructions to install and configure the Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector on your TRACE GC 2000. Guide at a Glance… About This Guide ...............................................................................................358 Introduction ........................................................................................................359 Getting Started....................................................................................................361 Configuration......................................................................................................377 Set NPD Parameters ...........................................................................................379 Operating Procedures Installing NPD Upgrade Kit ...............................................................................362 Configuring Hardware, Detector and Make-up Gas...........................................377 Parameters Setting ..............................................................................................379 Installation Guide 357 Upgrade Kit About This Guide About This Guide It provides the instructions to install and configure the Nitrogen Phosphorus on your TRACE GC™ 2000. NOTE 358 For Conventions, Symbols and Costumer Communications, please refer to the TRACE GC 2000 Operating Manual. Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Introduction Introduction The upgrade kit contains all the material required to install the Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector on your TRACE GC 2000: CAUTION • NPD Assembly for TRACE • NPD Control Card • Transformer for NPD • NPD Standard Outfit The detector gas control module is not part of this kit. Who Performs the Installation of the Kit If, for any reason, the kit is not installed by ThermoQuest technical personnel, you must carefully adhere to the following instructions. Detector Gases Requirements The NPD requires air and hydrogen as fuel gases and nitrogen or helium as makeup gas. Make-up gas is not necessary when packed column is used. According to the required gases, the DGFC or the Non-DGFC module is: • Type AD for the control of air, hydrogen and make-up gas. 1. Verify that the detector gas control module installed on your GC is compatible with the NPD gas requirements. 2. The connections of the detector gases must be performed as described in the following table: Installation Guide Installed Module Connect Hydrogen to Connect Air to Connect Make-up Gas to AD Gas 2 Gas 1 Gas 3 359 Upgrade Kit Introduction For further details, refer to Chapters 15 and Chapter 16 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating Manual. Transformer for NPD To supply NPD, the dedicated transformer provided must be installed on the Power Control Module of the GC. WARNING! This operation must be carried out by authorized ThermoQuest technical personnel. 360 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Getting Started Getting Started This paragraph contains the instruction to install the NPD on your GC. To properly install the NPD upgrade kit, the following sequential operations must be performed: • Remove the top, right side and rear panels of the GC. • Install the detector control card into the GC electronic compartment (control unit). • Remove the GC Power Control Module • Mount the transformer for NPD. • Mount the NPD on the GC. • Remount GC panels. • Restart the GC. • Configure the transformer. • Configure the detector. Before starting, the following preliminary operations must be carried out: 1. Cool the oven and detector base body to room temperature. 2. Make sure that the detector base body is leak free. 3. Close the gas supplies. 4. Turn off the main power on the rear panel of the GC. 5. Disconnect the main power cable from the rear of the GC. Installation Guide 361 Upgrade Kit Getting Started Installing NPD Upgrade Kit Follow this instruction to properly install the NPD Upgrade Kit. 1 3 2 4 1. Injector and detector cassette 2. Column oven door 3. Upper cover 4. Right hand-side panel Figure B-1. TR ACE GC 2000 Removing the GC Panels This operation allows to access the GC upper parts and the electronic compartment. Material needed: • 2-mm Allen wrench • 3-mm Allen wrench Remove the GC Top Cover 1. Lift the detector cover off the GC top cover. 362 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Getting Started 2. Open the oven door and unscrew the two top cover fastening screws. 3. Push the cover back about 1 cm and lift it up and off the GC. Figure B-2. TRACE GC 2000 Top Cover Remove the GC Right Side Panel 1. Loosen and remove the screw that secures the right side panel to the right upper rear corner of the GC by using the 3-mm Allen wrench. Refer to Figure B-3. 2. Slide the side panel towards the back of the GC and then tilt the top of the side panel outwards. Continue to slide the panel towards the rear of the GC. 3. Hold the side panel parallel to the GC, and pull the lower edge of the panel away from the GC. Installation Guide 363 Upgrade Kit Getting Started 1 1. Right Panel Securing Screw Figure B-3. TRACE GC 2000 Rear Panel Remove the GC Rear Panel 1. Locate the six Allen screws that secure the rear panel to the GC. Remove these screws using the 2-mm Allen wrench. See Figure B-4. 2. Carefully remove the rear panel of the GC. Be aware that the cooling fan is attached to the rear panel. NOTE 364 Pay attention to the positioning of the cooling fan plug, so it can be reconnected in the same way it was removed. Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Getting Started 1 1. Rear Panel Fixing Screws Figure B-4. GC Rear Panel Fixing Screws Installing the NPD Control Card The NPD control card must be installed into the proper expansion slot marked A, B or C located on the left part of the GC mother board in the electronic compartment. Refer to Figures B-5 and B-6. NOTE In the case all the expansion slots are occupied, it is necessary to remove one of the three detector control card currently installed and replace it with the NPD control card. Materials needed: • Installation Guide 3-mm Allen wrench 365 Upgrade Kit Getting Started 1. Loosen the fixing screw of the slot cover plate that corresponds to the selected A, B or C expansion slot on the mother board. C 1 B 3 2 A 1. Slot cover plate 2. Cover plates fixing screw 3. Free slot A B C. Extension slot position Figure B-5. Extension Slots Top View 366 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Getting Started 3 2 1. Detector control card expansion 2. Additional heat control jumpers Slots 3. Mother board Figure B-6. Detector Control Card Expansion Slots 2. Verify that the jumper (marked J6, J7, or J8), adjacent to the defined detector control card connector on the mother board, is positioned between the pins 2 and 3. Refer to the following table. Expansion slot Installation Guide Corresponding Jumper A J8 B J7 C J6 367 Upgrade Kit Getting Started Jumper Positioning Pins 1-2 = additional heat control enabled Pins 2-3 = additional heat control not enabled WARNING! The jumper (marked J6, J7, or J8) must be positioned between the pins 2 and 3. 3. Guide through the slot mentioned at point 1 the signal and ignition cables coming from the top of the card. 4. Plug the detector control card into the selected expansion slot on the mother board. 5. Fix the control card by using the same screw previously removed at point 1. Removing the Power Control Module Materials Needed: • Phillips screwdriver Six screws fix the Power Control Module. Two large Phillips screws are located in the rear of the right hand-side of the GC, while the remaining four screws are located just behind the front panel of the GC. 1. Remove the six screws. Refer to Figure B-7. 368 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Getting Started 1 1 1. Large Phillips Screws Figure B-7. TRACE GC 2000 Right Side View 2. Slide the Power Control Module very slowly and gently outward towards the rear of the GC. See Figure B-8 on page 370. CAUTION Installation Guide This operation requires particular attention because several cables are connected to the Power Control Module. It must be removed gradually paying attention to disconnect step by step all the cables available until the power control module is completely free. Be very careful not to damage any wire during this operation. 369 Upgrade Kit Getting Started 1 1. Power Control Module Figure B-8. TRACE GC 2000 Rear View 3. As the Power Control Module is being removed, disconnection of the parts must be carried out in the following order: • J1, 16-pin white connector. • J8, 2-pin connector. • J11, 16-pin white connector located in the upper rear quadrant of the chassis. • J13, ribbon cable. • Oven heater wire connected to the oven heater triac. • TB1 and TB2, orange terminal strips for the heater wire connections. • J17, oven blower motor. • J8, second oven heater wire. • Chassis ground wire from the GC rear oven terminal. 4. Place the Power Control Module on a free working table. 370 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Getting Started Install the Transformer for Detector Figure B-9 shows the positions on the GC Power Control Module where the detector trasformer must be installed. 1 1. Installation Position of the Transformer for NPD Figure B-9. Transformer Installation Install the transformer proceeding as follows. To identify the parts, refer to Figure B-10 on page 372. 1. Screw the spacer on the threaded pin. 2. Insert the first protection disk on the spacer. 3. Place the transformer over the protection disk. 4. Place the second protection disk over the transformer. 5. Place the metal plate over the assembly. 6. Insert the fixing screw in the spacer passing through the metal plate. Installation Guide 371 Upgrade Kit Getting Started 7. Screw until the transformer assembly is blocked. 1 4 5 2 3 1. Transformer 2. Protection disks 3. Spacer 4. Metal Plate 5. Fixing Screw Figure B-10. Transformer Assembly Identification Parts The transformer has three cables and four female connectors marked “Px”. Connect the female connectors to the corresponding male connectors marked “Jx”on the power control module PCB (J14, J15) and on the mother board PCB (J35, J36, J37) depending where the NPD board has been installed. Cable Connector Connect To... P15 J15 P4 J4 P35 or 36 J35 or 36 P36 or 37 J36 or 37 The result of the operation is shown in Figure B-11 on page 373. 372 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Getting Started Figure B-11. Installation of the Transformer for NPD Reinstall the Power Control Module CAUTION This operation requires particular attention because several cables must be reconnected to the Power Control Module. It must be gradually reinserted paying attention to reconnect step by step all the cables until the power control module is completely reinstalled into the GC. 1. Reconnect the previous disconnected connections in the reverse order of their removal. 2. Secure the six Phillips screws that fix the Power Control Module in place. 3. Reconnect the chassis ground wire to the GC rear oven terminal. Mounting the NPD on the GC This operation allows the correct installation of the NPD on your TRACE GC 2000. Installation Guide 373 Upgrade Kit Getting Started Materials needed: • Jet for NPD • Tool for jet 1. Place the jet into the detector base body housing and tighten it with the proper tool. Ensure the jet is perfectly vertically aligned to avoid damaging its ceramic part. Refer to Figure B-12. 1 2 3 1. Tool for jet 2. Jet 3. Detector base body Figure B-12. Jet for NPD 2. Install the NPD on the detector base body and secure it by using the fixing screw on the front of the detector cell. Refer to Figure B-13 on page 375. 3. Carefully, connect the signal and ignition polarization cables coming from the detector control card, to the detector cell. Refer to Figure B-13 on page 375. 374 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Getting Started 1 2 4 3 1. NPD 2. Fixing screw 3. Detector base body 4. Signal cable 5. Ignition polarization cable Figure B-13. Installation of the NPD Reinstall the GC Panels This operation allows to reinstall the GC panels Materials needed: • 3-mm Allen wrench 1. Reconnect the chassis ground wire to the GC rear oven terminal. 2. Reinstall all the GC panels proceeding in the reverse order of their removal (refer to Removing the GC Panels on page 362) being sure to reconnect the rear panel cooling fan. Installation Guide 375 Upgrade Kit Getting Started Restarting the GC 1. Verify that the connections of the detector gases has been correctly performed. 2. Open the gas supplies. 3. Reconnect the main power. 4. Turn on main power. 376 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Configuration Configuration This paragraph contains the instructions to configure your GC to operate with NPD. The following operations must be performed: • Hardware Configuration • Detector and Make-up Gas Configuration Configuring Hardware, Detector and Make-up Gas Hardware Configuration This operation must be performed to verify if the GC has recognized the presence of the transformer previously installed. 1. Press INFO/DIAG twice to open Diagnostics menu. 2. Scroll to Hardware Config and press ENTER. 3. Address the hardware configuration menu. Scroll down until the type of transformer installed in the system is displayed. 4. If not, verify the transformer connections. Detector and Make-up Gas Configuration You configure the detector and make-up gas in the CONFIGURE menu. Refer to Chapter 15 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating manual. 1. Press CONFIG then scroll to Left detector or Right detector depending on the location of the detector to configure. Press ENTER to open the detector gas menu. Installation Guide 377 Upgrade Kit Configuration LEFT DETECTOR Detector type < 1 Makeup gas 1 This line appears only if the DGFC module is present. Refer to note. 2. Select Detector type. This line indicates the type of detector mounted and the slot (A, B or C) of the relevant control board. Press ENTER to display the submenu. 3. To change detector type, scroll to the desired detector and press ENTER to confirm the selection. An asterisk appears beside the detector selected. 4. When the DGFC Module is present scroll to Makeup gas and press ENTER. The gases applicable to the detector in use are displayed in the submenu. An asterisk appears beside the currently active make-up gas is also displayed in parentheses in the title bar. 5. To change the make-up gas, scroll to the desired gas and press ENTER to confirm the selection. An asterisk appears beside the make-up gas selected. 378 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Set NPD Parameters Set NPD Parameters To set NPD parameters, it is necessary to open the NPD menu and the NPD Signal menu. NOTE • The DETECTOR (NPD) menu contains the detector control parameters. To set parameters, refer to the Chapter 16 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating Manual. • The DETECTOR SIGNAL menu contains the parameters that control the detector signal. To set parameters, refer to the Chapter 15 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating Manual. To verify the correct installation of the detector on your GC, perform the NPD Checkout as described in Section IV of the TRACE GC 2000 Standard Operating Procedures manual PN 31709200. Parameters Setting 1. To open NPD menu, press LEFT DETECTOR or RIGHT DETECTOR depending on the location of the detector. The following menu is displayed: LEFT DETECTOR (NPD)1 Source curr.A Base temp 2.740 300 300 Signal pA (10.4) Polarizer V 3.5 H2 delay time H2 2 Air 2.3 2.3 2 Mkup N2 Off 60 60 2 15 15< 1. These settings could also be for a right detector. 2. If you have a non-DGFC module, the actual value are not displayed, and you can only turn the flows on and off. Installation Guide 379 Upgrade Kit Set NPD Parameters 2. To open NPD Signal menu, press LEFT SIGNAL or RIGHT SIGNAL according to the location of the detector. The following menu is displayed: LEFT SIGNAL (NPD)1 Output Offset Auto zero? Range 10^(0..3) Analog filter (1000) 100 Y/N 0< Off 1. These settings could also be for a right signal 380 Installation Guide Flame Photometric Detector This appendix contains the manual FPD Installation Instructions (PN M 317 09 331) which provides the instructions to install and configure the Flame Photometric Detector on your TRACE GC 2000. Guide at a Glance… About This Guide ...............................................................................................382 Introduction ........................................................................................................383 Getting Started....................................................................................................385 Configuration......................................................................................................395 Set FPD Parameters............................................................................................396 Operating Procedures Installing FPD Upgrade Kit................................................................................386 Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas ............................................................395 Parameters Setting ..............................................................................................396 Installation Guide 381 Upgrade Kit About This Guide About This Guide It provides the instructions to install and configure the Flame Photometric Detector on your TRACE GC™ 2000. NOTE 382 For Conventions, Symbols and Costumer Communications, please refer to the TRACE GC 2000 Operating Manual. Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Introduction Introduction The upgrade kit contains all the material required to install the Flame Photometric Detector on your TRACE GC 2000: CAUTION • FPD Assembly for TRACE • FPD Control Card • FPD Standard Outfit The detector gas control module is not part of this kit. Who Performs the Installation of the Kit If, for any reason, the kit is not installed by ThermoQuest technical personnel, you must carefully adhere to the following instructions. Detector Gases Requirements The FPD requires air and hydrogen as fuel gases. FPD applications typically do not require the use of the make-up gas. According to the required gases, the DGFC or the Non-DGFC module may be: • Type AB for the control of air and hydrogen. • Type AD for the control of air and hydrogen. • Type AC for the control of air, hydrogen and make-up gas. 1. Verify that the detector gas control module installed on your GC is compatible with the FPD gas requirements. Installation Guide 383 Upgrade Kit Introduction 2. The connections of the detector gases must be performed as described in the following table: Installed Module Connect Hydrogen to Connect Air to Connect Make-up Gas to AB Gas 2 Gas 1 — AC Gas 2 Gas 1 Gas 3 AD Gas 3 Gas 1 — For further details, refer to Chapters 15 and Chapter 16 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating Manual. 384 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Getting Started Getting Started This paragraph contains the instruction to install the FPD on your GC. To properly install the FPD upgrade kit, the following sequential operations must be performed: • Remove the top and right side panels of the GC. • Install the detector control card into the GC electronic compartment (control unit). • Mount the FPD on the GC. • Remount GC panels. • Restart the GC. • Configure the detector. Before starting, the following preliminary operations must be carried out: 1. Cool the oven and detector base body to room temperature. 2. Make sure that the detector base body is leak free. 3. Close the gas supplies. 4. Turn off the main power on the rear panel of the GC. 5. Disconnect the main power cable from the rear of the GC. Installation Guide 385 Upgrade Kit Getting Started Installing FPD Upgrade Kit Follow this instruction to properly install the FPD Upgrade Kit. 1 3 2 4 1. Injector and detector cassette 2. Column oven door 3. Upper cover 4. Right hand-side panel Figure C-1. TRACE GC 2000 Removing the GC Panels This operation allows to access the GC upper parts and the electronic compartment. Materials needed: • 2-mm Allen wrench • 3-mm Allen wrench Remove the GC Top Cover 1. Lift the detector cover off the GC top cover. 386 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Getting Started 2. Open the oven door and unscrew the two top cover fastening screws. 3. Push the cover back about 1 cm and lift it up and off the GC. Figure C-2. TRACE GC 2000 Top Cover Remove the GC Right Side Panel 1. Loosen and remove the screw that secures the right side panel to the right upper rear corner of the GC by using the 3-mm Allen wrench. Refer to Figure C-3. 2. Slide the side panel towards the back of the GC and then tilt the top of the side panel outwards. Continue to slide the panel towards the rear of the GC. 3. Hold the side panel parallel to the GC, and pull the lower edge of the panel away from the GC. Installation Guide 387 Upgrade Kit Getting Started 1 1. Right Panel Securing Screw Figure C-3. TRACE GC 2000 Rear Panel Installing the FPD Control Card The FPD control card must be installed into the proper expansion slot marked A, B or C located on the left part of the GC mother board in the electronic compartment. Refer to Figures C-4 and C-5. NOTE If all expansion slots are occupied, remove one of the three detector control cards currently installed and replace it with the FPD control card. Materials needed: • 388 3-mm Allen wrench Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Getting Started C 1 B 3 2 A 1. Slot cover plate 2. Cover plates fixing screw 3. Free slot A B C. Extension slot position Figure C-4. Extension Slots Top View 1. Loosen the fixing screw of the slot cover plate that corresponds to the selected A, B or C expansion slot on the mother board. Installation Guide 389 Upgrade Kit Getting Started 2 3 1 1. Detector control card expansion 2. Additional heat control jumpers Slots 3. Mother board Figure C-5. Detector Control Card Expansion Slots 2. Verify that the jumper (marked J6, J7, or J8), adjacent to the defined detector control card connector on the mother board, is positioned between the pins 1 and 2. Refer to the following table. Expansion slot 390 Corresponding Jumper A J8 B J7 C J6 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Getting Started Jumper Positioning Pins 1-2 = additional heat control enabled Pins 2-3 = additional heat control not enabled WARNING! The jumper marked “Jx” must be positioned between the pins 1 and 2. 3. Guide through the slot mentioned at point 1 the signal and ignition cables coming from the top of the card. 4. Plug the detector control card into the selected expansion slot on the mother board. 5. Fix the control card by using the same screw previously removed at point 1. 6. Connect the ignition/hetaing cable to the connector located on the top of the detector control card. Mounting the FPD on the GC This operation allows the correct installation of the FPD on your TRACE GC 2000. Materials needed: Installation Guide • Jet for FPD • 5-mm wrench • FPD fixing tool. 391 Upgrade Kit Getting Started 1. Place the jet into the detector base body housing and tighten it. Ensure the jet is perfectly vertically aligned to avoid damage. 2 1. Jet 2 .Detector Base Body Figure C-6. Jet for FPD 2. Place the FPD on the detector base body, paying attention that the alluminium ring has been inserted in the correct position. 3. Tighten the fixing nut by using the FPD fixing tool. 392 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Getting Started 1 5 3 4 2 1. FPD 2. Detector Base Body 3. Aluminium ring 4. Jet 5. FPD Fixing Tool Figure C-7. Installation of the FPD 4. Carefully, connect the signal, excitation voltage and ignition/heating cables coming from the detector control card, to the detector cell. 1 2 3 1. Signal Cable 2. Excitation Voltage Cable 3. Ignition/heating Cable Figure C-8. Cables Connection Installation Guide 393 Upgrade Kit Getting Started Reinstall the GC Panels This procedure reinstalls the GC panels. Materials needed: • 3-mm Allen wrench 1. Reconnect the chassis ground wire to the GC rear oven terminal. 2. Reinstall all the GC panels proceeding in the reverse order of their removal (refer to Removing the GC Panels on page 386) being sure to reconnect the rear panel cooling fan. Restarting the GC 1. Verify that the connections of the detector gases has been correctly performed. 2. Open the gas supplies. 3. Reconnect the main power. 4. Turn on main power. 394 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Configuration Configuration This paragraph contains the instructions to configure your GC to operate with FPD. You configure the detector and make-up gas in the CONFIGURE menu. Refer to Chapter 15 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating manual. Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas 1. Press CONFIG then scroll to Left detector or Right detector depending on the location of the detector to configure. Press ENTER to open the detector gas menu. LEFT DETECTOR Detector type < 1 Makeup gas 1. This line appears only if the DGFC module is present. Refer to note. 2. Select Detector type. This line indicates the type of detector mounted and the slot (A, B or C) of the relevant control board. Press ENTER to display the submenu. 3. To change detector type, scroll to the desired detector and press ENTER to confirm the selection. An asterisk appears beside the detector selected. 4. When the DGFC Module is present scroll to Makeup gas and press ENTER. The gases applicable to the detector in use are displayed in the submenu. An asterisk appears beside the currently active make-up gas is also displayed in parentheses in the title bar. 5. To change the make-up gas, scroll to the desired gas and press ENTER to confirm the selection. An asterisk appears beside the make-up gas selected. Installation Guide 395 Upgrade Kit Set FPD Parameters Set FPD Parameters To set FPD parameters, it is necessary to open the FPD menu and the FPD Signal menu. NOTE • The DETECTOR (FPD) menu contains the detector control parameters. To set parameters, refer to the Chapter 16 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating Manual. • The DETECTOR SIGNAL menu contains the parameters that control the detector signal. To set parameters, refer to the Chapter 15 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating Manual. To verify the correct installation of the detector on your GC, perform the FPD Checkout as described in Section V of the TRACE GC 2000 Standard Operating Procedures manual PN 31709200. Parameters Setting 1. To open FPD menu, press LEFT DETECTOR or RIGHT DETECTOR depending on the location of the detector. The following menu is displayed: LEFT DETECTOR (FPD)1 Flame Off Base temp 300 300 FPD temp 150 150 Signal pA (1.4) High voltage mode? H2 2 Air 90 90 2 Mkup N2 N 115 115 2 00 00 1. These settings could also be for a right detector. 2. If you have a non-DGFC module, the actual value are not displayed, and you can only turn the flows on and off. 396 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Set FPD Parameters 2. To open FPD Signal menu, press LEFT SIGNAL or RIGHT SIGNAL according to the location of the detector. The following menu is displayed: LEFT SIGNAL (FPD)1 Output Offset Auto zero? Range 10^(0..2) Analog filter (1000) 100 Y/N 0< Off 1. These settings could also be for a right signal Installation Guide 397 Upgrade Kit Set FPD Parameters 398 Installation Guide Photoionization Detector This appendix contains the manual PID Installation Instructions (PN M 317 09 333) the instructions to install and configure the Photoionization Detector on your TRACE GC 2000. Guide at a Glance… About This Guide ...............................................................................................400 Introduction ........................................................................................................401 Getting Started....................................................................................................403 Configuration......................................................................................................416 Set PID Parameters.............................................................................................417 Operating Procedures Installing PID Upgrade Kit.................................................................................404 Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas ............................................................416 Parameters Setting ..............................................................................................417 Installation Guide 399 Upgrade Kit About This Guide About This Guide It provides the instructions to install and configure the Photoionization Detector on your TRACE GC™ 2000. NOTE 400 For Conventions, Symbols and Costumer Communications, please refer to the TRACE GC 2000 Operating Manual. Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Introduction Introduction The upgrade kit contains all the material required to install the Photoionization Detector on your TRACE GC 2000: CAUTION • PID Assembly for TRACE • PID Control Card • PID Standard Outfit The detector gas control module and the UV lamp for PID are not parts of this kit. Who Performs the Installation of the Kit If, for any reason, the kit is not installed by ThermoQuest technical personnel, you must carefully adhere to the following instructions. Detector Gases Requirements The PID requires helium or nitrogen as make-up and sheath gas. According to the required gases, the DGFC or the Non-DGFC module may be: • Type AB, AC or AD for the control of make-up and sheath gas. 1. Verify that the detector gas control module installed on your GC is compatible with the PID gas requirements. 2. The connections of the detector gases must be performed as described in the following table: Installation Guide Installed Module Connect Make-up Gas to Connect Sheath Gas to AB Gas 2 Gas 1 AC Gas 3 Gas 1 AD Gas 3 Gas 1 401 Upgrade Kit Introduction For further details, refer to Chapters 15 and Chapter 16 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating Manual. 402 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Getting Started Getting Started This paragraph contains the instruction to install the PID on your GC. To properly install the PID upgrade kit, the following sequential operations must be performed: • Remove the top and right side panels of the GC. • Install the detector control card into the GC electronic compartment (control unit). • Mount the PID on the GC. • Connect the capillary column and the exit line • Remount GC panels. • Restart the GC. • Configure the detector. Before starting, the following preliminary operations must be carried out: 1. Cool the oven and detector base body to room temperature. 2. Make sure that the detector base body is leak free. 3. Close the gas supplies. 4. Turn off the main power on the rear panel of the GC. 5. Disconnect the main power cable from the rear of the GC. Installation Guide 403 Upgrade Kit Getting Started Installing PID Upgrade Kit Follow this instruction to properly install the PID Upgrade Kit. 1 3 2 4 1. Injector and detector cassette 2. Column oven door 3. Upper cover 4. Right hand-side panel Figure D-1. TRACE GC 2000 Removing the GC Panels This operation allows to access the GC upper parts and the electronic compartment. Materials needed: • 2-mm Allen wrench • 3-mm Allen wrench Remove the GC Top Cover 1. Lift the detector cover off the GC top cover. 2. Open the oven door and unscrew the two top cover fastening screws. 404 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Getting Started 3. Push the cover back about 1 cm and lift it up and off the GC. Figure D-2. TRACE GC 2000 Top Cover Remove the GC Right Side Panel 1. Loosen and remove the screw 1 that secures the right side panel to the right upper rear corner of the GC by using the 3-mm Allen wrench. Refer to Figure D-3. 2. Slide the side panel towards the back of the GC and then tilt the top of the side panel outwards. Continue to slide the panel towards the rear of the GC. 3. Hold the side panel parallel to the GC, and pull the lower edge of the panel away from the GC. Installation Guide 405 Upgrade Kit Getting Started 1 1. Right Panel Securing Screw Figure D-3. TRACE GC 2000 Rear Panel Installing the PID Control Card The PID control card must be installed into the proper expansion slot marked A, B or C located on the left part of the GC mother board in the electronic compartment. NOTE 406 In the case all the expansion slots are occupied, it is necessary to remove one of the three detector control card currently installed and replace it with the PID control card. Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Getting Started Materials needed: • 3-mm Allen wrench C 1 B 3 2 A 1. Slot cover plate 2. Cover plates fixing screw 3. Free slot A B C. Extension slot position Figure D-4. Extension Slots Top View 1. Loosen the fixing screw of the slot cover plate that corresponds to the selected A, B or C expansion slot on the mother board. Installation Guide 407 Upgrade Kit Getting Started 1 3 2 1. Detector control card expansion 2. Additional heat control jumpers Slots 3. Mother board Figure D-5. Detector Control Card Expansion Slots 2. Verify that the jumper (marked J6, J7, or J8) adjacent to the defined detector control card connector on the mother board, is positioned between the pins 2 and 3. Refer to the following table. Expansion slot 408 Corresponding Jumper A J8 B J7 C J6 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Getting Started Jumper Positioning Pins 1-2 = additional heat control enabled Pins 2-3 = additional heat control not enabled WARNING! The jumper (marked J6, J7, J8) must be positioned between the pins 2 and 3. 3. Plug the detector control card into the selected expansion slot on the mother board. 4. Fix the control card by using the same screw previously removed at point 1. Mounting the PID on the GC This operation allows the correct installation of the PID on your TRACE GC 2000. Materials needed: • UV Lamp • Fixing Tool The PID consists of four main sub units. Refer to Figures D-6 and D-7 to identify the parts constituiting the PID. Installation Guide • Cell Block It includes the detector cell assembly, the stainless steel bell and the insulation jacket. • Lamp Housing It includes the detector cell assembly, the stainless steel bell and the insulation jacket. • Lamp Holder It contains the UV lamp with the electrical cable for lamp ignition and operation. 409 Upgrade Kit Getting Started • Heat Sink It dissipates the heat of the detector base body. 1 2 3 4 1. Lamp Holder 2. Heat Sink 3. Lamp Housing 4. Cell Block (not visible) Figure D-6. PID General View 410 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Getting Started 1. Detector Cell Assembly 2. Insulation Jacket 3. Stainless Steel Bell 4. Seal 5. Seal 6. Detector Base Body 7. Viton™ O-ring for Lamp Holder 8. Lamp Housing 9. Heat Sink 10. UV Lamp 11. Viton™ O-ring for UV Lamp 12. Lamp Holder 13. Two-way Capillary Adapter 14. Silver Seal 15. Fixing Tool Figure D-7. Explose of the PID Components Installation Guide 411 Upgrade Kit Getting Started To install the PID on the GC detector base body, follow the instruction below: Refer to Figure D-7 to identify the parts. 1. Place the insulation jacket (2) on the stainless steel bell (3). 2. Put the detector cell assembly (1) into the stainless steel bell (3) passing the lower threaded section of the cell assembly through the bottom hole of the bell. 3. Install the seal (5) on the detector base body surface (6) and the seal (4) on the threaded section of the cell that goes out from the hole of the bell. 4. Screw the cell block (detector cell assembly + stainless steel bell + insulation jacket) on the detector base body, without overtighten, by using the fixing tool (15) provided. 5. Make sure that the Viton™ O-ring (8) is correctly positioned on the lower part of the lamp housing (7). 6. Pull the electrical cables of the lamp housing (7) through the heat sink (9) pay attention that the external knurled area of the heat sink is oriented upwards and the internal threaded section must be turned towards the detector base body. 7. Put the lamp housing on the cell block paying attention to the proper insertion of the two orientation pins into the corresponding slots of the cell block. 8. Mount the heat sink (9) on the lamp housing (7), then screw manually the heat sink on the stainless steel bell. 9. Install the UV lamp (10), with the Viton ™ O-ring (11) on its flange, into the lamp holder (12). WARNING! Never install the UV lamp without the o-ring. 10. Install the lamp assembly (UV lamp + lamp holder) into the lamp housing and ensure screwing the two knurled screws. Refer to Chapter 12 of the TRACE GC 2000 Maintenance and Troubleshooting Manual. 412 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Getting Started 11. Mount the two-way capillary adapter (13) to the lower part of the detector base body, inside the GC column oven, interposing the seal (14). The result of the operation is shown in Figure D-8. 1. PID Assembly 2. Detector Base Body 3. Two-way Capillary Adapter 4. GC Column Oven Figure D-8. PID Installation Result Installation Guide 413 Upgrade Kit Getting Started Connecting Capillary Column and Exit Line 1. Connect capillary column and exit line to the PID as described in Chapter 14 (on page 237) of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating Manual. The result of the operation is shown in Figure D-9. 1. Detector Base Body 2. Two-way Capillary Adapter 3. Inlet Line 4. Exit Line 5. Capillary Column 6. Exit Line Fused Silica Tubing Figure D-9. Capillary Column and Exit Line Connections Reinstall the GC Panels This operation allows to reinstall the GC panels Materials needed: • 3-mm Allen wrench 1. Reconnect the chassis ground wire to the GC rear oven terminal. 414 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Getting Started 2. Reinstall all the GC panels proceeding in the reverse order of their removal (refer to Removing the GC Panels on page 404) being sure to reconnect the rear panel cooling fan. Restarting the GC 1. Verify that the connections of the detector gases has been correctly performed. 2. Open the gas supplies. 3. Reconnect the main power. 4. Turn on main power. Installation Guide 415 Upgrade Kit Configuration Configuration This paragraph contains the instructions to configure your GC to operate with PID. You configure the detector and make-up gas in the CONFIGURE menu. Refer to Chapter 15 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating manual. Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas 1. Press CONFIG then scroll to Left detector or Right detector depending on the location of the detector to configure. Press ENTER to open the detector gas menu. LEFT DETECTOR Detector type < 1 Makeup gas 1. This line appears only if the DGFC module is present. Refer to note. 2. Select Detector type. This line indicates the type of detector mounted and the slot (A, B or C) of the relevant control board. Press ENTER to display the submenu. 3. To change detector type, scroll to the desired detector and press ENTER to confirm the selection. An asterisk appears beside the detector selected. 4. When the DGFC Module is present scroll to Makeup gas and press ENTER. The gases applicable to the detector in use are displayed in the submenu. An asterisk appears beside the currently active make-up gas is also displayed in parentheses in the title bar. 5. To change the make-up gas, scroll to the desired gas and press ENTER to confirm the selection. An asterisk appears beside the make-up gas selected. 416 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Set PID Parameters Set PID Parameters To set PID parameters, it is necessary to open the PID menu and the PID Signal menu. NOTE • The DETECTOR (PID) menu contains the detector control parameters. To set parameters, refer to the Chapter 16 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating Manual. • The DETECTOR SIGNAL menu contains the parameters that control the detector signal. To set parameters, refer to the Chapter 15 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating Manual. To verify the correct installation of the detector on your GC, perform the PID Checkout as described in Section VI of the TRACE GC 2000 Standard Operating Procedures manual PN 31709200. Parameters Setting 1. To open PID menu, press LEFT DETECTOR or RIGHT DETECTOR depending on the location of the detector. The following menu is displayed: LEFT DETECTOR (PID)1 Lamp Off Base temp 300 300 High current Signal pA Mkup N2 (15.4) 2 Sheath Gas N < 7.0 7.0 2 40 40 1. These settings could also be for a right detector. 2. If you have a non-DGFC module, the actual value are not displayed, and you can only turn the flows on and off. Installation Guide 417 Upgrade Kit Set PID Parameters 2. To open PID Signal menu, press LEFT SIGNAL or RIGHT SIGNAL according to the location of the detector. The following menu is displayed: LEFT SIGNAL (PID)1 Output Offset Autozero? Range 10^(0..3) Analog filter (1000) 100 Y/N 0< Off 1. These settings could also be for a right signal 418 Installation Guide Electron Capture Detector This appendix contains the manual ECD Installation Instructions (PN M 317 09 335) which provides the instructions to install and configure the Electron Capture Detector on your TRACE GC 2000. Guide at a Glance… About This Guide ...............................................................................................420 Introduction ........................................................................................................421 Getting Started....................................................................................................423 Configuration......................................................................................................432 Set ECD Parameters ...........................................................................................433 Operating Procedures Installing ECD Upgrade Kit ...............................................................................424 Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas ............................................................432 Parameters Setting ..............................................................................................433 Installation Guide 419 Upgrade Kit About This Guide About This Guide It provides the instructions to install and configure the Electron Capture Detector on your TRACE GC™ 2000. WARNING! The Electron Capture Detector (ECD) contains a 63Ni beta-emitting eadioactive source of 370 MBq (10 mCi). NOTE 420 For Conventions, Symbols, Safety Information, Wipe Test and Costumer Communications, please refer to the TRACE GC 2000 Operating Manual. Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Introduction Introduction The upgrade kit contains all the material required to install the Electron Capture Detector on your TRACE GC 2000: CAUTION • ECD Assembly for TRACE • ECD Control Card • ECD Standard Outfit • Wipe Test The detector gas control module is not part of this kit. Who Performs the Installation of the Kit If, for any reason, the kit is not installed by ThermoQuest technical personnel, you must carefully adhere to the following instructions. Detector Gases Requirements The ECD commonly uses nitrogen or argon/methane as make-up gas. According to the required gases, the DGFC or the Non-DGFC module may be: • Type AA, AB, AC or AD for the control of make-up gas. 1. Verify that the detector gas control module installed on your GC is compatible with the ECD gas requirements. 2. The connections of the detector gases must be performed as described in the following table: Installation Guide Installed Module Connect Hydrogen to Connect Air to Connect Make-up Gas to AA — — Gas 3 AB — — Gas 2 421 Upgrade Kit Introduction Installed Module Connect Hydrogen to Connect Air to Connect Make-up Gas to AC — — Gas 3 AD — — Gas 3 For further details, refer to Chapters 15 and Chapter 16 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating Manual. 422 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Getting Started Getting Started This paragraph contains the instruction to install the ECD on your GC. To properly install the ECD upgrade kit, the following sequential operations must be performed: • Remove the top and right side panels of the GC. • Install the detector control card into the GC electronic compartment (control unit). • Mount the ECD on the GC. • Remount GC panels. • Restart the GC. • Configure the detector. Before starting, the following preliminary operations must be carried out: 1. Cool the oven and detector base body to room temperature. 2. Make sure that the detector base body is leak free. 3. Close the gas supplies. 4. Turn off the main power on the rear panel of the GC. 5. Disconnect the main power cable from the rear of the GC. Installation Guide 423 Upgrade Kit Getting Started Installing ECD Upgrade Kit Follow this instruction to properly install the ECD Upgrade Kit. 1 3 2 4 1. Injector and detector cassette 2. Column oven door 3. Upper cover 4. Right hand-side panel Figure E-1. TRACE GC 2000 Removing the GC Panels This operation allows to access the GC upper parts and the electronic compartment. Materials needed: • 2-mm Allen wrench • 3-mm Allen wrench Remove the GC Top Cover 1. Lift the detector cover off the GC top cover. 424 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Getting Started 2. Open the oven door and unscrew the two top cover fastening screws. 3. Push the cover back about 1 cm and lift it up and off the GC. Figure E-2. TRACE GC 2000 Top Cover Remove the GC Right Side Panel 1. Loosen and remove the screw that secures the right side panel to the right upper rear corner of the GC by using the 3-mm Allen wrench. Refer to Figure E-3. 2. Slide the side panel towards the back of the GC and then tilt the top of the side panel outwards. Continue to slide the panel towards the rear of the GC. 3. Hold the side panel parallel to the GC, and pull the lower edge of the panel away from the GC. Installation Guide 425 Upgrade Kit Getting Started 1 1. Right Panel Securing Screw Figure E-3. TRACE GC 2000 Rear Panel Installing the ECD Control Card The ECD control card must be installed into the proper expansion slot marked A, B or C located on the left part of the GC mother board in the electronic compartment. Refer to Figures E-4 and E-5. NOTE 426 In the case all the expansion slots are occupied, it is necessary to remove one of the three detector control card currently installed and replace it with the ECD control card. Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Getting Started Materials needed: • 3-mm Allen wrench C 1 B 3 2 A 1. Slot cover plate 2. Cover plates fixing screw 3. Free slot A B C. Extension slot position Figure E-4. Extension Slots Top View 1. Loosen the fixing screw of the slot cover plate that corresponds to the selected A, B or C expansion slot on the mother board. Installation Guide 427 Upgrade Kit Getting Started 3 2 1. Detector control card expansion 2. Additional heat control jumpers Slots 3. Mother board Figure E-5. Detector Control Card Expansion Slots 2. Verify that the jumper (marked J6, J7, or J8) adjacent to the defined detector control card connector on the mother board, is positioned between the pins 1 and 2. Refer to the following table. Expansion slot 428 Corresponding Jumper A J8 B J7 C J6 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Getting Started Jumper Positioning Pins 1-2 = additional heat control enabled Pins 2-3 = additional heat control not enabled WARNING! The jumper (marked J6, J7, J8) must be positioned between the pins 1 and 2. 3. Guide through the slot mentioned at point 1 the signal and excitation cables coming from the top of the card. 4. Plug the detector control card into the selected expansion slot on the mother board. 5. Fix the control card by using the same screw previously removed at point 1. 6. Connect the temperature sensor/heater cable to the connector located on the top of the detector control card. Mounting the ECD on the GC This operation allows the correct installation of the ECD on your TRACE GC 2000. Refer to Figure E-6. Materials needed: • Installation Guide ECD Fixing Tool 429 Upgrade Kit Getting Started 6 4 1 3 2 1. ECD 2. Detector Base Body 3. Lower Seal 4. Signal connector 5. Excitation Connector 6. Temperature sensor/heater Connector 7. ECD Fixing Tool Figure E-6. Installation of the ECD 1. Install the ECD on the detector base body interposing the lower seal. Secure the detector by using the ECD fixing tool 2. Carefully, connect the signal, excitation and temperature sensor/heater extension cables coming from the detector control card, to the detector cell. Reinstall the GC Panels This operation allows to reinstall the GC panels 430 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Getting Started Materials needed: • 3-mm Allen wrench 1. Reconnect the chassis ground wire to the GC rear oven terminal. 2. Reinstall all the GC panels proceeding in the reverse order of their removal (refer to Removing the GC Panels on page 424) being sure to reconnect the rear panel cooling fan. Restarting the GC 1. Verify that the connections of the detector gases has been correctly performed. 2. Open the gas supplies. 3. Reconnect the main power. 4. Turn on main power. Installation Guide 431 Upgrade Kit Configuration Configuration This paragraph contains the instructions to configure your GC to operate with ECD. You configure the detector and make-up gas in the CONFIGURE menu. Refer to Chapter 15 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating manual. Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas 1. Press CONFIG then scroll to Left detector or Right detector depending on the location of the detector to configure. Press ENTER to open the detector gas menu. LEFT DETECTOR Detector type < 1 Makeup gas 1. This line appears only if the DGFC module is present. Refer to note. 2. Select Detector type. This line indicates the type of detector mounted and the slot (A, B or C) of the relevant control board. Press ENTER to display the submenu. 3. To change detector type, scroll to the desired detector and press ENTER to confirm the selection. An asterisk appears beside the detector selected. 4. When the DGFC Module is present scroll to Makeup gas and press ENTER. The gases applicable to the detector in use are displayed in the submenu. An asterisk appears beside the currently active make-up gas is also displayed in parentheses in the title bar. 5. To change the make-up gas, scroll to the desired gas and press ENTER to confirm the selection. An asterisk appears beside the make-up gas selected. 432 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Set ECD Parameters Set ECD Parameters To set ECD parameters, it is necessary to open the ECD menu and the ECD Signal menu. NOTE • The DETECTOR (ECD) menu contains the detector control parameters. To set parameters, refer to the Chapter 16 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating Manual. • The DETECTOR SIGNAL menu contains the parameters that control the detector signal. To set parameters, refer to the Chapter 15 of the TRACE GC 2000 Operating Manual. To verify the correct installation of the detector on your GC, perform the ECD Checkout as described in Section III of the TRACE GC 2000 Standard Operating Procedures manual PN 31709200. Parameters Setting 1. To open ECD menu, press LEFT DETECTOR or RIGHT DETECTOR depending on the location of the detector. The following menu is displayed: LEFT DETECTOR (ECD)1 Base temp 250 250 ECD Temp 300 300 Ref current nA Freq kHz 1.0 (2.20) Pulse amp V 50 Pulse width us 1.0 Mkup (N2) 2 30 30< 1. These settings could also be for a right detector. 2. If you have a non-DGFC module, the actual value are not displayed, and you can only turn the flows on and off. Installation Guide 433 Upgrade Kit Set ECD Parameters 2. To open ECD Signal menu, press LEFT SIGNAL or RIGHT SIGNAL according to the location of the detector. The following menu is displayed: LEFT SIGNAL (ECD)1 Output Offset Auto zero? (1000) 100 Y/N < 1. These settings could also be for a right signal 434 Installation Guide Transformer Installation This appendix contains the manual Transformer Installation which provides the instructions to install and configure a transformer on your TRACE ™ GC 2000. Guide at a Glance… Transformer Overview .......................................................................................436 Getting Started....................................................................................................438 Configuration......................................................................................................446 Operating Procedures Installing the Transformer ..................................................................................438 Hardware Configuration.....................................................................................446 Installation Guide 435 Upgrade Kit Transformer Overview Transformer Overview All the GC’s are equipped with a proper toroidal transformer already factory installed according to the type of the detector in use. Refer to TableF-1. Table H-1. Transformer Types Transformer Description Standard It supports the detectors FID, ECD, PID, FPD, TCD and the PTV Injector. For NPD It supports the NPD only. It is already factory installed when the GC is equipped with a NPD. - In the case the GC, equipped with a detector different than NPD, is upgraded with a NPD, the transformer must be installed on the GC Power Control Module. - When the GC is upgraded with a second NPD, this transformer supports both. NOTE 436 An obsoleted FID transformer is present in TRACE™ GC 2000 with FID having serial number below than 983808 (Milan) or TR101089 (Austin). This transformer must be replaced with the standard one when the GC is upgraded with a detector different than FID. In the case the GC is upgraded with a second FID, the transformer already present may be used to supply a second FID. Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Transformer Overview Figures F-1 shows the positions on the GC Power Control Module where the detector trasformer must be installed. 1 1. NPD Transformer 2. Standard Transformer Figure F-1. Standard and NPD Transformers To install or replace the required transformer into the GC, refer to the Operating Sequence Installing the Transformer on page 438. Installation Guide 437 Upgrade Kit Getting Started Getting Started This paragraph contains the instruction to install or replace the transformer on your GC. WARNING! This operation must be carried out by authorized ThermoQuest technical personnel. To properly install or replace the transformer, the following sequential operations must be performed: • Remove the top, right side and rear panels of the GC. • Remove the GC Power Control Module • Mount the transformer. • Remount GC panels. • Restart the GC. • Configure the transformer. Before starting, the following preliminary operations must be carried out: 1. Cool the oven and detector base body to room temperature. 2. Close the gas supplies. 3. Turn off the main power on the rear panel of the GC. Disconnect the main power cable from the rear of the GC. Installing the Transformer This operation allows to install or replace the toroidal transformer. WARNING! This operation must be carried out by authorized ThermoQuest technical personnel. Removing the GC Panels This operation allows to access the GC electronic compartment. 438 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Getting Started Materials needed: • 2-mm Allen wrench • 3-mm Allen wrench 1 1. Right hand-side panel Figure F-2. TRACE GC 2000 View Remove the GC Right Side Panel 1. Loosen and remove the screw 1 that secures the right side panel to the right upper rear corner of the GC by using the 3-mm Allen wrench. 2. Slide the side panel towards the back of the GC and then tilt the top of the side panel outwards. Continue to slide the panel towards the rear of the GC. Installation Guide 439 Upgrade Kit Getting Started 3. Hold the side panel parallel to the GC, and pull the lower edge of the panel away from the GC. 1 2 3 1. Right Panel Securing Screw 2. Reap Panel Fixing Screws 3. GC Right Side Panel Figure F-3. TRACE GC 2000 Rear Panel Remove the GC Rear Panel 1. Locate the six Allen screws that secure the rear panel to the GC. Remove these screws using the 2-mm Allen wrench. See Figure F-F-3. 2. Carefully remove the rear panel of the GC. Be aware that the cooling fan is attached to the rear panel. Pay attention to the positioning of the cooling fan plug, so it can be reconnected in the same way it was removed. Remove the Power Control Module Materials needed: • 440 Phillips screwdriver Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Getting Started Six screws fix the Power Control Module. Two large Phillips screws are located in the rear of the right hand-side of the GC, while the remaining four screws are located just behind the front panel of the GC. 1. Remove the six screws. Refer to Figure H-F-4. 1 1 1 1. Large Phillips Screws Figure F-4. TRACE GC 2000 Right Side View 2. Slide the Power Control Module very slowly and gently outward towards the rear of the GC. CAUTION Installation Guide This operation requires particular attention because several cables are connected to the Power Control Module. It must be removed gradually paying attention to disconnect step by step all the cables available until the power control module is completely free. Be very careful not to damage any wire during this operation. 441 Upgrade Kit Getting Started 1 1. Power Control Module Figure F-5. TRACE GC 2000 Rear View 3. As the Power Control Module is being removed, disconnection of the parts must be carried out in the following order: • J1, 16-pin white connector. • J8, 2-pin connector. • J11, 16-pin white connector located in the upper rear quadrant of the chassis. • J13, ribbon cable. • Oven heater wire connected to the oven heater triac. • TB1 and TB2, orange terminal strips for the heater wire connections. • J17, oven blower motor. • J8, second oven heater wire. • Chassis ground wire from the GC rear oven terminal. 4. Place the Power Control Module on a free working table. 442 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Getting Started Install the Transformer for Detector Figure F-6 shows the positions on the GC Power Control Module where the detector trasformer must be installed. 1 2 1. Transformer for FID, ECD, PID, 2. Transformer for NPD FPD , TCD and PTV Injector Figure F-6. Transformer Installation Install the transformer proceeding as follows. Refer to Figure F-7. 1. Screw the spacer on the threaded pin. 2. Insert the first protection disk on the spacer. 3. Place the transformer over the protection disk. 4. Place the second protection disk over the transformer. 5. Place the metal plate over the assembly. 6. Insert the fixing screw in the spacer passing through the metal plate. Installation Guide 443 Upgrade Kit Getting Started 7. Screw until the transformer assembly is blocked. 1 4 5 2 3 1. Transformer 2. Protection disks 3. Spacer 4. Metal Plate 5. Fixing Screw Figure F-7. Transformer Assembly Identification Parts The transformer has three cables and three female connectors marked “Px”1. Connect the female connectors to the corresponding male connectors on the power control module PCB marked “Jx”1. 1. “x” is equal to a number defined by the table below. Transformer Standard For NPD 444 Cable Connector Connect To... P14 J14 P5 J5 P6 J6 P15 J15 P4 J4 P35/36 J35/36 P36/37 J36/37 Installation Guide Upgrade Kit Getting Started Reinstall the Power Control Module CAUTION This operation requires particular attention because several cables must be reconnected to the Power Control Module. It must be gradually reinserted paying attention to reconnect step by step all the cables until the power control module is completely reinstalled into the GC. 1. Reconnect the previous disconnected connections in the reverse order of their removal. 2. Secure the six Phillips screws that fix the Power Control Module in place. 3. Reconnect the chassis ground wire to the GC rear oven terminal. Reinstall the GC Panels This operation allows to reinstall the GC panels Materials needed: • 3-mm Allen wrench 1. Reconnect the chassis ground wire to the GC rear oven terminal. 2. Reinstall all the GC panels proceeding in the reverse order of their removal (refer to Removing the GC Panels on page 438) being sure to reconnect the rear panel cooling fan. Restarting the GC 1. Verify that the connections of the detector gases has been correctly performed. 2. Open the gas supplies. 3. Reconnect the main power. 4. Turn on main power. Installation Guide 445 Upgrade Kit Configuration Configuration This paragraph contains the instructions to configure your GC to operate with the new transformer. Hardware Configuration This operation must be performed to verify if the GC has recognized the presence of the transformer previously installed. 1. Press INFO/DIAG twice to open Diagnostics menu. 2. Scroll to Hardware Config and press ENTER. 3. Address the hardware configuration menu. Scroll down until the type of transformer installed in the system is displayed. 4. If not, verify the transformer connections. 446 Installation Guide Reagent Safety Information Material Safety Data Sheets for the chemicals mentioned in the procedures contained in this manual should be requested from the respective manufacturers, in compliance with the relevant legislation in the country of use. Chemical safety information is also available from the Internet. For example, International Chemical Safety Cards can be found at http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/ipcs/ ipcsname.html. The following are the chemical references for the solvents mentioned in this manual. ACETONE ACETONE 2-Propanone Dimethyl ketone C3H6O/CH3-CO-CH3 Molecular mass: 58.1 CAS # 67-64-1 RTECS # AL3150000 ICSC # 0087 UN # 1090 EC # 606-001-00-8 Service Manual 447 Appendix G METHANOL METHANOL Methyl alcohol Carbinol Wood alcohol CH4O/CH3OH Molecular mass: 32.0 CAS # 67-56-1 RTECS # PC1400000 ICSC # 0057 UN # 1230 EC # 603-001-00-X TOLUENE TOLUENE Methylbenzene Toluol C6H5CH3/C7H8 Molecular mass: 92.1 CAS # 108-88-3 RTECS # XS5250000 ICSC # 0078 UN # 1294 EC # 601-021-00-3 448 Service Manual Customer Communication This appendix contains contact information for ThermoQuest offices worldwide. This appendix also contains a one-page Reader Survey. Use this survey to give us feedback on this manual and help us improve the quality of our documentation. How To Contact Us and Order Spare Parts ThermoQuest provides comprehensive technical assistance worldwide and is dedicated to the quality of our customer relationships and services. Use this list to contact your local ThermoQuest office or affiliate. Please fax any spare parts orders to the fax number corresponding to your country of residence. Service Manual AUSTRALIA BELGIUM ThermoQuest Australia PO Box 239, Unit 20, 38-46 South Street Rydalmere, NSW 2116 Tel: 2 898 1244 Fax: 2 684 4244 Interscience SPRL Scientific Parc Einstein – Avenue Jean-Etienne Lenoir 2 B-1348 Louvain-la-Neuve Tel: 10 450025 Fax: 10 453080 AUSTRIA CANADA ThermoQuest Austria GmbH Wehlistrasse 27 b, A-1200, Wien Tel: 1 33350340 Fax: 1 333503426 Also serving BULGARIA, CROATIA, CZECH REPUBLIC, HUNGARY, POLAND, SLOVAKIA, SLOVENIA ThermoQuest/APG 1355 Remington Road, Suite M Schaumburg, IL 60173-4814 USA Tel: 847 310 0140 Fax: 847 310 1681 CIS and formerly USSR Republics ITALY Neolab Sretenskii Boulevar, dom 6/1, entrance 2, no. 16 101000 Moscow, center Tel: 095 9264148 Fax: 095 9285378 ThermoQuest Italia S.p.A. Strada Rivoltana 20090 Rodano (Milan) Tel: 02 95059355 Fax: 02 95059388 439 Appendix H Customer Communication 440 How To Contact Us and Order Spare Parts FINLAND JAPAN Odior Oy Analytical Louhelantie 10 – PO Box 86 FIN - 01601 Vantaa Tel: 9 530 8000 ThermoQuest K.K. Nishi-Shinjuku, Toyokuni Building 2-5-8 Hatsudai, Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 151 Tel: 3 3372 3001 Fax: 3 3372 7051 FRANCE KOREA ThermoQuest France SA Hightec Sud 12 Avenue des Tropiques – Z.A. de Courtaboeuf BP 141 - 91944 Les Ulis Cedex Tel: 1 6918 8810 Fax: 1 6929 9382 InSung Hi-Tech Co., Ltd. InSung Bldg 89-111, Shinjung 2-dong Yangcheon-Ku – Seoul Tel: 2 644 19997 Fax: 2 643 4911 GERMANY NETHERLANDS ThermoQuest APG Gmbh Boschring 12, 63329 Egelsbach Tel: 6103 408 0 Fax: 6103 408 290 Interscience B.V. Tinstraat 16, Postbus 2148, 4823 CC Breda Tel: 76 5411800 Fax: 76 5420088 INDIA NORWAY Nulab Equipment Co. Pvt. Ltd. Labhouse Plot No. F-13 Opp. SEEPZ, Marol M.I.D.C. Andheri (East) Mumbay 400 093 Tel: 22 8376701 Fax: 22 8368275 IT Instrument Teknikk Skandinavia A/S – PO Box 14 Østerndalen 9-11 – N-1345 Østerås Tel: 67 149303 Fax: 67 149302 PEOPLES REPUBLIC OF CHINA SWITZERLAND Finnigan MAT China Rm. 315 Hui Zhi Building No. 68 Xue-yuan-nan-Lu, Haidian Dist., Beijing 100081 Tel: 10 62172241, 10 62186342, 10 62186341 Fax: 10 62172240 Brechbühler AG Steinviesenstrasse 3, 8952 Schlieren Tel: 1 732 3131 Fax: 1 730 6141 SINGAPORE TURKEY CE Instruments Enterprise c/o Sintech Scientific S.E.A. Pte Ltd. No. 196 Pandan Loop #02-18 Pantech Industrial Complex Singapore 128384 Tel: 779 0007 Fax: 872 2392 Also serving INDONESIA, MALAYSIA, THAILAND, PHILIPPINES Dolunay Teknik Cihazlar Ltd. Ali Sami Yen Sokak Orman Apt. No. 3/B Daire: 23 80290 Gayrettepe, Istanbul Tel: 212 281154 Fax: 212 2885427 Service Manual Appendix H Customer Communication How To Contact Us and Order Spare Parts SOUTH AFRICA UNITED KINGDOM SMM Instruments (Pty) Ltd. SMM House Kyalami Boulevard Kyalami Park Midrand PO Box 11400 Vorna Valley 1686 Tel: 11 466 2200 Fax: 11 466 2220 ThermoQuest Limited PO Box 45 Wythenshawe, Manchester M23 9TQ Tel: 161 374 4380 Fax: 161 374 4399 SPAIN USA and LATIN AMERICA ThermoQuest Austin 2215 Grand Avenue Parkway Austin, TX 78728-3812 Tel: 512 251 1445 800 766 9761 (US only) Fax: 512 251 1578 ThermoQuest – ThermoInstruments S.A. Avenida Valdelaparra 27 Edifico Alcor – Planta 2 28108 Alcobendas – Madrid Tel: 1 6574930 Fax: 1 6574937 SWEDEN Finnigan MAT AB Pyramidbacken 3 S-141 75 Huddinge Tel: 8 680 0101 Fax: 8 680 0315 Technical Support For Canada, the USA, and Latin America: ThermoQuest Corporation 3661 Interstate Park Road North Riviera Beach, Florida 33404 USA (800) 685 9535 For technical support in other areas, contact your local ThermoQuest office or affiliate. Service Manual 441 Reader Survey Product: Manual: Part No.: TRACE GC 2000 Service Manual M 317 09 270, Rev. B Please help us improve the quality of our documentation by completing and returning this survey. Circle one number for each of the statements below. Strongly Agree Agree Neutral Strongly Disagree Disagree The manual is well organized. 1 2 3 4 5 The manual is clearly written. 1 2 3 4 5 The manual contains all the information I need. 1 2 3 4 5 The instructions are easy to follow. 1 2 3 4 5 The instructions are complete. 1 2 3 4 5 The technical information is easy to understand. 1 2 3 4 5 Examples of operation are clear and useful. 1 2 3 4 5 The figures are helpful. 1 2 3 4 5 I was able to install the system using this manual. 1 2 3 4 5 If you would like to make additional comments, please do. (Attach additional sheets if necessary.) _________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________ _________________________________________________________________________________ Fax or mail this form to: ThermoQuest Italia S.p.A. Strada Rivoltana km 4 20090 Rodano (MI) ITALY Fax: 39 02 95059388 Glossary This section contains an alphabetical list and descriptions of terms used in this guide and the help diskette. This also includes abbreviations, acronyms, metric prefixes, and symbols. A A ampere ac alternating current ADC analog-to-digital converter B b bit B byte (8 b) baud rate data transmission speed in events per second C ºC Celsius CIP Carriage and Insurance Paid To cm centimeter CPU central processing unit (of a computer) CSE Customer Service Engineer D d depth DAC digital-to-analog converter dc direct current DET Detector DPFC Digital Pressure Flow Control DS data system E Service Manual ECD Electron Capture Detector EMC electromagnetic compatibility EPROM Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory ESD electrostatic discharge 453 Glossary F ºF Fahrenheit FET field effect transistor FID Flame Ionization Detector FOB Free on Board FPD Flame Photometric Detector ft. foot G g gram GC gas chromatograph GFC Gas Flow Control GND electrical ground GSV gas sampling valves H h height h hour harmonic distortion A high-frequency disturbance that appears as distortion of the fundamental sine wave. HV high voltage HW hardware Hz hertz (cycles per second) I ID identification code or inside diameter IEC International Electrotechnical Commission impulse See transient in. inch INJ injector I/O input/output K 454 k kilo (103 or 1024) K Kelvin Service Manual Glossary kg kilogram kPa kilopascal L l length l liter lb. pound LED light-emitting diode M m meter (or milli [10-3]) M mega (106) µ micro (10-6) min minute mA milliampere mL milliliter mm millimeter m/z mass-to-charge ratio N n nano (10-9) NPD Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector O OC on-column τ ohm P Service Manual p pico (10-12 ) Pa pascal PCB printed circuit board PCKD packed PCM power control module PID Photo Ionization Detector PLD programmable logic device PN part number 455 Glossary psi pounds per square inch PTV programmable temperature vaporizing R platinum temperature sensor RAM random access memory; read and write memory RF radio frequency ROM read-only memory RS-232 industry standard for serial communications RTD reading temperature device S s second sag See surge SC wiring diagram slow average A gradual, long-term change in average RMS voltage level, with typical durations greater than 2 s. SPI serial peripheral interface S/SL split/splitless SSR solid-state-relay surge A sudden change in average RMS voltage level, with typical duration between 50 µs and 2 s. SW software T TC thermocouple TCD Thermal Conductivity Detector TF & DIO Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O TPU Time Processor Unit transient A brief voltage surge of up to several thousand volts, with a duration of less than 50 µs. V 456 V volt V ac volts, alternating current V dc volts, direct current VGA Video Graphics Array Service Manual Glossary W Service Manual w width W Watt WB wide-bore 457 Index A About This Manual xvii Additional heat control jumpers 349, 367, 390, 408, 428 Additional Technical Information 335 Analog Pneumatics 8 Analytical Unit 4, 157, 160 ange 10^ parameter 355 B Blower Motor Removal 106 C Carrier Gas Control 8 Central Processing Unit 183 Adjustment Procedures 186 Component Layout 187 Schematics 187 Theory of Operations 184 CLEAR TRACE key 341 Column Evaluation 9 Column oven door 346, 362, 386, 404, 424 Column Oven. See Oven. Config Right Inlet Menu 340 Config Right Inlet Type Menu 341 CONFIGURE menu 353, 377, 395, 416, 432 Configure Menu 337, 338, 339 Control Card 345, 359, 383, 401, 421 control card 348, 365, 388, 406, 426 Control Unit 161 Conventions Used in This Manual xxi cooling fan 364, 440 Cover plates fixing screw 349, 366, 389, 407, 427 CPU Reinstallation 127 Removal 125, 127 Introduction 125 Operating Procedure 126 Required Parts 125 Required Tools 125 D Description of Electronic Boards 153 Detection Systems 19 Trace Service Manual DETECTOR (FID) menu 354, 379, 396, 417, 433 Detector Base Bodies 21 Detector base body 351, 374 detector base body 351, 374, 392 Detector control card expansion Slots 349, 367, 390, 408, 428 Detector Gas Control 13 Detector Gas Flow Control 137, 145 Detector Gas Connections 143 Modules 138 Hardware Configuration AA 138 Hardware Configuration AB 139 Hardware Configuration AC 140 Hardware Configuration AD 141 Hardware Configuration AE 142 DETECTOR SIGNAL menu 354, 379, 396, 417, 433 Detectors 20, 63 DGFC Module 353, 378, 395, 416, 432 DGFC module 345, 359, 383, 401, 421 Diagnostic Messages 90 Digital Flowmeter 320 Digital Pneumatics 8 Digital Pressure Flow Control 129, 227 Adjustment Procedures 229 Component Layout 229 Maintenance 134 Calibration 134 Modules 130 On-Column Carrier 132 Packed Carrier 131 Purged Packed Carrier 130 S/SL and PTV Carrier 133 Schematics 229 Theory of Operations 228 Circuit Function 228 Troubleshooting 135 Digital Voltmeter 320 Display Panel 5, 235 E Electron Capture Detector 20, 419 Base Frequency 73 Configuration 432 Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas 432 Constant Current Mode 72 459 Gases 70 Getting Started 423 Installing ECD Upgrade Kit 424 Introduction 421 Menu 74 Operating Principle 71 Overview 69 Response 71 Set ECD Parameters 433 Who Performs the Installation of the Kit 421 Wipe Test 70 Electron Capture Detector Controller 255, 260 Adjustment Procedures 258 Component Layout 258 Schematics 258 Theory of Operations 256 Circuit Function 256 Output Specifications 258 Electronic Compartment 5 electronic compartment 347, 362, 386, 404, 424, 438 ENTER TRACE key 342 Error Messages 86 expansion slot 348, 349, 365, 366, 388, 389, 406, 407, 426, 427 Extension slot position 349, 366, 389, 407, 427 F Flame 275 Flame Ionization Detector 20, 343 Configuration 353 Detector Gases Requirements 345 Flame Out Conditions 68 Gases 65 Installing FID Upgrade Kit 346 Introduction 345 Jet 64 Menu 67 Overview 64 Selectivity 64 Set FID Parameters 354 Temperature 64 Transformer for FID 345 Who Performs the Installation of the Kit 345 Flame Ionization Detector Controller 241 460 Adjustment Procedures 243 Calibration Adjustments 243 Special Notes 243 Component Layout 244 Schematics 244 Theory of Operations 242 Circuit Function 242 Output Specifications 243 Flame Photometric Detector 275, 381 Adjustment Procedure 277 Configuration 395 Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas 395 Detector Gases Requirements 383 Getting Started 385 Installing FPD Upgrade Kit 386 Introduction 383 Parameters Setting 396 Protection Circuits 277 Schematics and Component Layout 278 Set FPD Parameters 396 Special Notes 277 Theory of Operations 275 Circuit Functions 275 Output Specifications 277 Who Performs the Installation of the Kit 383 Flapper Motor Electrical Plug, Disconnect 117 Reassembly 118 Removal 118 Replacement 116, 118 Introduction 116 Operating Procedure 117 Required Parts 116 Required Tools 116 Free slot 349, 366, 389, 407, 427 fuel gases 345, 359, 383 Functional Tests 79 G Gas Saver Function 13 Gases Carrier 129 Connections 143 Control 8, 13 Detector 137, 145 Trace Service Manual ECD 70 FID 65 NPD 76 GC Base Unit 3, 99 GC Rear Panel Removal 120 GC Right Side Panel Removal 110, 121, 126 Glossary 453 gnition polarization cable 351, 375, 393, 430 H Handshake Cables 145 Hidden Configuration Menu 338, 340 HOT OC Injector Menu 52 Optional Devices 50 Auxilliary Purge Line 50 Solvent Vapor Exit Valve 51 Overview 50 Hydrogen Sensor xxiv I Info Messages 82 Injection Systems 15 HOT Cold On-Column Injector 16 Large Volume On-Column Injector 17 On-Column Injector 16 Overview 16 Packed Column Injector 17 Purged Packed Column Injector 17 Split/Splitless Injector 16 Injector and detector cassette 346, 362, 386, 404, 424 Injectors 35 Instrument Markings and Symbols xxii Introduction 1 J Jet 351, 374, 392 jet 351, 374, 392 K Keypad 5, 235 Keypad and Display Panel 5, 235 Adjustment Procedures 236 Component Layout 236 Trace Service Manual Schematics 236 Theory of Operations 236 L Large Volume On-Column Injector Auxilliary Purge Line 54 Menu 55 Overview 53 Leak Check 9 Leak Test Meter 320 Left Carrier Col Flow Rates Menu 342 Left Inlet Menu 341 Left Valves Menu 342 LVOCI Inlet Parameters 341 M Maintenance & Troubleshooting 97 Makeup gas 353, 378, 395, 416, 432 Menu ECD 74 FID 67 HOT OC 52 LVOCI 55 NPD 77 OCI 49 Oven 31 PKD 58 PPKD 61 Mixed Pneumatics 8 Mother board 349, 367, 390, 408, 428 mother board 349, 366, 389, 407, 427 Motherboard 167 Adjustment Procedure 173 Component Layout 173 Schematics 173 Theory of Operations 168 Multidetector System 21 N Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector 20 Gases 76 Menu 77 Overview 75 Thermionic Source Lifetime 75 Nitrogen Phosphorous Detector Controller 265, 270 Adjustment Procedures 267 461 Component Layout 268 Schematics 268 Theory of Operations 266 Circuit Function 266 Output Specifications 267 Nitrogen Phosphorus Detector 357 Configuration 377 Configuring Hardware, Detector and Make-up Gas 377 Detector Gases Requirements 359 Getting Started 361 Installing NPD Upgrade Kit 362 Introduction 359 Set NPD Parameters 379 Transformer for NPD 360 Who Performs the Installation of the Kit 359 Non-DGFC module 345, 359, 383, 401, 421 O On-Column Injector Menu 49 Optional Devices 48 Automatic Actuator 48 Auxilliary Purge Line 48 HOT OC Device 48 LVOCI 48 Primary Cooling System 46 Secondary Cooling System 47 On-Column Semiautomatic Actuator 311 Adjustment Procedures 312 Component Layout 312 Schematics 312 Theory of Operations 312 Oscilloscope 320 Oven Configuration 29, 30 Menu 31 Multiple Ramp Program 33 Overview 26 Safety 28 Single Ramp Program 33 Oven Fan Removal 104 Oven Heater Replacement 114 462 Oven Heater Baffle Reassembly 115 Removal 104, 113 Replacement 108 Introduction 108 Operating Procedure 109 Required Parts 108 Required Tools 108 Oven Motor Assembly 106 Replacement 101 Introduction 101 Operating Procedure 102 Required Parts 101 Required Tools 101 P Packed Column Injecter Overview 56 Packed Column Injector Adapters 57 Liners 57 Menu 58 Septa 56 Parts List 329 PCB Replacement 320 Photoionization Detector 399 Configuration 416 Configuring Detector and Make-up Gas 416 Detector Gases Requirements 401 Getting Started 403 Installing PID Upgrade Kit 404 Introduction 401 Parameters Setting 417 Set PID Parameters 417 Who Performs the Installation of the Kit 401 Photoionization Detector Controller 285 Adjustment Procedures 287 Protection Circuits 287 Schematics and Component Layout 288 Special Notes 287 Theory of Operations 285 Circuit Function 285 Output Specifications 287 Pneumatic Compartment 4 Trace Service Manual Pneumatic Flow Module Removal 103 Power Control Module 217, 368, 370, 373, 441, 442, 445 Adjustment Procedures 219 Component Layout 219 Reinstallation 124 Removal 111, 119, 122 Introduction 119 Operating Procedure 120 Required Parts 119 Required Tools 119 Schematics 219 Theory of Operations 218 Power Supply Chassis Removal Required Parts 125 Required Tools 125 Purged Packed Column Injector Liners 60 Menu 61 Overview 59 Septa 60 R Ramps 33 Rear panel 365, 372, 444 Recommended Test Equipment 319 Right hand-side panel 346, 362, 386, 404, 424, 437, 439 Right panel 348, 364, 388, 406, 426 right side panel 347, 363, 387, 405, 425, 439 S Service Equipment 317 Service Information 331 Service Kit 323 AS 2000 Left/Right 328 Detector Assemblies 326 Detector Consumables 327 Electronics 324 Fans 327 HS 2000 328 Injector Assemblies 325 Injector Consumables 325 Introduction 324 Large Volume Injections 326 Trace Service Manual Oven 325 Pneumatics 328 Tools 328 Service Notes 333 Signal cable 351, 375, 393, 430 Slot cover plate 349, 366, 389, 407, 427 slot cover plate 349, 366, 389, 407, 427 Software Update 336 Split/Splitless Injector Liners 40 Overview 36 Packed Columns 41 Septum 39 Summary of Specifications 23 System Components 4 T Temperature Programs 33 Temperature Feedback and Digital I/O 197 Adjustment Procedures 201 Component Layout 201 Reinstallation 127 Removal 125, 127 Introduction 125 Operating Procedure 126 Required Parts 125 Required Tools 125 Schematics 201 Theory of Operations 198 Temperature Sensor Removal 112 Thermal Conductivity Detector 295 Adjustment Procedures 297 Protection Circuits 297 Schematics and Component Information 298 Special Notes 297 Theory of Operations 295 Circuit Functions 295 Output Specifications 297 Thermocouple Preamplifiers 305 Adjustment Procedures 306 Component Layout 307 Schematics 307 Theory of Operations 306 463 Tool for jet 351, 374, 392 transformer 371, 443 Transformer Installation 435 Configuration 446 Getting Started 438 Hardware Configuration 446 Installing the Transformer 438 Transformer Overview 436 U Updating Software 336 Upper cover 346, 362, 386, 404, 424 Using Hydrogen xxiv Using the Configure Menu 337 Using the Hidden Configuration Menu 338 V Valves Menu 342 464 Trace Service Manual